Electrical Products Catalog
AC & DC
Adjustable Speed
Controls and
Motors
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Our new web site contains free downloadable CAD drawings on over
84,000 products, technical specs, application/use information and
sales support, bostongear.com is the ultimate resource for design
and manufacturing engineers alike. Besides providing extensive
product data, you’ll also find information on our innovative delivery
programs, our trade show schedule, and who to contact for sales
and support.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Check
Out
www.bostongear.com
UCT
D
O
PR CTOR
E
SEL
CAD GS
WIN
DRA
Stop by often so you don’t miss out on any of the exiting new
products and services that are being introduced regularly by one of
the industry leaders in power transmission.
Just click on BostSpec 2 for FREE interactive search tools, product configurators, built-in performance criteria, and downloadable CAD drawings – all designed to help you define your power
transmission application requirements and select the right product for your needs. You can even submit an on-line RFQ.
Call Toll Free 888-999-9860
Request
Reducer Express
We guarantee same day shipment by air if we receive your
order by 12pm EST or we guarantee next business day shipment by air if your order is received after 12pm EST...
or the air freight is free!
Call your Boston Gear distributor
and request your Reducer Express
order today!
The Second Century of Service
THAT THE PEOPLE OF BOSTON GEAR
WILL PROVIDE
ALL PRODUCTS AND SERVICES
AT A QUALITY LEVEL
THAT MEETS OR EXCEEDS
THE EXPECTATIONS
AND THE REQUIREMENTS
OF OUR CUSTOMERS
Started in 1877 as a machine shop making gear cutting
machines, Boston Gear has led the growth of the power
transmission industry for more than a century. In its
early years, Boston Gear introduced the concepts of
gear standardization and stock gears – innovations of
enormous benefit to power transmission system
designers, specifiers and users.
Boston Gear was the early pioneer in enclosed drives,
a category it still dominates with dependable, high-performance products like Worm, Helical and Bevel Gear
Drives.
Today, Boston Gear provides the widest range of integrated motion control products from one source. The
convenience of this single-source capability is yours
when you deal with Boston Gear.
www.bostgear.com
Engineering Services
Boston Gear's new, easy to navigate web site offers a
variety of tools designed to simplify the selection and
ordering process. Powered by advanced Internet XML
technology, www.bostgear.com offers 24 hour access to
the industry's premier source for power transmission
information:
The Boston Gear Engineering Group can satisfy your
technical needs through skillful application of standard
products or development of custom designs. Creating
specials is an important aspect of customer service. It is
supported by R & D personnel who use microprocessorcontrolled equipment to collect and monitor data on
materials and product performance.
•
•
BostSpec2 – Boston Gear's award winning
open and enclosed gearing configurator.
Based upon your applications requirements,
select from over 84,000 parts, view specifications,
even download CAD drawings
Products – get the most current product
information, features, benefits, or application
data
•
Literature – all of Boston Gear's catalogs,
brochures, specification sheets, and installation
manuals are available for immediate down loading
•
Distributor Locator – find your local stocking
Boston Gear distributor
N
G
SPEC
Computer-Aided-Design (CAD) systems help Boston
Gear engineers create new approaches to broad industrial challenges or specific customer needs. Computer
simulation and testing at critical stages ensure that their
designs are practical
Manufacturing Excellence
Boston Gear manufactures more than 20,000 products
in-house at facilities in Florence, Kentucky; York,
Pennsylvania; and Louisburg and Charlotte, North
Carolina. Production is efficiently organized into
manufacturing cells under group technology. This
approach encourages a sense of responsibility and
pride of workmanship, to gain consistently high-quality
output.
Computerized production control provides close supervision over scheduling and resource planning, coupled
with the flexibility to fit your requirements smoothly into
the master schedule. Other dedicated computer
controls within the production department govern the
ordering and delivery functions to keep operations lean
and efficient.
I
A
I
Whether you're looking to design a worm gear speed
reducer to fit your application, get information
on Boston Gear's newest products, or receive the
latest news about the company, www.bostgear.com is
your answer.
L
IST
BEAR
S
A
N
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
OUR QUALITY POLICY
S
S
O C I ATI
O
Electrical Products Catalog
1
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
RATIOTROL PRODUCTS ADD SOPHISTICATED
CONTROL TO MOTION
Boston Gear, the reliable source for motion control products for
over 100 years, has added electronic brains to its mechanical
brawn. New Ratiotrol microprocessor-based AC and DC digital
controllers bring operating intelligence to our high-performance
speed reducers, gears, motors, bearings, shaft accessories,
clutches and brakes. Your advantage is more capable and
adaptable motion control systems when you utilize the
coordinated components available from Boston Gear.
FIELD SUPPORT
The specialists at Boston Gear distributors are ready to help
you meet all your motion control needs. For in-depth technical
assistance, they can turn to the Boston Gear field application
engineering force. Our field engineers have daily exposure to
the specialized needs of many industries. They work cooperatively with our distributors to solve customer problems, design
new systems and upgrade existing systems with added
capabilities.
APPLICATION ASSISTANCE
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
ELECTRONIC DRIVES AND CONTROLLERS
From fractional horsepower AC & DC controllers to powerful
three-phase AC inverters, Boston Gear serves a broad
spectrum of control needs for adjustable speed AC and DC
drives. In manufacturing and assembly operations, Ratiotrol
controllers adapt easily to new factory automation projects or
system upgrades. For material handling systems and
conveyors, food processing equipment, extruders and mixers,
they give you a low-cost route to the infinitely adjustable
speeds needed to match a production line or process flow.
Many can be field or factory-modified for specialized
performance and operating convenience.
CUSTOMER/FACTORY MODIFICATIONS
Many Boston Gear Ratiotrol series accept pre-engineered
options to meet unusual environmental conditions or to offer
specialized performance and operating convenience. Simple
plug-in modules and Boston Gear Field Kits make it easy to
accomplish many modifications in the field; other options are
factory installed and tested before delivery. Modifications can
range from simple product adaptations for OEM applications to
complex integrated installations controlling multiple drives in
automated process lines.
Multi-level assistance is available from the network of Boston
Gear full-line distributors, backed by Boston Gear’s own
dedicated field specialists, electrical product specialists and
factory application engineers. All are available to analyze
applications and help you specify the product combination that
will perform your work with efficiency and economy.
TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE
Besides assisting with application review and product
selection, all of the people in the Boston Gear distributor, field
and factory organizations can help resolve problems by
offering technical assistance. They are trained and prepared to
troubleshoot unexpected process difficulties, or to provide
functional analysis and repair of the controller/
motor drive system.
AVAILABILITY
Boston Gear service has many facets and they all involve the
coast-to-coast Boston Gear distributor organization. The
distributors’ own product knowledge is supplemented by our
field and factory experts; their local product inventories are
backed by national and regional warehouse stocks. On-line
computer links give distributors instant access to Boston Gear
headquarters for order entry, inventory checks, price information, etc.
Boston Gear customer support services include technical application assistance, complete
electronic and mechanical repairs and skilled factory modifications of standard products.
2
Electrical Products Catalog
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION...............................................................................................................1-2
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
PRODUCT SELECTION/REFERENCE GUIDE ...............................................................3-7
NONREGENERATIVE AND REGENERATIVE, DC CONTROLLERS...........................9-52
OPTIONS AND MODIFICATIONS FOR DC CONTROLLERS.....................................53-71
SINGLE AND THREE PHASE AC CONTROLLERS .................................................73-107
ACCESSORIES ........................................................................................................109-115
CLUTCHES AND BRAKES ......................................................................................117-143
DC MOTORS ............................................................................................................145-153
AC MOTORS ............................................................................................................155-171
WASHDOWN PRODUCTS .......................................................................................173-174
APPLICATION ENGINEERING ................................................................................175-189
TERMS AND CONDITIONS .....................................................................................190-191
BOSTON GEAR®, RATIOTROL®, RATIOPAX®, ACX®, BCX®, DCX® and DCXplus® are
registered trademarks of Boston Gear.
Electrical Products Catalog
3
PRODUCT SELECTION/REFERENCE GUIDE
Section A
Ratiopax
DCX
BETA II
Pages 11-12
Pages 13-17
Pages 18-22
BETAplus
VEplus
VED
Pages 23-27
Pages 28-32
Pages 33-39
DC Controllers, Single-Phase, Regenerative
RBA/VEA-RG
VEL/H-RG
Pages 43-47
Pages 48-52
Section A
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
DC Controllers, Single Phase, Nonregenerative
AC Controllers, Single and Three Phase
BCX
ACX
Pages 75-79
Pages 80-87
ADX
SSX
Pages 89-101
Pages 102-104
4
Electrical Products Catalog
Section B
PRODUCT SELECTION/REFERENCE GUIDE
Section C
Remote
Stations
Tachometer
Generator
Magnetic
Pick-up
Analog
Meter
Digital
Meter
Pages 109-110
Pages 111-112
Page 113-114
Page 114
Page 115
Clutches and Brakes
Section D
DC C-Face
DC Foot Mounted
DC Shaft Mounted
AC C-Face
AC C-Face
Washdown
AC Motor
Brake Kit
Page 119-120
Page 121-124
Pages 125
Page 139
Pages 140-141
Page 142
DC Motors
Section E
Permanent
Magnet
Permanent
Magnet-Washdown
Shunt Wound
Pages 147-149
Page 150
Pages 151-153
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Accessories
AC Motors
Section F
Open Dripproof
Totally
Enclosed
Washdown
Brake Motors
Rigid Base
Inverter Duty
Pages 157-158
Page 159-164
Page 165
Pages 166-167
Page 169
Pages 170-171
Electrical Products Catalog
5
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
System Selection
The proper selection of a Ratiotrol system is based on first determining the load torque, second, the horsepower of the motor and
last, the type and configuration of the controller to power the selected motor. Sizing an adjustable speed drive generally is no
different than selecting a motor and reducer for a constant speed application. Maximum RPM and maximum torque are used in all
calculations involving constant torque applications, which are the most common. Our standard Ratiotrol systems are constant
torque drives and therefore, selection is straight forward.
NOTE: Auxiliary drives beyond the reducer output shaft can reduce the cost of a system significantly since a chain or gear drive
multiplies the torque delivered by the reducer, thereby reducing the load required to be driven by the reducer. For instance, if a 3:1
ratio chain drive can be incorporated in a drive train, the driven load (torque) can be divided by 3 and the load speed multiplied by 3
before selecting a suitable motor and reducer combination.
SELECTION PROCEDURE:
1) Select a reducer as you would for a constant speed application and size the motor/controller package to provide the HP
indicated by the reducer’s input HP rating.
Note: When using compound worm gear reducers with ratios greater than 200:1, use a motor with twice the HP shown for that
reducer. This technique will provide sufficient starting torque at low motor speeds to overcome the near-static friction
conditions present in the output bearings and gearing of the reducer.
2) The motor selected in Step 1 determines the “System HP” to use when you progress to the Ratiotrol System Selection Guides.
3) From the Selection Guide, proceed to the appropriate AC or DC Controller section to determine the complete motor and
controller catalog numbers, options and any desired accessories.
SINGLE PHASE DC CONTROLLER SELECTION GUIDE
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Constant horsepower applications, typically winders or machine tools, require the use of the maximum load torque (usually at the
minimum speed) in selecting a suitable drive. If the required constant HP value is known, the required system HP is equal to the
required speed range ratio multiplied by the constant HP figure.
System
HP
1/12
1/6
1/4
1/3
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/2
2
3
5
Line
Voltage
(VAC)
115
115
115
115
115
230
115
230
115
230
230
230
230
230
Ratiopax
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DCX
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Nonregenerative
Regenerative
BETA II BETAplus VEplus VED RBA-RG VEA-RG VEL/H-RG
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
* Basic DC Motor Catalog number, refer to Section I for complete motor selection.
6
Electrical Products Catalog
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Motor Series*
PM
Shunt
BPM/PM908T
—
PM916
V91600
PM925
V92500
PM933
V93300
PM950
V95000
PM1850
—
PM975
V97500
PM1875
V18750
PM9100
V91000
PM18100
V18100
PM18150
V18150
PM18200
V18200
PM18300
18300
PM18500
18500
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
System Selection
AC CONTROLLER SELECTION GUIDE
System
HP
1/6
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
1/4
1/3
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/2
2
3
5
7 1/2
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
125
150
200
250
300
400
Line
Voltage
(VAC)
115-1-60
230-1-60
230-3-60
115-1-60
230-1-60
230-3-60
115-1-60
230-1-60
230-3-60
115-1-60
230-1-60
230-3-60
115-1-60
230-1-60
230-3-60
115-1-60
230-1-60
230-3-60
460-3-60
230-1-60
230-3-60
460-3-60
230-1-60
230-3-60
460-3-60
230-3-60
460-3-60
230-3-60
460-3-60
230-3-60
460-3-60
230-3-60
460-3-60
230-3-60
460-3-60
230-3-60
460-3-60
230-3-60
460-3-60
230-3-60
460-3-60
230-3-60
460-3-60
230-3-60
460-3-60
460-3-60
460-3-60
460-3-60
460-3-60
460-3-60
460-3-60
460-3-60
460-3-60
460-3-60
BCX
ACX
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ADX
Motor*
Series
CU
DU
EU
FU
GU
•
•
HU
•
•
JU
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
KU
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
LU
KU
NU
PU
RU
SU
TU
UU
VU
WU
XU
YU
ZU
*Basic AC Motor Catalog number, refer to Section J for complete motor
selection.
Electrical Products Catalog
7
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
NOTES
8
Electrical Products Catalog
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPECIFICATION CHART ...............................................................................................................10
RATIOPAX .................................................................................................................................11-12
DCX/DCXplus............................................................................................................................13-17
BETA II .......................................................................................................................................18-22
BETAplus ..................................................................................................................................23-27
VEplus .......................................................................................................................................28-32
VED ............................................................................................................................................33-39
OPTIONS FOR DC CONTROLLERS........................................................................................53-71
APPLICATION ENGINEERING .............................................................................................175-189
Electrical Products Catalog
9
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
Specification
Chart
The purpose of this chart is to provide a general feature comparison of the Boston Gear controllers. When selecting, refer to the specific catalog selection for complete information.
SINGLE PHASE NONREGENERATIVE DC MOTOR CONTROLLER SPECIFICATIONS
A
Features
Voltage
50/60 Hz
Maximum Horsepower
Armature Voltage (0 to)
Field Voltage
AC Line
Output
AC Line
Protection
Functions
Enclosure
Adjustments
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Range
Horsepower/
Voltage
Calibration
Fuse
Circuit Breaker
Jog
Preset Speeds
Armature Contactor
Unidirectional W/ D.B.
Reversing W/DB
Reversing, Switch
Constant Torque Operation
Angle Bracket Chassis
Open Chassis
NEMA 1
NEMA 3
NEMA 4
NEMA 12
Acceleration (Seconds)
Deceleration (Seconds)
IR Compensation (%)
Maximum Speed (%)
Minimum Speed (%)
Current Limit (%)
Trim Pot Adjustments
Resistance Wire
Reconnectable Jumpers
Dip Switches
Isolated Regulator
Load Monitor
Speed
Standard IR Feedback
Regulation
Percentage
Speed Range
Tachometer Feedback
Percentage
Speed Range
Input
Analog
Digital
Tachometer
Unidirectional
Feedback
Bidirectional
Modifiable
DC Tachometer Feedback
Features
AC Line Starting
Torque Regulator
External DC Signal Follower
Limit Switch Reversing
Options
Field Installed
Factory Installed
UL/cUL
Pages
S-Standard
10
O-Optional
Electrical Products Catalog
Ratiopax
DCX
DCXplus
BETA II
BETAplus
VEplus
VED
115
230
115 230
115
230
115
230
115
230
115
230
115
230
1/2
90
50
1
180
100
1
3
90 180
100 200
1/2
90
100
1
180
200
1
90
50/
100
3
180
100/
200
1
90
50/
100
3
180
100/
200
1
5
90 180
50/ 100/
100 200
S
O
S
1
90
50
3
180
100
S
O
S
O
O
S
S
S
S
S
75-100
150
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
0.2-40
0.2-40
0-100
50-100
0-40
0-150
S
S
0.2-30
0.2-30
0-100
50-100
0-40
0-150
S
S
0.2-30
0.2-30
0-100
50-100
0-40
0-150
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
0.8-10
0.8-10
0-100
60-100
0-40
0-150
S
S
0.8-10
0.8-10
0-100
60-100
0-40
0-150
S
S
S
O
S
S
O
O
S
S
S
O
O
O
0.2-100
0.2-100
0-100
0-100
0-100
0-150
S
5%
20:1
2%
30:1
2%
30:1
2%
50:1
2%
50:1
2%
50:1
2%
50:1
S
1%
100:1
S
1%
100:1
S
0.5%
200:1
S
0.5%
200:1
S
0.5%
200:1
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
O
S
S
S
S
O
S
O
S
S
S
S
S
O
S
18-22
S
23-27
S
O
S
S
S
S
S
O
O
S
28-32
0.2%
200:1
S
S
S
O
S
S
S
O
11-12
O
O
S
13-17
S
13-17
O
O
S
33-39
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
RATIOPAX Series
1/12-1 Horsepower
Ratiopax Controllers are economical, non-modifiable, general purpose controllers
featuring static conversion of AC line power to regulated DC for nonregenerative,
adjustable speed armature control of shunt-wound and permanent-magnet DC motors.
Their lightweight and compact design makes these units an ideal choice for a broad
range of industrial applications.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Motors suitable for application with these controllers are listed in the DC motor section.
DESIGN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS
1. Enclosure – All models are furnished in a rugged die
cast enclosure. Complete control assembly is attached
to the front cover which can be removed from the enclosure by removing four (4) screws.
2. Operator Controls – Mounted on the front cover.
Included is a calibrated SPEED control potentiometer
and a RUN-STOP toggle switch. A Forward-StopReverse maintained switch is standard on the RPIR &
RP2R. This switch includes a no pass through center
detent which provides anti-plug protection.
3. AC Line Protection – AC line fuse provides instantaneous protection from peak loads and fault currents.
The fuse is front panel mounted, and can be replaced
without removing the cover.
4. Voltage Transient Protection – Suppression network
to minimize the effect of high voltage or high frequency
spikes.
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
1. Controlled Speed Range – Zero to motor base speed.
Speed range with respect to specified regulation is shown
below.
2. Speed Regulation – Regulation percentages listed are of
motor base speed under steady-state conditions. Normal
operation will result in performance equal to or better than
specifications.
SPEED REGULATION CHARACTERISTICS
Variables
Regulation
Method
Standard
Voltage
Feedback with IR
Compensation
Load
Line
Change Voltage
95%
±10%
5%
±1%
Field
Heating
Cold/
Normal
Temp.
±10°C
Speed
Range
5–12%
±2%
20:1
5. Full-Wave Power Conversion – 2 SCRs 2 diodes and
a free-wheeling diode provide optimum form factor for
best motor performance and longevity. NEMA Code K
Converter.
3. Efficiency (rated speed/rated load)
(a) Controller (SCR regulator).....................................98%
(b) Complete drive (controller and motor, typical) ......85%
6. Reference Circuit – 24 VDC regulated to provide stable performance with changes in line voltage.
4. Current Limit (factory set, nonadjustable) ...............150%
full-load torque (typical)
7. Maximum Speed Adjustment – Adjustable from 75 to
100% of motor base speed.
8. Trigger Circuit – Fast rise, hard firing type to minimize
di/dt degradation of SCRs.
9. Counter EMF Voltage Feedback with IR Compensation – Non-adjustable, factory set.
OPERATING CONDITIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
Line Voltage Variation................................±10% of rated
Line Frequency Variation .......................................±2 Hz
Ambient Temperature..........0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
Altitude (standard) ....3300 feet (1000 meters) maximum
10. Quality Features – FR4 glass printed circuit card •
Rugged construction • Conservatively rated components selected for long service life.
RATINGS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Service factor ...............................................................1.0
Duty ................................................................. Continuous
Overload Capacity...............................150% for 1 minute
Run Speed Potentiometer .....................100K Ohms, 2W
Reference Power Supply.................................... 24 VDC
AC Line Fuse, Interrupting Capacity ........... 5000 Amps
RP1, RP1R Controllers .................115 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz,
Single Phase
8. RP2, RP2R Controllers................ 230 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz,
Single Phase
Electrical Products Catalog
11
A
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
RATIOPAX Series
1/12-1 Horsepower
MODEL TYPES
Ratiopax controllers are offered as four standard models. Models RP1 and RP2, are unidirectional packaged controllers and Models
RP1R and RP2R, are reversible controllers with Forward-Stop-Reverse switch. All are furnished in a totally-enclosed, non-ventilated, rugged, die-cast aluminum alloy enclosure with integral operator controls.
A
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
NEMA 1 ENCLOSED CONTROLLER WITH INTEGRAL OPERATOR CONTROLS
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Horsepower Range
115 VAC
230 VAC
1/6 – 1/2
—
—
1/2 – 1
Catalog
Number
RP1
RP1R
RP2
RP2R
Item
Code
63370
63372
63371
63373
Function
Run/Stop
Armature Switch Reversing
Run/Stop
Armature Switch Reversing
TYPICAL APPLICATION DATA
Ratings
Rated Horsepower (HP)
Rated Kilowatts (kW)
1-Phase
AC Input
(Full-Load)
115V
Unit
230V
Unit
Line
Amps
KVA
Motor
Armature
Amps
DC Output
(Full-Load)
Motor(1)
Field
Amps
Full-Load Torque
(lb-ft) with 1750 RPM
Base Speed Motors
1/6
0.124
1/4
0.187
1/3
0.249
1/2
0.373
3/4
0.560
1
0.746
3.9
5.0
6.0
8.7
—
—
—
—
—
4.2
5.9
8.8
.48
.58
.71
1.0
1.4
2.0
90V
2.0
2.8
3.5
5.4
—
—
180V
—
—
—
2.6
3.8
5.5
50V
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
—
—
100V
—
—
—
2.0
2.0
2.0
0.5
0.75
1.0
1.5
2.2
3.0
(1) Does not apply to permanent magnet motors.
DIMENSIONS – ALL MODELS
1.12 DIA.
(ONE END)
.88 MAX.
CONTROL
PROJ.
2.06
1.50
3.00
3.00
(2) .19 DIA.
HOLES-AS
SHOWN
7.50
9.00
1.62
.69
.75
APPROX WEIGHT – 2 LBS
12
Electrical Products Catalog
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
DCX® Series
DCXplus® Series
1/12-3 Horsepower
Ratiotrol DCX ® controllers statically convert single-phase AC line power to regulated
DC for nonregenerative adjustable speed armature control of shunt-wound and permanent magnet DC motors. They are ideal for simple MRO modifications of existing
drives or for installation in OEM equipment to provide variable speed motor operation
with traditional Boston Gear reliability.
These controls feature a number of exclusive advantages. Their built-in adjustment trimpots, for example, offer immediate access to a broad range of horsepower settings.
They completely eliminate the need to stock a variety of components for every horsepower rating.
The dual voltage models can be connected to either 115 VAC or 230 VAC for operation without the use of jumpers or switches.
With a selection of four enclosed models, two panel-front models for installation in
OEM control cabinets, and three chassis models with up to 3 horsepower capability
and companion optional accessories, Boston Gear has a low-cost controller suitable
for virtually any requirement.
Motors suitable for application with these controllers are listed in the DC motor section.
DESIGN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS
1. DCXplus® Enclosed Models – These units are furnished in a compact, die cast aluminum, nonventilated
NEMA 1 or NEMA 12 rated enclosure. The complete
control assembly is mounted on the front panel which
can be removed from the enclosure by removing four (4)
screws. The unenclosed panel assembly can be mounted through a cut-out in the user's enclosure.
2. DCX® Chassis Models – The units are furnished as a
very compact open chassis consisting of the regulator/power conversion circuit board mounted to a formed
aluminum chassis. The DCX202C model may be furnished with a supplemental heatsink (DCX-HTSK or
DCX-RHTSK) to improve heat dissipation and thereby
extend the horsepower range. Chassis units are dimensionally interchangeable with many competitive units.
7.
8.
9.
3. Full-Wave Power Conversion – NEMA Code K converter configuration formed of discrete devices rated
600 PIV. Converter consists of two (2) SCR’s, two
diodes and a free wheeling diode which provide optimum form factor for best motor performance and long
service. Enclosed models use the control enclosure as
an integral heatsink with the power control devices electrically isolated from the enclosure.
4. Voltage Transient Protection – Metal oxide suppressor across the AC line minimizes the effect of high voltage spikes from the AC power source.
5. Tachometer Feedback – All standard units except
DCX102C accept a 35, 50 or 100 VDC/1000 RPM feedback signal from a motor mounted DC tachometer generator for improved speed regulation. (Unidirectional
units only).
6. Horsepower Selection – Easily calibrated by built-in
10.
11.
12.
trimpots to suit individual motor horsepower ratings without special instruments, or plug-in shunts.
Wiring Terminals – Enclosed models are provided with
barrier terminal strips for all external power and signal
wires. Chassis models are provided with male tab wiring
connectors. A terminal strip is offered as Options
DCX-BTB2 or DCX-BTB3.
AC Line Fuse – Enclosed models include an AC line fuse
mounted on the circuit board. Chassis units do not include
a fuse as standard, but a fuse holder may be provided with
Options DCX-BTB2, DCX-BTB3 or DCX-FBK.
Operator Controls – All enclosed models include integral operator controls consisting of a speed setting
potentiometer and an ON-OFF AC line power switch.
Switch is maintained in ON and OFF positions.
Reversing models additionally include a 3-position FORWARD-STOP-REVERSE maintained switch. Switch
includes a no pass through center detent which provides
a delay when changing direction.
Chassis units are controlled by external, customer furnished switches, pushbuttons, or control logic. These
units include an inhibit circuit for automatic operation by
switch, relay or PLC.
Chassis units are furnished with a speed setting potentiometer and female wiring connectors supplied loose.
Line Voltage Selection – Line voltage selection is automatic without the use of jumpers or switches.
Field Supply – A full-wave, transient protected motor
field supply is provided.
UL Rating – The DCX Series units are either UL listed
or UL recognized.
Electrical Products Catalog
13
A
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
DCX® Series
DCXplus® Series
1/12-3 Horsepower
RATINGS
A
1.
2.
3.
4.
SPEED REGULATION CHARACTERISTICS
Horsepower. . . See selection chart page A7
Service Factor ..............................................................1.0
Duty ................................................................. Continuous
Operating Voltages
Standard Voltage
Feedback with IR
Compensation
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
OPERATING VOLTAGES
Output VDC
Armature
Field
0-90
100
0-180
200
Power Source
(Single-Phase)
115V, 50 or 60 Hz
230V, 50 or 60 Hz
5.
6.
7.
8.
Tachometer
Feedback(1)
(2)
Variable
Load
Line
Speed
Change Voltage Field Heating Temp. Range
95%
± 10% Cold/Normal ±10°C
2%
± 1%
5–12%
± 2%
30:1
1%
± 1%
0.2%
±2%
100:1
(1) Unidirectional models only.
Overload Capacity (armature).............150% for 1 minute
Run Speed Potentiometer.................... 5K Ohms, 1/2 W
Reference Power Supply...................................10VDC(1)
Line Fuse(2) ........................................ Provided by others
(1)
Regulation
Method
Units are optionally adaptable for use with 4-20mA and 0-10 VDC
reference voltages by the use of option DCX-25A
Line fuse is standard on DCXplus models, optional on all others
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
1. Controlled Speed Range — Zero to motor base speed.
Speed range with respect to specified regulation is shown
on right
2. Speed Regulation — Regulation percentages listed are of
motor base speed under steady-state conditions. Normal
operation will result in performance equal to or better than
specifications.
3. Efficiency (Rated speed/rated load)
Controller................................................................... 99%
Controller and Motor (typical) ................................. 85%
ADJUSTMENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Current Limit ................. 0-150% full-load torque (typical)
Maximum Speed.............. 60-100% of motor base speed
Minimum Speed .................. 0-40% of motor base speed
IR (load) Compensation ................ 0-100% of rated load
Acceleration/Deceleration(1) ................. 0.8-10 seconds
NOTE: (1) DCX102C acceleration/deceleration is 1.0 second fixed rate.
OPERATING CONDITIONS
1. Line Voltage Variation ............................... ±10% of rated
2. Line Frequency Variation....................................... ±2 Hz
3. Ambient Temperature
Chassis ................................ 0°C to 50°C (32°F to 122°F)
Enclosed .............................. 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
4. Altitude (Standard) ... 3300 Feet (1000 meters) maximum
5. Relative Humidity ........................... 95% non-condensing
TYPICAL APPLICATION DATA
Rated Horsepower (HP)
Rated Kilowatts (kW)
1-Phase
AC Input
(Full-Load)
DC Output
(Full-Load)
Line
Amps
KVA
Motor
Armature
Amps
Motor(1)
Field
Amps
115V
Unit
230V
Unit
90V
1/6
0.124
1/4
0.187
1/3
0.249
1
0.746
1-1/2
1.129
2
1.492
3
2.238
2.0
3.9
5.0
6.0
8.7
12.4
15.0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
4.8
5.9
8.8
12.6
15.8
24.0
.30
.48
.58
.71
1.0
1.4
2.0
3.0
4.0
6.0
0.9
2.0
2.8
3.5
5.4
8.1
10.5
—
—
—
180V
—
—
—
—
2.5
3.8
5.5
8.2
11.6
16.0
100V
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
—
—
—
200V
—
—
—
—
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
.25
0.5
0.75
1.0
1.5
2.2
3.0
4.5
6.0
9.0
Full-Load Torque
(lb-ft) with 1750 RPM
Base Speed Motors
(1) Does not apply to permanent magnet motors.
14
Ratings
1/2
3/4
0.373
0.560
1/12
0.062
Electrical Products Catalog
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
DCX® Series
DCXplus® Series
1/12-3 Horsepower
MODEL TYPES
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
DCX and DCXplus Series controllers are offered as open chassis or enclosed configurations in nine (9) standard models in four (4)
functional groups. The DCX® Series chassis units are ideal for the OEM or panel builder who may want to build a custom system by
integrating the controller in an enclosure with special logic or auxiliary control devices. The DCXplus® Series enclosed units are
offered as complete self-contained functional packages which include power conversion and regulator electronics, AC line protection and integral operator controls.
DCX® AND DCXplus® SERIES SELECTION CHART
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
Horsepower Range
115 VAC
230 VAC
Catalog
Number
(4)
Item
Code
Function
DCX ANGLE BRACKET CHASSIS CONTROLLERS
1/12 – 1/2
1/12 – 1/2
1/12 – 1(1)
1/12 – 1
—
1/2 – 1
1/2 – 2(1)
1/2 – 3
DCX102C
DCX202C
65984
65985
Run/Stop(3)(2)
Run/Stop(3)(2)
DCX302C
65986
Run/Stop(3)(2)
DCXplus FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY WITH INTEGRAL OPERATOR CONTROLS
1/12 – 1/2
1/2 – 1
DCX202EP
65987
Run/Stop
DCX202ERP
65991
Run/Stop, Armature Switch Reversing
DCXplus NEMA 1 ENCLOSED CONTROLLER WITH INTEGRAL OPERATOR CONTROLS
1/12 – 1/2
1/2 – 1
DCX202E
65988
Run/Stop
DCX202ER
65992
Run/Stop, Armature Switch Reversing
DCXplus NEMA 12 ENCLOSED CONTROLLER WITH INTEGRAL OPERATOR CONTROLS
1/12 – 1/2
1/2 – 1
DCX202EN12
65990
Run/Stop
DCX202ERN12
65995
Run/Stop, Armature Switch Reversing
(1) Requires either Option DC-RHTSK for 1 HP on 115 VAC and 2 HP on 230 VAC or Option DCX-HTSK for 3/4 HP on 115 VAC and 1-1/2 HP on 230 VAC.
(2) DC units are furnished with a potentiometer rated 5K ohms, 1/2 watt for separate mounting.
(3) Armature contactor Run-Stop-DB, and contactor reversing and dynamic braking are provided by Options DCX-DA and DCX-RA
(4) Units may be easily recalibrated for any standard rating within the range of the product using trimpots.
DIMENSIONS - DCX CHASSIS
.312
7.00
6.00
.50
.50
1.87
1.31
3.750
1.12
.25
4.25
.188 TYP
5.75
.456
5.25
.750
3.55
1.750
.50
DCX102C, DCX202C
.188
TYP.
.25
DCX302C
Electrical Products Catalog
15
A
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
DCX® Series
DCXplus® Series
1/12-3 Horsepower
DIMENSIONS - DCXplus ENCLOSED
.19 DIA MOUNTING HOLES
2 PLACES ON BACK
1.50
.75 TYP
.156 DIA
4 PLACES
.19 DIA HOLES
3 PLACES
A
8.360
9.500
8.72
10.25
9.00
.69
1.625
.75
.56
.62
3.00
3.00
3.00
1.12 DIA.
ONE END
1.12 DIA.
ONE END
9.00
2.06
DCXplus NEMA 1
2.375
1.875
.62
.12
2.72
3.12
.18
.75
2.75
2.06
DCXplus NEMA12
DCXplus Panel–Front
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
7.500
DIMENSIONS - HEATSINKS
.700
6.150
.700
#6-32 TAP, 2 PLACES
4.430
3.000
.900
1.38
.25
2.00
DCX RHTSK
16
Electrical Products Catalog
3.750
4.25
.87
5.75
6.1
#6-32 TAP, 2 PLACES
2.00
6.75
.250
4.430
3.000
DCX HTSK
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
OPTIONS FOR DCX SERIES CHASSIS UNITS
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
Barrier Terminal
Board
DCX-BTB-2 (68249)
DCX-BTB-3 (68254)
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Contactor,
Two-Pole with
Dynamic Braking
DCX-DA
(65996)
Kit includes screw terminals for all external wiring, one line fuse
holder, and an LED power on indicator in an assembly that
plugs piggy-back onto chassis model units.
(fuse not included)
Total height when assembled to
DCX102C or DCX202C is 2.12 inches
The basic DCX Series chassis
controller is designed for
Run-Stop unidirectional
operation without an armature
contactor. This option provides
a two-pole armature contactor
which is necessary whenever
the application requires a positive
disconnection of the rectified
armature power source from the
motor on a stop command. Action
of the contactor is sequenced with
the SCR regulator to ensure that
the DC power circuit is "phased off"
before the contactor is opened.
This results in "dry switching" for
improved contactor longevitiy. This
option also includes dynamic braking
which provides exponential rate braking
of the DC motor armature. Included is a
DB resistor with an anti-plug circuit to
prevent restarting the controller until the
braking cycle is complete, thereby
preventing a potentially damaging
electrical surge and mechanical stress.
COMPONENT
Braking
Torque %
Stops Per
Minute
UNIT
115V
230V
115V
230V
Kit includes a fuse block, lead wire with spade connectors, and
mounting screw. This option provides external line fuse protection for DCX Series chassis controllers (fuse not included).
Heatsink Kit (Flat)
DCX-HTSK
(67106)
This option consists of an extruded aluminum heatsink and
hardware to mount a Model DCX202C controller. This heatsink
is intended for use only with Model DCX202C where its greater
heat dissipation permits increasing the units original rated
horsepower.
Dimensions: 4.44"x6.75"x.88"
Knob and Dial Plate
Kit DCX-KDP
(67109)
Follower,
External Signal
DCX-25A
(68342)
1
DCXBTB-3
115/230 VAC
3
RATED HORSEPOWER
1/12 1/6 1/4 1/3 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/2 2
250 180 129 103 66 44 34
–
–
–
–
–
– 278 190 130 88
62
18 15 12 11
8
6
2
–
–
–
–
–
–
8
6
1
1
1
A
3
–
44
–
1
Dimensions 4.3” x 4.6” x 1.9”
Fuse Block Kit
DCX-FBK (67114)
Dual Connector
Terminal Adapter
DCX-DP (67118)
HP RATING
115 VAC
This option permits motor Start/Stop operation by pushbuttons or external logic in
115 or 230 VAC applications.
This option is the same as DCX-DA except two double pole contactors are provided for reversing the DC motor armature rated 1 HP
at 90 VDC armature or 3 HP at 180 VDC maximum. Anti-plug protection is provided to prevent armature reversal until a safe minimum speed is attained. The direction of motor rotation is controlled
by external RUN/FORWARD-REVERSE pushbuttons, switches or
logic. Braking times are same as DCX-DA above.
Dimensions 4.3” x 4.6” x 1.9”
horsepower rating.
Dimensions: 2"x1.38"x4.25"
INPUT VOLTAGE
DYNAMIC BRAKING RESISTOR RATINGS
Reversing,
Armature with
Dynamic Braking
DCX-RA (65998)
Heatsink Kit (Radial) This option provides the same function as
Option DCX-HTSK except it is a unique space
DCX-RHTSK
saving radial design and offers a greater
(67098)
OPTION
DCXBTB-2
COMPONENT
Braking
Torque %
Stops Per
Minute
UNIT
115V
230V
115V
230V
RATED HORSEPOWER
1/12 1/6 1/4 1/3 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/2 2
250 180 129 103 66 44 34
–
–
–
–
–
– 278 190 130 88
62
18 15 12 11
8
6
2
–
–
–
–
–
–
8
6
1
1
1
3
–
44
–
1
This option provides a two (male) into one (female) push-on
terminal to facilitate connection of DCX Series units for
tachometer feedback and/or inhibit.
This option provides a knob and a dial face graduated 0-100%
for use with the potentiometer provided with DCX Series units.
This option is intended as a low cost alternative which offers
greater accuracy and flexibility. The option is capable of
operating from the following isolated or nonisolated signals:
4-20 DC ma, 0-10 VDC. This option includes a scaling
potentiometer for offset adjustment.
Dimensions 1.5" x 3.38" x .75"
Electrical Products Catalog
17
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
BETA II series controllers are high quality, economically priced, general purpose controllers that feature static conversion of AC line power to regulated DC for nonregenerative adjustable speed armature control of shunt wound and permanent magnet DC
motors. The combination of a rugged compact design, mechanical flexibility, with many
standard and field modifiable features, make these units an ideal choice for a broad
range of industrial applications.
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
A
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
BETA II Series
1/6-3 Horsepower
The BETA II controllers are designed and manufactured to comply with applicable
standards established by the National Electric Code and NEMA for industrial motor and
control equipment. The units are UL and cUL Listed.
Motors suitable for Application with these controllers are listed in the DC motor section.
DESIGN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS
1. Construction
a) Angle Bracket Chassis – Circuit board and
power devices are mounted to a formed metal bracket
which allows a smaller footprint than the conventional
basic chassis. The optional contactor assemblies may
also be mounted on the same bracket.
b) Basic Chassis – Open chassis constructed of a
rugged die-cast aluminum alloy with provisions for conduit entry at the top and bottom by two (2) 3/4-14 NPSC
tapped holes with knockout plugs. The optional contactor
boards may also be mounted in the basic chassis.
c) Enclosed – Basic chassis unit with an aluminum
die-cast cover added. The cover has a recessed area to
guard the local operator control from accidental operation. All units use an oil resistant synthetic gasket to meet
the provisions for NEMA 4/12, making them suitable for
a wide range of wet and dirty industrial environments. All
models with integral operator controls include flexible
boots to seal the operator control switches, and a seal for
the motor speed potentiometer.
d) Washdown Duty – Basic Chassis unit and aluminum die-cast cover painted with a durable white epoxy
paint. All units are furnished with stainless steel hardware, oil resistant synthetic gasket and flexible boots for
sealing the operator controls to meet the provisions of
NEMA 4X.
2. Full-Wave Conversion – NEMA Code K converter configuration consisting of two (2) SCRs, two (2) diodes and
a free wheeling diode provides optimum form factor for
best motor performance and long service. The units have
600 PIV devices. The controller base or metal bracket
forms an integral heatsink with the power control devices
and is electrically isolated from the rest of the control.
3. Voltage Transient Protection – Metal oxide suppresser
across the AC line minimizes the effect of high voltage
spikes from the AC power source.
4. AC Line Protection – AC line fuse provides instantaneous protection from peak loads and fault currents.
The AC line fuse and holder are located on the main circuit board of the controller.
5. Motor Contactor – Models with a M or U in the catalog
number include DC magnetic armature contactors. This
provides a positive, two-pole disconnection of the motor
armature from the rectified power source. Action of the
contactor is sequenced with the SCR regulator to ensure
18
Electrical Products Catalog
that the DC power circuit is “phased-off” before the contactor is opened. This results in “dry-switching” for
improved contactor life. Anti-plug protection is provided
to prevent armature reversal until a safe minimum speed
is reached. Two types of contactor assemblies are available; Unidirectional (U suffix) which adds contactors to
disconnect the motor armature when the control is
stopped and Reversing (M suffix) which adds additional
contactors to disconnect and reverse the motor armature
when the unit is reversed.
6. Dynamic Braking – A standard feature of the controllers
when supplied with the motor contactor. Dynamic braking
provides exponential rate braking of the DC motor armature. Included is a DB resistor with an anti-plug circuit to
prevent restarting the controller until the braking cycle is
complete, thereby preventing a potentially damaging
electrical surge and mechanical stress.
The DB resistor is rated for stopping a typical load,
when the external machine inertia does not exceed that
of the motor armature, as shown in the chart below. The
DB resistor may be disconnected when braking is not
desired.
DB RESISTOR RATINGS
Model
RBA2
RBA3
Component
Voltage
Braking
Rated Horsepower
1/6
1/4
1/3
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/2
2
3
115V
180 129 103
66
44
34
—
—
—
Torque (%)
230V
—
—
—
278 190 130
88
62
—
Stops Per
115V
15
12
11
8
6
2
—
—
—
Minute
230V
—
—
—
8
6
1
1
1
—
Braking
115V
300 215 170 110
75
60
—
—
—
Torque (%)
230V
—
—
—
145 105
85
Stops Per
115V
9
6
5
5
4
4
—
—
—
Minute
230V
—
—
—
5
4
4
3
3
2
400 320 220
7. Operator Controls – All enclosed models with integral
operator controls include a speed setting potentiometer
and a multi-position switch providing RUN-STOP-JOG
functions. The switch is maintained in RUN and STOP
positions and a spring return to the center stop position
from the momentary JOG position. Jog speed is set by
the RUN speed potentiometer. The reversing models,
when supplied without a contactor assembly, have an
armature reversing power switch which is maintained in
the FORWARD or REVERSE run positions. This switch
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
BETA II Series
1/6-3 Horsepower
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
DESIGN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS (Continued)
a signal from a DC tachometer generator directly coupled to
the drive motor armature. The tachometer signal makes the
controller directly sensitive to motor speed. This results in an
expanded speed range, improved speed regulation with
load changes, motor field heating and other operating variables. The controller will automatically transfer to counter
EMF voltage feedback to prevent a runaway motor if the
tachometer circuit is opened. (A broken tachometer drive
coupling will cause the motor to run at maximum speed.)
Tachometers producing 7 to 150 VDC at maximum motor
speed may be used. This feature is suitable for use only with
unidirectional units using DC tachometers.
b) AC Line Starting – A provision is included to
defeat the no-restart-on-power-failure feature to permit
run-stop control of unidirectional models by an external
AC line contactor. Included is circuitry to assure smooth
motor starting.
c) Torque Regulator – These units may be easily
reconfigured to function as torque regulators. In this mode,
the speed setting potentiometer is used to set and regulate the maximum motor armature current over a range
of 0 to 150% of rated current. Accordingly motor speed is
unregulated and will go to a level of 0 to 100% of rated
speed, depending upon the application load torque.
includes a no pass through center detent which provides
a delay when changing direction for anti-plug protection.
Reversing models with a contactor assembly include
a momentary contact FORWARD-REVERSE run switch
with a spring return to the center position. This switch
controls only low control power since armature switching
is accomplished by magnetic contactors. The unit is
jogged forward or reverse by the momentary FORWARD-REVERSE switch after selecting the JOG position on the RUN-STOP-JOG switch (the JOG position is
maintained on this unit).
8. Control Transformer – All models include a control
transformer which provides internal reference and power
supply voltages, and a low voltage source for the magnetic controls, control logic and operator controls.
9. Counter EMF Voltage Feedback with IR Compensation – Adjustable to suit individual motor characteristics.
10. Trigger Circuit – Fast rise, hard firing to ensure reliable
conduction and minimize di/dt degradation of SCRs.
11. Field Supply – Transient protected. Selectable for either
half-wave or full-wave output. See Table for operating
voltages.
12. Control Relay – Enables remote control of all models
and provides an interlock to prevent a restart after a
power outage. This may be defeated when an external
customer furnished AC line contactor is used to control
the unit.
13. Customer Use Run Relay Contact – Form A normally
open contact rated five (5) amps at 115 VAC or 30 VDC
coordinating with a run command. May be used for external control and indicating devices. May also be applied
as a pushbutton seal-in or a drive OK contact.
14. Hybrid Circuitry – Miniature components in custom surface mount assemblies improve reliability and make
available more features in the smallest possible mechanical configuration.
15. Selectable Capabilities –
a) DC Tachometer Feedback – Provided is impedance matching, voltage scaling and terminals for accepting
RATINGS
1. Horsepower Range:
Enclosed .................................. 1/6 thru 1 HP @ 115 VAC
1/2 thru 2 HP @ 230 VAC
Chassis.................................... 1/6 thru 1 HP @ 115 VAC
1/2 thru 3 HP @ 230 VAC
2. Operating Voltages
Output VDC
Armature
Field(1)
115V, 50 or 60 Hz
0–90
50/100
230V, 50 or 60 Hz
0–180
100/200
17. Horsepower and Voltage Calibration – Units are
shipped calibrated for the maximum horsepower rating
and 230V operation. They may be easily recalibrated for
115V operation by reconfigurable jumpers and any standard horsepower rating within the design range by clipping shunt wires.
18. Safety Features – UL, cUL listed, low voltage operator
control. Requires mandatory restart after power interruption, NEMA 4/12.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Service Factor ............................................................. 1.0
Duty ................................................................. Continuous
Overload Capacity (Armature circuit). 150% for 1 minute
Run Speed Potentiometer..................... 5K ohms, 1/2 W
Reference Power Supply.....................................10 VDC
AC Line Fuse, Interrupting Capacity ...... 100,000 Amps
ADJUSTMENTS
OPERATING VOLTAGES
Power Source
(Single-Phase)
16. Mechanical Flexibility – The same basic unit can be
used as an open chassis or an enclosed package controller. Enclosed units may be mounted under or through
a console surface as shown on page 20. The angle
bracket chassis offers the same controller in a smaller
footprint and is designed for use in the customer’s own
panel.
Control
Reference
Voltage(2)
Magnetic
Control
Voltage
0-10 VDC
24 VDC
(1) Selectable
(2) Where operation from an external, non-isolated 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC signal is desired we suggest using either the BETAplus or VE plus Series
Potentiometer adjustments are provided for:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Acceleration Time .................................. 0.2–40 seconds
Deceleration Time................................... 0.2–40 seconds
Minimum Speed ............................ 0–40% of base speed
Maximum Speed ....................... 50–100% of base speed
IR (Load) Compensation................0–100% of rated load
Current Limit ...........................0–150% of full load torque
Electrical Products Catalog
19
A
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
BETA II Series
1/6-3 Horsepower
3. Efficiency — (rated speed/rated load)
(a) Controller (SCR regulator) ....................................99%
(b) Complete drive (Controller and motor, typical) ......85%
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
1. Controlled Speed Range — Zero to motor base speed.
Speed range with respect to specified regulation is shown
below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Line Voltage......... 115/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Single Phase
Line Voltage Variation............................ ±10% of rated(1)
Line Frequency Variation....................................... ±2 Hz
Ambient Temperature ....................Enclosed: 0° to 40° C
(32° to 104° F)
Chassis: 0° to 55° C
(32° to 131° F)
5. Altitude ......................... 3300 ft. (1000 meters) maximum
6. Relative Humidity ....................... 0–95%, noncondensing
SPEED REGULATION CHARACTERISTICS
Variable
Field
Load
Line
Heating
Change Voltage
Cold/
95%
±10%
Normal
Regulation
Method
Standard Voltage
Feedback with IR
Compensation
Optional Tachometer
Feedback(1)
Speed
Temp.
Range
±10°C
2%
±1%
5-12%
±2%
50:1
0.5%
±1%
0.2%
±2%
200:1
(1) Unit will operate down to -15% of rated voltage although this may prevent
rated speed with rated load.
(1) Unidirectional Models Only
TYPICAL APPLICATION DATA
Ratings
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
A
OPERATING CONDITIONS
2. Speed Regulation — Regulation percentages listed are
of motor base speed under steady-state conditions.
Normal operation will result in performance equal to or
better than specifications.
Rated Horsepower (HP)
1/6
1/4
1/3
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/2
2
3
Rated Kilowatts (kW)
0.124
0.187
0.249
0.373
0.560
0.746
1.120
1.492
2.238
3.9
5.0
6.0
8.7
12.4
15.8
—
—
—
1-Phase
AC Input
(Full-Load)
DC Output
(Full-Load)
Line
Amps
115 VAC
230 VAC
KVA
Motor
Armature
Amps
Motor(1)
Field
Amps
(Maximum)
—
—
—
4.2
5.9
8.8
12.6
15.8
22.0
0.48
0.58
0.71
1.00
1.40
2.00
3.00
4.00
5.00
90V
2.0
2.8
3.5
5.4
8.1
10.5
—
—
—
180V
—
—
—
2.7
4.0
5.5
8.2
11.6
14.4
50V
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
—
—
—
100V
—
—
—
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
200V
—
—
—
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
Full-Load Torque (lb-ft) with 1750 RPM
Base Speed Motors
0.5
0.75
1.0
1.5
2.2
3.0
4.5
6.0
9.0
Minimum Transformer KVA for Voltage
Matching or Isolation
0.5
0.75
0.75
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
5.0
7.5
(1) Does not apply to Permanent Magnet Motors
MOUNTING CONFIGURATIONS
PANEL
PANEL MOUNTED
OPEN CHASSIS
20
Electrical Products Catalog
SURFACE
SURFACE MOUNTED
ENCLOSED PACKAGE
PANEL
PANEL
THROUGH PANEL
SURFACE MOUNTED
BELOW PANEL
SURFACE MOUNTED
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
BETA II Series
1/6-3 Horsepower
MODEL TYPES
BETA II controllers are offered in twenty three (23) standard models in six functional groups. The basic chassis models are the nucleus of all the enclosed models; standard covers and contactor assemblies can be added to the basic chassis to make an enclosed
controller or the enclosed unit may be ordered complete as shown below.
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
Horsepower
115 VAC
Range(1)
Catalog
Number
230 VAC
Item
Code
A
Function
1/6 – 1
1/2 – 2
RBA2C
57854
Run/Stop(2)
RBA2CU
57855
Armature Contactor Run/Stop and DB
RBA2CM
57856
Armature Contactor Forward/Reverse and DB
BASIC CHASSIS CONTROLLERS WITHOUT OPERATOR CONTROLS*
1/6 – 1
1/6 – 1
1/2 – 2
RBA2
64801
Run/Stop(2)
Armature Contactor Run/Stop and DB
RBA2U
57831
RBA2M
64821
Armature Contactor Forward/Reverse and DB
RBA3
64865
Run/Stop(2)
RBA3U
57889
Armature Contactor Run/Stop and DB
RBA3M
64873
Armature Contactor Forward/Reverse and DB
1/2 – 3
NEMA 4/12 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS WITHOUT OPERATOR CONTROLS*
1/6 – 1
1/2 – 2
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
ANGLE BRACKET CHASSIS CONTROLLERS WITHOUT OPERATOR CONTROLS*
RBA2B
64805
Run/Stop(2)
RBA2UB
57852
Armature Contactor Run/Stop and DB
RBA2MB
64855
Armature Contactor Forward/Reverse and DB
NEMA 4/12 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS WITH INTEGRAL OPERATOR CONTROLS
1/6 – 1
RBA2S
64814
Run/Stop/Jog(2) (4)
RBA2R
64820
Run/Stop/Jog, Armature Switch Reversing(3) (4)
RBA2US
57853
Run/Stop/Jog, Armature Contactor Run and DB(4)
RBA2MR
64863
Run/Stop/Jog, Armature Contactor Forward/Reverse and DB(5)
1/2 – 2
WASHDOWN DUTY ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS WITHOUT OPERATOR CONTROLS*
1/6 – 1
1/2 – 2
RBA2B-WD
13048
Run/Stop(2)
RBA2UB-WD
13050
Armature Contactor Run/Stop and DB
RBA2MB-WD
13100
Armature Contactor Forward/Reverse and DB
WASHDOWN DUTY ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS WITH INTEGRAL OPERATOR CONTROLS
1/6 – 1
1/2 – 2
RBA2S-WD
13102
Run/Stop/Jog(2) (4)
RBA2R-WD
13104
Run/Stop/Jog, Armature Switch Reversing(3) (4)
RBA2US-WD
13106
Run/Stop/Jog, Armature Contactor Run and DB(4)
RBA2MR-WD
13108
Run/Stop/Jog, Armature Contactor Forward/Reverse and DB(5)
*Refer to Remote Operator Control Stations on pages 109 and 110.
(1) Units are shipped calibrated for the maximum horsepower ratings shown. Units may be calibrated for other standard ratings by the removal of appropriate resistance wires. Units are connected for 230 VAC and are easily reconnected for 115 VAC input.
(2) Contactorless Run-Stop Operation
(3) Contactorless Reversing Operation
(4) Jog Speed is set by the Run Speed Potentiometer. Maintained in RUN position, JOG position is momentary with a spring return to STOP.
(5) Jog Speed is set by the Run Speed Potentiometer. Maintained JOG position, Forward/Reverse are momentary.
CONTROLLER WEIGHTS
Model
Weight (Lbs)
RBA2C
2.0
RBA2CU
RBA2CM
2.3
RBA2
RBA3
3.3
RBA2U
RBA2M
RBA3U
RBA3M
3.8
RBA2B, RBA2S
RBA2R, RBA2BWD
RBA2SWD
RBA2RWD
5.5
RBA2UB, RBA2MB
RBA2US, RBA2MR
RBA2UB-WD
RBA2MB-WD
RBA2US-WD
RBA2MR-WD
6.1
Electrical Products Catalog
21
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
BETA II Series
1/6-3 Horsepower
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
REMOTE OPERATOR CONTROL STATIONS BETA II
Item
Code
69362
Pushbuttons
Run, Stop
Switches
—
RCS3C
58098
Run, Stop
Run/Jog
RCS3D
58099
Run, Stop
RCS6
60239
RCS16
RCS17
RBA2U, RBA3U, RBA2UB
Run/Jog
Pots
Motor Speed
Motor Speed
Jog Speed
Motor Speed
Jog Speed
Fwd, Rev, Stop
—
Motor Speed
RBA2M, RBA3M, RBA2MB
58102
—
Run/Stop/Jog
Motor Speed
RBA2U, RBA3U, RBA2UB
58103
—
Run/Stop/Jog,
Fwd/Rev
Motor Speed
RBA2M, RBA3M, RBA2MB
RBA2, RBA3, RBA2B
Remote Operator Station dimensions shown on page 110.
OPTIONS
Options and modifications are listed alpha-numerically within each group. Complete option descriptions are listed in the DC option
section. To order a controller with the option installed or the modification made, add the option number or letter as a suffix to the
controller catalog number, e.g. RBA2B-21. To order a kit for field installation, order by item code.
Group
Feedback
Torque (Current) Reference
DC Tachometer Feedback
No.
18E
24
Kit
Item Code
—
—
Notes
(1)
(1)
Line Starting
Motor Speed Potentiometer, One Turn
Motor Speed Potentiometer, Ten Turn (Analog)
Motor Speed Potentiometer, Ten Turn (Digital)
LS
21
21A
21B
—
—
60168
66103
(1)
(2)
(3)
(3)
Option
External
Notes:
(1) Modifiable feature of controller
(2) Unit will not be rated NEMA 4/12 unless factory installed.
(3) Unit will not be rated NEMA 4/12
DIMENSIONS
4.25
TAP NO. 3/4-14 NPSC
(2 PL))
TAP NO. 3/4-14 NPSC
(2 PL)
3.312
1.75
8.00
.19
8.88
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
A
Use With
Controller
Models
ALL
Control Elements
Catalog
Number
RCS1
9.5
9.5
8.00
9.12
.50
9.12
RBA2C
4.00
5.00
5.25
ENCLOSED
22
Electrical Products Catalog
.19
4.00
.50
5.00
CHASSIS
2.25
4.30
RBA2CU
RBA2CM
ANGLE BRACKET CHASSIS
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
BETAplus Series
1/6-3 Horsepower
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
BETAplus series controllers are high performance, high quality, general purpose units
which feature static conversion of AC line power to regulated DC for nonregenerative,
adjustable speed armature control of shunt-wound or permanent magnet DC motors.
The BETAplus series features an isolated speed reference circuit and uses miniature
component hybrid assemblies which provide many standard features in a compact
package. This series incorporates the use of DIP switches and reconnectable jumpers
to configure the voltage, horsepower and selectable features of the controller. The combination of a rugged compact design with standard features and field modifications
make this controller an ideal choice for a broad range of industrial applications.
These controllers are designed and manufactured to comply with applicable standards
established by the National Electric Code and NEMA pertaining to motor and industrial control equipment. The controllers are UL and cUL Listed.
Motors suitable for application with these controllers are listed in the DC motor section.
DESIGN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS
1. Construction
a) Angle Bracket Chassis – Circuit board and power
devices are mounted to formed metal bracket which allows
a smaller footprint than the conventional basic chassis. The
optional contactor assemblies may also be mounted on the
same bracket.
b) Basic Chassis – Open chassis constructed of a rugged
die-cast aluminum alloy with provisions for conduit entry at
the top and bottom by two (2) 3/4-14 NPSC tapped holes
with knockout plugs. The optional contactor assemblies may
also be mounted in the basic chassis.
c) Enclosed – Basic chassis unit with an aluminum die-cast
cover added. The cover has a recessed area to guard the
local operator control from accidental operation. All units use
an oil resistant synthetic gasket to meet the provisions for
NEMA 4/12, making them suitable for a wide range of wet
and dirty environments. All models with integral operator
controls include flexible boots to seal the operator control
switches, and a seal for the motor speed potentiometer.
d) Washdown Duty – Basic chassis unit and aluminum diecast cover painted with a durable white epoxy paint. All units
are furnished with stainless steel hardware, oil resistant synthetic gasket and flexible boots for sealing the operator controls to meet the provisions of NEMA 4X.
2. Full-Wave Power Conversion – Full-wave converter configuration consisting of four SCR's and a freewheeling diode
provide benefits for optimum motor performance and long
service. Power bridge is composed of 600PIV, discrete,
encapsulated and electrically isolated devices. The alloy
base forms an integral heatsink with the power control
devices electrically isolated from the base.
The "full-bridge” configuration offers important benefits over
the conventional two SCR semiconverter commonly used.
Smoother operation results since two SCR's in series must
fire to enable conduction as opposed to one SCR in conventional single-phase converters. This provides broad band
immunity to inadvertent SCR firing due to line noise, and contributes to operating safety since the failure of one SCR will
not initiate undesired motor rotation when the armature is at
rest.
The freewheeling diode improves the form factor which lowers rms currents resulting in reduced motor temperatures by
minimizing power dissipation at low speeds. This enhances
both motor performance and life.
3. Voltage Transient Protection – Metal oxide suppressor
across the AC line is combined with RC snubbers across the
power bridge to limit potentially damaging high voltage
spikes from the AC power source.
4. AC Line Protection – A high (100K amp) interrupting
capacity AC line fuse provides instantaneous protection
from peak loads and fault currents. This fuse holder is
mounted on the main circuit board of the controller.
5. Isolated Regulator – Internal DC circuits are isolated from
the AC power source for operator and equipment safety and
for simplified application. The control reference input common may be grounded or connected without additional isolation to other drive units or grounded external signal sources.
Isolation eliminates the common condition of line voltage to
ground potentials being present on the speed control potentiometer.
6. Feedback Isolation –
(a) Current Feedback – Isolation by optical coupler.
(b) Voltage Feedback – High impedance circuit (two
megohms).
7. Feedback – Two selectable modes of analog feedback are
provided. See table for speed regulation characteristics.
(a) Armature Feedback – Counter EMF voltage feedback
with IR compensation. IR compensation is adjustable to suit
individual motor characteristics and optimize speed regulation in this mode.
(b) DC Tachometer Feedback – Provides impedance
matching, voltage scaling and terminals for accepting a signal from a DC tachometer generator mechanically coupled to
the drive motor armature. This results in expanded speed
range, improved speed regulation with load changes and
reduced sensitivity to operating conditions such as line voltage variations, ambient temperature changes, motor field
heating and other operating variables. The controller will
automatically transfer to counter EMF voltage feedback to
prevent runaway if the tachometer circuit is open. (A broken
tachometer drive coupling will cause the motor to run at maximum speed.) Tachometers producing 7 VDC to 150 VDC at
maximum motor speed may be used.
This feature is suitable for use with unidirectional units using DC
tachometers.
Electrical Products Catalog
23
A
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
BETAplus Series
1/6-3 Horsepower
DESIGN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS (Continued)
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
A
8. Control Voltage – A transformer coupled 24 VDC power
supply isolates all magnetic pushbutton control and logic
from the AC power source for operator protection.
9. Field Supply – Transient protected, half-wave or full-wave.
See table for operating voltages.
10. Contactorless Design – Unit is designed for reliable solid
state, run-stop operation without an armature contactor.
Logic includes a provision to prevent an involuntary restart
after a power failure. This feature may be defeated when an
external customer furnished AC line contactor is used to
control the unit.
11. Motor Contactor – Models with a M or U in the catalog number include DC magnetic armature contactors. This provides
a positive, two-pole disconnection of the motor armature from
the rectified power source. Action of the contactor is
sequenced with the SCR regulator to ensure that the DC
power circuit is “phased-off” before the contactor is opened.
This results in “dry-switching” for improved contactor life.
Anti-plug protection is provided to prevent armature reversal
until a safe minimum speed is reached. Two types of contactor assemblies are available; Unidirectional (U suffix) which
adds contactors to disconnect the motor armature when the
control is stopped and Reversing (M suffix) which adds additional contactors to disconnect and reverse the motor armature when the unit is reversed.
12. Dynamic Braking – Standard feature of models with a motor
contactor. Dynamic braking provides exponential rate braking of the DC motor armature. Included is a DB resistor with
an anti-plug circuit to prevent restarting the controller until the
braking cycle is complete, thereby preventing a potentially
damaging electrical surge and mechanical stress. The DB
resistor is rated for stopping a typical load, when the external
machine inertia does not exceed that of the motor armature,
as shown below.
DB RESISTOR RATINGS
Model
RBS2
RBS3
16.
Rated Horsepower
Component
Voltage
1/6
1/4
1/3
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/2
2
3
Braking
115V
180
129 103
66
44
34
—
—
—
Torque (%)
230V
—
—
278 190 130
88
62
—
—
Stops Per
115V
15
12
11
8
6
2
—
—
—
Minute
230V
—
—
—
8
6
1
1
1
—
Braking
115V
300
215 170 110
75
60
—
—
—
Torque (%)
230V
—
—
—
Stops Per
115V
9
6
5
5
4
4
—
—
—
Minute
230V
—
—
—
5
4
4
3
3
2
400 320 220 145 105
85
13. Motor Overload – A nonadjustable electronic circuit continuously monitors motor armature current and shuts down the
drive whenever the load exceeds 120% for 80 seconds.
14. Operator Controls – All enclosed models with integral
operator controls include a speed setting potentiometer and
a multi-position switch providing RUN-STOP-JOG functions.
The switch is maintained in RUN and STOP positions and a
spring return to the center stop position from the momentary
JOG position. Jog speed is set by the RUN speed potentiometer. The reversing models, when supplied without a
contactor assembly, have an armature reversing power
switch which is maintained in the FORWARD or REVERSE
24
15.
Electrical Products Catalog
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
run positions. This switch includes a no pass through center
position detent which provides a delay when changing direction. Reversing models with a contactor assembly include a
momentary contact FORWARD-REVERSE run switch with
a spring return to the center position. This switch controls
only low control power since armature switching is accomplished by magnetic contactors. The unit is jogged forward
or reverse by the momentary FORWARD-REVERSE switch
after selecting the JOG position on the RUN-STOP-JOG
switch (the JOG position is maintained on this unit).
Selectable Capabilities –
(a) DC Tachometer Feedback – See description under
Feedback 7(b).
(b) AC Line Starting – Provision is included to defeat the
no-restart-after-power-failure feature to permit run-stop control of unidirectional models by an external AC line contactor.
Included is circuitry to assure smooth starting.
(c) Torque Regulator – BETAplus units may be easily
reconfigured to function as a torque regulator. In this mode
the speed setting potentiometer is used to set and regulate
the motor maximum armature current over a range of
0–150% of rated. Accordingly, motor speed is unregulated
and will go to a level of 0–100% of rated, depending upon
the application load torque.
(d) External DC Signal Follower – These units include isolation and impedance matching circuitry to interface an externally supplied grounded or ungrounded, isolated or
non-isolated 0–5 VDC, 0–10 VDC or 4–20 mA DC signal
source with the motor controller reference input. This provides
a linear transfer of the external signal to motor speed. Typical
applications include those where motor speed must be controlled as a function of a process variable such as temperature,
weight, flow, pressure, etc. In many applications, the reference
signal is obtained from a process instrument controller, or other
commercially available transducers with a DC output.
Mechanical Flexibility – BETAplus units offer outstanding
application flexibility. The same basic unit can be used as an
open chassis or enclosed package controller.
Horsepower and Voltage Calibration – Units are shipped
calibrated for the maximum horsepower rating and 230V
operation. They may be easily recalibrated for any standard
horsepower rating within the design range and 115V operation by reconfigurable jumpers.
Customer Use Run Contact – Form A normally open contact rated five amps at 115 VAC or 30 VDC coordinated with
run command may be used for external control and indicating devices.
Visual Status Indicator – Bicolor LED glows green to show
normal operation with the armature current at 100% of rated
or less, glows red to show current limit operation.
Control Relay – Enables remote control of all models and
provides an interlock to prevent a restart after a power outage.
Hybrid Circuitry – Extensive use of surface mount miniature
components expands flexibility, enhances reliability, and
results in a significant reduction in the size of the controller.
Safety Features – UL and cUL Listed. Low Voltage Operator
Control. Requires reset for restart after power interruption.
TENV enclosure. Isolated regulator. High Interrupting
Capacity AC Line Fuse.
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
RATINGS
BETAplus Series
1/6-3 Horsepower
OPERATING CONDITIONS
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
1. Horsepower:
Enclosed.................................. 1/6 thru 1 HP @ 115 VAC
1/2 thru 2 HP @ 230 VAC
Chassis.................................... 1/6 thru 1 HP @ 115 VAC
1/2 thru 3 HP @ 230 VAC
2. Service Factor ............................................................. 1.0
3. Duty ................................................................. Continuous
4. Operating Voltages
1. Line Voltage ............................... 115/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz,
Single Phase
2. Line Voltage Variation......................................... ±10%(1)
3. Line Frequency Variation ...................................... ±2 Hz
4. Ambient Temperature ....................Enclosed: 0° to 40°C
(32° to 104°F)
Chassis: 0° to 55°C
(32° to 131°F)
5. Altitude ......................... 3300 ft. (1000 meters) maximum
6. Relative Humidity....................... 0–95%, noncondensing
OPERATING VOLTAGES
Output VDC
Power Source
(Single-Phase)
115V, 50 or 60 Hz
Armature
0–90
Field(1)
50/100
230V, 50 or 60 Hz
0–180
100/200
Control
Reference
Voltage(2)
0–5 VDC
0–10 VDC
4–20 mA
(1) Unit will operate down to -15% of rated voltage, although this may prevent
rated speed with rated load.
Magnetic
Control
Voltage
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
24 VDC
1. Controlled Speed Range — Zero to motor base speed.
Speed range with respect to specified regulation is shown
below.
(1) Selectable
(2) Grounded or Ungrounded. Choice of one reference voltage.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2. Speed Regulation — Regulation percentages listed are
of motor base speed under steady-state conditions.
Normal operation will result in performance equal to or
better than specifications.
Overload Capacity (Armature circuit). 150% for 1 minute
Run Speed Potentiometer..................... 5K ohms, 1/2 W
Reference Power Supply.....................................10 VDC
AC Line Fuse, Interrupting Capacity ...... 100,000 Amps
SPEED REGULATION CHARACTERISTICS
Variable
Field
Load
Line
Speed
Heating Temp.
Change Voltage
Range
Cold/
±10°C
95%
±10%
Normal
Regulation
Method
ADJUSTMENTS
Potentiometer adjustments are provided for:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Acceleration Time .................................. 0.2–30 seconds
Deceleration Time .................................. 0.2–30 seconds
Minimum Speed........................... 0–40% of Base Speed
Maximum Speed ...................... 50–100% of Base Speed
IR (Load) Compensation.............0–100% of Rated Load
Torque (Current) Limit ....................0–150% of Full Load
Standard Voltage
Feedback with IR
Compensation
Optional Tachometer
Feedback(1)
2%
±1%
5–12%
±2%
50:1
0.5%
±1%
0.2%
±2%
200:1
(1) Unidirectional Models Only
3. Efficiency — (rated speed/rated load)
(a) Controller (SCR regulator) ....................................98%
(b) Complete drive (Controller and motor, typical) .....85%
ELECTRICAL DATA
TYPICAL APPLICATION DATA
Component
Rated Horsepower (HP)
Rated Kilowatts (kW)
1-Phase
AC Input
(Full-Load)
DC Output
(Full-Load)
1/6
0.124
1/4
0.187
1/3
0.249
1/2
0.373
Ratings
3/4
0.560
1
0.746
1-1/2
1.120
2
1.492
3
2.238
Line
Amps
KVA
115 VAC
230 VAC
3.9
—
0.48
5.0
—
0.58
6.0
—
0.71
8.7
4.2
1.00
12.4
5.9
1.40
15.8
8.8
2.00
—
12.6
3.00
—
15.8
4.00
—
22.0
5.00
Motor
Armature
Amps
90V
2.0
2.8
3.5
5.4
8.1
10.5
—
—
—
180V
—
—
—
2.6
3.8
5.5
8.2
11.6
15.1
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
—
—
—
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
—
—
—
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
0.5
0.75
1.0
1.5
2.2
3.0
4.5
6.0
9.0
0.5
0.75
0.75
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
5.0
7.5
Motor(1)
50V
Field
100V
Amps
(Maximum)
200V
Full-Load Torque (lb-ft) with 1750 RPM
Base Speed Motors
Minimum Transformer KVA for Voltage
Matching or Isolation
(1) Does not apply to Permanent Magnet Motors
Electrical Products Catalog
25
A
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
BETAplus Series
1/6-3 Horsepower
MODEL TYPES
can be added to the basic chassis to make an enclosed controller or the enclosed unit may be ordered complete as shown
below.
BETAplus controllers are offered in twenty-three (23) standard
models in six functional groups. The basic chassis models are
the nucleus of all the enclosed models; standard covers
A
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Horsepower Range(1)
115 VAC
230 VAC
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
Function
ANGLE BRACKET CHASSIS CONTROLLERS WITHOUT OPERATOR CONTROLS*
1/6–1
RBS2C
RBS2CU
RBS2CM
1/2–2
57898
57899
57903
Run/Stop(2)
Armature Contactor Run/Stop and DB
Armature Contactor Forward/Reverse and DB
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
BASIC CHASSIS CONTROLLERS WITHOUT OPERATOR CONTROLS*
1/6–1
1/2–2
1/6–1
1/2–3
RBS2
RBS2U
RBS2M
RBS3
RBS3U
RBS3M
64874
57894
64878
64881
57895
64882
Run/Stop(2)
Armature Contactor
Armature Contactor
Run/Stop(2)
Armature Contactor
Armature Contactor
Run/Stop and DB
Forward/Reverse and DB
Run/Stop and DB
Forward/Reverse and DB
NEMA 4/12 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS WITHOUT OPERATOR CONTROLS
1/2–2
64875
57896
64879
Run/Stop(2)
Armature Contactor Run/Stop and DB
Armature Contactor Forward/Reverse and DB
®
1/6–1
RBS2B
RBS2UB
RBS2MB
NEMA 4/12 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS WITH INTEGRAL OPERATOR CONTROLS
1/6–1
RBS2S
RBS2R
RBS2US
RBS2MR
1/2–2
64876
64877
57897
64880
Run/Stop/Jog(2) (4)
Run/Stop/Jog, Armature Switch Reversing(3) (4)
Run/Stop/Jog, Armature Contactor Run and DB(4)
Run/Stop/Jog, Armature Contactor Forward/Reverse and DB(5)
WASHDOWN DUTY ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS WITHOUT OPERATOR CONTROLS*
1/6–1
RBS2B-WD
RBS2UB-WD
RBS2MB-WD
1/2–2
13184
13280
13324
Run/Stop(2)
Armature Contactor Run/Stop and DB
Armature Contactor Forward/Reverse and DB
WASHDOWN DUTY ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS WITH INTEGRAL OPERATOR CONTROLS
1/6–1
RBS2S-WD
RBS2R-WD
RBS2US-WD
RBS2MR-WD
1/2–2
13350
13362
13364
13378
Run/Stop/Jog(2) (4)
Run/Stop/Jog, Armature Switch Reversing(3) (4)
Run/Stop/Jog, Armature Contactor Run and DB(4)
Run/Stop/Jog, Armature Contactor Forward/Reverse and DB(5)
*Refer to Remote Operator Stations, pages 109 and 110.
(1) Units are shipped calibrated for the maximum horsepower ratings shown. Units may be calibrated for other standard ratings by the changing of a Jumper. Units
are connected for 230 VAC and are easily reconnected for 115VAC input.
(2) Contactorless Run-Stop Operation
(3) Contactorless Reversing Operation
(4) Jog Speed is set by the Run Speed Potentiometer. Maintained in RUN position, JOG position is momentary with a spring return to STOP.
(5) Jog Speed is set by the Run Speed Potentiometer. Maintained JOG position, Forward/Reverse are momentary.
CONTROLLER WEIGHTS
Model
Weight (Lbs.)
26
RBS2C
2.0
RBS2CU
RBS2CM
2.3
Electrical Products Catalog
RBS2
RBS3
3.3
RBS2U
RBS2M
RBS3U
RBS3M
3.8
RBS2B, RBS2S
RBS2R, RBS2BWD
RBS2SWD
RBS2RWD
5.5
RBS2UB, RBS2MB
RBS2US, RBS2MR
RBS2UB-WD
RBS2MB-WD
RBS2US-WD
RBS2MR-WD
6.1
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
REMOTE STATIONS
BETAplus Series
1/6-3 Horsepower
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
Catalog
Number
RCS1
Item
Code
69362
Pushbuttons
Run, Stop
Control Elements
Switches
—
RCS3C
58098
Run, Stop
Run/Jog
RCS3D
58099
Run, Stop
RCS6
60239
RCS16
RCS17
Use With
Controller
Models
ALL
RBS2U, RBS3U, RBS2UB
Run/Jog
Pots
Motor Speed
Motor Speed
Jog Speed
Motor Speed
Jog Speed
Fwd, Rev, Stop
—
Motor Speed
RBS2M, RBS3M, RBS2MB
58102
—
Run/Stop/Jog
Motor Speed
RBS2U, RBS3U, RBS2UB
58103
—
Run/Stop/Jog,
Fwd/Stop/Rev
Motor Speed
RBS2M, RBS3M, RBS2MB
RBS2, RBS3, RBS2B
Remote Operator Station dimensions shown on page110.
OPTIONS
Options are listed alpha-numerically within each group. Complete option descriptions are listed in the DC option section. To order a
controller with the option installed or the modification made, add the option number or letter as a suffix to the controller catalog number e.g. RBS2B-21. To order a kit for field installation, order by item code.
Group
Feedback
Option
External
(1)
(2)
(3)
Kit
Item Code
—
—
—
60168
66103
—
—
No.
18E
24
21
21A
21B
38
LS
Torque (Current) Reference
DC Tachometer Feedback
Motor Speed Potentiometer, One Turn
Motor Speed Potentiometer, TenTurn (Analog)
Motor Speed Potentiometer, Ten Turn (Digital)
Follower/Manual Mode Selector Switch
Line Starting
®
Modifiable Feature of controller
Unit will not be NEMA 4/12 unless factory installed.
Unit will not be rated NEMA 4/12
4.25
DIMENSIONS
1.75
Notes
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(3)
(2)
(1)
3.312
TAP NO. 3/4-14 NPSC
(2 PL))
TAP NO. 3/4-14 NPSC
(2 PL)
.19
8.88
8.00
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
REMOTE OPERATOR CONTROL STATIONS BETAplus
9.5
9.5
8.00
9.12
.50
9.12
4.00
.19
5.25
5.00
4.00
.50
ENCLOSED
2.25
RBS2C
4.30
5.00
CHASSIS
RBS2CU
RBS2CM
ANGLE BRACKET CHASSIS
MOUNTING CONFIGURATIONS
PANEL
PANEL MOUNTED
OPEN CHASSIS
SURFACE
SURFACE MOUNTED
ENCLOSED PACKAGE
PANEL
PANEL
THROUGH PANEL
SURFACE MOUNTED
BELOW PANEL
SURFACE MOUNTED
Electrical Products Catalog
27
A
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
VEplus series of controllers are a high performance, high quality, general purpose unit
which features static conversion of AC line power to regulated DC for nonregenerative,
adjustable speed armature control of shunt-wound or permanent magnet DC motors.
The VEplus series features an isolated speed reference circuit and use miniature component hybrid assemblies which provide an additional number of standard features and
field modifications. This series also incorporates the use of DIP switches and reconnectable jumpers to configure the voltage, horsepower and selectable features of the
controller. Supplied in a larger chassis to allow the addition of pre-engineered options
and extending the horsepower range to 5 HP make this an ideal choice for your more
demanding requirements.
These controllers are designed and manufactured to comply with applicable standards
established by the National Electric Code and NEMA pertaining to motor and industrial control equipment. The controllers are UL and cUL Listed.
Motors suitable for application with these controllers are listed in the DC motor section.
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
A
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
VEplus Series
1/6-5 Horsepower
DESIGN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS
1. Construction
a) Basic Chassis – Open chassis constructed of a
rugged die-cast aluminum alloy which features a heatsink
design consisting of a unique pin configuration with omnidirectional heat dissipation characteristics. This allows the
unit to be wall mounted in either a vertical or horizontal position. Conduit entry is provided top and bottom by two (2) 3/414 NPSC tapped holes. All open chassis are cooled by
natural convection. Additional space is provided in the base
for the addition of the optional contactor assemblies and
pre-engineered options.
b) Enclosed – Basic chassis unit with the addition of a
screw fixed cover which is gasketed with an oil resistant synthetic rubber gasket to meet the provisions for NEMA 4/12,
making them suitable for a wide range of wet and dirty
industrial environments. The covers are molded of high
strength Noryl® engineering plastic. The cover is designed to
accept either a blank panel or various local control panels.
All models with integral operator controls include flexible
boots to seal the operator control switches, and a seal for
the motor speed potentiometer. 5 HP units require the use
of a fan assembly mounted to the bottom of the heatsink.
2. Full-Wave Power Conversion – Full-wave converter configuration consisting of four SCR's and a freewheeling diode
provide benefits for optimum motor performance and long
service. Power bridge is composed of 600PIV, discrete,
encapsulated and electrically isolated devices. The alloy
base forms an integral heatsink with the power control
devices electrically isolated from the base.
The "full-bridge” configuration offers important benefits over
the conventional two SCR semiconverter commonly used.
Smoother operation results since two SCR's in series must fire
to enable conduction as opposed to one SCR in conventional
single-phase converters. This provides broad band immunity
to inadvertent SCR firing due to line noise, and contributes to
operating safety since the failure of one SCR will not initiate
undesired motor rotation when the armature is at rest.
The freewheeling diode improves the form factor which lowers rms currents resulting in reduced motor temperatures by
minimizing power dissipation at low speeds. This enhances
both motor performance and life.
3. Voltage Transient Protection – Metal oxide suppressors
across the AC line is combined with RC snubbers across the
power bridge to limit potentially damaging high voltage
spikes from the AC power source.
4. AC Line Protection – A high (100K amp) interrupting capacity AC line fuse provides instantaneous protection from peak
loads and fault currents. The fuse holder is mounted on the
main circuit board of the controller. The optional circuit break-
28
Electrical Products Catalog
er (30) is a two-pole, molded case, magnetic trip circuit
breaker which provides a means of manually disconnecting
the AC power to the controller and motor and automatic,
instantaneous trip protection from a peak load.
5. Isolated Regulator – Internal DC circuits are isolated from the
AC power source for operator and equipment safety and for
simplified application. The control reference input common
may be grounded or connected without additional isolation to
other drive units or grounded external signal sources. Isolation
eliminates the common condition of line voltage to ground
potentials being present on the speed control potentiometer.
6. Feedback Isolation –
(a) Current Feedback – Isolation by optical coupler.
(b) Voltage Feedback – High impedance circuit (two
megohms).
7. Feedback – Two selectable modes of analog feedback are
provided. See Table for speed regulation characteristics.
(a) Armature Feedback – Counter EMF voltage feedback
with IR compensation. IR compensation is adjustable to
suit individual motor characteristics and optimize speed
regulation in this mode.
(b) DC Tachometer Feedback – Provides impedance
matching, voltage scaling and terminals for accepting a
signal from a DC tachometer generator mechanically
coupled to the drive motor armature. This results in
expanded speed range, improved speed regulation with
load changes and reduced sensitivity to operating conditions such as line voltage variations, ambient temperature changes, motor field heating and other operating
variables. The controller will automatically transfer to
counter EMF voltage feedback to prevent run away if
the tachometer circuit is open. (A broken Tachometer
drive coupling will cause the motor to run at maximum
speed). Tachometers producing 7 VDC to 150 VDC at
maximum motor speed may be used.
This feature is suitable for use with unidirectional units using DC
tachometers.
8. Control Voltage – A transformer coupled 24 VDC power
supply isolates all magnetic pushbutton control and logic
from the AC power source for operator protection.
9. Field Supply – Transient protected, half-wave or full-wave.
See Table for output voltages.
10. Contactorless Design – Unit is designed for reliable solid
state, run-stop operation without an armature contactor.
Logic includes a provision to prevent an involuntary restart
after a power failure. This feature may be defeated when an
external customer furnished AC line contactor is used to
control the unit.
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
VEplus Series
1/6-5 Horsepower
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
DESIGN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS (Continued)
11. Motor Contactor – Models with M or U in the catalog number include DC magnetic armature contactors. This provides
a positive, two-pole disconnection of the motor armature from
the rectified power source. Action of the contactor is
sequenced with the SCR regulator to ensure that the DC
power circuit is “phased-off” before the contactor is opened.
This results in “dry-switching” for improved contactor life.
Anti-plug protection is provided to prevent armature reversal
until a safe minimum speed is reached. Two types of contactor assemblies are available; Unidirectional (U suffix) which
adds contactors to disconnect the motor armature when the
control is stopped and Reversing (M suffix) which adds additional contactors to disconnect and reverse the motor armature when the unit is reversed.
12. Dynamic Braking – Standard feature of models with a motor
contactor. Dynamic braking provides exponential rate braking of the DC motor armature. Included is a DB resistor with
an anti-plug circuit to prevent restarting the controller until the
braking cycle is complete, thereby preventing a potentially
damaging electrical surge and mechanical stress. The DB
resistor is rated for stopping a typical load, when the external
machine inertia does not exceed that of the motor armature,
as shown below.
DB RESISTOR RATINGS
Model
VES3
VES5
Component
Voltage
Braking
Torque (%)
Rated Horsepower
1/6 1/4 1/3 1/2 3/4
1 1-1/2 2
3
5
115V
300 215 170 110 75
60
—
—
—
—
230V
—
—
— 400 320 220 145 105 85
—
Stops Per
Minute
115V
9
6
5
5
4
4
—
—
—
—
230V
—
—
—
5
4
4
3
3
2
—
Braking
Torque (%)
115V
1000 960 660 460 320 220 150 100 —
—
Stops Per
Minute
230V
—
—
— 920 640 440 300 200 160 100
115V
15
12
11
8
6
4
3
3
—
—
230V
—
—
—
8
6
4
3
3
2
2
13. Motor Overload – A nonadjustable electronic circuit continuously monitors motor armature current and shuts down the
drive whenever the load exceeds 120% for 80 seconds.
14. Operator Controls – All enclosed models with integral operator controls include a speed setting potentiometer and a multiposition switch providing RUN-STOP-JOG functions. The
switch is maintained in RUN and STOP positions and a spring
return to the center stop position from the momentary JOG
position. Jog speed is set by the RUN speed potentiometer.
Reversing models with a contactor assembly include a
momentary contact FORWARD-REVERSE run switch with a
spring return to the center position. This switch controls only
low control power since armature switching is accomplished by
magnetic contactors. The unit is jogged forward or reverse by
the momentary FORWARD-REVERSE switch after selecting
the JOG position on the RUN-STOP-JOG switch (the JOG
position is maintained on this unit).
15. Selectable Capabilities –
(a) DC Tachometer Feedback – See description under
Feedback 7(b)
(b) AC Line Starting – Provision is included to defeat the
no-restart-after-power-failure feature to permit run-stop
control of unidirectional models by an external AC line
contactor. Included is circuitry to assure smooth starting.
(c) Torque Regulator – VEplus units may be easily reconfigured to function as a torque regulator. In this mode
the speed setting potentiometer is used to set and regulate the motor maximum armature current over a
range of 0–150% of rated. Accordingly, motor speed is
unregulated and will go to a level of 0–100% of rated,
depending upon the application load torque.
(d) External DC Signal Follower – These units include isolation and impedance matching circuitry to interface an
externally supplied grounded or ungrounded, isolated or
non-isolated 0–5 VDC, 0–10 VDC or 4–20 mA DC signal source with the motor controller reference input. This
provides a linear transfer of the external signal to motor
speed. Typical applications include those where motor
speed must be controlled as a function of a process
variable such as temperature, weight, flow, pressure,
etc. In many applications, the reference signal is
obtained from a process instrument controller, or other
commercially available transducers with a DC output.
16. Mechanical Flexibility – VEplus series units offer outstanding application flexibility. The same basic unit can be used
as an open chassis or enclosed package controller.
17. Horsepower and Voltage Calibration – Units are shipped
calibrated for the maximum horsepower rating and 230V
operation. They may be easily recalibrated for any standard
horsepower rating within the design range and 115V operation by reconfigurable jumpers.
18. Customer Use Run Contact – Form A normally open contact rated five amps at 115 VAC or 30 VDC coordinated with
run command may be used for external control and indicating devices.
19. Visual Status Indicator – Bicolor LED glows green to show
normal operation with the armature current at 100% of rated
or less, glows red to show current limit operation.
20. Control Relay – Enables remote control of all models and
provides an interlock to prevent a restart after a power outage.
21. Hybrid Circuitry – Extensive use of surface mount miniature components expands flexibility, enhances reliability, and
results in a significant reduction in the size of controllers
over competitive models.
22. Safety Features – UL and cUL Listed. Low Voltage
Operator Control. Requires reset for restart after power
interruption. TENV enclosure. Isolated regulator. High
Interrupting Capacity AC Line Fuse.
23. Quality Features – FR4 glass circuit cards. Rugged diecast aluminum alloy chassis base. High strength Noryl® covers. Conservatively rated components selected for long
service life.
Electrical Products Catalog
29
A
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
RATINGS
A
VEplus Series
1/6-5 Horsepower
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
1. Horsepower:
Enclosed or Chassis.............. 1/6 thru 1 HP @ 115 VAC
............................................1/2 thru 5 HP @ 230 VAC
2. Service Factor ............................................................. 1.0
3. Duty ................................................................. Continuous
4. Operating Voltages
1. Controlled Speed Range — Zero to motor base speed.
Speed range with respect to specified regulation is shown
below.
2. Speed Regulation — Regulation percentages listed are
of motor base speed under steady-state conditions.
Normal operation will result in performance equal to or better than specifications.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
OPERATING VOLTAGES
Output VDC
Power Source
(single-phase)
115V, 50 or 60 Hz
Armature
0–90
Field(1)
50/100
230V, 50 or 60 Hz
0–180
100/200
Control
Reference
Voltage(2)
0–5 VDC
0–10 VDC
4–20 mA
Overload Capacity (Armature circuit). 150% for 1 minute
Run Speed Potentiometer..................... 5K ohms, 1/2 W
Reference Power Supply.....................................10 VDC
AC Line Fuse, Interrupting Capacity ...... 100,000 Amps
ADJUSTMENTS
Potentiometer adjustments are provided for:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Variable
Regulation
Method
24 VDC
(1) Selectable
(2) Grounded or Ungrounded, choice of one Reference Voltage
5.
6.
7.
8.
SPEED REGULATION CHARACTERISTICS
Magnetic
Control
Voltage
Acceleration Time .................................. 0.2–30 seconds
Deceleration Time .................................. 0.2–30 seconds
Minimum Speed............................ 0–40% of base speed
Maximum Speed ....................... 50–100% of base speed
IR (Load) Compensation ...............0–100% of rated load
Torque (Current) Limit.......................0–150% of full load
Standard Voltage
Feedback with IR
Compensation
Optional Tachometer
Feedback(1)
Field
Load
Line
Speed
Heating Temp.
Change Voltage
Range
Cold/
±10°C
95%
±10%
Normal
2%
±1%
5–12%
±2%
50:1
0.5%
±1%
0.2%
±2%
200:1
(1) Unidirectional Models Only
3. Efficiency (rated speed/rated load)
(a) Controller (SCR regulator) .....................................98%
(b) Complete drive (Controller and motor, typical) ......85%
OPERATING CONDITIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
Line Voltage......... 115/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Single Phase
Line Voltage Variation ............................................ ±10%
Line Frequency Variation....................................... ±2 Hz
Ambient Temperature.............. 0° to 40°C (32° to 104°F)
.............................. Chassis: 0° to 55°C (32° to 131°F)
5. Altitude ......................... 3300 ft. (1000 meters) maximum
6. Relative Humidity ....................... 0–95%, noncondensing
(1) Unit will operate down to -15% of rated voltage, although this may prevent
rated speed with rated load.
TYPICAL APPLICATION DATA
Rated Horsepower (HP)
Rated Kilowatts (kW)
1-Phase
AC Input
(Full-Load)
DC Output
(Full-Load)
Line
Amps
KVA
Motor
Armature
Amps
Motor(1)
Field
Amps
(Maximum)
1/4
0.187
1/3
0.249
1/2
0.373
3.9
5.0
6.0
8.7
12.4
—
—
—
4.2
0.48
0.58
0.71
90V
2.0
2.8
180V
—
—
115
VAC
230
VAC
1-1/2
1.120
2
1.492
3
2.238
5
3.730
15.8
—
—
—
—
5.9
8.8
12.6
15.8
22.0
32.0
1.00
1.40
2.00
3.00
4.00
5.00
8.00
3.5
5.4
8.1
10.5
—
—
—
—
—
2.6
3.8
5.5
8.2
11.6
15.1
25.0
50V
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
—
—
—
—
100V
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
2,0
200V
—
—
—
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
2.0
0.5
0.75
1.0
1.5
2.2
3.0
4.5
6.0
9.0
15.0
0.5
0.75
0.75
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
5.0
7.5
10.0
Full-Load Torque
(lb-ft) with 1750 RPM
Base Speed Motors
Minimum Transformer
KVA for Voltage
Matching or Isolation
(1) Does not apply to Permanent Magnet Motors
30
Ratings
3/4
1
0.560
0.746
1/6
0.124
Electrical Products Catalog
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
VEplus Series
1/6-5 Horsepower
MODEL TYPES
VEplus controllers are offered in eighteen (18) standard models in three functional groups. The basic chassis models are
the nucleus of all the enclosed models. Standard covers can be
added to the basic chassis to make an enclosed controller (a
fan assembly must also be added to the VES5 models) or the
enclosed model may be ordered complete as shown below.
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
Horsepower Range(1)
115 VAC
230 VAC
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
A
Functions
1/6–1
1/2–3
1/6–1
1/2–5
Run/Stop(2)
VES3
64883
VES3U
57904
Armature Contactor Run/Stop and DB
VES3M
64884
Armature Contactor Forward/Reverse and DB
VES5
64890
Run/Stop(2)
VES5U
57909
Armature Contactor Run/Stop and DB
VES5M
64891
Armature Contactor Forward/Reverse and DB
NEMA 4/12 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS WITHOUT OPERATOR CONTROLS*
1/6–1
1/2–3
1/6–1
1/2–5
VES3B
VES3UB
VES3MB
VES5B
VES5UB
VES5MB
64885
57910
64887
64892
57926
64894
Run/Stop(2)
Armature Contactor
Armature Contactor
Run/Stop(2)
Armature Contactor
Armature Contactor
Run/Stop and DB
Forward/Reverse and DB
Run/Stop and DB
Forward/Reverse and DB
NEMA 4/12 CONTROLLERS WITH INTEGRAL OPERATOR CONTROLS
1/6–1
1/2–3
1/6–1
1/2–5
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
BASIC CHASSIS CONTROLLERS WITHOUT OPERATOR CONTROLS*
VES3S
VES3US
VES3MR
VES5S
VES5US
VES5MR
64886
57930
64889
64893
57935
64896
Run/Stop/Jog(2) (3)
Run/Stop/Jog, Armature
Run/Stop/Jog, Armature
Run/Stop/Jog(2) (3)
Run/Stop/Jog, Armature
Run/Stop/Jog, Armature
Contactor Run and DB(3)
Contactor Forward/Reverse and DB(4)
Contactor Run/Stop and DB(3)
Contactor Forward/Reverse and DB(4)
(1) Units are shipped calibrated for the maximum HP ratings shown. Units may be calibrated for other standard HP ratings by changing the position of a jumper.
Units are connected for 230VAC and are easily reconnected for 115VAC input.
(2) Contactorless Run-Stop operation.
(3) JOG speed is set by the RUN-SPEED potentiometer. Maintained in RUN position, JOG position is momentary with a spring return to STOP.
(4) JOG speed is set by the RUN SPEED potentiometer. Maintained in JOG position. FORWARD/REVERSE are momentary.
*Refer to Remote Operator Station, pages 109 and 110.
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
REMOTE OPERATOR CONTROL STATIONS VEplus
Control Elements
Catalog
Number
RCS1
Item
Code
69362
Pushbuttons
Run, Stop
Switches
—
RCS3C
58098
Run, Stop
Run/Jog
RCS3D
58099
Run, Stop
Run/Jog
Pots
Motor Speed
Motor Speed
Jog Speed
Motor Speed
Jog Speed
RCS6
60239
Fwd, Rev, Stop
—
Motor Speed
RCS16
58102
—
Run/Stop/Jog
Motor Speed
RCS17
58103
—
Run/Stop/Jog,
Fwd/Stop/Rev
Motor Speed
Use With
Controller
Models
ALL
VES3UB
VES5UB
VES3, VES5,
VES3B, VES5B
VES3MB
VES5MB
VES3UB
VES5UB
VES3MB
VES5MB
Remote Operator Station dimensions shown on page 110.
Electrical Products Catalog
31
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
VEplus Series
1/6-5 Horsepower
OPTIONS
Feedback
(plug-in)(2)
Input and Feedback
Interfaces
External
Enclosure
Notes:
Option
Circuit Breaker (Two-Pole)
Follower, Master Override
Follower, AC or DC Tachometer Generator
Follower, Digital Pulse Generator
Follower, External DC Signal
Follower, AC Current Transducer
Follower, MIRC
Precision Reference
Torque Taper
Torque (Current) Limit Control
Torque (Current) Reference
DC Tachometer Feedback
Feedback, AC or DC Tachometer Generator
Feedback, Digital Pulse Generator
Centerwind Torque Control
Constant Velocity Winder
Interface Adapter Board
Line Starting
Motor Speed Potentiometer, Ten Turn (Analog)
Motor Speed Potentiometer, Ten Turn (Digital)
Follower/Manual Mode Selector Switch
Hinge, Enclosure Cover
(1) Option IAB (64907) required to use these options
(2) Only one plug-in option in a group is possible
(3) Not to be combined with options from other groups
DIMENSIONS
W
Kit
Item
Code
58091
60170
60163
60270
60165
—
60173
50390
60164
60164
—
—
60162
60269
60175
61285
64907
—
60168
66103
—
67539
No.
30
14
22A
22B
25A
25C
35
47
18A
18B
18E
24
24A
24B
36A
36B
IAB
LS
21A
21B
38
50
D
M2
W
D2
C
M2
(6)
(5)
(5)
(4)
D1
M1
H
M1
TAP NO. 3/4-14NPT
(2 PL; one top, one bottom)
ENCLOSED
MODELS
OPEN CHASSIS
MODELS
H
W
D
D1
D2
M1
M2
12.1
12.1
9.0
9.0
7.3
9.0
4.1
4.1
5.6
6.9
9.3
9.3
8.6
8.6
C Weight (lbs.)
Chassis
VES3
VES5
NOTE:
Electrical Products Catalog
(1, 2)
(1, 2)
(1, 2)
(1, 2)
(1, 2)
(1, 2)
(1, 2)
(1, 2)
(1, 2)
(6)
(6)
(1, 2)
(1, 2)
(1, 2, 3)
(1, 2, 3)
(4) Will not be NEMA 4/12 unless factory installed
(5) Unit will not be rated NEMA 4/12
(6) Modifiable feature of controller
H
32
Notes
EP247A
Group
Power
Input Signal
(plug in)(2)
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
A
Options and modifications are listed alpha-numerically within each group. Complete option descriptions are listed in the DC option
section.
To order a controller with the options installed, add the option number or letter as a suffix to the controller catalog number, e.g.
VES3MR-IAB-25A, VES5MB-21A, etc. To order a kit for field installation, order by item code.
A large number of options, or certain combinations of options may require a larger enclosure or an additional enclosure.
1.3
1.3
VES5 enclosed models are supplied with a fan assembly.
Enclosed
9.0 11.4
9.5 13.0
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
Digital DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
VED Series
1/6-3 Horsepower
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
VED Series digital controllers are high performance, microprocessor based, softwareconfigured, packaged drive units representing a most significant advance in singlephase drive design. In their most basic form the units easily duplicate and expand upon
the capabilities of their analog counterparts while more sophisticated optional versions
offer advantages formerly not possible without complex and expensive external digital
control loops. Features include pretuned control algorithms for speed and current regulators, digital set-up and troubleshooting, self diagnostics with optional capabilities for:
remote interrogation, digital speed input and feedback, super accurate digital speed
regulation and serial communication for direct control by programmable logic controllers and computers.
The units include conversion of AC line power to DC for the adjustable speed nonregenerative armature control of shunt wound or permanent magnet DC motors. VED
Series controllers are offered with a wide range of options making them an ideal choice
for a broad range of industrial applications.
VED SERIES CONTROLLERS
The VED Series controllers are designed and manufactured to comply with applicable
standards established by the National Electrical Code and NEMA pertaining to motor
and industrial control equipment. The controllers are UL and cUL Listed.
Motors suitable for application with these controllers are listed in the DC motor section.
DESIGN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS
1. Microprocessor Based Design – VED controllers are
designed around a proprietary microcontroller. Up to two
identical but individually software configured microcontrollers are used in each controller. One in the controller
chassis provides all necessary digital drive regulator
functions in accord with control algorithms for speed and
current loops and ports for external communications. The
other is located in the optional Model MB1 membrane
operator control panel where it is dedicated to operator
input commands, the various data displays, communications with the regulator microcontroller, and external control and monitoring devices.
An important, integral part of the microcontroller architecture is the FINbus option port which is standard in all VED
units. This unique bus structure is specifically configured
to support a wide range of drive optional features dedicated to the VED Series units making them much more
versatile than previous analog designs.
2. Trigger Circuit – Digitally generated, super-hard firing
with repetitive 10 microsecond wide pulses at a 5kHz
rate. High energy circuit ensures reliable conduction and
minimizes di/dt degradation of SCR’s. Gate isolation is
standard.
3. Overload Protection – Processor continuously monitors
output current. Sophisticated inverse time circuit integrates armature circuit overload level with time matching
the shutdown to the motor’s thermal time constant and
capacity.
4. Undervoltage/Overvoltage Protection – Processor
continuously monitors its internal power supplies and will
shut down the unit on undervoltage or overvoltage.
5. Isolated Regulator – Internal DC circuits are optically
isolated from the AC power source for operator and
equipment safety and for simplified application. The control reference input common may be grounded or connected without additional isolation to other drive units or
grounded external signal sources. Isolation eliminates
the common condition of line voltage to ground potentials
being present on the speed control potentiometer.
6. Feedback Isolation
(a) Current Feedback – Isolation by optical coupler
(b) Voltage Feedback – High impedance circuit
(2 megohms).
7. Feedback – Two selectable modes of analog feedback
are provided. See Table for speed regulation characteristics.
(a) Armature Feedback – Counter EMF voltage feedback with IR compensation. IR compensation is
adjustable to suit individual motor characteristics.
(b) DC Tachometer Feedback – Provided is impedance
matching, voltage scaling and terminals for accepting a signal from a DC tachometer generator
mechanically coupled to the drive motor armature.
The tachometer signal makes the unit directly sensitive to motor speed. This results in expanded speed
range, improved speed regulation with load changes
and reduced sensitivity to operating conditions such
as line voltage variations, ambient temperature
changes, motor field heating and other operating
variables. The controller will automatically transfer to
counter EMF voltage feedback to prevent run away
if the tachometer signal is lost. Tachometers producing 7VDC to 150VDC at maximum motor speed
may be used.
This feature is suitable for use with unidirectional
units using DC tachometers.
8. Operator Control Panels – A choice of two operator
control panels are offered as an integral part of the
enclosed standard units. They mount in a dedicated
space in the cover. This mounting is dimensionally identical to the Remote Operator Control Station housing
where the control panel may be optionally mounted for
remote control applications.
Electrical Products Catalog
33
A
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
Digital DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
VED Series
1/6-3 Horsepower
DESIGN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS (Continued)
(a) Membrane Operator Control Panel – Is a state of the
art operator panel using membrane push switches
for all control functions: RUN-JOG-STOP, MOTOR
SPEED FASTER-SLOWER and MOTOR DIRECTION FORWARD-REVERSE (Optional). Each
switch includes a raised perimeter which defines the
operating area. Also included is tactile feedback providing confidence that the command has been
accepted. The unbroken, smooth surface of the
membrane panel is easy to keep clean since it has
no openings or voids which will allow penetration by
liquid or dust contaminants.
The integral LCD bar graph provides a visual indication of: the relative operating speed of the drive
motor, the relative speed reference setting for the
drive motor at rest, and FORWARD-REVERSE
designators indicate the selected direction of motor
rotation. Also the bar graph will flash on-off whenever the current limit is exceeded, warning the operator of this condition. The operator panel also
includes space for mounting Option 44, Digital
Meter, which provides important additional operational and troubleshooting data. See Option 44.
(b) Pushbutton Operator Control Panel – Utilizes conventional industrial control elements including RUN
and STOP pushbuttons and a MOTOR SPEED
potentiometer. Reversing models include a FORWARD-REVERSE selector switch. Space is also
provided in the Operator Control Panel to add the
optional RUN-JOG selector switch and JOG SPEED
potentiometer or a MANUAL-AUTO selector switch.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
A
9. Nonvolatile Memory – Basic drive regulator and application programs are permanently stored in memory. The
membrane panel stores application parameters such as
JOG and RUN speeds, direction of motor rotation, etc. in
the microprocessor memory with a battery back-up.
Lithium battery life is 7 years minimum.
10. 50 Hz Operation – Controller automatically synchronizes to either 50 or 60 Hz line frequency.
11. Power Up Check – Each time AC line power is applied,
the processor goes through a self-checking routine
(approximately 250 ms.)
12. Construction – The basic open chassis includes a diecast aluminum alloy base, the digital regulator electronics, AC line circuit breaker, power conversion and
protective circuitry as a totally functional, self contained
unit. The entire back surface of the base is a unique, pin
configuration heatsink with omni-directional heat dissipation characteristics. This allows vertical or horizontal
mounting as best suits the available space. All models
are cooled by natural convection.
Enclosed models consist of the basic chassis with the
addition of a screw fixed cover of molded, high strength
Noryl® engineering plastic. Cover includes an oil resistant synthetic rubber gasket which seals against the
base to prevent the intrusion of contaminants. Basic unit
is TENV, NEMA 1 which may be easily and inexpensively
converted to NEMA 4, 12 by the addition of Option 27M,
34
Electrical Products Catalog
a transparent flexible boot for the circuit breaker and a
gasket for the operator panel or blank panel used with
remote control models. Option 50 provides a kit permitting field installation of cover hinges where the user may
find this more desirable. Conduit entry is provided by two
3/4-14 NPSC tapped holes, one each on the top and bottom.
13. Full-Wave Power Conversion – Full-wave converter
configuration consisting of four SCR’s and a freewheeling diode provide benefits for optimum motor performance and long service. Power bridge is composed of
600PIV, descrete, encapsulated and electrically isolated
devices. The alloy base forms an integral heatsink with
the power control devices electrically isolated from the
base.
The “full bridge” configuration offers important benefits
over the conventional 2 SCR semiconverter commonly
used. Smoother operation results since two SCR's in
series must fire to enable conduction as opposed to one
SCR in conventional single-phase converters. This provides broad band immunity to inadvertent SCR firing due
to line noise, and contributes to operating safety since
the failure of one SCR will not result in undesired motor
rotation when the armature is at rest.
The freewheeling diode improves the form factor which
lowers rms currents resulting in reduced motor temperatures by minimizing power dissipation at low speeds.
This enhances both motor performance and life.
14. Voltage Transient Protection – Metal oxide suppressors across the AC line are combined with RC snubbers
across the power bridge to limit potentially damaging
high voltage spikes from the AC power source.
15. Circuit Breaker – A single-pole, molded case, magnetic
trip circuit breaker is provided as a means of manually
disconnecting the AC power to the controller and motor
and as automatic instantaneous trip protection from a
peak load. A two-pole circuit breaker, (Option 30) is
optional.
16. Control Voltage – A transformer coupled 24 VDC power
supply isolates all magnetic pushbutton control and logic
from the AC power source for operator protection.
17. Field Supply – Transient protected, half-wave. See
Table 1 for output voltages. A full-wave field providing
100VDC for 115VAC controllers and 200VDC for 230
VAC controllers is available as a factory installed option.
18. Contactorless Design – Unit is designed for safe, reliable solid state, run-stop operation without an armature
contactor. Logic includes a provision to prevent an involuntary restart after a power failure. This feature may be
defeated when an external customer furnished AC line
contactor is used to control the unit.
Unidirectional, Dynamic Braking models and Reversing
models include a two-pole DC magnetic contactor which
provides a positive disconnection of the motor armature
from the rectified power source. Action of the contactor is
sequenced with the SCR regulator to ensure that the
power circuit DC is “phased-off” before the contactor is
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
Digital DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
VED Series
1/6-3 Horsepower
DESIGN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS (Continued)
opened. This ensures that only “dry-switching” occurs for
improved contactor longevity. See Option R for additional
information.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
19. Optional Capabilities
(a) Tachometer Feedback – The standard unidirectional
units include terminals to accept a feedback signal
from a motor mounted DC tachometer generator for
improved speed regulation as shown in Table 2.
(b) AC Line Starting – Provision is included to defeat the
no-restart-on-power-failure feature to permit run-stop
control of unidirectional models by an external AC
line contactor.
(c) Half Voltage Output – Permits using 90VDC armature motors on a controller connected for operation
from a 230V power source. May eliminate expensive
transformers where 180VDC motors are not available.
RATINGS
20. Paint Finish – Base casting is painted with a durable,
baked power epoxy finish in Boston Gear “Thermo
Black.” Enclosure covers are molded of resins in this
color.
21. Mechanical Flexibility – VED Series units offer outstanding application flexibility. The same basic unit can
be used as an open chassis or enclosed package controller.
22. Safety Features – UL and cUL Listed • Low Voltage
Operator Control • Requires mandatory restart after
power interruption • TENV enclosure • Isolated regulator
23. Quality Features – FR4 glass circuit cards • Rugged die
aluminum alloy chassis base • High strength Noryl®
cover • Conservatively rated components selected for
long service life.
TABLE 2. SPEED REGULATION CHARACTERISTICS
1. Service Factor ..............................................................1.0
2. Duty ................................................................. Continuous
3. Overload Capacity
(armature circuit).................................150% for 1 minute
4. Operating Voltages ....................................... See Table 1
TABLE 1. OPERATING VOLTAGES
Power Source
(single-phase)
115V, 50 or 60 Hz
230V, 50 or 60 Hz
Output VDC
Armature
Field
0–90
50
0–180
100
Control
Reference
Voltage
Magnetic
Control
Voltage
5VDC
24VDC
5. Horsepower Range ..............................1/6-1 HP, 115VAC
1/2-3 HP, 230 VAC
6. Circuit Breaker Interrupting Capacity ......... 5000 Amps
7. Analog Reference Power Supply ........................ 5 VDC
8. Run Speed Potentiometer (Optional).... 5K ohms, 1/2W
9. Current/Torque Reference
Potentiometer (Optional)........................ 5K ohms, 1/2W
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
1. Controlled Speed Range - Zero to motor base speed.
Speed range with respect to specified regulation is listed
in Table 2.
2. Speed Regulation - Regulation percentages shown in
Table 2 are of motor base speed under steady-state conditions.
3. Efficiency - (rated speed/rated load)
(a) Controller SCR regulator ...................................... 98%
(b) Complete drive with motor (Typical)..................... 84%
Regulation
Method
Standard Voltage
Feedback with IR
Compensation
(Tach) Feedback
Variable
Field
Heating
ColdNormal
Temp.
±10°C
Speed
Range
Load
Change
95%
Line
Voltage
±10%
2%
±1%
5–12%
± 2%
50:1
0.2%
± 0.2%
0.2%
±0.5%
500:1
OPERATING CONDITIONS
1. Line Voltage Variation............................... ±10% of rated
2. Line Frequency Variation ...................................... ±2 Hz
3. Ambient Temperature(1)
Enclosed Models ........................................ 0° C to 40°C
(32° F to 104° F)
4. Altitude (Standard) ............................................ 3300 feet
(1000 meters) maximum
5. Relative Humidity ........................... 95% noncondensing
NOTE: (1) 55°C (131°F) maximum in enclosed areas where open chassis
units are mounted.
ADJUSTMENTS
Potentiometer adjustments are provided for:
1. Torque (Current) Limit ............... 0-150% full-load torque
2. Minimum Speed ................ 0-100% of motor base speed
3. Maximum Speed................ 0-100% of motor base speed
4. Jog Speed .......................... 0-100% of motor base speed
5. IR (Load) Compensation ............... 0-100% of rated load
6. Acceleration/Deceleration(1)
(a) Time ............................................... 0.2–100 seconds,
(b) Rate......................................... 500%–1% per second
NOTE: (1) Adjustments are logarithmic for fine adjustment of fast rates.
Acceleration and deceleration are linear and independently
adjustable.
Electrical Products Catalog
35
A
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
Digital DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
VED Series
1/6-3 Horsepower
TYPICAL APPLICATION DATA
1/6
0.124
1/4
0.187
1/3
0.249
1/2
0.373
Ratings
3/4
0.560
1
0.746
115 VAC
3.9
5.0
6.0
8.7
12.4
15.8
—
—
—
230 VAC
—
—
—
4.2
5.9
8.8
12.6
17.0
22.0
.48
.58
.71
1.0
1.4
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
2.0
2.8
3.5
5.4
8.1
10.5
—
—
—
Rated Horsepower (HP)
Rated Kilowatts (kW)
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
A
1-Phase
AC Input
(Full-Load)
DC Output
(Full-Load)
Line
Amps
KVA
Motor
Armature
Amps
90V
180V
Motor(1)
50V
Field
Amps
100V
Full-Load Torque (lb-ft) with 1750 RPM
Base Speed Motors
1-1/2
1.120
2
1.492
3
2.238
—
—
—
2.6
3.8
5.5
8.2
11.6
15.1
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
—
—
—
—
0.5
—
0.75
—
1.0
2.0
1.5
2.0
2.2
2.0
3.0
2.0
4.5
2.0
6.0
2.0
9.0
(1) Does not apply to Permanent Magnet Motors
MODEL TYPES
The VED controllers are offered in both open chassis and NEMA
1 enclosed configurations in twenty-four standard models. The
basic, open chassis models are the nucleus of all other VED
Series controllers. The other models listed are constructed from
these basic chassis by adding appropriate option kits and covers
either factory installed or field modified.
Local Control Operation – Local control, enclosed, package
drives are provided with integral, cover mounted operator control
panel. Units with an M Suffix (e.g., VED100M) include membrane push switches for all control functions and an LCD
Display providing important operational data while P units
(VED100P) feature conventional pushbuttons, switches and a
speed control potentiometer.
Remote Control Operation – Enclosed, package remote control models have a blank cover mounted in the space reserved
for the operator control panel. Since the blank cover and the
operator control panel are dimensionally the same and interchangeable, the controller may easily be field converted from
local to remote control.
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
Horsepower Range
115 VAC
230 VAC
(1)
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
Function
ENCLOSED – LOCAL CONTROL WITH PUSHBUTTON PANEL
1/6–1
—
1/6–1
—
—
1/2–3
—
1/2–3
VED100P
VED300P
VED100PR
VED300PR
67001
67003
67004
67008
Run-Stop
Run-Stop
Run-Stop, Forward/Reverse Switch, DB
Run-Stop, Forward/Reverse Switch, DB
ENCLOSED – LOCAL CONTROL WITH MEMBRANE PANEL
1/6–1
—
1/6–1
—
—
1/2–3
—
1/2–3
VED100M
VED300M
VED100MR
VED300MR
65853
65854
65856
65857
Run-Stop-Jog
Run-Stop-Jog
Forward-Reverse-DB-Jog
Forward-Reverse-DB-Jog
ENCLOSED – BLANK COVER – FOR USE WITH RCS PUSHBUTTON STATIONS*
1/6–1
—
1/6–1
—
—
1/2–3
—
1/2–3
VED100BP
VED300BP
VED100BPR
VED300BPR
65865
65866
65869
65870
Run-Stop
Run-Stop
Run-Stop, Forward/Reverse Switch, DB
Run-Stop, Forward/Reverse Switch, DB
ENCLOSED – BLANK COVER – FOR USE WITH MCS1 REMOTE STATION*
1/6–1
—
1/6–1
—
—
1/2–3
—
1/2–3
VED100B
VED300B
VED100BR
VED300BR
65859
65860
65862
65863
(Continued)
36
Electrical Products Catalog
Run-Stop-Jog
Run-Stop-Jog
Forward-Reverse-DB-Jog
Forward-Reverse-DB-Jog
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
Digital DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
VED Series
1/6-3 Horsepower
MODEL TYPES (Continued)
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
Horsepower Range
115 VAC
230 VAC
(1)
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
Function
A
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
OPEN CHASSIS – FOR USE WITH RCS PUSHBUTTON STATIONS*
1/6–1
—
1/6–1
—
—
1/2–3
—
1/2–3
1/6–1
—
1/6–1
—
—
1/2–3
—
1/2–3
VED100CP
VED300CP
VED100CPR
VED300CPR
65878
65879
65881
65882
Run-Stop
Run-Stop
Run-Stop, Forward/Reverse Switch, DB
Run-Stop, Forward/Reverse Switch, DB
OPEN CHASSIS – FOR USE WITH MCS1 REMOTE STATION*
VED100C
VED300C
VED100CR
VED300CR
65872
65873
65875
65876
Run-Stop-Jog
Run-Stop-Jog
Forward-Reverse-DB-Jog
Forward-Reverse-DB-Jog
*Refer to Remote Operator Stations, pages 109 and 110.
(1) Units are shipped calibrated for the maximum design horsepower rating. They may be easily calibrated in the field for any standard rating within the design range.
REMOTE OPERATOR CONTROL STATIONS VED
Control Elements
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
Pushbuttons
Switches
Pots
Use With
Controller
Models
RCS1
69362
Run, Stop
—
Motor Speed
‘BP, CP’
RCS3
69366
Run, Stop
Run/Jog
Motor Speed
Jog Speed
‘BP, CP’
RCS6
60239
Fwd, Rev, Stop
—
Motor Speed
‘BPR, CPR’
MCS1
66774
Microprocessor Based Membrane Control Panel with Push Switches for
Run-Jog-Stop, Motor Speed Faster–Slower and Motor Direction
Forward–Reverse
‘B, BR, C, CR’
Remote Operator Station dimensions shown on page 110.
Electrical Products Catalog
37
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
Digital DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
VED Series
1/6-3 Horsepower
OPTIONS
Options and modifications are listed alphanumerically within each group. Complete option descriptions are listed in the DC
option section.
To order assembled (installed) options, add the option number or letter as a suffix to the controller catalog number, e.g.,
VED100M-44. To order a kit for field installation, order by item code.
A
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Group
Input
Feedback
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
Winder
Power
Auxiliary Control
®
Operator Control
Miscellaneous
Enclosure
Notes:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
38
Description
Follower, AC/DC Volts
Follower, AC or DC Tachometer
Follower, Pulse
Follower, Serial Link-RS422
Parallel (BCD) Multiplexer
Parallel (BCD) Digital Input
Follower, DC mA Signal
Follower, AC Current Transducer
Follower/Isolator, DC mA Signal
Tachometer Feedback, AC or DC
Digital Pulse Feedback
Torque-Taper
Reverse/DB Kit
Circuit Breaker, 2-Pole
Full-Wave Field Supply
Power Supply, Auxiliary
Auxiliary Contacts
Auxiliary Contacts, Programmable
Programmable Speed/Torque
MCS1 Remote Station
Forward/Reverse Switch Kit
Remote Kit, Membrane
JOG, Toggle Switch
Speed Pot, 10-Turn, Analog
Speed Pot, 10-Turn, Digital
Digital Meter, LCD
Digital Monitor, Local
Digital Monitor, Remote
Signal Bus Support Guide
Signal Bus Cable
Computer Monitoring Software
NEMA 3, 4, 12 Kit (for Membrane Operators)
NEMA 3, 4, 12 Kit (for Pushbutton Operators)
Hinge Kit
Only one may be Selected from this group.
No input or Feedback Option may be used with this option.
This option provides reversing and/or dynamic braking.
For use Only with Membrane Controls (MP1 Panel and MCS1 Remote Station).
Requires external current transducer; advise full-load current and voltage of AC motor to be followed.
Cannot be used with Option 21A or 21B.
Requires Option 22P.
Specify 31⁄2 or 51⁄4 floppy disk.
Electrical Products Catalog
Option
No.
14
22A
22D
22L
22M
22P
25B
25C
25S
24A
24D
18
R
30
32
52
12A
12B
15
MCS1
RSW
6A
9A
21A
21B
44
44A
44B
53
54
55
27M
27P
50
Item
Code
66827
66830
66836
66868
67075
66874
66853
—
66865
66830
66836
66880
65889
67540
—
67573
66864
67564
67577
66774
—
65890
—
—
—
67565
67015
67018
67574
67575
67576
66915
—
67539
Notes
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1, 4)
(1, 4, 7)
(1)
(1)
(1, 5)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(8)
(4)
(6)
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
Digital DC Motor Controllers, Nonregenerative
VED Series
1/6-3 Horsepower
DIMENSIONS
W
D2
W
D
M2
M2
D1
C
A
CAUTION
CAUTION
FORWARD
MOTOR
DIRECTION
M1
REVERSE
H
H
M1
SLOWER
ON
OFF
STOP
C
TAP NO. 3/4-14NPT
(2 PL; one top, one bottom)
ENCLOSED
MODELS
OPEN CHASSIS
MODELS
Dimensions, inches
Model
VED100
VED300
H
W
D
D1
D2
M1
M2
C
12.1
9.0
7.3
4.1
6.5
9.3
8.6
1.3
Weight – LB
Open Chassis
Enclosed
Models
Models
9.0
11.4
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
FASTER
MOTOR
SPEED
Electrical Products Catalog
39
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
NOTES
A
40
Electrical Products Catalog
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
Regenerative DC Motor Controllers
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPECIFICATION CHART ...............................................................................................................42
RBA/VEA–RG............................................................................................................................43-47
VEL/VEH-RG .............................................................................................................................48-52
OPTIONS FOR DC CONTROLLERS........................................................................................53-71
APPLICATION ENGINEERING .............................................................................................175-189
Electrical Products Catalog
41
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
Regenerative DC Motor Controllers
Specification
Chart
The purpose of this chart is to provide a general feature comparison of the Boston Gear controllers. When selecting refer to the specific catalog selection for complete information.
REGENERATIVE DC MOTOR CONTROLLER SPECIFICATIONS
A
Features
Single-Phase Voltage
Three-Phase Voltage
Maximum Horsepower
Armature Voltage
Field Voltage
AC Line
Fuse
Protection
Circuit Breaker
Enclosure
Open Chassis
Angle Bracket Chassis
NEMA 1
NEMA 4
NEMA 12
Adjustments
Acceleration (Seconds)
Deceleration (Seconds)
IR Compensation (%)
Maximum Speed (%)
Current Limit (%)
Gain
Phase Shift
Horsepower/
Trim Pot Adjustments
Voltage
Resistance Wire
Calibration
Plug In Jumpers
Switch
Isolated Regulator
Speed
Standard IR Feedback
Regulation
Percentage
Speed Range
Tachometer Feedback
Percentage
Speed Range
Input
Analog
Digital
Tachometer
Bidirectional
Feedback
Options
Field Installed
Factory Installed
UL/cUL
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
AC Line
(50/60 Hz)
Range
Output
Pages
S-Standard
42
O-Optional
Electrical Products Catalog
RBA-RG/VEA-RG
115
230
—
—
1
5
90
180
50/100
100/200
S
S
O
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
0.2–30
0.2–30
10
50–100
10–150
VEL/VEH-RG
115
230
—
—
1
5
90
180
100
200
S
S
S
O
O
0-100
60-100
50-150
S
S
S
S
S
O
S
2%
50:1
2%
50:1
0.5%
200:1
S
0.5%
200:1
S
S
O
O
S
S
S
S
43-47
48-52
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
Regenerative DC Motor Controllers
RBA-RG/VEA-RG Series
1/6-5 Horsepower
Boston Gear RBA-RG/VEA-RG regenerative controllers, are economical, general purpose units. The units feature static conversion of AC line power to regulated direct current adjustable speed, four-quadrant armature control of shunt-wound or permanent
magnet DC motors. The compact dimensions and design features of the units make
this series of controllers an ideal choice for numerous industrial applications which
require controllable bidirectional speed and torque for overhauling loads, contactorless
reversing and static braking.
RBA-RG & VEA-RG units are identical in standard features and functions and differ
only in mechanical configuration and horsepower range. RBA-RG Series units are
smaller, are limited to three horsepower maximum and will accept a limited number of
options. VEA-RG Series units are physically larger permitting ratings through five
horsepower and provide greater available space to facilitate mounting a wide range of
optional features. Accordingly, RBA-RG Series units are preferred in space intensive
applications where the standard features and functions are adequate for the application. The RBA-RG Series is available as standard in open and enclosed configurations
along with the angle bracket chassis style. The VEA-RG Series is available as standard in the open and enclosed configuration.
RBA-RG/VEA-RG controllers are designed and manufactured to comply with applicable standards established by the National Electrical Code and NEMA for industrial
motor and control equipment. The units are UL and cUL Listed.
DESIGN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS
1. Construction – The die-cast aluminum alloy base assembly
forms the basic RBA-RG Series open chassis (excluding RBA2CRG units) which includes regulator electronics, AC line fuse,
power conversion and protective circuitry as a totally functional,
self-contained unit. The entire back surface of the VEA-RG Series
base is a unique, pin configuration heatsink with omni-directional
heat dissipation characteristics. This allows vertical or horizontal
wall mounting as best suits the available space. All open models
are cooled by natural convection. Conduit entry is provided in the
base by two 3/4-14 NPT tapped holes, one each on the top and
bottom.
Enclosed models consist of the basic chassis with the addition of
a screw fixed cover which is gasketed with an oil resistant synthetic rubber gasket to exclude contaminants. Basic enclosed
units are TENV, NEMA 4 and 12. All models with integral operator controls also include flexible boots to seal the operator control
switches and a seal for the motor speed potentiometer.
RBA3-RG Models, when rated three (3) horsepower as an
enclosed unit, requires the use of a stand off kit (Option SK). This
is included when an enclosed controller is ordered.
VEA5-RG Models, when rated five (5) horsepower as an
enclosed unit, requires the addition of Option VFKT cooling fan
assembly. This is included when an enclosed controller is
ordered.
VEA-RG Series unit covers are molded of high strength Noryl®
engineering plastic. An aperture in the cover permits mounting a
blank panel for remote control models or various standard or
optional local operator control panels. Where a hinged cover is
desired, Option 50 provides a kit permitting easy field installation.
RBA-RG Series unit covers are die-cast aluminum alloy. Various
cover models are provided. Blank face models include no operator control elements, as they are intended for remote control operation. The local control model provides a motor speed
potentiometer and Run/Stop Jog toggle switch.
chassis configuration, formed of aluminum into a Right Angle
chassis design, which requires only two (2) mounting screws.
2. Full-Wave Power Conversion – Dual full-wave converter configuration, consists of eight (8) SCRs connected in back to
back bridges of four (4) SCRs each. The SCR’s are rated 600
PIV minimum.
3. Voltage Transient Protection – Metal oxide suppressor with
RC snubbers across the AC line input and a second RC snubber across the DC output.
4. AC Line Protection – A 100,000 ampere interrupting capacity
AC line fuse provides instantaneous protection from peak
loads and fault currents. This line fuse is located inside the
controller. A molded-case magnetic-trip circuit breaker (Option
30) is available for VEA-RG Model controllers, which provides
a manual disconnection to the controller, and also provides
automatic instantaneous trip protection from a peak load.
5. AC Line Power – Controllers are reconnectable for 115 or 230
VAC, single-phase, 50 or 60 Hertz.
6. Safety Features – UL listed and cUL. Requires mandatory
restart after power interruption.
7. AC Line Starting – Provision is included to defeat the mandatory restart after power interruption to permit run-stop control of
the units by an external AC line contactor.
8. Deadband Selection – This will help to eliminate “creeping”
motor speed with zero speed reference signal. It gives a nonadjustable ±2% deadband around zero speed.
9. Field Supply – Transient protected, full-wave and half-wave
field supply.
10. Operator Controls – Units with a “S” suffix in the catalog number (example: RBA2S-RG) contain a motor speed potentiometer and a Run-Stop-Jog switch. The speed potentiometer is
reconnectable for unidirectional or bidirectional operation.
RBA2C-RG Models are offered only in a special space saving
Electrical Products Catalog
43
A
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
Regenerative DC Motor Controllers
RBA-RG/VEA-RG Series
1/6-5 Horsepower
DESIGN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS (Continued)
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
A
11. Static Reversing – Solid state, electronic reversal of the motor
armature. No reversing contacts to burn, arc or wear.
12. Static Braking – Provides smooth regeneration braking of the DC
drive motor. Braking is effective whenever the manual speed control potentiometer is reset to command a reduction in speed or
change in the direction of motor rotation.
13. DC Tachometer Feedback – Unit includes terminals to accept a 5.5
to 100VDC/1000 RPM (1750 RPM maximum) signal from a motor
mounted DC tachometer generator for improved speed regulation.
14. External Current (Torque) Control – Terminals are provided for
external forward and reverse current limit (torque) control.
15. Diagnostic LED – A dual color LED, green for power on, red for
current limit is provided.
16. Customer Use Run Contacts – Form A normally open contact
rated five (5) amps at 115 VAC or 30 VDC coordinated with run
command may be used for external control and indicating devices.
May be applied as pushbutton seal-in or a drive “RUN” contact.
17. Hybrid Circuitry – Miniature components in a custom surface
mount assembly, improve reliability and make possible more features in the smallest possible mechanical configuration.
18. Option Connectors – These connectors are provided for options
that fit in a space provided inside the controller.
19. Dynamic Braking – Standard feature of model numbers with a
“U” suffix. Dynamic braking provides exponential rate braking of
the DC motor armature. Included is a Dynamic Braking resistor
with an anti-plug circuit to prevent restarting the controller until the
braking cycle is complete, thereby preventing a potentially damaging contact arcing. The Dynamic Braking resistor is rated for
stopping a typical load, when the external machine inertia does
not exceed that of the motor armature, as shown in table.
20. Control Voltage – A transformer coupled 24 VDC power supply
provides non-isolated control power for all magnetic control logic
and operator controls.
21. DIP Switch Settings – An 8-position DIP Switch is used to program the controller for various applications and operations.
22. Motor Contactor – Controller model numbers with a “U” suffix,
e.g., RBA2U-RG, VEA5US-RG, have a DC magnetic armature
contactor, which disconnects both motor armature leads from the
controller. An antiplug circuit ensures that the contactor does not
make or break DC from the SCR bridge.
QUADRANT II
QUADRANT I
MOTOR ROTATION
TORQUE
QUADRANT III
QUADRANT IV
NOTE:
ARROWS
SAME DIRECTION
MOTORING (PULLING)
ARROWS
OPPOSITE DIRECTION
BRAKING (HOLDING)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
Regenerative adjustable speed drives, also known as four-quadrant
drives, are capable of controlling not only the speed and direction of
motor rotation, but also the direction of motor torque. This is illustrated to the right.
The term regenerative describes the ability of the drive under braking
conditions to convert the mechanical energy of the motor and connected load into electrical energy which is returned (or regenerated)
to the AC power source.
When the drive is operating in Quadrants I and III, both motor rotation and torque are in the same direction and it functions as a conventional nonregenerative unit. The unique characteristics of a
regenerative drive are apparent in Quadrants II and IV. In these quadrants the motor torque opposes the direction of motor rotation which
provides a controlled braking or retarding force. A high performance
regenerative drive, such as the RBA-RG/VEA-RG Series, is able to
switch rapidly from motoring to braking modes while simultaneously
controlling the direction of motor rotation.
RATINGS
1. Horsepower Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/6-5 HP
2. Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 or 230 VAC,
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single-Phase, 50 or 60 Hz
3. Operating Voltages
OPERATING VOLTAGES
DYNAMIC BRAKING CHARACTERISTICS (1) (2)
Component
Braking
Torque (%)
Model
RBA2-RG
RBA3-RG
VEA5-RG
RBA2-RG
Stops Per
Minute
RBA3-RG
VEA5-RG
Notes:
44
Rated
Voltage
115V
230V
115V
230V
115V
1/6
180
N/A
300
N/A
600
1/4
129
N/A
214
N/A
429
230V
115V
230V
115V
230V
115V
230V
N/A
15
N/A
9
N/A
15
N/A
N/A N/A 923
12 11 8
N/A 12 8
6
5
5
N/A N/A 5
12 10 10
N/A N/A 10
1/3
103
400
171
N/A
343
Rated Horsepower
1/2 3/4 1 11⁄2 2
66 44 34 N/A N/A
278 200 138 93 66
111 74 57 N/A N/A
462 316 218 146 103
222 148 114 N/A N/A
3
N/A
N/A
N/A
79
N/A
5
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
632 436 293 207 159 96
6
2 N/A N/A N/A N/A
6
2 1 1 N/A N/A
4
4 N/A N/A N/A N/A
4
4 3 3 2 N/A
7
7 N/A N/A N/A N/A
7
7 5 5 3 2
(1) Ratings shown for units with contactor board (Model number contains “U”
suffix, ex RBA3U-RG).
(2) High inertia loads may extend braking time and cause the wattage rating
of the dynamic braking resistors to be exceeded.
Electrical Products Catalog
Power Source
(Single-Phase)
115V, 50 or 60 Hz
230V, 50 or 60 Hz
Output VDC
Armature
Field
0-90
50/100
0-180
100/200
Control
Reference
Voltage
Magnetic
Control
Voltage
0 to ±10 VDC
24 VDC
4. Service Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0
5. Duty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous
6. Overload Capacity
(Armature Circuit) . . . . . . . . . . 150% for 1 Minute
7. Line Fuse Interrupting Capacity
(Non-Isolated). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,000 Amps
8. Reference Power Supply
(Non-Isolated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ±10VDC
9. Run Speed Potentiometer . . . . 10K ohms, 1/2 W
10. Current/Torque Reference
Potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10K ohms, 1/2 W
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
Regenerative DC Motor Controllers
RBA-RG/VEA-RG Series
1/6-5 Horsepower
ADJUSTMENTS
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
1. Current Limit...........................10-150% Full-Load Torque
(Independent forward and reverse circuits)
2. Maximum Speed..............50-100% of Motor Base Speed
3. IR (Load) Compensation.................................10% Boost
4. Acceleration .........................................0.2 to 30 Seconds
5. Deceleration .........................................0.2 to 30 Seconds
6. Deadband (Yes or No Adjustment)...................0 or ±2%
7. Jog Speed ......................0 to 100% of Motor Base Speed
OPERATING CONDITIONS
1. Line Voltage Variation ...............................±10% of rated
2. Line Frequency Variation .......................................±2 Hz
3. Ambient Temperature (1) ...............................0°C to 40°C
(32°F to 104°F)
4. Altitude (Standard) .......................................1000 meters
(3300 feet) Maximum
5. Relative Humidity ............................95% Noncondensing
(1) 0°C to 55°C (32°F to 131°F) maximum in enclosed areas where chassis
models are mounted.
1. Controlled Speed Range – Zero to motor base speed.
Speed range with respect to specified regulation is listed in
Table. See page I2 for continuous duty application limitations of DC motors.
2. Speed Regulation – Regulation percentages shown in
Table below are of motor base speed under steady-state
conditions.
3. Efficiency (Rated speed/Rated load)
(a) Controller SCR regulator .......................................98%
(b) Complete drive with motor (typical) .......................85%
5. Current Ripple Frequency.................120 Hz (60 Hz line)
100 Hz (50 Hz line)
4. Controller Bandwidth (Speed of Response) ..........5 Hz
SPEED REGULATION CHARACTERISTICS
Variable
Field
Load
Line
Heating
Change Voltage
Cold/
95%
±10%
Normal
Regulation
Method
Standard Voltage
Feedback with IR
Compensation
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Potentiometer adjustments are provided for:
Tachometer
Feedback with
5 PY DC Tach
Feedback
Temp.
±10°C
Speed
Range
2%
±1%
5-12%
±2%
50:1
0.5%
±1%
0.2%
±2%
200:1
TYPICAL APPLICATION DATA
Component
Ratings
Rated Horsepower (HP)
1/6
1/4
1/3
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/2
2
3
5
Rated Kilowatts (kW)
0.124
0.187
0.249
0.373
0.560
0.746
1.120
1.492
2.238
3.730
115V
Unit
3.9
5.0
6.0
8.7
12.4
15.8
—
230V
Unit
—
—
—
4.2
5.9
8.8
12.6
15.8
22.0
32.0
0.48
0.58
0.71
1.00
1.40
2.00
3.00
4.00
5.00
8.00
90V
2.0
2.8
3.5
5.4
8.1
10.5
—
—
—
180V
—
—
—
2.6
3.8
5.5
8.2
11.6
15.1
RBA-RG
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
—
VEA-RG
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
Full Load Torque (lb-ft)
with 1750 RPM Base Speed Motors
0.5
0.75
1.0
1.5
2.2
3.0
4.5
6.0
9.0
15.0
Minimum Transformer KVA for
Voltage Matching or Isolation
0.5
0.75
0.75
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
5.0
7.5
10.0
1-Phase
AC Input
(Full-Load)
Line
Amps
KVA
DC Output
(Full-Load)
Motor
Armature
Amps
Motor
Field
Amps
—
—
Electrical Products Catalog
—
—
25.0
45
A
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
Regenerative DC Motor Controllers
RBA-RG/VEA-RG Series
1/6-5 Horsepower
MODEL TYPES
RBA-RG/VEA-RG controllers are offered in eighteen (18) standard models in four (4) functional groups. The basic chassis models
are the nucleus of all the enclosed models; standard covers and contactor assemblies can be added to the basic chassis to make
an enclosed controller or the enclosed unit may be ordered complete as shown below.
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
A
Horsepower Range
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
115 VAC
(1)
Catalog
Number
230 VAC
Item
Code
Function
ANGLE BRACKET CHASSIS UNITS WITHOUT OPERATOR CONTROLS*
1/6-1
1/2-2
RBA2C-RG
68402
Run/Stop(4)
RBA2CU-RG
68411
Bidirectional with Armature Contactor and DB
BASIC CHASSIS CONTROLLERS WITHOUT OPERATOR CONTROLS*
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
1/6-1
1/2-2
1/6-1
1/2-3
1/6-1
1/2-5
RBA2-RG
68385
Run/Stop(4)
RBA2U-RG
68388
Bidirectional with Armature Contactor and DB
RBA3-RG
68397
Run/Stop(4)
RBA3U-RG
68400
Bidirectional with Armature Contactor and DB
VEA5-RG
68440
Run/Stop(4)
VEA5U-RG
68441
Bidirectional with Armature Contactor and DB
NEMA 4/12 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS WITHOUT OPERATOR CONTROLS*
1/2-2
1/6-1
1/2-3
1/6-1
1/2-5
®
1/6-1
RBA2B-RG
68392
Run/Stop(4)
RBA2UB-RG
68394
Bidirectional with Armature Contactor and DB
RBA3B-RG
68419
Run/Stop(2)(4)
VEA5B-RG
68442
Run/Stop(3)(4)
VEA5UB-RG
68443
Bidirectional with Armature Contactor and DB(3)
NEMA 4/12 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS WITH OPERATOR CONTROLS*
1/6-1
1/2-2
1/6-1
1/2-3
1/6-1
1/2-5
RBA2S-RG
68395
Run/Stop/Jog(4)(5)
RBA2US-RG
68396
Bidirectional with Armature Contactor and DB
RBA3S-RG
68424
Run/Stop/Jog(2)(4)(5)
VEA5S-RG
68444
Run/Stop/Jog(3)(4)(5)
VEA5US-RG
68445
Bidirectional with Armature Contactor and DB
*Refer to Remote Operator Stations on pages 109 and 110
(1) Units are shipped calibrated for the maximum horsepower ratings shown. Units may be calibrated for other standard ratings by the removal of jumpers. Units are
connected for 230 VAC and are easily reconnected for 115 VAC input.
(2) Includes option SK, Spacer Kit, as standard.
(3) Includes option VFKT, Cooling Fan, as standard.
(4) Contactorless Run-Stop Operation.
(5) Jog Speed is set by the Run Speed potentiometer, maintained in the Run position, Jog position is momentary with a spring return to Stop.
PANEL
PANEL MOUNTED
OPEN CHASSIS
SURFACE
SURFACE MOUNTED
ENCLOSED PACKAGE
PANEL
THROUGH PANEL
SURFACE MOUNTED
RBA-RG Series Mounting Configurations
46
Electrical Products Catalog
PANEL
BELOW PANEL
SURFACE MOUNTED
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
Regenerative DC Motor Controllers
RBA-RG/VEA-RG Series
1/6-5 Horsepower
DIMENSIONS
4.25
3.312
1.75
TAP NO. 3/4-14 NPSC
(2 PL))
TAP NO. 3/4-14 NPSC
(2 PL)
A
.19
8.00
8.88
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
8.00
9.12
.50
9.12
4.00
2.25
4.30
5.00
ENCLOSED
MODELS
RBA2C-RG
OPEN CHASSIS
MODELS
RBA-RG
9.0
8.6
6.5
1.3
ENCLOSED
MODELS
CONTROLLER WEIGHTS
4.1
12.1
9.3
9.0
12.1
9.3
9.0
8.6
.50
4.00
.19
5.25
5.00
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
9.5
9.5
OPEN CHASSIS
MODELS
VEA-RG
OPTIONS
Unit
RABA2-RG, RBA3-RG
RBA2U-RG, RBA3U-RG
RBA2B-RG, RBA3B-RG
RBA2S-RG, RBA3S-RG
RBA2UB-RG
RBA2US-RG
RBA2C-RG
RBA2CU-RG
VEA5-RG
VEA5U-RG
VEA5B-RG
VEA5S-RG
VEA5UB-RG
VEA5US-RG
Weight lbs.
7.70
8.50
11.60
12.40
2.00
2.25
8.20
8.90
12.50
13.20
The versatility of the RBA-RG/VEA-RG Series controllers for various applications can be extended by selecting one (1) or more of
the listed options. Most can be easily added in the field via simplified instructions provided. The table below lists the options in functional groups along with information on allowable combinations and installation complexity.
Allowable Option Combinations
Remarks
Enclosure Options—Choice of any or all
within this group. May be combined with
options from any other group.
Power Options
Accel/Decel Option
Circuit Board Options—
Choice of one within this group
External Options—
Choice of any or all within this group
Option
Hinge kit to allow the cover to swing open
Spacer kit for RBA3B-RG, RBA3S-RG enclosed controllers
Circuit Breaker—Two Pole (VEA-RG only)
Four-Quadrant Acceleration/Deceleration
Torque Taper
Pulse Tachometer Feedback/Follower
Isolated Input
Limit Switch Reversing
Motor Speed Potentiometer, One-Turn
Motor Speed Potentiometer, Ten-Turn With Analog Dial
Option Guide Card Kit
Option/Contactor Mounting Kit for RBA2C-RG
Catalog
Number
50
SK
30
17
18
24B
25
RI
21
21A
MK
SKO
Kit
Number
67539
68416
68456
68457
68458
68462
68478
68461
—
66929
68476
64101
Notes
(1)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(1)
(1) Option MK is a pre-requisite to enable the use of options in the VEA-RG Series.
(2) Will not be NEMA 4/12 unless factory installed.
Electrical Products Catalog
47
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
Regenerative DC Motor Controllers
Boston Gear VEL/VEH-RG regenerative controllers are high performance, generalpurpose units featuring static conversion of AC line power to regulated DC for
adjustable speed, four-quadrant armature control of shunt-wound or permanent-magnet DC motors. Unique design features of the basic units and a wide range of standard
and custom options make the VEL/VEH-RG controllers an ideal choice for numerous
industrial applications which require controllable bidirectional torque for overhauling
loads, contactorless reversing or precise position control. Motors for use with these
controllers are listed in the DC motor section.
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
A
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
VEL/VEH-RG Series
1/6-5 Horsepower
VEL/VEH-RG controllers are designed and manufactured to comply with applicable
standards established by the National Electrical Code and NEMA for industrial motor
and control equipment. The units are UL and cUL Listed.
DESIGN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS
1. Construction – VEL/VEH-RG models feature a totally enclosed,
non-ventilated NEMA Type 12 enclosure, constructed of rugged,
die-cast aluminum alloy. Hinged cover includes a draw latch that
tightly compresses the gasket to exclude contaminants. Conduit
entry is provided by four 3/4-14 NPSC tapped holes on three (3)
sides. Back surface is deeply finned for maximum heat transfer.
13. Feedback Isolation Networks –
(a) Current Feedback – Current transformer in the AC line.
(b) Voltage Feedback – High impedance circuit: 115V units –
two (2) megohms, 230V units – four (4) megohms.
VEL/VEH-RG-CM models feature an open chassis with a dead
back and front construction. Front access is provided to all components by a hinged, latched front cover which forms a mounting
surface for the main control circuit board. The entire base is a
finned alloy extrusion for maximum heat transfer.
15. Static Braking – Provides smooth regenerative braking of the DC
drive motor. Braking is effective under the following conditions:
(a) Overhauling Load – Whenever the speed of driven load
attempts to exceed the speed set by the reference signal.
(b) Speed Reference Change – Whenever the speed reference
is reset to command a reduction in speed or change in the
direction of motor rotation.
(c) Stop Function – Motor will brake to minimum speed before
the motor contactor opens. Stop command can originate
from a pushbutton or compatible external logic.
2. Full-Wave Power Conversion – Dual full-wave converter configuration, consists of two (2) back-to-back bridges of four (4) SCRs
each, which provides optimum form factor for best motor performance and long service. Power bridges are an integrated, encapsulated component.
3. Voltage Transient Protection – Metal oxide suppressor across
the AC line and RC snubbers across the power bridge modules
minimize the effect of high voltage spikes from the AC power
source.
4. AC Line Protection – AC line fuse(s) provide instantaneous protection from peak loads and fault currents.
5. Motor Contactor – A two-pole DC magnetic contactor provides
positive disconnection of the motor armature from the rectified
power source. Action of the contactor is sequenced with the SCR
regulator to ensure that the power circuit is “phased-off” before
the contactor is opened. This ensures that only “dry switching”
occurs for improved contactor longevity.
6. Control Transformer – A 24-volt secondary transformer isolates
all magnetic control and logic from the AC power source for operator protection.
7. Counter EMF Voltage Feedback with IR Compensation –
Adjustable for individual motor characteristics.
8. Trigger Circuit – Fast rise, hard firing with repetitive twenty-five
(25) microseconds wide-shaped pulses at a 10 KHz rate to
ensure reliable conduction and minimize di/dt degradation of the
SCRs. Gate isolation is standard.
9. Field Supply – Transient protected, full-wave power supply.
10. DC Loop Protection – Fast acting, current limiting fuse provides
protection from inverting faults.
11. Undervoltage Protection – By motor contactor.
12. Isolated Regulator – Internal DC circuits are isolated from the
AC power circuitry for operator and equipment safety and for simplified application. The control reference input common may be
grounded or connected without additional isolation to other drive
units or grounded output process controllers. Isolation eliminates
the common condition of line voltage to ground potentials being
present on the MOTOR SPEED potentiometer.
48
Electrical Products Catalog
14. Static Reversing – Electronic reversal of motor armature. No
reversing contacts to burn, arc or wear.
16. Safety Features – Isolated regulator • Low voltage operator control • Mandatory restart after power interruption • High interrupting
capacity AC line fuses • Two-pole armature contactor.
17. General Features – Rugged construction • Lightweight •
Compact Dimensions • No heavy center-tap transformers or DC
inductors required.
18. Two Button Stop – Normal STOP initiates Static Braking, EMERGENCY STOP provides Dynamic Braking.
19. Sync Shift – Ensures that regenerated energy from motor CEMF
is properly synchronized with the AC line. In the regenerative
mode, this unique circuit automatically shifts the SCR firing angle
±30°, regardless of other control commands to precisely transfer
energy back to the power source. This provides smooth, controllable regenerative braking, minimum dead band, and super fast
response.
20. Dynamic Braking – Provides exponential rate braking of the DC
Motor Armature. Dynamic Braking is standard in the EMERGENCY STOP mode. The Dynamic Braking resistor is selected to
provide initial braking torques as listed.
Component
Rated Horsepower
(HP)
Rated Kilowatts
(KW)
Braking 115V Unit
Torque
230V Unit
(%)
Stops
Per
Minute
Ratings
1/6
1/4
1/3
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/2
2
3
5
0.124 0.187 0.249 0.373 0.560 0.746 1.120 1.492 2.238 3.730
300
215
170
110
75
60
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
220
145
105
85
96
115V Unit
9
6
5
5
4
4
—
—
—
—
230V Unit
—
—
—
—
—
4
3
3
2
2
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
Regenerative DC Motor Controllers
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
ADJUSTMENTS
The term regenerative describes the ability of the drive under
braking conditions or overhauling loads (torque is in the opposite direction of speed) to convert the mechanical energy of the
motor and connected load into electrical energy which is
returned (or regenerated) to the AC power source. This is in
contrast to nonregenerative drives where mechanical energy is
dissipated as heat through the use of a dynamic braking resistor.
When the drive is operating in Quadrants I and III, both motor
rotation and torque are in the same direction and it functions as
a conventional nonregenerative unit. The unique characteristics of a regenerative drive are apparent in Quadrants II
and IV. In these quadrants, the motor torque opposes the direction of motor rotation which provides a controlled braking or
retarding force. A high performance regenerative drive, such as
the VEL/VEH-RG, is able to switch rapidly from motoring to
braking modes while simultaneously controlling the direction of
motor rotation.
1. Current Limit ..............................50-150% full-load torque
(Common forward and reverse circuits)
2. Maximum Speed...............60-100% of motor base speed
(Common forward and reverse circuits)
3. IR (load) Compensation..................0-100% of rated load
4. Gain (motor stability, factory set) .............Adjustable for
individual motor characteristics.
5. Phase Shift (factory set) ............Adjustable for individual
motor characteristics.
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
1. Controlled Speed Range – Zero to motor base speed.
Speed Range with respect to specified regulation is listed
in Table below. For continuous duty application limitations
of DC motors, see Section I.
2. Speed Regulation – Regulation percentages listed are of
motor base speed under steady-state conditions. Normal
operation will result in performance equal to or better than
specified.
SPEED REGULATION CHARACTERISTICS
Variable
QUADRANT I
Regulation
Method
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Regenerative adjustable speed drives, also known as fourquadrant drives, are capable of controlling not only the speed
and direction of motor rotation, but also the direction of motor
torque. This is illustrated by the figure below.
QUADRANT II
VEL/VEH-RG Series
1/6-5 Horsepower
MOTOR ROTATION
TORQUE
QUADRANT III
QUADRANT IV
NOTE:
ARROWS
SAME DIRECTION
MOTORING (PULLING)
ARROWS
OPPOSITE DIRECTION
BRAKING (HOLDING)
Load
Line
Change Voltage
95%
±10%
Field
Heating
Cold/
Normal
Temp.
±10°C
Speed
Range
Standard
Voltage
Feedback
with IR
Compensation
2%
±1%
5-12%
±2%
50:1
Optional Speed
(Tach) Feedback
0.5%
±1%
0.2%
±2%
200:1
3. Efficiency (rated speed, rated load)
(a) Controller SCR regulator .......................................99%
(b) Complete drive with motor (typical) .......................85%
RATINGS
1. Horsepower Range.............................................1/6-5 HP
2. Power Source .....115 or 230V, single-phase, 50 or 60 Hz
3. 115V Unit Output (1/6-1 HP–VEL-RG)
(a) Armature ........................................................0-90 VDC
(b) Field ................................................................100 VDC
4. 230V Unit Output (1-5 HP–VEH-RG)
(a) Armature ......................................................0-180 VDC
(b) Field ................................................................200 VDC
5. Service Factor ..............................................................1.0
6. Duty ..................................................................Continuous
7. Overload Capacity (Armature circuit)..150% for 1 minute
8. Reference Power Supply....................................±10VDC
9. Run Speed Potentiometer....................10K ohms, 1/2 W
4. Acceleration Control (standard) ...............By current limit
Linear acceleration is optional
5. Controller Bandwidth
(responsiveness) .................................25 Hz (60 Hz line)
21 Hz (50 Hz line)
6. Current Ripple Frequency ................120 Hz (60 Hz line)
100 Hz (50 Hz line)
OPERATING CONDITIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
Line Voltage Variation............................... ±10% of rated
Line Frequency Variation ...................................... ±2 Hz
Ambient Temperature(1) ..... 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
Altitude (standard) .....3300 feet (1000 meters) maximum
(1) Chassis Models are designed for panel mounting where the internal temperature of the enclosure does not exceed 55°C (131°F).
Electrical Products Catalog
49
A
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
Regenerative DC Motor Controllers
VEL/VEH-RG Series
1/6-5 Horsepower
MODEL TYPES
VEL/VEH-RG controllers are offered in two (2) basic model types:
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
Horsepower Range
115 VAC
230 VAC
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
A
1. VEL/VEH-RG-CM – Basic unenclosed, chassis-mount
controller offered in ratings 1/6 through 5 HP. The unit is a
complete, self-contained, functional package which
includes power conversion and regulator electronics, AC
line and DC loop transient protection and a motor contactor. These models are ideal for the OEM or panel builder
who may want to build his own custom system by integrating special logic or auxiliary control devices with the
controller.
2. VEL/VEH-RG – Packaged controller furnished in a rugged
die-cast aluminum NEMA Type 12 enclosure. This configuration is offered in ratings 1/6 through 5 HP and shares
common circuitry and basic features of the
chassis models.
1/6
1/4
1/3
1/2
3/4
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
1-1/2
2
3
5
1/6
1/4
1/3
1/2
3/4
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
1-1/2
2
3
5
Catalog
Number
Function
BASIC CHASSIS CONTROLLERS WITHOUT OPERATOR CONTROLS*
VELRG16-CM
66835
Armature Contactor Run/Stop
VELRG25-CM
66888
Armature Contactor Run/Stop
VELRG33-CM
66890
Armature Contactor Run/Stop
VELRG50-CM
66909
Armature Contactor Run/Stop
VELRG75-CM
66911
Armature Contactor Run/Stop
VELRG100-CM
66913
Armature Contactor Run/Stop
VEHRG100-CM
66914
Armature Contactor Run/Stop
VEHRG150-CM
66916
Armature Contactor Run/Stop
VEHRG200-CM
66917
Armature Contactor Run/Stop
VEHRG300-CM
66918
Armature Contactor Run/Stop
VEHRG500-CM
66919
Armature Contactor Run/Stop
(Rev
(Rev
(Rev
(Rev
(Rev
(Rev
(Rev
(Rev
(Rev
(Rev
(Rev
By
By
By
By
By
By
By
By
By
By
By
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Pot)
Pot)
Pot)
Pot)
Pot)
Pot)
Pot)
Pot)
Pot)
Pot)
Pot)
NEMA 12 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS WITHOUT OPERATOR CONTROLS*
VELRG16
66809
Armature Contactor Run/Stop (Rev
VELRG25
66811
Armature Contactor Run/Stop (Rev
VELRG33
66814
Armature Contactor Run/Stop (Rev
VELRG50
66815
Armature Contactor Run/Stop (Rev
VELRG75
66816
Armature Contactor Run/Stop (Rev
VELRG100
66817
Armature Contactor Run/Stop (Rev
VEHRG100
66819
Armature Contactor Run/Stop (Rev
VEHRG150
66822
Armature Contactor Run/Stop (Rev
VEHRG200
66824
Armature Contactor Run/Stop (Rev
VEHRG300
*
Armature Contactor Run/Stop (Rev
VEHRG500
*
Armature Contactor Run/Stop (Rev
By
By
By
By
By
By
By
By
By
By
By
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Speed
Pot)
Pot)
Pot)
Pot)
Pot)
Pot)
Pot)
Pot)
Pot)
Pot)
Pot)
*Remote control stations are shown on pages 109 and 110.
50
Item
Code
Electrical Products Catalog
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
Regenerative DC Motor Controllers
VEL/VEH-RG Series
1/6-5 Horsepower
TYPICAL APPLICATION DATA
Component
Rated Horsepower (HP)
Rated Kilowatts (kW)
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
1-Phase
AC Input
(Full-Load)
DC Output
(Full-Load)
115V
Unit
230V
Unit
Line
Amps
KVA
Motor
Armature
Amps
Motor
Field
Amps Max(1)
Ratings
3/4
1
0.560
0.746
1/6
0.124
1/4
0.187
1/3
0.249
1/2
0.373
1-1/2
1.120
2
1.492
3
2.238
5
3.730
3.9
5.0
6.0
8.7
12.4
15.8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
8.8
12.6
17.0
22.0
35.0
.48
.58
.71
1.0
1.4
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
8.0
90V
2.0
2.8
3.5
5.4
8.1
10.5
—
—
—
—
180V
—
—
—
—
—
5.5
8.2
11.6
15.1
24.0
100V
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
—
—
—
—
200V
—
—
—
—
—
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
0.5
0.75
1.0
1.5
2.2
3.0
4.5
6.0
9.0
15.0
Full-Load Torque
(lb-ft) with 1750 RPM
Base Speed Motors
(1) Does not apply to Permanent Magnet Motors.
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
REMOTE OPERATOR CONTROL STATIONS VEL/H-RG
Use With
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
Pushbuttons
Switches
RCS30-RG
66953
Run, Stop, Emer. Stop
—
RCS31-RG
66954
Run, Stop, Emer. Stop
Run/Jog
RCS32-RG
66955
Run, Stop, Emer. Stop
Fwd/Rev
Control Elements
Controller
Models
Pots
Motor Speed
100 – 0 – 100
Motor Speed
100 – 0 – 100
Motor Speed
0 – 100
ALL
ALL
ALL
Remote Operator Station dimensions shown on page 110.
OPTIONS
Options and modifications are listed
alphabetically within each group. Option
numbers have been retained for the
sake of continuity with previous control
systems. Complete option descriptions
are listed alpha/numerically in the DC
option section.
To order assembled (installed) options,
add the option number or letter as a suffix to the controller catalog number, e.g.
VELRG50-17-24, etc., To order a kit for
field installation, order by item code.
Group
Input
(Plug-In)
Feedback
(Plug-In)
Input and
Feedback
(Plug-In)
Interface
External
Option
No.
Acceleration/Deceleration, Bidirectional Linear
Acceleration/Deceleration, “S" Curve
Follower, DC Tachometer Generator
Follower, Process Instrument Controller
Follower, MIRC
Feedback, Tachometer DC
17
17S
22
25
35
24
Kit
Item
Code
66925
66926
66930
66935
—
66932
Torque Taper
Torque (Current) Limit Control
18
18B
50448
—
(1, 2)
(1, 2)
Input/Feedback Interface Board
Input/Feedback Adapter (1-position)
Input/Feedback Adapter (2-position)
Jog, Toggle Switch Selection
Motor Speed Potentiometer, One Turn
Motor Speed Potentiometer, Ten Turn (Analog)
Follower/Manual Mode Selector Switch
IFA
IF1
IF2
9A
21
21A
38
—
—
—
60166
(4)
(4)
(4)
66929
67488
(3)
Notes
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
NOTES:
(1) Only one (1) plug-in option per group is possible unless IFA option is selected.
(2) Can not be combined with options from other groups.
(3) Unidirectional operation only.
(4) Chassis controllers only.
A large number of options, or certain combinations of options may require a larger enclosure or an additional enclosure.
Electrical Products Catalog
51
A
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single-Phase Adjustable Speed
Regenerative DC Motor Controllers
VEL/VEH-RG Series
1/6-5 Horsepower
DIMENSIONS
VEL/VEH-RG – Enclosed Controller
MAX. CONTROL PROJ.
.65
1.35
A
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
1.33
OPERATOR
PANEL
12.00
®
9.34
MOUNTING
SLOT
WIDTH
.25
6.00
8.59
CONDUIT
ENTRANCE
3
4 -14 NP.T.
(4) PLACES
1.20
10.55
6.30
9.06
16.81
.25
Approximate Weight: 12 Lbs.
VEL/VEH-RG-CM-Chassis Controller
A
B
C
G
E
F
(4) H DIA. MTG.
HOLES PL.
D
Mounting Dimensions
Model
VEL/H-RG
16-200 CM
VEH-RG
300-500 CM
HP
A
B
D
E
F
G
Controller
Weight
(lbs)
1/6-2
9.88
13.00 12.25
6.56
5.00
.38
2.44
.188
12.5
3-5
12.75 13.00 12.00
6.25
11.38
.50
.44
.281
17.0
All Dimensions in Inches
52
C
Hole
Dia.
Electrical Products Catalog
EP003A
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
1.75
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Options and Modifications for DC Controllers
Option
No.
CL
For Use
with
Series
Description
MAGNETIC CONTROL INTERFACE (115V)
VEplus
The standard magnetic control run logic excitation is 24 VDC, obtained from a self-contained power supply in the
VEplus controllers. This option provides a means of interfacing a controller with pushbuttons or external logic powered
by a 115 or 230 VAC excitation source. The interface circuit includes three control relays with 115 VAC coils for use in
both unidirectional and reversing applications.
INTERFACE, SIGNAL OPTIONS
BETA II
Series VEplus units incorporate as standard many of the functions that were formerly offered as extra cost options on
the products they replace. However, some special applications may still require the use of signal options. Option IAB
enables the use of these options by providing a power supply, mounting area and an electrical connector to interface
and mate with these options. This option mounts within the VEplus chassis.
BETAplus
VEplus
Space limitations prevent mounting this option within the BETA units and therefore it may be mounted externally with
brackets provided in a kit.
IFA
IF1
FEEDBACK/INPUT ADAPTER, INTERFACE BOARD
VELRG
Signal input or feedback circuit boards plug directly into the control board of the controller. Some applications require
multiple operating modes with the ability to selectively track two (2) or more external reference signals, i.e., a
tachometer signal or an external DC signal. This option provides an extender circuit board with a terminal strip which
replaces the standard input or feedback board. This brings the internal regulator circuits of the control board to screw
terminal connection points. The input or feedback boards are mounted externally from the controller and wired through
selection logic to the external input or feedback interface terminal board.
VEHRG
FEEDBACK/INPUT ADAPTER, 1-POSITION
Provides an assembly capable of accepting either a standard
input option board or a feedback option board.
Option IF1 consists of a vinyl mounting track with P.C. socket
and terminal board.
3.25
VELRG
VEHRG
mm equals inches times 25.4
5.00
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
IAB
3.40
.812
VINYL MOUNTING TRACK
IF2
6.00
FEEDBACK/INPUT ADAPTER, 2-POSITION
Provides an assembly capable of accepting feedback and input
boards or a double width board containing both the feedback and
input function (i.e., Option 36A).
Option IF2 consists of a base with P.C. socket and terminal board.
VELRG
VEHRG
mm equals inches times 25.4
5.50
6.00
1.1875
LS
LINE STARTING
BETA II
A modification which will defeat the internal “anti-restart” feature of the controller. An external AC line contactor may then BETAplus
VEplus
be used to start and stop the controller.
MK
OPTION CARD GUIDE KIT
VEA-RG
This option is required when mounting the option cards in the enclosure or if the option cards are mounted external.
Electrical Products Catalog
53
A
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Options and Modifications for DC Controllers
Option
No.
R
Description
ARMATURE CONTACTOR, REVERSING AND/OR DYNAMIC BRAKING
This option is required whenever unidirectional or
bidirectional operation with or without dynamic braking is
required. Included are double-pole armature reversing
contactors and a DB resistor for rapid deceleration. The
direction of motor rotation is controlled by a FWD-REV
membrane push switches in the membrane operator
control panel or a Fwd-Rev toggleswitch and Run
pushbutton in the pushbutton operator control panel.
Reversing includes software configured antiplug
protection. The drive must be stopped by the Stop
pushbutton before a reverse command may be given.
Drive motor is then restarted in the new direction of
rotation by pushing the Run push switch.
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
A
For Use
with
Series
VED
Rated Horsepower (1750 RPM)
Ratings
Line
Component Volt
1/6
1/4
1/3
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/2
2
3
115V 300
Unit
215
170
110
75
60
—
—
—
—
—
670
460
320
220
145
105 85
115V
Unit
9
6
5
5
4
4
4
4
—
230V
Unit
—
—
—
5
4
4
3
3
2
Braking
Torque (%) 230V
Unit
Stops per
Minute
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
Dynamic Braking provides exponential rate braking of the DC motor armature. Braking is initiated by disconnecting
the armature from the rectified power source and reconnecting it to a DB resistor. This is accomplished by normallyclosed contacts which are mechanically interlocked with the normal run contacts. The DC motor, thus connected,
functions as a generator with the kinetic energy of the armature and machine load dissipated as heat by the resistor.
The resistor is selected to provide initial braking torques as listed in the Table.
®
Included is software configured antiplug logic to prevent restarting the controller until the braking cycle is complete,
preventing a potentially damaging electrical surge a mechanical stress.
The DB resistor is rated for stopping a typical load, a maximum number of stops per minute from top speed as shown
in the table. A typical load is defined as:
1. Not exceeding rated-load torque
2. External load inertia (beyond the motor shaft) not exceeding that of the motor armature.
High inertia loads may extend braking times beyond the wattage rating of the DB resistor. Dynamic braking is
not a holding brake; it will not prevent a motor at rest from rotating.
Option R consists of a circuit board containing two double pole armature contactors and a separate dynamic braking
resistor. This option is a standard factory installed feature of all models with an “R” suffix in the model number, or it
may be easily installed in the field.
RI
LIMIT SWITCH REVERSING
This option board allows interfacing the controller with a variety of external devices, such as limit switches, push
buttons and potentiometers. There are two (2) speed potentiometers on this board, one (1) for forward speed and one
(1) for reverse speed. These internal potentiometers can be switched out if external potentiometers are required. In
addition, this board will allow a controlled stop feature with an adjustable speed dropout.
RSW
REVERSING SWITCH
VEA-RG
RBA-RG
VED
Option includes a forward/reverse toggle switch for use with a pushbutton operator station.
SK
SPACER KIT FOR 3 HP RBA-RG ENCLOSED CONTROLLER
RBA-RG
This spacer kit is required for mounting controllers when they are to be used for their maximum 3 HP rating.
SKO
OPTION MOUNTING KIT
RBA-RG
This kit contains standoffs for mounting an optional contactor or option board onto an Angle Bracket chassis.
6A
REMOTE CONTROL KIT, MEMBRANE
VED
Remote control kit includes Remote Box, two (2) Buffer Amplifiers, and Blank Panel to remote the Membrane Panel
included with the controllers.
9A
JOG, TOGGLE SWITCH SELECTION
Option includes a RUN-JOG selector switch and a JOG SPEED potentiometer for installation in the operator control panel.
The RUN-JOG toggle switch (maintained) contacts in the operator station open the contactor seal-in circuit.
Controller then jogs when the RUN pushbutton is pressed and held at the JOG SPEED potentiometer setting.
Jog action is momentary, causing motor rotation only when the RUN pushbutton is depressed. This option is also
suitable for reversing units where identical forward and reverse jog speeds are acceptable.
54
Electrical Products Catalog
VED
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Options and Modifications for DC Controllers
Option
No.
12A
For Use
with
Series
Description
AUXILIARY CONTACTS
VED
A
12B
PROGRAMMABLE AUXILIARY OUTPUT CONTACTS
This versatile option provides two (2) Form C relays each with one normally open and one normally closed contact
rated 1 amp, 120 VAC or 28 VDC. The relays may be programmed to individually energize whenever:
1. A preset motor speed is attained, adjustable 0–100% of motor base speed.
– or –
2. A preset torque (current) level is attained, adjustable 0 – 150% of rated current.
Hysteresis is adjustable to establish pick-up and drop-out points.
Terminals are provided for connection of the output contacts to external indicating and control devices.
Each Option 12B will provide a choice of either motor current or motor speed sensing. Multiple Option 12B circuits will
be required whenever both current and speed sensing are desired or whenever additional output contacts/set points
are necessary.
Option 12B consists of a small circuit board which mounts in the chassis base and communicates with the controller
VED
14
FOLLOWER, EXTERNAL AC/DC SIGNAL
Provides necessary matching, isolation, signal conversion and filtering as required to adjust the speed of the drive (or drives)
from an external signal source. Option 14 permits full range speed control from an external 0 to 115 VAC (or 0-105VDC)
adjustable signal source manually controlled by a potentiometer, variable autotransformer (AC only) or some other suitable means.
This option is required for each controller which is to be controlled by the external AC signal.
When using this option the normal drive run speed setting device functions as a ratio setting when following the
external signal. The maximum ratio is 150%. This option is useful for multiple section machines where a definite speed
relationship must be maintained between sections, while the entire machine is varied over a specified speed range by
a common manual speed control device.
This option consists of a small plug-in circuit board which mounts in the chassis base and communicates with the
controller via Finbus. This option does not include the external AC signal source,
VED
14
MASTER OVERRIDE (FOLLOWER, EXTERNAL AC SIGNAL)
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Provides two (2) form C relays with one normally-open and one (1) normally-closed contact rated 1 amp, 120 VAC or
28 VDC. One relay is energized with a Forward Run command and the other relay is energized with the Reverse contactor (reversing controllers only) or it can be reprogrammed so both relays pick up on either a Forward or Reverse
command. Contacts may be used to signal external circuits.
Option 12A consists of a circuit board which mounts in the chassis and a ribbon cable which connects to the logic board.
VEplus
Provides necessary impedance matching, isolation, signal conversion and filtering as required to adjust the speed of the
drive (or drives) from an external AC signal source. Option 14 permits full range speed control from an external 0 to 115 VAC
adjustable signal source manually controlled by a potentiometer, variable autotransformer or some other suitable means.
This option is required for each controller which is to be controlled by the external AC signal.
Included in this option are minimum and maximum speed adjustments, with the normal drive run speed potentiometer
functioning as a ratio setting when following the external AC signal. This option is useful for multiple section machines
where a definite speed relationship must be maintained between sections, while the entire machine is varied over a
specified speed range by a common manual speed control device.
This option consists of a small plug-in circuit board which inserts into the input connector of the control board.
The option does not include the external AC signal source.
Master Override Station Cat. No. 62317 provides the required master signal and also includes master run-stop pushbuttons. (Option 14A)
If the controls are to be started with individual pushbutton stations, Master Station Cat. No. 62311 may be used to
provide master speed control only. (Option 14B)
15
PROGRAMMABLE PRESET SPEED/TORQUE PROGRAM CONTROL
VED
This option offers exceptional application flexibility whenever it is necessary to select a combined total of up to five
preset motor speeds, and/or preset motor armature current (torque) reference levels in either Forward or Reverse
(with Option R) directions of rotation. Included are four independent circuits, each of which is programmable by
individual DIP switches for selecting a choice of one of the functions listed:
1. Forward-Run Speed or Current
2. Reverse-Run Speed or Current
3. Forward-Jog Speed or Current
4. Reverse-Jog Speed or Current
Four integral reference adjustment potentiometers permit setting the motor speed from zero to base speed, an zero to 150%
current. If none of the four preset circuits are selected, control reverts to a default circuit which can provide a fifth programmable
potentiometer adjustable speed or current. When desired, external potentiometers may be used to establish the operating
preset reference levels. The programmed speed or current settings may be selected by external pushbuttons, relay
contacts, programmable control, etc., operating from the internal 24VDC source or an external source of this level.
Multiple Option 15 circuits may be used when greater than five (5) preset references are desired.
This option consists of a small printed circuit board which inserts into the chassis base and communicates with the controller.
Electrical Products Catalog
55
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Options and Modifications for DC Controllers
Option
No.
17
17
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION BIDIRECTIONAL LINEAR (adjustable 1-9 sec)
FOUR-QUADRANT ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
This option board has four (4) adjustment potentiometers consisting of a forward acceleration potentiometer, a
forward deceleration potentiometer, a reverse acceleration potentiometer and a reverse deceleration potentiometer.
The potentiometers have an adjustment range of .3 to 30 seconds. Also, the board has a bypass mode to disable the
four (4) potentiometers on the option board and switch to the two (2) potentiometers (acceleration and deceleration)
on the control board.
This option board mounts on the control board and does not take up the option slot in the casting base.
17S
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION “S” CURVE
Provides a smooth take-off and soft final approach to minimize any overshoot.
The acceleration profile approximates that of an “S” curve. The time span from 0 to base speed is adjustable from 1 to 9
seconds. This option provides one (1) potentiometer to adjust the time rate and two (2) potentiometers to adjust the “S” curve.
18
TORQUE TAPER
FIGURE A.
“Ideal” Constant HP
curve for a winder
application
Electrical Products Catalog
RPM
WINDER RPM
®
MOTOR TORQUE
56
VELRG
VEHRG
VEA-RG
RBA-RG
VELRG
VEHRG
VED
Center driven winders ideally require a reciprocal speed torque relationship (constant horsepower) to maintain
constant tension throughout the range of material build-up. Acceptable performance can be economically achieved for
many applications with an inverse-linear speed-torque relationship provided by this option. Tension control accuracy of
approximately 20% can normally be maintained from empty to full roll over a 2:1 build ratio at a fixed production
machine speed.
Use caution in the selection of motors for center driven windup applications where torque loads increase in
inverse proportion to motor speed. Web break or other process material detectors are recommended to prevent
a dangerous overspeed should the process material break.
Option 18 normally provides acceptable performance in applications where the material being wound travels at a constant
speed during winder roll buildup.
Option 18 can also be used for constant torque applications where conventional operation of the current limit is required
and remote mounting of the torque (current) potentiometer is desired. When used in this manner, the Slope adjustment is
set for a vertical cut-off of motor (maximum setting) torque (current).
This option consists of a small circuit board which mounts in the chassis base and communicates with the controller.
RPM
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Description
Permits potentiometer adjustments of a desired time span to attain maximum speed from zero speed. The preset rate
is effective any time there is a speed change command, not just from startup. Circuit includes four (4) totally
independent 1 to 9 second adjustable timing circuits on a plug-in circuit board as follows:
1. FWD ACCEL
2. FWD DECEL
3. REV ACCEL
4. REV DECEL
A
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
For Use
with
Series
50%
100%
MOTOR TORQUE
150%
FIGURE B.
Torque Adjust with slope
adjust at maximum
50%
100%
MOTOR TORQUE
FIGURE C.
Slope Adjust with
torque adjust at
100% torque setting
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Options and Modifications for DC Controllers
Option
No.
18
Description
TORQUE TAPER
Center-driven winders ideally require a reciprocal speed-torque relationship (constant horsepower) to maintain
constant tension throughout the range of material build-up. Acceptable performance can be economically achieved for
many applications with an inverse-linear speed-torque relationship provided by this option. Tension control accuracy of
approximately 20% can normally be maintained from empty roll to full roll at a given production machine speed.
This option consists of a plug-in circuit board which inserts into the FEEDBACK AND INPUT connector of the control
circuit board and a TORQUE ADJUST potentiometer for installation in the operator control station. Independent
potentiometers are provided.
TORQUE ADJUST – Establishes maximum low speed torque. The TORQUE ADJUST in combination with the Taper
adjustments, establishes the torque available at any point throughout the operating speed range. The TORQUE
ADJUST potentiometer is mounted in the operator control station.
Option 18 can also be used for constant torque applications where conventional operation of the current limit is
required and a remote mounted torque current potentiometer is desired. When used in this manner the TAPER
adjustment is set for a vertical cut-off of motor torque (current.
REV/FWD TAPER – Establishes the slope or rate of linear torque increase with decreasing speed throughout the
operating range. Adjustable from 0 to 100% torque at maximum motor speed with minimum effect on low speed
torque. The FORWARD TAPER and REVERSE TAPER potentiometers are mounted within the controller on the option
circuit board.
CAUTION – This option can only control torque in a single direction.
Use caution in the selection of motors for center-driven windup applications where torque loads increase in
inverse proportion to motor speed.
Web break or other process material detectors are recommended to prevent a dangerous overspeed should a
break in the process material occur.
Option 18 normally provides acceptable performance in applications where the material being wound travels at a
constant speed during winder roll buildup. This option can also be used to drive unwind stands.
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
For Use
with
Series
18
TORQUE TAPER
This option consists of a plug-in circuit board. This board provides an inverse-linear speed-torque relationship when
operating in the braking (regenerative) mode, and provides constant torque in the motoring mode of operation.
Motoring torque and braking torque are individually adjustable as well as forward and reverse torque taper.
Applications include the following:
1. Winders where the material being wound travels at a constant speed during winder roll buildup.
2. Unwinders, since this option provides relatively constant holdback tension (±20%) from full roll to empty roll.
18A
TORQUE TAPER
Center driven winders ideally require a reciprocal speed torque relationship (constant horsepower) to maintain
constant tension throughout the range of material build-up. Acceptable performance can be economically achieved for
many applications with an inverse-linear speed-torque relationship provided by this option. Tension control accuracy of
approximately 20% can normally be maintained from empty to full roll at a given machine speed.
This option consists of a plug-in circuit board which replaces the FEEDBACK board in the control and a torque
potentiometer for installation in the operator’s panel. Independent potentiometers are provided for:
TORQUE ADJUST—Establishes maximum low speed torque. The TORQUE ADJUST in combination with the SLOPE
ADJUST establishes the torque available at any point throughout the operating speed range
SLOPE ADJUST–Establishes the rate of torque increase with decreasing speed, throughout the operating range.
Adjustable from 0 to 100% torque at maximum motor speed with minimum effect on low speed torque. The SLOPE
ADJUST potentiometer is mounted within the controller on the option circuit board.
Use caution in the selection of motors for center driven windup applications where torque loads increase in
inverse proportion to motor speed. Web break or other process material detectors are recommended to
prevent a dangerous overspeed should the process material break.
Option 18A normally provides acceptable performance in applications where the material being wound travels at a
constant speed during winder roll buildup. If the process is such that the speed of the material being wound varies
during winder roll buildup or if more accurate tension control is desired, see Option 36A.
This Option Kit is also used for constant torque applications where conventional operation of the current limit is
required and remote mounting of the torque (current) potentiometer is desired. When used in this manner, the Slope
adjustment is set for a vertical cutoff of motor (maximum setting) torque (current). See Option 18B.
Electrical Products Catalog
VELRG
VEHRG
A
VEA-RG
RBA-RG
VEplus
57
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Options and Modifications for DC Controllers
Option
No.
FIGURE A.
“Ideal” constant hp Curve for a
winder application
18B
50% (MIN)
MOTOR TORQUE
150% (MAX)
FIGURE B.
Torque adjust with a slope adjust
at maximum
RPM
VEplus
RPM
WINDER RPM
MOTOR TORQUE
50%
100%
MOTOR TORQUE
FIGURE C.
Slope adjust with torque adjust at
100% torque setting
TORQUE (CURRENT) LIMIT CONTROL
VEplus
Provides the ability to adjust the drive current limit setting and thus the motor torque over a range of 50-150% by a
remote mounted TORQUE ADJUST potentiometer. (See Option 18A).
18B
FOLLOWER, CURRENT REGULATOR (LESS ADJUSTMENTS)
Provides a means of controlling motor armature current and torque by a manually adjusted potentiometer or an
external 0 to 12 VDC signal. This option provides separate current reference inputs for forward and reverse torque, but
operates in one (1) motor direction only.
This option is useful in applications where load sharing of two (2) or more drive units is required where one (1) unit can
be designated as master. The master unit would generate a 0 to 12 VDC current reference to be used by the slave drives.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
A
Description
TORQUE TAPER (Continued)
EP138B
18A
For Use
with
Series
18C
FOLLOWER, CURRENT REGULATOR
VEplus
Provides a means of controlling motor armature current and torque by a manually adjusted potentiometer or an
external DC voltage reference signal. The circuit includes internal isolation permitting direct connection to a grounded
signal source. Since torque is directly controlled independent of motor speed, provision is included for limiting
maximum motor speed.
Multiple motor applications typically involve master speed regulated drive which establishes the speed of the system
and one (1) or more current regulated follower drive units. The follower units obtain their current reference signal from
the master controller. Typical applications include:
a. Load sharing between two (2) or more drive units with their motors mechanically coupled.
b. Load sharing between two (2) or more drive units coupled by the process material itself such as steel bar stock
being pulled by multiple drive units through separately powered sections of a machine.
c. Tension control of a web of process material being transferred between sections of a multiple section machine.
APPLICATION INFORMATION
1. Current response time
Zero to full-load current........................................................................................................................150 Milliseconds
2. Output current control
Range ......................................................................................................................................................................10:1
3. Signal input required for maximum current output
Range 1 ..............................................................................................................................................3.35 to 36.5 VDC
Range 2 ................................................................................................................................................0.34 to 3.7 VDC
Range 3 ..............................................................................................................................................0.04 to 0.44 VDC
4. Transfer linearity
Input signal to output current.....................................................................................................................................1%
This option consists of a plug-in circuit board which inserts into both input and feedback connectors of the control
board. Included are separate adjustments for:
Maximum Speed ..........................................................................................................................0-Motor Base Speed
Maximum Current ............................................................................................................................0-150% of rated(1)
Input Scaling ..........................Adjustable to match the input signal (0.04 to 36.5 VDC) for maximum current output.
Current offset ...............................................................Adjustable for zero current output with minimum signal input.
(1) 0-75% of rated achieved by adjustment of the unit current limit.
(Continued)
58
Electrical Products Catalog
VEL-RG
VEH-RG
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Options and Modifications for DC Controllers
Option
No.
18E
21
For Use
with
Description
Series
TORQUE (CURRENT) REFERENCE
BETA II
A modification that will allow the controller to function as a torque regulator. This modification allows the use of an BETAplus
VEplus
external potentiometer to set maximum motor torque (0-150% of rated).
POTENTIOMETER, SINGLE TURN MOTOR SPEED
ALL
21A
POTENTIOMETER, TEN-TURN MOTOR SPEED (ANALOG)
ALL
Provides a Ten-Turn, 2W potentiometer, knob and analog dial.
Not intended for bi-directional operation via speed potentiometer.
21B
POTENTIOMETER, TEN-TURN MOTOR SPEED (DIGITAL)
ALL
Provides a Ten Turn, 1/2W Potentiometer with digital dial and knob.
Not intended for bi-directional operation via speed potentiometer.
22
FOLLOWER, DC TACHOMETER GENERATOR
Intended for single or multi-drive control systems where it is necessary for the drive(s) to follow the speed of a
preceding drive unit or rotating machine coupled to a DC tachometer generator. The tach signal provides the speed
reference for the "follower” drive. This option provides bidirectional operation.
Option 22 includes impedance matching circuitry and a RATIO adjustment potentiometer connected across the output
of the DC tachometer generator to interface with the reference input of the drive controller(s). Controllers include
internal isolation permitting the reference common to be connected directly with other drive(s) without utilizing line
isolation transformers.
Option 22 does not include the tachometer generator which must provide a minimum of 30 VDC at base speed and not
exceed 180 VDC at maximum speed.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Provides a single turn, 2W potentiometer, knob and analog dial plate.
Not intended for bidirectional operation via speed potentiometer.
22A
FOLLOWER, AC OR DC TACHOMETER
M
O
M
O
M
O
VELRG
VEHRG
VED
Intended for automatic control systems
T
T
T
O
O
O
where it is necessary for the drive to
R
R
R
follow the speed of a preceding drive
unit or rotating machine coupled to an
S
S
S
P
P
P
AC single-phase or 2-phase or DC
E
E
E
tachometer generator with either
E
E
E
output polarity. The tachometer
D
D
D
voltage signal provides the speed
TACH VOLTAGE
TACH VOLTAGE
TACH VOLTAGE
reference for the “follower” drive.
FIGURE
A.
TACH
FIGURE
B.
MINIMUM
FIGURE
C. MINIMUM
Adjustments are provided to adapt
SCALING AND
SPEED ADDITIVE
SPEED OVERRIDE
the unit to a wide range of system
FOLLOWER RATIO
requirements. Included are independent adjustments for:
TACH SCALING – Adjustable to interface the tachometer generated voltage with the required controller reference voltage.
FOLLOWER RATIO (Optional) – Adjustable to permit tracking the tachometer signal voltage at a plus or minus ratio.
See Figure A. The FOLLOWER RATIO potentiometer is mounted in the operator control panel.
OFFSET – Adjustable to permit tracking the tachometer signal at a fixed (+ or –) offset. The offset potentiometer is
mounted on the option circuit board. See Figure B.
MINIMUM SPEED (Override) – Adjustable by an optional potentiometer which is used to establish a minimum drive
speed independent of tachometer signal voltage. The MOTOR SPEED control may also be used as a manual speed
setting control when no tachometer signal is present. See Figure C.
A MANUAL/FOLLOWER selector switch input is provided in order to select the membrane operator panel when in manual mode.
VED Series controllers include internal isolation permitting the reference common to be directly connected with other
drive(s) without utilizing line isolation transformers.
This option requires a tachometer generator which provides 7 to 150V, AC or DC, at motor maximum and/or base
speed. This option does not include the tachometer generator.
Electrical Products Catalog
59
A
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Options and Modifications for DC Controllers
Option
No.
22A
For Use
with
Series
VEplus
Description
FOLLOWER, AC OR DC TACHOMETER GENERATOR
Intended for automatic control systems where it is necessary for the drive to follow the speed of a preceding drive unit or
rotating machine coupled to an AC or DC tachometer generator. The tachometer voltage signal provides the speed
reference for the “follower” drive.
Option 22A is not recommended for use where multiple drive controllers are required to operate from a common signal
source, unless the controllers are isolated. A more economical approach if the controllers are not isolated would be the use
of the MIRC master isolated reference controller which is intended for use with multiple drive controllers. See Option 35.
Adjustments are provided to adapt the unit to a wide range of system requirements. Included are independent adjustments for:
TACH SCALING – Adjustable to interface the tachometer generated voltage with the required controller reference voltage
when the FOLLOWER RATIO potentiometer is set on maximum. If a plus ratio is required (i.e.: the follower drive is at full
speed when the master drive is at half speed) set the FOLLOWER RATIO potentiometer at its midpoint and adjust TACH
SCALING for the required controller reference voltage and then adjust the FOLLOWER RATIO potentiometer toward 100.
FOLLOWER RATIO – Adjustable to permit tracking the tachometer signal voltage at a plus or minus ratio.
The FOLLOWER RATIO potentiometer is mounted in the operator control panel.
MINIMUM SPEED (Additive)–Adjustable to permit tracking the tachometer signal at a fixed offset voltage.
MINIMUM SPEED ADDITIVE potentiometer is mounted on the Option 22A circuit board.
MINIMUM SPEED (Override)–Adjustable by the MOTOR SPEED potentiometer to establish a minimum drive speed
independent of tachometer signal voltage. The MOTOR SPEED potentiometer is also used as a manual speed setting
control when no tachometer signal is present. The MOTOR SPEED potentiometer is mounted in the operator control station.
A MANUAL/FOLLOWER selector switch is therefore unnecessary for most applications and is not included with this option.
See Option 38 when a switch is desired. The MOTOR SPEED potentiometer is mounted in the operator control station.
Option 22A consists of a small plug-in circuit board which inserts into the input connector of the Control Circuit Board
and a FOLLOWER RATIO potentiometer for separate mounting.
This option does not include the tachometer generator which must provide 30 volts at base speed and not to exceed
180 volts at maximum speed.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
A
M
O
T
O
R
M
O
T
O
R
M
O
T
O
R
S
P
E
E
D
S
P
E
E
D
S
P
E
E
D
TACH VOLTAGE
FIGURE A. TACH
SCALING AND
FOLLOWER RATIO
22B
TACH VOLTAGE
FIGURE B. MINIMUM
SPEED ADDITIVE
TACH VOLTAGE
FIGURE C. MINIMUM
SPEED OVERRIDE
FOLLOWER, DIGITAL PULSE GENERATOR
This option provides signal conditioning and isolation for accepting a signal from a magnetic pulse pick-up
mechanically coupled to a preceding drive motor, rotating machinery or various static pulse generators permitting the
drive to follow at an adjustable ratio.
This option consists of:
a. Digital to analog conversion circuit board which inserts into the INPUT connector of the control circuit board.
b. A signal conditioning circuit board which is mounted in the base of the controller or remotely mounted.
c. MANUAL/FOLLOWER selector switch for separate mounting.
d. Interconnection wire harness.
Two (2) modes of operation are provided: Manual and Follower, as selected by the MANUAL/FOLLOWER switch. In
the Manual mode, the MOTOR SPEED potentiometer controls motor speed. In the Follower mode, the motor follows
the digital pulse signal, and the MOTOR SPEED potentiometer functions as the follower ratio adjust potentiometer.
The signal conditioner circuit board accepts the output of any one of the following devices:
1. Magnetic pulse pick-up capable of providing 450 pulses/second at motor base speed and not exceeding a
maximum of 2500 pulses/second at motor base speed. Recommended input:
100 tooth gear on a 1150 RPM motor.
60 tooth gear on a 1750 RPM motor.
30 tooth gear on a 2400 RPM motor.
2. Pulse generator (TTL) with a 0 to +5V output, capable of providing a minimum of 450 pulses/
second at motor base speed and not exceeding a maximum of 2500 pulses/second at motor base speed.
3. Pulse generator with an open collector output, capable of conducting 2 milliamperes at 24 VDC.
This option does not include the magnetic pick-up assembly, pulse gear or other signal source, or the motor speed potentiometer.
60
Electrical Products Catalog
VEplus
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Options and Modifications for DC Controllers
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Option
No.
22D
For Use
with
Series
VED
Description
DIGITAL PULSE FOLLOWER
This option provides signal conditioning for accepting a signal from a magnetic pulse pick-up mechanically coupled to a
preceding drive motor, rotating machinery or various static pulse generators permitting the drive to follow at an adjustable ratio.
Two modes of operation are provided: Manual and Follower, as selected by the MANUAL/FOLLOWER switch. In the
Manual mode, the Membrane Panel 1 MOTOR SPEED Faster-Slower switches control motor speed. In the Follower
mode, the motor follows the digital pulse signal, and the optional MOTOR SPEED potentiometer functions as the
follower ratio adjust potentiometer.
The signal conditioner circuit board accepts the output of any one (1) of the following devices:
Magnetic pulse pick-up capable of providing 1000-2500 pulses/second at motor base speed. A 60 tooth gear on a
1750 RPM motor generates 1750 PPS.
This option consists of a small printed circuit board which mounts in the base chassis and communicates with the
controller. This option does not include the magnetic pulse pick-up or other signal source.
22L
SERIAL LINK (COMPUTER CONTROL)
A
VED
Option provides the capability of two way communication and direct control by computer via an RS422 link. This
bypasses all on board potentiometer adjustments and permits computer control of all operating parameters: Speed,
Torque, Direction of Rotation, Current Limit, Acceleration/Deceleration Rate, Run-Stop-Jog-Reversing commands,
Min-Max speeds while permitting remote interrogation by the computer of these and other operational data such as the
First Fault Annunciator described in Option 44. Provision is included for manual operator safety stop circuit bypassing
the computer and a watch-dog circuit which will automatically stop the drive in the event of failure of the microprocessor or communication link.
The serial link is expandable for the individual or simultaneous control of up to thirty-two (32) drive units in a system.
The option consists of a small printed circuit board which mounts in the chassis base and communicates with the
controller. This option must be used in conjunction with Option 52, Power Supply, Auxiliary. Host computer software to
suit individual system requirements is not included with this option.
22M
PARALLEL (BCD) MULTIPLEXER
VED
This option provides means of connecting up to three (3) BCD thumbwheel switches to the same parallel (BCD) digital
input Option 22P with which it must be used.
It is the digital equivalent of the programmable speed/torque control Option 15. Ordinarily when Option 22P is used, e.g.
as a speed reference, only one BCD switch assembly may be connected. This is very inconvenient when multiple
speeds such as jog, reverse, or preset speed settings are required.
Each of the three (3) BCD inputs is selected by an external enable and a switch settable operating mode. The operating
modes are: forward, reverse, forward jog, and reverse jog. More than one (1) operating mode may be assigned to one
(1) BCD switch assembly. For example: Forward jog and reverse jog may be set by a common BCD switch assembly.
Option consists of a small printed circuit board which mounts within the controller base and communicates with Option
22P BCD input, and other options.
22P
PARALLEL (BCD) DIGITAL INPUT
VED
Allows precise selection of motor speed, motor armature current (torque) or other adjustable operating parameters by
a 4 digit BCD thumbwheel switch or other external, parallel digital reference. Since this option is totally digital it
provides a higher degree of accuracy than that available with analog inputs, and accuracy is now limited only by the
quality of feedback. Motor speed may be selected 0-100% and current 0-150% by tenths. Other switch selectable
parameters include individual parameters such as Current Limit, Current Reference, IR compensation, Ratio and
parameter pairs such as min/max speed and accel/decel. An optional “Data Enter” feature may be implemented with a
N.O. pushbutton so thumbwheel changes are not read until the pushbutton is depressed. Inputs are buffered for
reliable operation in industrial environments.
One (1) option 22P and one (1) thumbwheel switch is required for each individual parameter to be selected. However,
parameter pairs such as min/max speed and accel/decel require two (2) thumbwheels for each Option 22P. See also
Option 22M Parallel (BCD) Multiplexer where multiple presets (BCD switches) may be selected for the same parameter.
Option consists of a small printed circuit board which mounts within the chassis base and communicates with the
controller. Option does not include the thumbwheel switch(s) enter pushbutton, or other digital reference.
24
FEEDBACK. DC TACHOMETER
Provides impedance matching and terminals for accepting a signal from a DC tachometer generator which is directly
coupled to the motor armature. This option replaces the standard Counter EMF feedback mode in the controller and
improves speed regulation with respect to changes in load, line voltage variations, ambient temperatures and motor field
heating as well as other operating variables. The tachometer generator must provide 30 to 180 VDC at maximum speed.
The tachometer generator is not included as part of this option.
Electrical Products Catalog
VELRG
VEHRG
61
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Options and Modifications for DC Controllers
Option
No.
24
A
TACHOMETER FEEDBACK
BETA II
An internal modification which provides impedance matching from a DC tachometer generator which is directly coupled to BETAplus
VEplus
the motor armature. This option improves speed regulation with respect to changes in load, line voltage, ambient
temperature and motor field heating. The tachometer generator must be capable of providing 5 to 120 VDC/1000 RPM.
The tachometer generator is not part of this option.
FEEDBACK TACHOMETER AC OR DC
VED
VED units include as standard the capability to accept a signal from a feedback tachometer if it is; (a) a unidirectional
application and/or (b) the tachometer signal is DC. All other applications will require this option which provides voltage
scaling and terminals for accepting a signal from an AC (2 phase only) or DC tachometer generator (either polarity),
mechanically coupled to the drive motor armature. The tachometer signal defeats the IR compensation circuitry in the
drive controller making the unit directly sensitive to motor speed. This results in expanded speed range, improved speed
regulation with load changes, and reduced sensitivity to operating conditions such as line voltage variations, ambient
temperature changes, motor field heating and other operating variables.
This option requires a tach generator which provides 7 to 150V AC or DC at motor maximum and/or base speed. The
option does not include the tachometer generator.
24A
FEEDBACK, TACHOMETER AC OR DC
VEplus
Provides impedance matching and terminals for accepting a signal from a 2-phase AC or DC tachometer generator,
mechanically coupled to the drive motor armature. The tachometer signal defeats the IR compensation circuitry in the
drive controller making the unit directly sensitive to motor speed. This results in expanded speed range, improved speed
regulation with load changes and reduced sensitivity to operating conditions such as line voltage variations, ambient
temperature changes, motor field heating and other operating variables. The controller will automatically switch to
armature feedback if the tachometer signal is lost.
Tachometer generator must provide 30 to 180 volts at maximum motor speed. A MAXIMUM SPEED TACHOMETER
potentiometer is provided to scale the tachometer signal.
Option 24A consists of a small plug-in circuit board which inserts into the FEEDBACK connector on the control circuit
board, replacing the armature feedback circuit board. Option 24A does not include the tachometer generator.
Caution: Do not use a single-phase AC Tachometer.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
24A
Description
For Use
with
Series
24B
FEEDBACK, DIGITAL PULSE GENERATOR
VEplus
Provides signal conditioning and isolation for accepting a signal from a magnetic pulse pick-up mechanically coupled to
the drive motor armature. The magnetic pulse pickup must provide a minimum of 450 pulses per second at motor speed
(60 tooth gear on a 1750 RPM motor). The pulse pick-up signal defeats the IR compensation circuitry in the drive
controller, making the unit directly sensitive to motor speed. Speed range is limited to 35:1.
The option results in improved speed regulation with load changes (equal to DC tachometer feedback) and reduced sensitivity
to operating conditions such as line voltage variations, ambient temperature changes, motor field heating and other variables.
Option 24B consists of:
a. Digital to analog conversion circuit board which inserts into the FEEDBACK connector of the control circuit board.
b. A signal conditioner circuit board which is mounted on the base of the controller or remotely mounted.
This option does not include the pulse pick-up assembly.
24B
PULSE TACHOMETER FEEDBACK/FOLLOWER
This option is interfaces the controller to a pulse train for speed reference or as a feedback signal. It allows the use of
a 60 tooth gear for either speed reference or feedback. It is capable of providing digital pulse tach reference an/or
feedback functions. The sensor can be a magnetic pickup (2 wire), proximity sensor (3 wire), AC tachometer generator
(18 cycles/revolution), two-phase AC tachometer generator, or digital tachometer generator or encoder (240
pulses/revolution) Note: two-phase AC tachometer generator can be used for follower or feedback applications, but not both.
24D
DIGITAL PULSE FEEDBACK
Provides signal conditioning for accepting a signal from a magnetic pulse pick-up mechanically coupled to the drive
motor armature. The magnetic pulse pick-up must provide a minimum of 1750 pulses per second at motor speed (60
tooth gear on a 1750 RPM motor). The pulse pick-up signal defeats the IR compensation circuitry in the drive
controller, making the unit directly sensitive to motor speed. Speed range is limited to 35:1 with a 1750 RPM motor,
20:1 with a 1150 RPM motor and 45:1 with a 2400 RPM motor.
The option results in improved speed regulation with load changes (equal to DC tachometer feedback) and reduced
sensitivity to operating conditions such as line voltage variations, ambient temperature changes, motor field heating
and other variables.
This option consists of a small printed circuit board which mounts in the chassis base and communicates with the
controller. This option does not include the magnetic pulse pick-up or other signal source.
62
Electrical Products Catalog
RBA-RG
VEA-RG
RBA-RG
VED
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Options and Modifications for DC Controllers
Option
No.
25
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Provides necessary impedance matching circuitry to interFollower Input Requirements
face a customer supplied DC signal source with the
Current
Follower
Voltage
controller reference input. Typical applications are those
Signal
Input
Signal
where motor speed must be controlled as a function of a
Range
Impedance
Required
process variable, such as temperature, weight, fluid flow,
(mA) DC
(Ohms)
(Volts) DC
pressure, etc.
0-5
80
In many applications, the reference signal is obtained from
0-10
40
a process instrument controller or other commercially
0-25
16
available transducer with a DC milliampere output. Devices
of this type normally provide signal levels within the ranges
0-50
8
0.4 VDC
listed in the Table.
1-5
80
This option provides bidirectional operation.
2-10
40
4-20
20
Option provides suitable adjustments for linear transfer
of instrument output current to motor speed. These
10-50
8
adjustments are normally set so minimum transducer
signal results in minimum or zero motor speed and maximum signal produces maximum motor speed. Also
provided are adjustments to extend or compress the transducer signal output, so a 5:1 transducer output
signal range, for example, could provide a 10:1 or 20:1 drive speed range.
The controllers include internal DC isolation permitting the reference common to be directly connected to a process controller with a grounded output signal without the requirement for a signal isolator or AC line power isolation transformers.
Multiple controllers may also be connected directly to a common process controller without further isolation.
25
ISOLATED INPUT AND FOLLOWER
This option board isolates the motor speed potentiometer from the non-isolated controller for operator and equipment
safely. Also, it will allow the controller to follow a 4-20 DCMA current signal and a wide range of DC voltage signals
(±.05 to ±500 VDC). This makes the option ideal for following signal transducers, motor shunts, DC tachometer
generators and the armature voltage from DC motors.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
Description
FOLLOWER, DC PROCESS INSTRUMENT
25A
FOLLOWER, DC PROCESS
Provides necessary impedance matching circuitry to interface a customer supplied DC signal source with the drive
controller reference input. Typical applications are those where motor speed must be controlled as a function of a process
variable such as temperature, weight, flow, pressure, etc.
For Use
with
Series
VELRG
VEHRG
A
VEA-RG
RBA-RG
VEplus
In many applications, the reference signal is obtained from a process instrument controller or other commercially
available transducer with a DC milliampere output. Devices of this type normally provide signal levels compatible with
requirements listed in the table:
Included are suitable adjustments for linear transfer or
instrument output current to motor speed. The adjustments
Option Input Impedance (Ohms) will normally be set so minimum transducer signal results in
minimum or zero motor speed and maximum signal
0-5
80
produces maximum motor speed. Also provided is an
0-10
40
adjustment to extend or compress the transducer signal
output so a 5:1 transducer output signal range, for example,
0-25
16
could provide a 10:1 or 20:1 drive speed range. Included
0-50
8
are individual potentiometer adjustments for:
1-5
80
MINIMUM SPEED (Override)–Adjustable by the MOTOR
2-10
40
SPEED potentiometer to establish a minimum drive speed
independent of the external reference signal. The MOTOR
4-20
16
SPEED potentiometer is also used as a manual speed
10-50
8
setting control when no external reference signal is present.
A MANUAL/FOLLOWER selector switch is therefore unnecessary for most applications and is not included with this
option. See Option 38 when a switch is required. The MOTOR SPEED potentiometer is mounted in the operator control
station.
IMPEDANCE MATCH–Provides a means of matching the impedance of the signal source and also functions as a GAIN adjustment.
OFFSET–Trims minimum input signal.
IMPEDANCE MATCH and OFFSET potentiometers are mounted on the Option Circuit Board.
DC Input
Signal
Range (ma)
Electrical Products Catalog
63
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Options and Modifications for DC Controllers
Option
No.
25A
Description
FOLLOWER, DC PROCESS INSTRUMENT (Continued)
A
VEplus
M
O
T
O
R
M
O
T
O
R
S
P
E
E
D
S
P
E
E
D
EXTERNAL SIGNAL
EXTERNAL SIGNAL
MINIMUM SPEED OVERRIDE
FIGURE A
FIGURE B
Option consists of a small plug-in circuit board which inserts into the INPUT connector of the control circuit board.
Option does not include the external signal source, Motor Speed potentiometer or optional Manual Follower selector switch.
25B
FOLLOWER, PROCESS CONTROL SIGNAL
VED
Provides a necessary impedance matching circuitry to interface a customer supplied DC (current mode) signal source
with the drive controller reference input. Typical applications are those where motor speed or current (torque) must be
controlled as a function of a process variable such as temperature, weight, flow, pressure, etc.
In many applications, the reference signal is obtained from a process instrument controller or other commercially
available transducer with a DC milliampere output. Devices of this type normally provide signal levels compatible with
requirements listed in the table:
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
For Use
with
Series
®
Follower Input Requirement
Current
Follower
Voltage
Signal
Input
Signal
Range
Impedance
Required
(ma) DC
(Ohms)
(Volts) DC
0-5
0-20
0-50
1-5
4-20
10-50
1K
300
150
1K
300
150
5.0 VDC
Included are suitable adjustments for linear transfer of instrument output current to motor speed. The adjustments will
normally be set so minimum transducer signal results in minimum or zero motor speed and maximum signal produces
maximum motor speed. Also provided is an adjustment to extend or compress the transducer signal output so a 5:1
transducer output signal range, for example, could provide a 10:1 or 20:1 drive speed range. Included are individual
potentiometer adjustments for:
MINIMUM SPEED (Override) – Used to establish a minimum drive speed independent of the external reference signal.
The operator panel is also used as a manual speed setting control when no external reference signal is present. See
Figure A. A MANUAL/FOLLOWER selector switch is necessary to select between automatic and manual control
operation when membrane is used.
GAIN – See Figure B for adjustment range.
THRESHOLD – See Figure B for adjustment range.
64
Electrical Products Catalog
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Options and Modifications for DC Controllers
Option
No.
25B
For Use
with
Series
VED
Description
FOLLOWER, PROCESS CONTROL SIGNAL (Continued)
M
O
T
O
R
M
O
T
O
R
S
P
E
E
D
S
P
E
E
D
EXTERNAL SIGNAL
FIGURE A.
25C
A
EXTERNAL SIGNAL
FIGURE B.
FOLLOWER, AC CURRENT TRANSDUCER
VEplus
Intended for automatic control systems where it is necessary for the drive to follow an AC signal proportional to the load
current of a constant speed, AC induction motor. Typical examples are conveying systems where the material feed rate
has a direct influence over the loading of the AC motor, i.e.: the carriage or conveyor feeding logs to a saw powered by
an AC motor. Since the thickness and density of the wood is not uniform this option permits automatic adjustment of
conveyor speed to the highest feed rate which will not overload the saw motor.
In order that a proper current transformer may be supplied it is necessary that nameplate data such as
horsepower, voltage, load current, etc. be provided from the AC motor.
AUTO/MANUAL SELECTOR SWITCH (1)–Selects the operation function. When the switch is in AUTO position, the
drive functions as an AC current follower unit. When the switch is in MANUAL position the drive functions as an
adjustable speed unit. When the AUTO function is selected, the separately furnished Motor Speed potentiometer
provides speed adjustment of the DC motor at a ratio from 0 to 100% of the AC input signal. When the MANUAL
function is selected, the Motor Speed potentiometer provides normal manual speed adjustment of the DC motor.
DIRECT/INVERT SLIDE SWITCH (2)–Selects the operation mode. When the switch is in DIR position, the speed of the
DC drive motor varies directly proportional to the load current drawn by the AC motor. When the switch is in INVT
position the speed of the DC drive motor varies inversely proportional to the AC motor load current, i.e., when the load of
the AC motor increases causing it to draw more current, the DC motor speed decreases.
BIAS (2)–Set the maximum DC motor speed for the INVERT mode of operation.
CURRENT SCALING (2)–Matches the range of the AC input signal to the input signal range requirements of the controller.
INTEGRATION RATE (2)–Sets the response rate of the system when the AUTO function is selected.
MINIMUM SPEED (2)–Sets minimum speed independently of the input control signal.
PROPORTIONAL GAIN (2)–Sets the gain of Circuit Board when the AUTO function is selected.
This option consists of:
a. Toroidal current transformer for separate mounting by the user for sensing AC motor load current.
b. A small plug-in circuit board which inserts into the input connector of the control circuit board.
c. AUTO/MANUAL selector switch for mounting remotely.
NOTES: (1) Mounted in operator control station.
SAW
FEED DIRECTION
(2) Located on circuit board.
MOTOR
This illustration shows an application which requires an inverse
relationship between AC motor load current and the follower drive
ADJUSTABLE
motor speed. This option may also be programmed for a direct
SPEED CONVEYOR
relationship where the follower drive would increase in speed with
MOTOR
increasing AC motor load current.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
VED Series controllers include internal DC isolation permitting the reference common to be directly connected to a
process controller with a grounded output signal without the requirement for a signal isolator or AC line power isolation
transformers. Multiple controllers (up to 3) may also be connected directly to a common process controller without
further isolation.
This option consists of a small circuit board which mounts in the chassis base and communicates with the controller.
Option 25B does not include the external signal source.
25C
FOLLOWER, AC CURRENT TRANSDUCER
VED
Intended for automatic control systems where it is necessary for the drive speed to follow an AC signal proportional to
the load current of an AC constant speed, induction motor. Typical examples are conveying systems where the material
feed rate has a direct influence over the loading of the AC motor, I.e.: the carriage or conveyor feeding logs to a saw
powered by an AC motor.
Electrical Products Catalog
65
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Options and Modifications for DC Controllers
Option
No.
25C
FOLLOWER, AC CURRENT TRANSDUCER (Continued)
VED
Since the thickness and density of the wood is not uniform this option permits automatic adjustment of conveyor speed
to the highest feed rate which will not overload the saw motor.
In order that a proper current transformer may be supplied it is necessary that nameplate data such as horsepower,
voltage, load current, etc. be provided from the AC motor.
This illustration shows an application which requires an inverse relationship
SAW
between AC motor load current and the follower drive motor speed.
FEED DIRECTION
MOTOR
This option may also be programmed for a direct relationship where the
follower drive would increase in speed with increasing AC motor load
current. Included are independent controls and adjustments for:
ADJUSTABLE
SPEED CONVEYOR
AUTO/MANUAL SELECTOR SWITCH—Selects the operation function. When the switch is
MOTOR
in AUTO position, the drive functions as an AC current follower unit. When potentiometer
provides speed adjustment of the DC motor at a ratio from 0 to 100% of the AC input signal.
NORMAL/INVERT SLIDE SWITCH—Selects the operation mode. When the switch is in NORMAL position, the speed of the
DC drive motor varies directly proportional to the load current drawn by the AC motor. When the switch is in INVERT position
the current, i.e., when the load of the AC motor increases causing it to draw more current, the DC motor speed decreases.
THRESHOLD— Since AC motors draw significant current even when unloaded, a threshold adjustment is provided to
enable minimizing drive response below this point. An LED is provided to signal the threshold has been exceeded and
the drive begins to track proportionately.
OFFSET—Sets an additive minimum speed in the normal mode and sets the maximum motor speed for the INVERT
mode of operation.
CURRENT SCALING—Matches the range of the AC input signal to the input signal range requirements of the controller.
INTEGRATION RATE—Sets the response rate of the system when the AUTO function is selected.
PROPORTIONAL GAIN— Sets the Gain to enhance stability when the AUTO function is selected.
RATIO— Controls speed as a ratio of reference in the auto mode or may be wired as a manual speed control.
MIN SPEED CLAMP—Sets independent manual or min speed control without affecting ratio.
This option consists of:
a. Toroidal current transformer for separate mounting by the user for sensing AC motor load current.
b. A small circuit board which mounts in the chassis base and communicates with the controller via FINbus.
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
A
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
Description
For Use
with
Series
25S
FOLLOWER, EXTERNAL REFERENCE (ISOLATOR)
VED
Provides a means of controlling motor speed or current (torque) by an external DC voltage reference signal. The circuit
includes internal isolation permitting direct connection to a hot signal source riding upon a floating voltage such as a
shunt or speed potentiometer (500 VDC maximum) in the armature circuit of another DC drive controller.
Multiple motor applications typically involve a master speed regulated drive which establishes the speed of the system
and one (1) or more current regulated follower drive units which may follow at adjustable ratios up to 150%. The follower
units obtain their current reference signal from the master controller. Typical applications include:
a. Load sharing between two (2) or more drive units with their motors mechanically coupled.
b. Load sharing between two (2) or more drive units coupled by the process material itself such as steel bar stock
being pulled by multiple drive units through separately powered sections of a machine.
c. Tension control of a web of process material being transferred between sections of a multiple section machine.
This option consists of a small circuit board which mounts in the chassis base and communicates with the controller via FINbus.
27P
NEMA 3/4/12 KIT
VED
Provides protective covers over the control elements in the cover to covert the enclosure to NEMA 3/4/12.
27M
ENCLOSURE MODIFICATION, NEMA TYPE 3/4/12
VED
Provides necessary gaskets for the operator panel (in local and remote control models) and a protective cover on the
circuit breaker to convert the standard VED enclosure to NEMA Type 3, 4 and 12.
The modified unit is suitable for operation in nonhazardous applications where it may be subjected to
splashing water, seepage water, hose directed water, severe condensation and dust.
30
CIRCUIT BREAKER, 2-POLE
VED
This option provides two-pole interrupting capabilities enabling both incoming lines to be disconnected. The VED Series
has a single pole circuit breader as standard.
30
AC LINE CIRCUIT BREAKER, TWO POLE
Provides a two-pole, magnetic only, fast trip circuit breaker as a means of manually disconnecting controller from the AC
line. The high interrupting capacity fuse in the basic unit is retained as primary short circuit protection.
66
Electrical Products Catalog
VEA-RG
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Options and Modifications for DC Controllers
Option
No.
31
Description
TORQUE (CURRENT) MONITOR
Provides an adjustable, static circuit that monitors motor armature current and provides a programmed shutdown of the
drive under sustained overload conditions to prevent motor damage. The circuit provides greater versatility than the
standard, nonadjustable overload circuit calibrated to trip whenever armature current exceeds 120% for 80 seconds.
The static overload circuit supplements the protective benefits of the controller current limit and motor thermostat. It is
especially effective in preventing motor damage when:
a. The motor is subjected to high torque loads at low speeds.
b. The current limit allows adjustment to 150% of rated armature current. Standard 1.0 service factor motors are rated for
1 minute of operation at this load. Damage or reduced motor life may result if sustained for longer periods since the
current limit functions independent of time.
c. The motor is forced cooled and must run at speeds below 50% base speed for any sustained period of time.
Circuit includes one set of Form C, 2 amp, 120 VAC or 28 VDC rated relay contacts that may be used to signal
audible or visual alarms or auxiliary control devices such as lubrication pumps, fans or valves.
The circuit includes two adjustments:
1. “THRESHOLD” (trip current level)..............................................................................10-180% Rated Armature Amps
2. “DELAY” (time at trip current level)..........................................................................................................1-90 seconds
The threshold adjustment establishes the amount of armature current necessary to initiate the timing period set by the
delay circuit. When the current remains above the threshold level for a period equal to the delay time setting, the relay
energizes.
The accuracy of the current monitor is not affected by ambient temperature changes within the design
operating limits of the drive controller.
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
For Use
with
Series
VEplus
32
FIELD SUPPLY, FULL-WAVE
A
VED
Provides a full-wave excitation source for the field of a shunt-wound DC motor. Enables the use of 100 VDC field motors
with 115 VAC controller or 200 VDC field motors with a 230 VAC controller.
34
MASTER ISOLATED REFERENCE CONTROLLER
This is a master system housed in a VEL/H size cabinet including a circuit breaker for use as an on-off switch, a runstop control relay, operator’s controls consisting of run and stop pushbuttons and a master speed pot. Input voltage may
be 115 or 230 VAC, 60/50 Hz. The control provides an adjustable frequency signal for each control in the system with a
suitable follower board (see below). The master control also accepts input options and thus can provide system
acceleration-deceleration, external signal, etc. Order Cat. No. 60174.
35
FOLLOWER, MASTER ISOLATED REFERENCE CONTROLLER (MIRC)
Provides an input circuit board to interface a controller with speed reference signals transmitted by the Model MIRC
master controller. The receiver circuit board includes necessary isolation, impedance matching and frequency to analog conversion.
VEHRG
VELRG
VEplus
VEHRG
VELRG
VEplus
This option is required for each controller whenever one or more is to be controlled by the MIRC. Option 35 includes
adjustments for maximum ratio, minimum speed and offset as well as the separately furnished MOTOR SPEED potentiometer.
The MIRC is a versatile master controller suggested for use whenever isolation is required between a controller and a
grounded external signal source and/or signal isolation is required between multiple controllers which must track a
common speed reference signal.
All adjustments excepting the MOTOR SPEED potentiometer are mounted on the option circuit board. The MOTOR
SPEED potentiometer functions as a manual speed setting device with the MASTER/LOCAL selector switch in the
LOCAL position. In the MASTER position the potentiometer provides a ratio or draw adjustment.
See Option 34 for additional information on the MIRC Master Controller.
Option 35 consists of a small plug-in circuit board which inserts into a prewired connector provided for this purpose and
a MASTER/LOCAL selector switch.
The MIRC follower option will control motor speed for unidirectional operation only.
This option does not include the MIRC Master Controller or the MOTOR SPEED potentiometer. See Option 34.
36A
CENTERWIND TORQUE CONTROL
VEplus
This option offers a more sophisticated solution to controlling the tension of center driven winders than Torque Taper
Options 18 & 18A. Tension control is more accurate since this option produces a reciprocal speed-torque relationship
which closely matches the ideal constant horsepower curve required to maintain constant tension. Option 36A has
provisions to accept a signal proportional to web speed from either a tachometer generator driven from the production
machine feeding the winder or a potentiometer ganged to the production machine speed control. Tension control
accuracy of better than 20% can normally be maintained from empty to full roll, and the control automatically
compensates for changes in production machine speed.
Electrical Products Catalog
67
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Options and Modifications for DC Controllers
Option
No.
36A
Description
CENTERWIND TORQUE CONTROL (Continued)
VEplus
This option consists of a plug-in circuit board which inserts into both the INPUT and the FEEDBACK connectors of the
control board, and a TORQUE ADJUST potentiometer pre-wired for installation in the operator control panel. Included
are independent potentiometer adjustments for:
A
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
TORQUE ADJUST – Sets the desired tension in the material being wound. This potentiometer is mounted in the
operator control panel.
TACH SCALING (1) – Scales the production machine tachometer signal voltage to the control requirements.
MAX TORQUE EMPTY ROLL (1) – Establishes the torque required to maintain proper tension at high winder speed.
MAX TORQUE FULL ROLL (1) – Establishes the torque required to maintain proper tension at low winder speed.
TORQUE BOOST TIME (1) – Establishes the time that additional torque is supplied to accelerate the winder when the
production machine speed is increased.
Use caution in the selection of motors for center driven windup applications where torque loads increase in
inverse proportion to motor speed. Also, web break or other process material detectors are suggested to
prevent a dangerous overspeed should the process material break.
An AC or DC tachometer generator with a minimum output of 30 volts at base speed and not exceeding 180 volts at
maximum production machine speed or a 5K ohm potentiometer ganged to the production machine speed control is
required, but not furnished as part of this option.
(1) These potentiometers are mounted on the option circuit board.
36B
CONSTANT VELOCITY WINDER
VEplus
This option provides an economical but accurate method of automatically controlling the tension of process material in
strip, web, wire or cable form as wound by a center driven winder.
The option requires the use of a DC tachometer generator coupled to the process material by nip rolls, a pressure roller
or capstan in a manner that will provide a continuous feedback of the velocity of the process material.
A manually set MOTOR SPEED potentiometer establishes the desired line speed of the process material. As material
builds up on the winder core, the diameter increases which would tend to increase the line speed of the material. This
will produce a higher voltage output from the tachometer generator which will cause the drive motor and winder to slow
down to maintain a constant velocity and uniform winder tension.
Should a break occur in the process material, this option will automatically transfer to an adjustable minimum take up
speed to minimize damage to the product and winder machinery.
RATINGS
1. Regulation Accuracy .................................................................................................................2% of motor base speed
2. Maximum Line Speed Range................................................................................................................
30
Build Ratio
Example: a 3:1 build ratio (3 ft. dia. full roll, 1 ft. dia.
empty roll) = 10:1 line speed range.
3. MOTOR SPEED potentiometer.....................................................................................................................5,000 ohms
This option consists of a plug-in circuit board which inserts into both the INPUT and the FEEDBACK connectors of the
control board. Included are independent potentiometer adjustments for:
ADJUSTMENTS
1. Take-Up Speed ..................................................................................................................0 to 50% of maximum speed
2. Maximum Speed .....................................................................Sets maximum range of MOTOR SPEED potentiometer
3. Acceleration (Response Time) ..........................................................................................................................1-60 sec.
Use caution in the selection of motors for center driven windup applications where torque loads increase in
inverse proportion to motor speed.
A DC Tachometer Generator with a minimum output of 1.0 volt at base speed and not to exceed 120 volts at maximum
production machine speed and a 5K MOTOR SPEED potentiometer are required but not furnished as part of this option.
EP137A
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
For Use
with
Series
68
Electrical Products Catalog
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Options and Modifications for DC Controllers
Option
No.
38
For Use
with
Series
Description
MANUAL/FOLLOWER MODE SELECT (TOGGLE SWITCH)
ALL
44
DIGITAL METER
Option provides a 3 1/2 digit LCD meter for mounting and plug-in interconnection within a dedicated space in the
membrane operator control panel. Meter greatly expands the operational versatility of any VED Series unit by
monitoring important operating parameters and by annunciating faults.
1. Operating parameters displayed:
a. Power – percent of rated
b. Armature current – percent of rated
c. Armature voltage – percent of rated
d. Motor speed – percent of rated
e. Motor RPM – direct reading in RPM for 1750 RPM motors only.
A DIP switch permits programming the meter for continuous display of any one (1) of the parameters listed. Alternately,
any two or more parameters may be selected for sequential display at 12 second intervals. See Figure A.
A
VED
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
This option is intended as a companion to Option 22, Option 25A and Option 25B.
Option 22, 25A and 25B do not include a selector switch and rely upon a zero speed setting of the MOTOR SPEED
potentiometer to transfer to full automatic control by the external signal.
Option 38 when used with these options, allows manual switch selection of either the MOTOR SPEED potentiometer or
automatic control by the external signal.
Option 38 includes a switch with a MANUAL/FOLLOWER legend plate for installation in the operator control panel.
2. Fault Annunciator
In the event the drive shuts down due to a fault, it is displayed in the form of an error code. Error codes include:
a. ARMATURE FEEDBACK LOSS (E1)
Indicates the correct armature feedback signal has not
been received by the microprocessor.
b. CURRENT FEEDBACK LOSS (E2)
Indicates that the correct current feedback signal has
not been received by the microprocessor.
c. HALF WAVE FIRING (E3)
d. OVERVOLTAGE (E4)
120% or greater Line Voltage
e. UNDERVOLTAGE (E5)
85% or less Line Voltage
f. CONTROLLER OVERLOAD (E6)
Armature Current 120% for 90 seconds.
g. COMMUNICATION ERROR (E7)
Determines that a connected option fails to respond
with expected data.
h. MEMBRANE OPERATOR PANEL COMMUNICATION
ERROR (E8)
Operator panel serial link determines that a MB1
MEMBRANE OPERATOR PANEL is connected but
fails to respond with expected data.
i. CONTROLLER OVERCURRENT (E9)
Armature current exceeds 200%
j.
MOTOR OVERTEMPERATURE (E10)
k. MOTOR ROTOR LOCKED (E11)
Overload trip
l. MOTOR OVERSPEED (E12)
Shutdown whenever counter EMF is 120% of
nominal base speed armature voltage
m. TACH LOSS (E13)
When speed (voltage) from a feedback tachometer
differs from armature feedback voltage by 20% or
more the controller will switch to armature voltage
feedback. When speed from the tach is restored to
within 10% of armature feedback the tach signal is
again used.
A STOP is not initiated.
n. CONTROLLER TO PANEL COMMUNICATION
ERROR (E33)
o. BATTERY FAILURE (E34)
Lithium battery is exhausted. Only operator preset
adjustments in membrane panel such as Run
Forward or Reverse speeds, Jog speeds, etc. will
be lost under this condition. See Figure B.
Electrical Products Catalog
69
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Options and Modifications for DC Controllers
Option
No.
44A
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
DIGITAL MONITOR (LOCAL)
VED
Provided is a 3 1/2 digit, microprocessor based, programmable, LCD meter intended for use as a monitor only of VED
controller operating parameters and fault annunciation error codes. It is identical in function to the Option 44 digital
meter in the membrane operator panel, except it has no control capability. It may be used as a complementary meter
either in conjunction with the Option 44 meter, or it may be used as a separate, stand alone monitor. It is perhaps most
useful when the VED unit is controlled by conventional pushbuttons and speed setting potentiometer in the pushbutton
operator control panel, or a remote operator control station.
Option 44A is furnished as an unenclosed component, complete with a 12 in. (0.3M) ribbon interconnection cable for
mounting in the space reserved for the membrane operator control panel in the cover of the unit or adjacent to it. The
digital monitor includes membrane pushswitches for selecting the operating parameter to be monitored: Motor RPM
(1750 RPM only), Motor Speed %, Motor Volts %, Motor Amps %, Frequency Hz., and Watts %, plus a Reset
Pushbutton. When the digital monitor must be mounted remote from the enclosure, Option 44B is suggested.
A
44B
DIGITAL MONITOR (REMOTE)
VED
This option is identical to Option 44A except it is furnished for remote mounting in the same die cast aluminum housing
as provided for remote operator stations. Additionally, it includes one (1) buffer amplifier to enable remote mounting up
to 100 feet (30M) away from the VED controller. The buffer amplifier also permits interconnection wiring with
conventional stranded wire as opposed to the ribbon cable required for Option 6A.
47
REFERENCE, PRECISION
VEplus
This option provides a high stability, precision reference circuit that replaces the function of the standard internal
reference circuit in the drive controller. This circuit offers important benefits for critical applications where sensitivity to
operating variables such as load changes, temperature, line voltage variations, etc. must be held to an absolute
minimum. This option may be used in combination with Option 24A, Feedback, Tachometer AC or DC.
This option consists of a small plug-in circuit board which replaces the standard input board.
50
HINGE, ENCLOSURE COVER
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
Description
For Use
with
Series
Enclosed models include a screw fixed, gasketed cover which is removable for increased accessibility during
installation, troubleshooting or repair. When desired the cover may also be provided with optional hinges making
servicing more convenient.
This option may be provided factory installed or a kit is offered for simple field installation.
52
POWER SUPPLY, AUXILIARY
VEplus
VED
VEA-RG
VED
Provides a supplemental power supply with +5VDC, and ±24VDC outputs for multiple options selected that may require
more power than available from the basic controller.
This option consists of a small printed circuit board which mounts in the chassis base.
53
SIGNAL BUS SUPPORT GUIDE
VED
This option consists of an insulating circuit board edge guide/support plus necessary attachment hardware. While one
guide is supplied with each FINbus option installed in a VED chassis, two are required whenever the option is installed
on a baseplate adjacent to the controller. See also Option 54 for the necessary extender cable required for this purpose.
54
SIGNAL BUS EXTENDER CABLE
VED
Provides a 12 inch long, extender ribbon cable to enable mounting the FINbus option outside of the VED chassis.
55
COMPUTER MONITOR
Provides a very useful means of obtaining operation data from a VED controller using any IBM compatible computer for
continuous monitoring, test, and diagnostic purposes. Enables monitoring (with plain language designations) over 25
essential controller parameters:
1. Preset Adjustments (displayed in percent)
a. Maximum Motor Speed
b. Minimum Motor Speed
c. Acceleration Rate
d. Deceleration Rate
e. I.R. Compensation
f. Current Limit
2. Reference Input (displayed in percent)
a. Speed Reference
b. Current Reference
70
Electrical Products Catalog
VED
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Options and Modifications for DC Controllers
Option
No.
Description
COMPUTER MONITOR (Continued)
VED
3. Membrane Operator Control Panel
a. Direction of Operation Selected
b. Speed Presets (displayed in percent)
c. Run Forward
d. Run Reverse
e. Jog Forward
f. Jog Reverse
A
4. Measured Dynamic Parameters (displayed in percent except as noted)
a. Armature Voltage
b. Armature Current
c. Counter EMF
d. Tachometer (Optional) Input
e. Speed Feedback
f. Current Offset
g. Line Frequency (displayed in Hz)
h. Error Bus Data
i. Tachometer Offset
j. Input Status (Bit Parameters)
k. Motor Status (Bit Parameters)
l. Error Flags–First Fault Annunciator
See option 44 for parameters monitored
5. Fault Description – See Option 44 for Error Code and parameters monitored.
Output is an optically coupled and isolated RS232/RS422 link limited to a maximum distance of 50 feet (RS232) or 4000
feet (RS422). Operation is at 2.4K baud which provides an update approximately every two (2) seconds.
The option includes an option circuit board and either a 3 1/2” or 5 1/4” floppy disk containing the required software. The
option board mounts in a slot located within the VED Series chassis which is connected to the controller via a dedicated
serial port connector provided for this purpose.
This is a read only monitor. See Option 22L when the ability to also control the unit from a computer is desired.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
55
For Use
with
Series
Electrical Products Catalog
71
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
NOTES
A
72
Electrical Products Catalog
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
B
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Adjustable Frequency
AC Motor Controllers
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPECIFICATION CHART ...............................................................................................................74
BCX, AC INVERTER .................................................................................................................75-79
ACX, AC INVERTER .................................................................................................................80-87
ADX, AC INVERTER ...............................................................................................................89-101
SSX, SOFT-START CONTROLLERS ...................................................................................102-104
OPTIONS FOR AC CONTROLLERS ....................................................................................105-107
APPLICATION ENGINEERING .............................................................................................175-189
Electrical Products Catalog
73
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Adjustable Frequency
AC Motor Controllers
Specification
Chart
The purpose of this chart is to provide a general feature comparison of the Boston Gear controllers. When selecting refer to the
specific catalog section for complete information.
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Maximum HP
@ AC Line
BCX
1
2
5
5
S
ACX
1
5
30
75
S
ADX
30
75
S
S
S
Input
Phase (Hz)
50/60
50/60
50/60
Output
Frequency
Input Speed
Resolution
V/F Ratios
Braking
Range (Hz)
0-120
0-400
0-400
0.2
.03
.01
21
20
O
S
S
3
50-200
0.1-999
0.1-999
S
S
6
3-LEDS
.015
.006
22
20
O
S
S
3
20-250%
0-1900
0-1900
0-400
S
S
10
2 X 16 LCD
Functions
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
B
Controller Type
Features
115 Single Phase
230 Single Phase
230 Three Phase
460 Three Phase
V/F (Volts/Frequency)
Encodorless
Flux Vector
Isolated Regulator
Microprocessor Based
Keypad
Remote Keypad Cable
Protection
Programmable
Functions
Enclosure
Error Messages
Output Speed
Display
Serial Ports
Pages
Resolution (Hz) Analog
Digital
Regenerative (%)
Electronic (%)
Ramp-To-Stop
Coast-To-Stop
Jump Frequencies
Current Limit (%)
Acceleration (Sec)
Deceleration (Sec)
Jog Frequency (Hz)
75-150
0.1-100
0.1-100
S
Buttons (#)
Display
Trip
Stall
Instantaneous Power Failure
Phase-To-Phase
Ground Fault
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
46
S
S
S
S
S
403
NEMA 1
NEMA 4
NEMA 12
S
S
S
S
6
13
S
24
S
15
80-87
S
89-101
RS485
S - Standard
O - Optional
74
3
20
O
S
S
Electrical Products Catalog
75-79
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
®
BCX Series
1/6 – 5 Horsepower
230 and 460 VAC
The BCX Series micro-controllers are OEM designed
microprocessor based units providing the ultimate
combination of inverter technology, simplicity and affordability.
The BCX utilizes surface mount and IGBT technologies to
provide a compact low cost AC controller. The BCX offers an
unbeatable package of size, price and flexibility to suit your
application: whether converting fixed speed to adjustable
speed, replacing an existing AC inverter, or as an alternative
to a motor starter.
DESIGN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS
1. Construction – Furnished in a rugged NEMA 1 (UL Type
1) ventilated enclosure. The unit consists of four primary
components: (1) an aluminum heatsink, (2) a power cube
assembly, (3) an integrated logic/power board and (4) the
non-metallic housing. The three phase BCX is selfcooling at 2 HP, 230 VAC and 5 HP, 460 VAC and below.
Units above these ratings are fan cooled.
2. Microprocessor Design – The BCX utilizes a powerful
16-bit microprocessor for logic and regulator functions.
3. Power Devices – The BCX incorporates state-of-the-art
insulated gate bi-polar transistor (IGBT) output power
switches. IGBTs require less gate drive power which
reduces the internal temperature of the drive. Fast turn off
prevents damage in the event of an output short circuit.
4. PWM Modulation Technique – The BCX controllers utilize
a modified voltage vector modulation for smooth motor
operation. Asynchronous modulation eliminates the “gear
shifting” sound made by AC drives using older technology.
5. Acceleration/Deceleration Adjustment – A common
accel/decel adjustment potentiometer is provided for
acceleration and deceleration time adjustment.
6. Status LEDs – Two LEDs are provided for drive status
indication. The yellow LED lights when power is applied
to the unit. The red LED lights in the event of a pending
overload or flashes in the event of a fault.
7. Speed Potentiometer – A 5K ohm speed control
potentiometer is supplied loose for customer mounting
on the cover of the BCX control.
8. Control Power Supply – A +5VDC non-isolated power
supply is provided for pushbuttons and external Run-Stop
logic.
9. Power Loss Ride-Through – The BCX can maintain
motor control during periods of input power loss for a
minimum of 0.1 seconds.
10. Line Starting Capability – Causes the motor to start
upon application of power to the drive.
11. AC Line Voltage Compensation – Holds output voltage
constant with rated line voltage variations when output
voltage is less than line voltage (10% line voltage
variation causes 1% output voltage variation).
12. Multiple Motor Operation – The BCX is capable of
operating multiple motors at a common frequency. Total
amp draw of the motors cannot exceed the controller’s
rating.
Constant Torque
Constant HP
13. Volts/Hertz Pat120
terns – The chart
100
at right shows the
80
Volts per Hertz
60
60 Hz
Patterns avail50 Hz
able when the FC
40
(Frequency Cali20
bration) Potentio0
meter is adjusted
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
for 50 to 120 Hz
Frequency
operation. The
VOLTS PER HERTZ PATTERNS
drive will operate
in the Constant Torque mode when the FC Potentiometer is
set for a maximum frequency less than 60 Hz. When the
FC Potentiometer is adjusted for a frequency greater than
60 Hz, the drive will operate in the Constant Torque mode
from 0 to 60 Hz and will operate in the Constant HP mode
at frequencies above 60 Hz.
Voltage (Percent)
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Single and Three Phase Adjustable Frequency
AC Motor Controller
14. Electronic Inverse Time Motor Overload Protection –
The threshold for overload protection is 83% of the
current limit setting. The overload time is fixed at 60
seconds in current limit.
15. Protective Features –
A. Inverter Trip: Due to overvoltage, overcurrent,
undervoltage, overload or a logic fault.
B. Output Fault Protection: The unit is protected from
line-to-line output short circuits.
C. Instantaneous Power Failure: The unit will shut down
safely after a power loss greater than approximately 0.1
second. If power is restored within 1 second, the drive
will restart.
D. Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection:
Electronic shutdown when the bus voltage is outside
normal operating conditions.
16. Fault Trip Reset – Faults are cleared on the BCX by (a)
removing and then reapplying AC power, (b) pressing
the stop button (if used), or (c) opening and closing a
maintained run contact (if used).
17. Fuse Protection – An external AC line fused disconnect
or circuit breaker must be provided by the user in
accordance with electrical codes.
Electrical Products Catalog
75
B
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single and Three Phase Adjustable Frequency
AC Motor Controller
BCX Series
1/6 – 5 Horsepower
230 and 460 VAC
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
DESIGN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS (Continued)
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
B
18. Regeneration Limit – Designed to eliminate drive trips
when excessive braking energy is transferred from the
motor to the control. Regeneration limit will perform in
the following fashion:
All inputs are designed to be used with the +5VDC
(non-isolated) control voltage supplied by the BCX. The
BCX can be started and stopped by maintained dry
circuit contacts.
(a) Will extend decel time to prevent bus overvoltage trip
with high inertia loads.
21. Current Limit – Limits the motor output current to
prevent overcurrent trips during acceleration. The
current limit is adjustable from 75% to 150% of the rated
motor full load current.
(b) Will increase output frequency to user programmed
maximum frequency range during overhauling loads.
19. Analog Signal Inputs – One analog signal input is
provided. The associated external signals may not be
grounded or connected to other equipment because the
drive common is not isolated from the AC line.
20. Digital Control Inputs – Two digital inputs are provided
for the following functions.
22. Drive OK Relay Contact– The BCX includes a drive
OK relay contact which is closed whenever power is
applied to the control and the drive is not faulted. The
contact opens when power is removed and the DC bus
voltage drops below the minimum bus voltage for drive
operation. The contact also will open if the controller
should fault.
(a) Forward
(b) Reverse/Stop (Programmable via jumper)
RATINGS
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
1. Horsepower Range:
115 VAC Single Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1/6-1 HP(1)
208/230 VAC Single Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1/6-2 HP
208/230 VAC Three Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1/6-5 HP
460 VAC Three Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5 HP
2. Power Source:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 VAC, 1 Phase 50/60 Hz(1)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208/230 VAC, 1 or 3 Phase 50/60 Hz
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460 VAC, 3 Phase 50/60 Hz
3. Output Power:
(a) Voltage . . . . . . . .0 – 208/230 or 0 – 460, Three Phase
(b) Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-60 Hz Constant Torque
60-120 Hz Constant Horsepower
4. Service Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.0
5. Duty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Industrial, Continuous
6. Overload Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150% for 1 Minute
7. Linearity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .±1.0% Maximum
8. Analog Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+5 VDC
(for 5K ohm pot, non-isolated)
9. External Analog Reference Source (2) . . . . .0 – 5 VDC
10. Magnetic (Pushbutton) Control Voltage . . . . . .5 VDC
`
(non-isolated)
11. Storage Temperature . . . . . . .32° – 168°F (0° – 70°C)
1. Controlled Speed Range – Zero to motor base speed,
constant or variable torque with NEMA design B AC
induction motors.
Notes:
(1) Optional voltage doubler (2XV) required for 115 VAC operation
(2) External control signals must be ungrounded and not
connected to other equipment (drive common is not isolated
from the AC line input).
76
Electrical Products Catalog
2. Speed Regulation – Regulation percentages listed in
Table are of motor rated (base) speed under steady-state
operating conditions.
SPEED REGULATION CHARACTERISTICS(1)
Regulation
Method
Load
Change
95%
Line
Voltage
±10%
Motor Heating
Cold to
Normal
Temperature
±10°C
Normal
3.0%
±0.5%
1.0%
±0.5%
(1) Average expected values are dependent upon individual motor
characteristics.
3. Frequency Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . .0.2% of Maximum
Frequency
4. Frequency Stability . . . . . ±1% of Maximum Frequency
(or better)
5. Efficiency (at rated speed, rated load):
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95%
Control and Motor
(assumes 89% motor efficiency) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85%
(assumes 93% motor efficiency) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88%
6. Displacement Power Factor . . . . . . .Greater than 96%
7. Torque . . . . . . . . .Minimum developed torque under any
operating condition will not be less than 150%
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single and Three Phase Adjustable Frequency
AC Motor Controller
ADJUSTMENTS
OPERATING CONDITIONS
All adjustments are performed utilizing potentiometers.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1. Acceleration/Deceleration (linear) . . .0.1 – 100 Seconds
2. Maximum Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 – 120 Hz(1)
3. Current (Torque) Limit . . . . . . . . . .75 – 150% of Rated
(1)
Line Voltage Variation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .±10% Rated
Line Frequency Variation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .± 2 Hz
Ambient Temperature . . . . . . .32° to 104°F (0° – 40°C)
Ambient Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . .95% Non-condensing
Altitude (Standard) . .3300 Feet (1000 meters) Maximum
50 – 60 Hz Constant Torque, 60 – 120 Hz Constant Horsepower.
TYPICAL APPLICATION DATA
SINGLE PHASE 115/208/230 VAC INPUT
Controller
Motor
208 VAC
115 VAC
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
BCX Series
1/6 – 5 Horsepower
230 and 460 VAC
HP
KW
1/6
1/4
1/3
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/2
2
0.12
0.19
0.25
0.37
0.56
0.75
1.12
1.50
Input
Amps
KVA
BCX2003
AND
2XV-03
BCX2010
AND
2XV-10
—
—
KVA
Input
Amps
0.42
0.52
0.71
0.99
1.54
2.00
2.91
3.58
2.0
2.5
3.4
4.8
7.4
9.6
14.0
17.2
230 VAC
Output
Amps*
0.94
1.5
2.0
2.2
3.1
3.9
5.7
7.5
KVA
Input
Amps
Output
Amps*
0.44
0.55
0.76
1.10
1.54
2.00
2.92
3.57
1.9
2.4
3.3
4.8
6.7
8.7
12.7
15.5
0.85
1.4
1.8
2.0
2.8
3.6
5.2
6.8
B
Catalog
Number
BCX2003
BCX2010
BCX2015
BCX2020
BCX2030
BCX2050
*3-Phase output
THREE PHASE 460 VAC INPUT
THREE PHASE 208/230 VAC INPUT
Controller
Motor
Output
Amps
Controller
Motor
460 VAC
230 VAC
208 VAC
HP
KW
KVA
Input
Amps
KVA
Input
Amps
Output
Amps
1/6
0.12
0.50
1.4
0.94
0.56
1.4
0.85
1/4
0.19
0.58
1.6
1.5
0.64
1.6
1.4
1/3
0.25
0.79
2.2
2.0
0.88
2.2
1.8
1/2
0.37
1.01
2.8
2.2
1.12
2.8
2.0
3/4
0.56
1.44
4.0
3.1
1.59
4.0
2.8
1
0.75
1.73
4.8
3.9
1.83
4.6
3.6
Catalog
Number
BCX2003
BCX2010
1 1/2
1.12
2.77
7.7
5.7
2.79
7.0
5.2
BCX2015
2
1.50
3.39
9.4
7.5
3.39
8.5
6.8
BCX2020
3
2.24
5.12
14.2
10.6
5.10
12.8
9.6
BCX2030
5
3.73
8.50
23.6
16.7
8.49
21.3
15.2
BCX2050
HP
KW
KVA
Input
Amps
Output
Amps
Catalog
Number
1
0.75
1.91
2.4
1.8
1 1/2
1.12
2.79
3.5
2.6
BCX4015
2
1.50
3.43
4.3
3.4
BCX4020
3
2.24
5.10
6.4
4.8
BCX4030
5
3.73
8.53
10.7
7.6
BCX4050
Electrical Products Catalog
BCX4010
77
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single and Three Phase Adjustable Frequency
AC Motor Controller
BCX Series
1/6 – 5 Horsepower
230 and 460 VAC
DIMENSIONS
Ø 0.19
WIDE SLOT
4.625
1 - 5 HP,
460 VAC
1/6 -1 HP,
230 VAC
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
5.72 5.31
7.00 7.50
MTG.
Ø 0.19
TYP 2PL
3.75 Deep
1.25
0.22
.025
TYP 4PL
0.19
2.44
2.94
B
Weight 1.5 lbs
1/2 IN CONDUIT
3PL
TERMINAL
COVER
PRESS HERE TO OPEN
6.25
3.50
CL
2.00
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
7.25
1 1/2-5 HP,
230 VAC
2.00
Weight 5.6 lbs
MODEL TYPES
The BCX Series of controllers are offered as a NEMA 1 enclosed controller. These units are available in either 115 VAC (with
voltage doubler), 208/230 VAC or 460 VAC input voltages covering a range of 1/6 to 5 HP as shown below.
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
Motor
Input
Voltage
115 VAC
Single Phase
50/60 Hz
208/230 VAC
Single Phase
50/60 Hz
208/230 VAC
Three Phase
50/60 Hz
460 VAC
Three Phase
50/60 Hz
Rated Output
Amps (2)
208 VAC
230 VAC
HP
Max.
KW
1/6-1/3(1)
0.25
2.0
1.8
1/2-1(1)
0.75
3.9
3.6
1/6-1/3
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/2
2
1/6-1/3
1/2-1
1 1/2
2
3
5
0.25
0.37
0.56
0.75
1.12
1.50
0.25
0.75
1.12
1.50
2.24
3.73
2.0
2.2
3.1
3.9
5.7
7.5
2.0
3.9
5.7
7.5
10.6
16.7
1
1 1/2
2
3
5
0.75
1.12
1.50
2.24
3.73
1.8
2.0
2.8
3.6
5.2
6.8
1.8
3.6
5.2
6.8
9.6
15.2
460 VAC
1.8
2.6
3.4
4.8
7.6
(1) For HP/Voltage rating shown, both the controller and option are required.
(2) At maximum horsepower rating
78
Electrical Products Catalog
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
BCX2003
and 2XV-03
BCX2010
and 2XV-10
BCX2003
BCX2010
BCX2015
BCX2020
BCX2030
BCX2050
BCX2003
BCX2010
BCX2015
BCX2020
BCX2030
BCX2050
08106
and 58575
08108
and 58576
08106
08108
07152
07154
07156
07170
08106
08108
07152
07154
07156
07170
BCX4010
BCX4015
BCX4020
BCX4030
BCX4050
07176
85459
07193
07203
07206
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single and Three Phase Adjustable Frequency
AC Motor Controller
BCX Series
1/6 – 5 Horsepower
230 and 460 VAC
OPTIONS
Complete option descriptions are listed in the AC option section. To order a kit for field installation order by the item code.
Option
Din Rail Mounting Kit
Conduit Box
Magnetic Bypass
AC Line Circuit Breaker with Handle
AC Line Contactor
Motor Contactor
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Voltage Doubler
Overload Relay
HAND-OFF-AUTO Switch
Input Line Chokes (Open)
Input Line Chokes (Enclosed)
Output Line Filter (Open)
Output Line Filter (Enclosed)
Electronic Braking
RUN/STOP Switch
Washdown Duty Integral Operator Controls
Washdown Duty without Operator Controls
Voltage and Horsepower
230 VAC
1/6 -1
230 VAC
1/6 -1
1/6 - 1/3
230 VAC
1/2 - 1
1 1/2
2
230 VAC
3
5
1
1 1/2
460 VAC
2
3
5
1-2
230 VAC
3-5
460 VAC
1-5
1 1/2 - 2
230 VAC
3-5
460 VAC
1-5
1 1/2 - 2
230 VAC
3-5
460 VAC
1-5
1 1/2
2
230 VAC
3
5
1
1 1/2
460 VAC
2
3-5
230 VAC
1 1/2 - 5
460 VAC
1-5
1-2
230 VAC
3
5
1 - 1 1/2
460 VAC
2-3
5
1-2
230 VAC
3
5
1 - 1 1/2
460 VAC
2-3
5
1-2
460 VAC
3-5
1-2
460 VAC
3-5
1 1/2
2
230 VAC
3
5
1
1 1/2
460 VAC
2
3
5
ALL
ALL
Option Number
DIN
WBX-B
2XV-03(1)
2XV-10(1)
MB(1)
CBH(1)
LC(1)
MC(1)
OR(1)
HOA
Field Kit Item Code
58572
84255
58575
57576
18392
18393
18394
18395
18398
18399
18400
18401
18402
18405
18406
18405
18407
18408
18407
18409
18410
18409
18414
18416
18417
18418
18413
18415
18414
18416
18421
RSS
18422
18423
18424
18427
18428
18429
18432
18433
18434
18437
18438
18439
18442
18443
18445
18446
18449
18450
18451
18452
18455
18456
18457
18458
18459
58578
LCO(1)
LCE(1)
LFO(1)
LFE(1)
EB(1)
B
ALL
ALL
WD
CF
ALL
ALL
WDB
CF
(1) Provided as a separate assembly for customer mounting and connections.
Electrical Products Catalog
79
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single and Three Phase Adjustable Frequency
AC Motor Controller
ACX Series
1/6 – 75 Horsepower
230 and 460 VAC
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
The ACX Series micro-controllers are OEM
designed, microprocessor based software controlled
units representing the latest advances in AC drive
technology. The ACX couples state of the art
inverter technology with simple easy-to-use features,
providing a compact affordable AC drive. With the
capabilities of drives costing hundreds of dollars
more, the ACX is suitable for any OEM budget.
These controllers are UL and cUL certified. Also,
they include the CE mark through 10 horsepower.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
B
DESIGN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS
1. Construction – Furnished in a rugged NEMA 1
ventilated enclosure or a NEMA 4 washdown
enclosure. The unit consists of five primary
components: (1) an aluminum heatsink, (2) a power
cube assembly, (3) a power board, (4) an integrated
logic board and (5) the non-metallic housing which
contains a membrane keypad. Power connections are
easily accessible via a removable panel located at the
bottom of the unit. The three phase ACX units are selfcooling at 2HP, 230 VAC and 5HP, 460 VAC and below.
Units above these ratings are fan cooled.
2. Microprocessor Design – The ACX utilizes a powerful
16-bit microprocessor for logic, communications and
regulator functions.
3. Power Devices – The ACX incorporates state-of-the-art
insulated gate bi-polar transistor (IGBT) output power
switches. IGBTs require less gate drive power which
reduces the internal temperature of the drive. Fast turn
off prevents damage in the event of an output short
circuit.
B. Keypad: 6 tactile feedback buttons are provided for
programming and local operator control.
1. FWD – Provides forward run function.
2. REV – When enabled, will provide reverse run
function (may be enabled or disabled by
programming the Reverse Enable Parameter).
3. STOP (controlled) – Local stop.
4. MODE – Monitor (displays parameter value),
Parameter Selection (selects a parameter to
edit), Data Entry (edits a parameter value).
5. Up Arrow – Increments upward to desired
data to be set; allows parameter values to be
changed; increases motor speed in the run
mode; moves within display and trip modes.
6. Down Arrow – Increments downward to
desired data to be set; allows parameter values
to be changed; decreases motor speed in the
run mode; moves within display and trip modes.
4. PWM Modulation Technique – The ACX controllers
utilize a modified voltage vector modulation for smooth
motor operation. Asynchronous modulation eliminates
the “gear shifting” sound made by AC drives using older
technology.
5. Operator Panel – ACX units include a versatile digital
control panel mounted on the front cover of the
controller. The panel includes a membrane keypad and
an LED display for set-up and monitoring of all controller
functions, operating parameters, and self diagnostics.
The panel is also used as a local operator control
station.
A. Display: 3-digit, 7-segment alphanumeric LED panel
displays motor speed and indicates all programmable
functions and faults.
80
Electrical Products Catalog
ACX KEYPAD
C. Security Code: All ACX adjustments may be
protected by a password access scheme at the owner’s
discretion. Once the password has been entered, the
user may adjust any drive parameter. The user may
adjust certain parameters (such as run speed) without
entering a password. If desired, the user may program
password protection for all drive parameters.
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single and Three Phase Adjustable Frequency
AC Motor Controller
ACX Series
1/6 – 75 Horsepower
230 and 460 VAC
DESIGN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS (Continued)
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
C. Data Entry Mode: Allows parameter values to be
changed by the up/down keys. If the parameter is
editable, the decimal point will flash at a 1 second rate.
Editing data is always terminated by pressing the Mode
key. Data may not be edited when: (1) the data is read
only, (2) operating conditions are such that it is not safe
or technically impossible, (3) during a fault condition, or
(4) when password protection has been activated.
7. Non-Volatile Parameter Storage – User parameter
settings are stored permanently in memory (EEPROM).
The user must save the parameters for these settings to
be maintained when power is removed from the ACX.
8. Control Power Supply – A +24VDC isolated power supply
is provided for pushbuttons and external Run-Stop logic.
9. Power Loss Ride-Through – The ACX can maintain motor
control during periods of input power loss for a minimum of
0.1 seconds.
10. Automatic Restart – The ACX can be programmed to
automatically restart after any drive fault. This feature
allows the user to program the number of restart tries as
well as the elapsed time between these tries. The ACX
must be configured for Line Starting for automatic restart
to function properly.
11. Line Starting Capability – Causes the motor to start
upon application of power to the drive.
12. Start Into a Rotating Motor – When programmed for
this mode of operation, the ACX can start while the motor
is still spinning. The drive will not trip and the motor will
not necessarily be brought to zero speed. The connected
inertia may not exceed 5 times the rotor inertia for this
feature to operate correctly.
13. Resonant Frequency Avoidance – The ACX can be
programmed to accelerate or decelerate through, but not
continuously run at certain frequencies that may cause
mechanical and or acoustic resonance. The avoidance
point may be programmed by setting a center point and
band width. Up to three points may be programmed.
100
BOOST
B. Parameter Selection Mode: Entered from the Monitor
Mode by pressing the Mode key once. The LED panel
will display a “P” followed by a two digit number. The up
and down arrows allow the parameter number to be
changed.
16. Torque Boost –
Improves torque
capacity at lower
speeds. ACX torque
boost provides a
programmable
boost level for optimal starting performance.
% VOLTS
A. Monitor Mode: Will display but not change
parameters. Allows the user to monitor all of the drive
parameters and conditions. The up/down arrow keys
will function as a digital speed pot if enabled. The
rate at which the run speed command is changed in
this mode is controlled by the acceleration and
deceleration time parameters.
15. Multiple Motor Operation – The ACX is capable of
operating multiple motors at a common frequency. Total
Amp draw of the motors cannot exceed the controller's
rating.
LEVEL
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
6. Operating Modes – The ACX provides three basic
operating modes selectable via the operator panel.
10
20
30
40
50
60
"0" BOOST SPEED
17. D C I n j e c t i o n
HERTZ
Braking – This
FIGURE
3.
TORQUE
BOOST
feature is adjustable for activation
on start, stop, or start and stop and is programmed by
setting a braking level and time period.
18. Volts/Hertz Adjustment – Volts/Hertz may be trimmed
to ±20% of nominal.
19. Volts/Hertz Patterns – 21 pre-programmed patterns are
provided as shown in the tables below. They provide
constant horsepower and/or constant torque patterns for
a wide range of applications.
Pattern
Number
0
1*
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Frequency At
Full Output
Voltage
50
60
90
120
180
240
400
50
60
60
60
Maximum
Frequency
50
60
90
120
180
240
400
55
66
90
120
Pattern
Number
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Frequency At
Full Output Voltage
60
60
60
90
90
90
90
120
120 120
Maximum
Frequency
180 240
400
120
180
240
400 180
240 400
*Factory Default
20. Slip Compensation – Programmable slip compensation
is provided to correct for induction motor speed droop or
slip and thereby improve speed regulation.
21. Electronic Inverse Time Motor Overload Protection –
Provides a programmable threshold and time to trip to
reduce the potential of costly motor damage.
22. Static Reversing Control – Contactorless reversing is a
standard capability and is enabled via parameter
selection. Direction may also be selected by external
control contacts.
14. AC Line Voltage Compensation – Holds output voltage
constant with rated line voltage variations when output
voltage is less than line voltage (10% line voltage
variation causes 1% output voltage variation).
Electrical Products Catalog
81
B
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single and Three Phase Adjustable Frequency
AC Motor Controller
ACX Series
1/6 – 75 Horsepower
230 and 460 VAC
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
DESIGN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS (Continued)
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
B
23. Protective Features –
A. Inverter Trip: Due to overvoltage, overcurrent,
undervoltage, overload and CPU error.
B. Output Fault Protection: The unit is protected from
line-to-line output short circuits. Also, models with a
“WD” suffix have line to ground output protection as
well.
C. Instantaneous Power Failure: The unit will shut
down safely after a power loss greater than
approximately 0.1 second. The ACX will automatically
restart if power is restored within one second.
D. Overvoltage and Undervoltage Protection:
Electronic shutdown when the bus voltage is outside
normal operating limits.
24. Fault Trip Reset – Faults are cleared on the ACX by (a)
pressing the stop button, (b) opening and closing a maintained
run contact, or (c) removing and then reapplying AC power.
25. Fuse Protection – An external AC line fused disconnect
or circuit breaker must be provided by the user in
accordance with electrical codes.
26. Regeneration Limit – Designed to eliminate drive trips
when excessive braking energy is transferred from the
motor to the control. Regeneration limit will perform in
the following fashion:
(a) Will extend decel time to prevent bus overvoltage
trip with high inertia loads.
(b) Will increase output frequency to user programmed
maximum frequency range during overhauling loads.
27. Analog Signal Inputs – One analog signal input is
provided. The associated external signals may be
grounded or ungrounded. This input is programmable for
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
the following functions:
(a) Run Speed Command
(b) Current Limit
(c) None (input is unused)
Digital Control Inputs – Two digital inputs are provided,
programmable for the following functions.
(a) Forward
(b) Reverse
(c) Stop
(d) Preset Speed Selection
All inputs are designed to be used with the +24 VDC
control voltage supplied by the ACX. The ACX can be
started and stopped by either maintained contacts or
momentary pushbuttons.
Current Limit – Limits the motor output current to prevent
overcurrent trips during acceleration. The current limit is
adjustable from 50% to 200% of the rated motor full load
current.
Programmable Stopping Modes – The ACX can be
programmed for controlled stop (using deceleration time
control) or coast-to-stop operation.
Preset Speeds – The ACX can be programmed to
operate in the forward direction at up to three preset
speeds selected by two programmable digital inputs.
Drive OK Relay Contact – The ACX includes a drive OK
relay contact which is closed whenever power is applied
to the control and the drive is not faulted. The contact
opens when power is removed and the DC bus voltage
drops below the minimum bus voltage for drive operation.
The contact also will open if the controller should fault.
Electronic Braking – The ACX has an option to add an
external braking resistor and circuitry for increased
motor braking torque. (Units sized 1-1/2 HP, 230 VAC
and 1HP, 460 VAC and greater)
RATINGS
1. Horsepower Range:
115 VAC Single Phase . . . . . . . . . . . .(input) 1/6-1 HP(1)
208/230 VAC Single Phase . . . . . . . . . .(input) 1/6-5 HP
208/230 VAC Three Phase . . . . . . . . .(input) 1/6-30 HP
460 VAC Three Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-75 HP
2. Power Source:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 VAC, 1 Phase 50/60 Hz(1)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208/230 VAC, 1 or 3 Phase 50/60 Hz
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 VAC, 3 Phase 50/60 Hz
3. Output Power
(a) Voltage . . . . . .0 - 208/230 or 0 - 460, Three Phase
(b) Frequency . . .0 - 400 Hz Constant Torque/Constant Horsepower
4. Service Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.0
5. Duty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Industrial, Continuous
6. Overload Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150% for 1 Minute
7. Linearity
(a) Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .±0.1% Maximum
(b) Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .±1.0% Maximum
8. Analog Reference(2) . . . . . .+10 VDC (for 5K ohm load)
82
Electrical Products Catalog
9. External Analog Reference Source . . . . .0 – 10 VDC,
4 - 20 mA (requires external 500 ohm resistor)
10. Magnetic (Pushbutton) Control Voltage . . .+24 VDC
11. Storage Temperature . . . . . .32° – 168° F (0° – 70°C)
(1) Optional voltage doubler (2XV) required for 115 VAC operation.
(2) An isolated reference. External control signals may be grounded or
ungrounded. Offset and scaling are programmable.
ADJUSTMENTS
All adjustments are programmed using the standard,
integral operator keypad.
1. Acceleration (linear or S-curve)
(a) Linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.1 to 999 Seconds
(b) S-curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.0 to 150 Seconds
2. Deceleration (linear or S-curve)
(a) Linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.1 to 999 Seconds
(b) S-curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.0 to 150 Seconds
3. Minimum Speed . . . . . . . .0 – 75% of Maximum Speed
4. Maximum Speed . . . .50 –100% of Motor Base Speed
5. Current (Torque) Limit . . . . . . . . .50 – 200% of Rated
6. Low Frequency Voltage Boost . . . . . . . . . . . .0 – 30%
7. Slip Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 – 100%
8. Volts/Hertz Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .±20% of Nominal
9. Preset Speeds, 3 Provided . . . . . . . .0 – 100% Speed
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single and Three Phase Adjustable Frequency
AC Motor Controller
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
Controlled Speed Range – Zero to motor base speed,
constant or variable torque with NEMA design B AC induction
motors. Constant horsepower is also programmable.
2. Speed Regulation – Regulation percentages listed in Table
are of motor rated (base) speed under steady-state
operating conditions.
SPEED REGULATION CHARACTERISTICS (1)
Change
SYNCHRONOUS
95%
Load
Voltage
±10%
Line
Cold to
Normal
Motor Heating
Temperature
±10°C
3.0%
0.0%
1.0%
±0.5%
±0.0%
±0.5%
1.0%
0.0%
1.0%
±0.5%
±0.5%
±0.5%
Motor Type
Regulation
Method
NEMA B
X
Normal
X
Slip Comp.
X
3. Frequency Resolution:
Digital Input . . . . . . . .0.01% of Maximum Frequency
Analog Input . . . . . . .0.03% of Maximum Frequency
4. Frequency Stability:
Digital . . . . . . . . . . . . .±0.5% of Set Point (or better)
Analog . . . . .±1% of Maximum Frequency (or better)
5. Efficiency (at rated speed, rated load):
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95%
Control and Motor (assumes 89% motor efficiency)85%
(assumes 93% motor efficiency)88%
6. Displacement Power Factor . . . . . .Greater than 96%
7. Torque . . . . . . . . .Minimum developed torque under any
operating condition will not be less than 150%
OPERATING CONDITIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
(1) Average expected values are dependent upon individual motor
characteristics.
Line Voltage Variation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .±10% Rated
Line Frequency Variation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .±2 Hz
Ambient Temperature . . . . . .32° to 104°F (0° – 40°C)
Ambient Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . .95% Non-condensing
Altitude (Standard) 3300 Feet (1000 meters) Maximum
TYPICAL APPLICATION DATA
SINGLE-PHASE 115/208/230 VAC INPUT
Controller
Motor
115 VAC
208 VAC
Input
KVA
Amps
ACX2003
and
2XV-03
Input
Amps
2.0
2.5
3.4
4.8
7.4
9.6
14.0
17.2
25.7
42.9
230 VAC
Catalog
Number
(NEMA 1)
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
1.
ACX Series
1/6 – 75 Horsepower
230 and 460 VAC
HP
KW
1/6
1/4
1/3
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/2
2
3
5
0.12
0.19
0.25
0.37
0.56
0.75
1.12
1.50
2.24
3.73
ACX2010
and
2XV-10
—
—
—
—
KVA
0.42
0.52
0.71
0.99
1.54
2.00
2.91
3.58
5.35
8.92
Output
Amps*
0.94
1.5
2.0
2.2
3.1
3.9
5.7
7.5
10.6
16.7
Input
Amps
1.9
2.4
3.3
4.8
6.7
8.7
12.7
15.5
23.3
38.8
KVA
0.44
0.55
0.76
1.10
1.54
2.00
2.92
3.57
5.36
8.92
Output
Amps*
0.85
1.4
1.8
2.0
2.8
3.6
5.2
6.8
9.6
15.2
ACX2003
ACX2010
ACX2015
ACX2020
ACX2030
ACX2050
ACX2075
ACX2100
Catalog
Number
(NEMA 4)
ACX2005-WD
ACX2010-WD
ACX2015-WD
ACX2020-WD
ACX2030-WD
ACX2050-WD
ACX2075-WD
ACX2100-WD
*3-phase output
THREE-PHASE 208/230 VAC INPUT
THREE-PHASE 460 VAC INPUT
Controller
Motor
HP
KW
Input Output
KVA Amps Amps KVA
Catalog
Input Output Number
Amps Amps (NEMA 1)
1/6
1/4
1/3
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/2
2
3
5
7 1/2
10
15
20
25
30
0.12
0.19
0.25
0.37
0.56
0.75
1.12
1.50
2.24
3.73
5.60
7.46
11.2
14.9
18.6
22.4
0.50 1.4
0.58 1.6
0.79 2.2
1.01 2.8
1.44 4.0
1.73 4.8
2.77 7.7
3.39 9.4
5.12 14.2
8.50 23.6
12.6 35.0
16.6 46.1
24.1 67.2
32.3 89.6
39.9 111.0
47.9 133.0
1.4
1.6
2.2
2.8
4.0
4.6
7.0
8.5
12.8
21.3
31.6
41.7
60.8
81.1
100.0
120.0
0.94
1.5
2.0
2.2
3.1
3.9
5.7
7.5
10.6
16.7
24.2
30.8
46.2
59.4
74.8
88.0
0.56
0.64
0.88
1.12
1.59
1.83
2.79
3.39
5.10
8.49
12.6
16.6
24.2
32.3
39.9
47.9
0.85
1.4
1.8
2.0
2.8
3.6
5.2
6.8
9.6
15.2
22.0
28.0
42.0
54.0
68.0
80.0
Controller
Motor
230 VAC
208 VAC
ACX2003
ACX2010
ACX2015
ACX2020
ACX2030
ACX2050
ACX2075
ACX2100
ACX2150
ACX2200
ACX2250
ACX2300
Catalog
Number
(NEMA 4)
ACX2005-WD
ACX2010-WD
ACX2015-WD
ACX2020-WD
ACX2030-WD
ACX2050-WD
ACX2075-WD
ACX2100-WD
ACX2150-WD
ACX2200-WD
–
–
460 VAC
HP
KW
KVA
1
1 1/2
2
3
5
7 1/2
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
0.75
1.12
1.50
2.24
3.73
5.60
7.46
11.2
14.9
18.6
22.4
29.8
37.3
44.8
56.0
1.91
2.79
3.43
5.10
8.53
12.7
16.6
24.9
31.6
39.7
47.6
63.5
79.0
94.8
118.0
Catalog
Input Output Number
Amps Amps (NEMA 1)
2.4
3.5
4.3
6.4
10.7
16.0
20.9
31.3
39.7
49.8
59.7
79.6
99.1
119
149
1.8
2.6
3.4
4.8
7.6
11.0
14.0
21
27
34
40
52
65
77
96
ACX4010
ACX4015
ACX4020
ACX4030
ACX4050
ACX4075
ACX4100
ACX4150
ACX4200
ACX4250
ACX4300
ACX4400
ACX4500
ACX4600
ACX4750
Catalog
Number
(NEMA 4)
ACX4010-WD
ACX4015-WD
ACX4020-WD
ACX4030-WD
ACX4050-WD
ACX4075-WD
ACX4100-WD
ACX4150-WD
ACX4200-WD
ACX4250-WD
ACX4300-WD
–
–
–
–
Electrical Products Catalog
83
B
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single and Three Phase Adjustable Frequency
AC Motor Controller
ACX Series
1/6 – 75 Horsepower
230 and 460 VAC
PARAMETERS
READ ONLY
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
PROGRAMMABLE
Password Entry
Run Speed Command
Minimum Speed
Maximum Speed
Acceleration Time
Deceleration Time
Motor Full Load Amps
Nominal Line Voltage
Save Parameters
Current Limit
Boost Level
Slip Compensation
Ramp Type
Analog Input Mode
Analog Input Invert
Run Speed Source
Current Limit Source
DC Injection Braking on Start
DC Injection Braking on Stop
DC Injection Braking Level
DC Injection Braking Time
Speed Avoidance Band #1
Speed Avoid Band #1 Width
Speed Avoidance Band #2
Speed Avoid Band #2 Width
Speed Avoidance Band #3
Speed Avoid Band #3 Width
Forward Enable
P28
P29
P30
P31
P32
P33
P34
P35
P36
P37
P38
P39
P40
P41
P42
P43
P44
P45
P46
P47
P48
P49
P94
P95
P96
P97
P98
P99
Reverse Enable
Remote Stop
Remote Maintained Run
Keypad Speed Adjust
Stopping Mode
Line Starting
Rotating Motor Starting
Overload Threshold
Overload Time
Restart Tries
Restart Window
Restart Delay
V/F Profile List
Volts Hertz
Preset Speed Enable
Preset Speed #1
Preset Speed #2
Preset Speed #3
Electronic Braking Enable
Analog Input Offset
Analog Input Trim
Keypad Run Enable
Start Delay
Monitor Parameter
Factory Preset
Reset Drive
Global Password
User Password
P50
P51
P52
P53
P54
P55
P56
P57
P58
P59
P60
P61
P62
P63
P64
P65
P66
P67
P68
P69
P70
P71
P72
P73
P74
P75
P76
P77
Frequency
Analog Input
Speed Command
Speed Operator Control
Final Speed Reference
Speed Accel/Decel
Speed Current Limit Input
Speed Correction
Final Speed Output
Voltage Volts Hertz Profile
Current Error
Motor Voltage
Bus Voltage
Bus Voltage
Bus Voltage Integrator
Motor Amps
Motor Amps
Current Setpoint
Current Limit Integrator
Slip Compensation Torque
Overload Integrator
Overload Trip
DC Injection Braking Timer
Disable Timer
Frequency Scale
PWM Frequency
PWM Voltage
Speed Search Volts/Hertz
P78
P79
P80
P81
P82
P83
P84
P85
P86
P87
Speed Search Timer
Match Speed
Fault Code
Start Again Timer
Digital Inputs
Last Digital Inputs
Logic State
Status
Status 2
Flags
MODEL TYPES
The ACX Series of controllers are offered as a NEMA 1 or NEMA 4 enclosed controllers. These units are available in either 115
VAC (with voltage doubler), 208/230 VAC or 460 VAC input voltages covering a range of 1/6 to 75 HP as shown.
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
Motor
Input
Voltage
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
B
P00
P01
P02
P03
P04
P05
P06
P07
P08
P09
P10
P11
P12
P13
P14
P15
P16
P17
P18
P19
P20
P21
P22
P23
P24
P25
P26
P27
115 VAC
Single Phase
50/60 Hz
208/230 VAC
Single Phase
50/60 Hz
208/230 VAC
Three Phase
50/60 Hz
460 VAC
Three Phase
50/60 Hz
Rated Output
Amps (2)
208 VAC
230 VAC
HP
Max.
KW
1/6-1/3(1)
0.25
2.0
1.8
1/2-1(1)
0.75
3.9
3.6
1/6-1/4
1/3
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/2
2
3
5
1/6-1/3
1/2
3/4-1
1 1/2
2
3
5
7 1/2
10
15
20
25
30
0.19
0.25
0.37
0.56
0.75
1.12
1.50
2.24
3.73
0.25
0.37
0.75
1.12
1.50
2.24
3.73
5.60
7.46
11.2
14.9
18.6
22.4
1.5
2.0
2.2
3.1
3.9
5.7
7.5
10.6
16.7
2.0
2.2
3.9
5.7
7.5
10.6
16.7
24.2
30.8
46.2
59.4
74.8
88
1.4
1.8
2.0
2.8
3.6
5.2
6.8
9.6
15.2
1.8
2.0
3.6
5.2
6.8
9.6
15.2
22.0
28.0
42
54
68
80
1
1 1/2
2
3
5
7 1/2
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
0.75
1.12
1.50
2.24
3.73
5.60
7.46
11.2
14.9
18.6
22.4
29.8
37.3
44.8
56.0
460 VAC
1.8
2.6
3.4
4.8
7.6
11.0
14.0
21.0
27
34
40
52
65
77
96
(1) For HP/Voltage rating shown, both the controller and option are required.
(2) At maximum horsepower rating.
84
Electrical Products Catalog
Catalog
Number
(NEMA 1)
Item
Code
ACX2003
and 2XV-03
ACX2010
and 2XV-10
08100
and 58575
08102
and 58576
ACX2003
08100
ACX2010
ACX2015
ACX2020
ACX2030
ACX2050
ACX2075
ACX2100
ACX2003
08102
07085
07086
07087
07097
07108
85455
08100
ACX2010
08102
ACX2015
ACX2020
ACX2030
ACX2050
ACX2075
ACX2100
ACX2150
ACX2200
ACX2250
ACX2300
ACX4010
ACX4015
ACX4020
ACX4030
ACX4050
ACX4075
ACX4100
ACX4150
ACX4200
ACX4250
ACX4300
ACX4400
ACX4500
ACX4600
ACX4750
Catalog
Number
(NEMA 4)
Item
Code
–
–
ACX2005-WD
63134
ACX2010-WD
63135
ACX2015-WD
ACX2020-WD
ACX2030-WD
ACX2050-WD
ACX2075-WD
ACX2100-WD
63136
63137
63138
63139
63140
63141
ACX2005-WD
63134
07085
07086
07087
07097
07108
85455
60537
60538
60539
60540
ACX2010-WD
ACX2015-WD
ACX2020-WD
ACX2030-WD
ACX2050-WD
ACX2075-WD
ACX2100-WD
ACX2150-WD
ACX2200-WD
–
–
63135
63136
63137
63138
63139
63140
63141
63142
63143
–
–
07111
85456
07117
07121
07122
07124
85457
60541
60542
60543
60544
60545
60546
50647
60548
ACX4010-WD
ACX4015-WD
ACX4020-WD
ACX4030-WD
ACX4050-WD
ACX4075-WD
ACX4100-WD
ACX4150-WD
ACX4200-WD
ACX4250-WD
ACX4300-WD
–
–
–
–
63144
63154
63145
63146
63147
63148
63149
63150
63151
63152
63153
–
–
–
–
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single and Three Phase Adjustable Frequency
AC Motor Controller
ACX Series
1/6 – 75 Horsepower
230 and 460 VAC
DIMENSIONS FOR NEMA 1 CONTROLLERS
7.25
Ø 0.19
WIDE SLOT
1/6 -1 HP,
230 VAC
MODE
FWD
STOP
4.625
1 1/2 -30 HP,
230 VAC
1-75 HP
460 VAC
REV
MODE
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
5.72 5.28
7.00 H1 7.50 H
FWD
STOP
REV
MTG
Ø 0.19
TYP 2PL
4.94 Deep
1.22
0.25
TYP 4PL
0.25
0.19
2.44
2.94
HP
Voltage
H
W
D
1.5-5
1-10
7.5-10
15
15-20
20-30
25-30
40
50
60-75*
230
460
230
460
230
460
230
460
460
460
7.50
7.50
12.0
12.0
15.94
15.94
25.25
22.13
25.13
27.00
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
14.38
6.25
6.25
6.25
6.25
9.13
9.13
9.13
9.13
9.13
9.13
Weight 1.8 lbs
Mounting
H1
W1
7.00
4.63
7.00
4.63
11.5
4.63
11.5
4.63
13.63
4.63
13.63
4.63
21.88
4.63
19.63
4.63
22.63
4.63
26.25
11.75
1/2 IN CONDUIT
3PL
TERMINAL
COVER
B
PRESS HERE TO OPEN
Weight (lbs.)
6.25
5.6
5.6
7.2
12.7
25
27
37
30
30
55
3.50
CL
2.00
2.00
*Dimensions and weight of 60-75HP are preliminary and subject to change.
DIMENSIONS FOR NEMA 4 CONTROLLERS
DIMENSIONS-THREE PHASE UNITS
HP
1/2-2
1-3
3-5
5-10
7.5-10
15
15-20
25-30
Voltage
230
460
230
460
230
460
230
460
H2
W2
Mounting
H1
W1
D
Weight (lbs.)
8.75
7.438
9.38
8.25
4.625
5.6
8.75
7.438
10.50
8.25
4.625
7.6
12.75
7.438
10.75
12.25
4.625
12.7
15.75
7.438
10.75
15.25
4.625
27.0
Voltage
H2
W2
D
1/4-2
1 1/2-2
3-5
230
230
230
8.75
8.75
12.75
7.438
7.438
7.438
9.38
10.50
10.75
Mounting
H1
W1
8.25
4.625
8.25
4.625
12.25
4.625
MODE
FWD
1/2 IN CONDUIT
3PL
DIMENSIONS-SINGLE PHASE UNITS
HP
1/2 -20 HP
230 VAC
1-30 HP
460 VAC
Weight (lbs.)
5.6
7.6
12.7
STOP
REV
TERMINAL
COVER
PRESS HERE TO OPEN
6.25
D
3.50
CL
2.00
2.00
Electrical Products Catalog
85
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single and Three Phase Adjustable Frequency
AC Motor Controller
ACX Series
1/6 – 75 Horsepower
230 and 460 VAC
OPTIONS
Complete option descriptions are listed in the AC option section. To order a kit for field installation order by the item code if shown.
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Option
Din Rail Mounting Kit
Conduit Box
Local Speed Potentiometer
Door Mounting Kit
Voltage Doubler
B
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
Magnetic Bypass
®
AC Line Circuit Breaker
with Handle
AC Line Contactor
Motor Contactor
Overload Relay
HAND-OFF-AUTO Switch
HAND-OFF-AUTO Switch with pot
Voltage and Horsepower
230 VAC
1/6 - 1
230 VAC
1/6 - 1
ALL
ALL
230 VAC
1/6 - 1
1/6 - 1/3
230 VAC
1/2 - 1
1 1/2
2
3
230 VAC
5
7 1/2
10
15-30
1
1 1/2
2
3
460 VAC
5
7 1/2
10
15-75
1-2
3-5
230 VAC
7 1/2 - 10
15-30
1-5
460 VAC
7 1/2 - 10
15 - 75
1 1/2 - 2
230 VAC
3-5
7 1/2 - 10
15-30
1-5
460 VAC
7 1/2 - 10
15-75
1 1/2 - 2
230 VAC
3-5
7 1/2 - 10
15-30
1-5
460 VAC
7 1/2 - 10
15-75
1 1/2
2
3
230 VAC
5
7 1/2
10
15-30
1
1 1/2
2
460 VAC
3-5
7 1/2
10
15-75
230 VAC
1 1/2 - 30
460 VAC
1 - 75
230 VAC
460 VAC
1 1/2 - 30
1 - 75
Option Number
DIN
WBX
LSP
DMK
2XV-03(1)
2XV-10(1)
MB(1)
CBH(1)
LC (1)
MC (1)
OR (1)
Field Kit Item Code
58572(2)
58573(2)
58574(2)
58579(2)
58575(2)
58576(2)
18392(2)
18393(2)
18394(2)
18395(2)
18396(2)
18397(2)
CF
18398(2)
18399(2)
18400(2)
18401(2)
18402(2)
18403(2)
18404(2)
CF
18405
18406
82926
CF
18407(2)
18408(2)
CF
18407(2)
18408(2)
83460(2)
CF
18407(2)
18408(2)
CF
18409(2)
18410(2)
18411(2)
CF
18409(2)
18410(2)
CF
18414(2)
18416(2)
18417(2)
18418(2)
18419(2)
18420(2)
CF
18413(2)
18414(2)
18415(2)
18416(2)
18417(2)
18418(2)
CF
HOA
18421
HP
CF
(2)
(Continued)
86
Electrical Products Catalog
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Single and Three Phase Adjustable Frequency
AC Motor Controller
ACX Series
1/6 – 75 Horsepower
230 and 460 VAC
OPTIONS (Continued)
Option
Voltage and Horsepower
230 VAC
460 VAC
230 VAC
Input Line Chokes (Enclosed)
460 VAC
Output Line Filter (Open)
460 VAC
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Input Line Chokes (Open)
Output Line Filter (Enclosed)
Electronic Braking Control Module
Electronic Braking Resistor Assembly
460 VAC
ALL
ALL
1-2
3
5
7 1/2
10
15-30
1 - 1 1/2
2-3
5
7 1/2
10
15-75
1-2
3
5
7 1/2
10
15-30
1 - 1 1/2
2-3
5
7 1/2
10
15-75
1-2
3-5
7 1/2 - 10
15-75
1-2
3-5
7 1/2 - 10
15-75
ALL
ALL
Option Number
Field Kit Item Code
18422(2)
18423(2)
18424(2)
18425(2)
18426(2)
CF
18427(2)
18428(2)
18429(2)
18430(2)
18431(2)
CF
18432(2)
18433(2)
18434(2)
18435(2)
18436(2)
CF
18437(2)
18438(2)
18439(2)
18440(2)
18441(2)
CF
18442(2)
18443(2)
18444(2)
CF
18445(2)
18446(2)
18447(2)
CF
CF
CF
LCO (1)
LCE (1)
LFO (1)
LFE (1)
EB (1)
EBR (1)
B
(1) Provided as a separate assembly for customer mounting and connections.
(2) This field kit is only for NEMA 1 controllers. Consult factory for part number when used on NEMA 4 controllers.
Electrical Products Catalog
87
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
B
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
NOTES
88
Electrical Products Catalog
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Three Phase Adjustable Frequency
AC Motor Controller
ADX Series
1 – 75 Horsepower
230 and 460 VAC
The ADX Series controllers provide wide range
adjustable speed control of conventional AC
induction motors in applications exhibiting a variety
of load characteristics. The unit converts the fixed
frequency and voltage of the AC line power source
to a sine coded pulse width modulated (PWM)
adjustable voltage and frequency output that will
control induction motors over a wide speed range.
DESIGN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS
1.
Construction - Compact, high density, dead back
configuration. Standard Series ADX units are furnished in
a ventilated NEMA type 1 (IP 20) enclosure. Most units
include an external fan to force cooling air over fins on the
back of the enclosure to aid dissipation of internal heat.
2.
Microprocessor Design - Series ADX units use a
powerful 16-bit microprocessor for logic, communications,
regulator functions, and generation of the PWM waveform
to control the motor.
3.
Power Devices - Series ADX controllers use state of the
art Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT) power
switches. IGBT’s require less gate drive power, which
reduces internal controller temperatures. Their extremely
high speed switching capability provides a superior
waveform for greater starting torque, cooler and virtually
inaudible motor operation. Fast turn-off prevents damage
in the event of an output short circuit.
4.
PWM Modulation Technique - Series ADX controllers
use modified voltage vector modulation for smooth, quiet
motor operation. Asynchronous modulation eliminates
undesirable “Gear Shifting” sounds produced by earlier
designs. Sensorless Torque Control is selectable and
Closed Loop Flux Vector control is available with the
addition of option 24E.
OPERATOR PANEL FOR SERIES ADX CONTROLLERS
5.
Operator Panel - Series ADX units include a versatile,
digital operator control panel mounted on the front cover
of the unit. The panel includes a membrane keypad, and
an LCD display that enables its use for set-up and
monitoring of all controller functions, operating
parameters, self-diagnostics, and also as a local operator
control station. The operator panel is a smooth, unbroken
surface, which is easy to keep clean and is sealed to
prevent the penetration of liquids and dust.
A.
Display - LCD super twist type provides two lines of
16 alphanumeric characters each. Display is
backlighted, enabling viewing in extremes of lighting
conditions including total darkness and is
temperature compensated for reliable viewing.
Displays motor speed, motor load, and power, and
indicates all programmable functions and faults in
English language word messages, no cryptic fault
codes are used.
B.
Visual Indicators - LED’s are provided to indicate
power on, direction, run/jog, manual/auto, and “at
speed”.
C. Keypad - 10 buttons are provided for local operator
control and programming. The buttons include a
raised perimeter, which defines the operating area,
and tactile feedback, which provides confidence that
the command has been entered. The keypad is
logically designed with two operating areas, one for
local operator control, and the other for programming:
1.
Local Operator Control - Buttons and their functions:
a. Stop (controlled) - Oversized button, easy to
locate.
b.
Forward (FWD) - Provides forward run/jog
function. Includes an LED indicator.
c.
Reverse (REV) - When enabled (at start-up)
will provide reverse run function. Includes an
LED indicator.
d.
Jog - Alternate presses activate and
deactivate the Jog mode. An LED indicator
is illuminated when Jog mode is selected.
Jog mode makes the operation of the
Forward and Reverse buttons momentary.
e.
Alternate presses activate and deactivate
the Auto mode. An LED indicator is
illuminated when Auto mode is selected.
Auto mode allows speed and/or torque
control commands to be accepted from
alternate or external sources.
f.
Faster - When the “Faster” indicator is
illuminated, pressing the up arrow key will
increase the local run speed command.
Electrical Products Catalog
89
B
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Three Phase Adjustable Frequency
AC Motor Controller
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
DESIGN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS
2.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
B
g.
Slower - When the “Slower” indicator is
illuminated, pressing the down arrow key
will decrease the local run speed command.
h.
Optional Potentiometer - Space is provided
to mount an optional speed setting
potentiometer.Option LSP provides a single
turn speed setting potentiometer and the
dial face for mounting in a dedicated area
on the operator panel. The potentiometer is
used instead of the faster-slower buttons to
set motor speed.
ADX Series
1 – 75 Horsepower
230 and 460 VAC
E.
Security Code - All ADX adjustments may be protected
by a “password” access scheme. Once the password
has been entered, the user may remove password
protection from commonly adjusted parameters that
need not be restricted.
6.
Keypad Operator Disable - The Operator control
functions described above can be disabled if desired by
changing a parameter in the ADX Drive.
7.
Operating Modes - Series ADX controllers provide three
basic operating modes selectable via the operator panel.
Programming Buttons and their functions:
a Menu - Selects adjustable drive parameters,
which can then be set with the arrow
buttons.
b.
Arrow Buttons - Arrow up, arrow down,
arrow right, and arrow left buttons are
provided to select, program, and monitor all
operating parameters.
Optionally, Series ADX units may be provided without the
standard, integral, digital operator panel. The ADX in this
configuration is then programmed and monitored by a
personal computer via the standard serial port.
Level One - Without entering a password or
entering the menu operating system, the user may
change the motor speed and the display configuration
for monitoring purposes.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
90
Line Starting
Operating Patterns
Volts/Hertz
Resonant Frequency
Avoidance
Carrier Frequency
Select
Static Braking
DC Injection Braking
Start into Rotating
Motor
Inverse Time
Overload
Electrical Products Catalog
B.
Monitor Mode - In monitor mode the operating state
of the ADX may be observed. English language
messages and/or a parameter number inform the
operator of the parameter being displayed. The unit
may be programmed so any two of the following
parameters may be displayed simultaneously.
9. Output Voltage
10. Ratio
11. Status
12. Operating Hours
13. None
(Display Not Used)
14. Motor Current
15. Extended Monitor
16. Date and Time
C. Programming Mode - Allows monitoring and
adjustment of all ADX parameters. Parameters are
grouped logically into menus using descriptive
English names and a companion identification
number for ease of location. Parameters are
grouped indescending order from those most
general to those more specific for operational
simplicity and quick selection.
Level Two - Upon entering the menu system by
pressing the Menu button, the user may adjust any
of the most commonly adjusted parameters without
entering a password. These parameters are listed
as adjustments under ADJUSTMENTS - Page 94
(excludes preset speeds and field trim).
a.
b.
c.
d.
Control Mode - Permits Run-Stop-Jog-ReverseManual/Auto functions and speed control from the
integral operator panel, a remote control station, or an
external signal source such as a process controller.
1. Drive Legend
(Assigned Name)
2. Custom Parameter
3. Speed Reference
4. Motor Speed
5. Output Power
6. Torque Limit Set-point
7. Motor Load
8. Output Frequency
D. Programming - The ADX controller provides three levels
of user programmability.
Level Three - Upon entering the menu system and
entering a password, the operator has access to
all programmable features of the ADX. This level
is intended for complex or nonstandard control
applications. A partial list of available functions
includes:
A.
8.
Control Power Supply - A 24 VDC power supply
isolates all magnetic control for pushbuttons and external
Run-Stop logic from the AC power source for operator
protection and equipment reliability.
9.
Over voltage and Under voltage Protection Electronic shutdown when line voltage exceeds
approximately +10 % or -30% of rated line voltage.
j. Torque Boost
k. Regeneration Limit
10. Power Loss Ride Through - The controller has
l. Dwell
sufficient energy storage to maintain control of the motor
m. Torque Taper
for at least 1 second whenever the AC power source is
n. Auto Restart
interrupted. Upon reapplication of AC line power within 1
o. PID Control
second, the motor will resume its set speed with a
p. Digital Input Selection
minimum of disturbance. The amount of speed droop
q. Digital Signal Output
during the power outage will be determined by the actual
r. Analog Signal Input
motor loading and other mechanical time constants.
Selection
11. Power Loss Shutdown - During power interruption, if
s. Analog Output
power is lost for longer than 1 second, a power loss fault
t. Operating Mode
is registered. If a phase of the AC Input is missing for
Selection
more than 1 second, a phase loss fault will be issued if
the drive is running.
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Three Phase Adjustable Frequency
AC Motor Controller
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
DESIGN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS
12. Automatic Restart - Series ADX units may be
programmed for automatic restart after any or all of the
faults listed under STANDARD DIAGNOSTIC
FEATURES, item 3, Faults (Page 95). This feature
allows the user to program the number of tries as well
as the retry time. Units in the restart mode will display
“Restarting”.
13. Start into Rotating Motor - The unit can be
programmed to start into a spinning motor. When
programmed for this mode of operation, the ADX can
start while the motor is still spinning. The drive will not
trip and the motor will not necessarily be brought to
zero speed.
14. Line Starting Capability - The unit can be
programmed to start when the main AC power is
applied to its input terminals.
15. Visual Indicators - LED indicators are provided to
monitor circuit operation and aid in troubleshooting.
Included are individual red LED’s showing FWD, REV,
JOG, AUTO, POWER, and AT SPEED status.
16. Multiple PWM Carrier Frequencies - The user can
program carrier frequencies of 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10
KHZ. The most efficient operation is produced at the
lower carrier frequencies. Series ADX units through 75 HP
are shipped programmed for 5 KHz.
17. AC Line Voltage Calibration - Holds output voltage
constant with rated line variations when output voltage is less
than line voltage (10% line voltage variation causes 1%
output voltage variation).
18. Volts/Hertz, Sensorless Torque, or Closed Loop
Flux Vector Control Operation - In the Volts/Hertz
mode the Volts/Hertz ratio may be trimmed ±20% of
nominal. In the Sensorless Torque Control or Closed Loop
Flux Vector mode the Motor Torque may be adjusted
from 50 to 200% of nominal.
19. Run/Stop Control - Series ADX controllers can be
remotely started and stopped by:
1. 2 wire control (maintained dry contact)
2. 3 wire control
3. Application of AC Line power
20. Jog Control - The ADX features a separate jog
function with unique directional acceleration/deceleration
rates. This feature allows hard or ramp acceleration on
jog without affecting run operation.
21. Isolated Regulator - Internal logic and control circuits
are isolated from the AC power source and internal DC
power circuitry for operator and equipment safety and for
simplified application. Isolation eliminates the common
condition of line voltage to ground potentials being
present on the speed control potentiometer.
22. PID Control - A built in Proportional Integral Derivative
type control is standard in the ADX. Provides outer loop
control of speed, flow, pressure, fluid level, or other process
variables. The PID loop may be programmed to accept
set-point/feedback input or error input. A flexible
configuration scheme allows PID inputs to be either analog
or digital with PID gains being separately adjustable.
ADX Series
1 – 75 Horsepower
230 and 460 VAC
23. Dwell Feature - The Standard Series ADX units
incorporate this feature providing an adjustable Dwell
time and Dwell Speed. This feature is commonly used
in pumping HVAC applications. The dwell feature halts
acceleration for a period of time at a programmed
Dwell Speed.
24. Resonant Frequency Avoidance -The ADX controller
can be programmed to accelerate or decelerate
through, but not continuously run at certain frequencies
that may cause mechanical and or acoustic resonance.
These frequencies are determined by setting a center
point and width. Three programmable frequency bands
are offered.
25. Multiple Motor Operation - All motors will track the
common output frequency of the Series ADX controller.
Synchronous motors are ideal for this purpose since
they will provide identical motor-to-motor shaft speeds.
For multiple motor operation, only Volts/Hertz operation
is recommended.
26. Torque Boost - Provides improved torque capacity at
lower speeds to produce up to 200% starting torque
with most standard motors. ADX Torque Boost provides
programmable boost level as well as a programmable
frequency where maximum boost is obtained. This
feature is disabled in sensorless torque or flux vector
mode of operation.
27. DC Injection Braking - Provides effective low speed
braking by injecting DC current into two motor windings.
The braking time period programmable to 25.5 seconds
and is engaged under programmable control at start,
stop, or both.
28. Volts/Hertz Patterns - 21 preprogrammed and one
user programmable pattern is included as standard as
shown in the following table. They provide constant
horsepower and/or constant torque patterns for a wide
range of applications. Additionally, the unit may be
programmed for any desired pattern within the frequency
and voltage range of the unit as shown by Table 3.
Table 3
Pattern Number
Frequency at Full
Output Voltage
Maximum
Frequency
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
50
60
90
120
180
240
400
50
60
60
60
50
60
90
120
180
240
400
55
66
90
120
Pattern Number
12
Frequency at Full
Output Voltage
60
Maximum
Frequency
180
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
60
60
90
90
90
90
120
120
120
240
400
120
180
240
400
180
240
400
The unit is shipped programmed for pattern number 2.
Patterns, which permit operation above 60 Hz, may
require a special high speed motor. Patterns 3 through 7
produce constant torque from special motors wound for
the design operating voltage at the pattern frequency,
e.g.: when Pattern 7 is selected for a 460V unit the motor
must be wound for 460V at 400Hz.
Electrical Products Catalog
91
B
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Three Phase Adjustable Frequency
AC Motor Controller
ADX Series
1 – 75 Horsepower
230 and 460 VAC
DESIGN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Pattern 22 shows the range over which the ADX units
may be individually programmed for constant torque or
constant HP. Patterns 8 and 9 are for variable torque
applications where it may be desirable to trim the pump
or fan speed by ±10%.
29. Output Protection - Line-to-Line and Line-to-Ground
output fault protection is provided. Also programmable is
output phase loss protection to protect the motor from
single-phase operation.
30. Phase Loss Protection - The controller detects phase
loss and inhibits normal operation as necessary to
prevent drive malfunction. If the phase loss is of short
duration (less than 1 second), the drive will continue to
operate normally until the phase is missing for more
than 1 second. When the phase is missing for longer
than 1 second a phase loss fault will be generated if the
motor is running.
31. Over Temperature Protection - A thermal switch on
the controller heatsink will shut down the controller in
the event of a cooling fan failure or other causes for
overheating.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
B
Both Linear and Non-Linear Volts per Hertz curves can
be selected. The Non-Linear Volts per Hertz curve offers
additional power savings for variable torque loads.
32. Analog Output - One Analog Output rated 0 - 10 VDC
@ 2mA is provided as standard. Two additional analog
outputs are available as an option and may be
programmed to one of the following parameters:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
Actual Speed
Analog Input #1
Analog Input #3
Motor Load
None
PID Error
PID Output
Power
Speed Command
Speed Trim
k) Acceleration Ramp
l) Analog Input #2
m) Motor Current
n) Motor Voltage
o) Output Frequency
p) PID Feedback
q) PID Reference
r) Remote Digital
s) Speed Ratio
t) Torque Reference
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
Acceleration
Alarm
Auto
At Speed
Bus Voltage Limit
Bypass
DC Braking
Deceleration
Drive Enabled
Dwelling
Forward Direction
Jog
35. Slip Compensation - Programmable slip compensation
is provided to correct for induction motor speed droop
or slip and thereby improve speed regulation in the
Volts/Hertz operating mode (see Table 2, Page 95).
36. Electronic Inverse Time Motor Overload Protection Inverse time motor overload protection provides a
programmable threshold and time to trip to reduce the
potential of costly motor damage. NOTE: To insure
motor protection, a motor thermal switch is suggested.
37. Static Reversing Control - Contactorless reversing is a
standard capability. Requires only the selection of an
operator station with reversing controls or direction may
be selected by external control contacts. NOTE: The
drive must also be programmed to enable reverse
operation by changing a parameter.
38. Protective Features a. Inverter Trip - Due to over voltage, over
current, under voltage, controller over
temperature, ground fault, motor overload, and
CPU error. The unit will annunciate the fault
with an English language word.
b.
Trip Avoidance - Series ADX units include
sophisticated torque control circuitry to
minimize nuisance tripping under conditions of
rapid deceleration and/or overhauling loads, or
when encountering high peak torque loads.
Under these abnormal torque conditions, the
circuits function much like the current limiter in
a DC drive extending the programmed
acceleration or deceleration times to hold motor
currents within set limits without tripping.
c.
Output Fault Protection - Unit is protected from
phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground output
short circuits and can be programmed for output
phase loss.
This output may be programmed for offset, scaling, and
inversion. The output could be used for external meters
or as a speed reference for other drive units in a system.
33. Output Contacts - One set of form C output contacts
rated 30 VDC @ 2.0 Amps or 115 VAC @ 0.5 Amps for
fault annunciation.
34. Digital Control Outputs - Four buffered open collector
outputs, rated 24 VDC @ 50 mA, are available for
external alarms or monitoring. One of these outputs is
dedicated for a pulse train at the drive output
frequency. The three remaining outputs are user
programmable to be any of the following parameters:
92
Electrical Products Catalog
m) Motor Overload
n) None
o) Regeneration Limit
p) Reverse Direction
q) Run
r) Speed Avoidance
s) Speed Search
t) Taper #1 Speed
u) Taper #2 Speed
v) Torque Limit
w) Zero Speed
x) Proof of Torque
39. Regeneration Limit - Designed to eliminate trips when
excessive braking energy is transferred from the motor
to the control, regeneration limit will perform in the
following fashion:
a.
Will extend the deceleration time to prevent
bus over voltage trip with high inertia loads.
b.
Will increase output frequency to user
programmed maximum frequency range during
overhauling loads.
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Three Phase Adjustable Frequency
AC Motor Controller
ADX Series
1 – 75 Horsepower
230 and 460 VAC
DESIGN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
40. Fault Trip Reset - Should a fault trip occur, the ADX
offers two reset modes.
a. Disconnect and reapply power.
b. Reset by STOP pushbutton command by operator.
41. Static Braking Control - Provides adjustable linear rate
electronic braking for the three-phase AC induction
motor. The braking rate is determined by the setting of
the deceleration control, which is adjustable.
Braking is effective under the following conditions:
a.
Predefined Digital Inputs:
Forward Run
Reverse Run
Forward Jog
Stop
Emergency Stop
Programmable Digital Inputs:
Faster
Jog Reverse
Slower
Preset Speed
Speed Reference Change - Whenever the speed
reference is changed to command a reduction in
All inputs are designed for use with the 24V control
speed. The speed reference change can originate
voltage supplied by the ADX controller. The predefined
from a manually adjusted speed setting potentiometer,
Digital Inputs can be disabled if desired.
an external DC analog signal or a change in the
digital speed reference. This permits the drive to 44. Torque Limit - State of the art electronics allow the ADX
rapidly follow a reduced speed command otherwise
to provide good torque control over a programmable
impossible except with a heavy friction loads.
range of 20-200% of rated torque.
b. Stop Function - When selected, the motor will brake 45. Torque Taper - Torque Limit slope and threshold are
following the deceleration ramp to zero speed. The
adjustable providing a programmable torque taper range
stop command can originate from a pushbutton or
of 0.1:1 to 3:1
external logic. A selectable alternate method of
46. Adjustments - The adjustments listed in
operation allows un-powered coast to stop.
ADJUSTMENTS on page 94 and most other
The standard unit provides a typical braking torque
adjustments can be changed while the drive is in
of 20% (dependent on motor efficiency) of rated
operation. This feature simplifies fine-tuning since the
motor torque. This is the limit of the standard drive to
drive does not need to be stopped, then restarted after
dissipate the regenerative energy produced by
each adjustment. See Series ADX Equipment Manual for
the kinetic energy of the motor and connected
a complete list of adjustable parameters.
machine load.
47. Standard Serial Port - An RS-485 compatible serial port
Where the inertia of the load is such that the desired
is standard on the ADX. This port provides read/write
minimum braking time cannot be achieved with the
access to all parameters available in the ADX. Up to 31
standard unit, an optional high torque braking circuit
ADX drives can be connected to a host computer with an
is also offered. See Electronic Braking Option ER
RS-485 Serial Port.
and EBR.
The ADX has the capability of communicating serially
with a host computer or PLC. Any parameter may be
42. Analog Signal Inputs - Three analog signal inputs are
read or written via the serial port. Full communication is
provided. The Analog to Digital conversion resolution is 12
allowed during motor operation as well as at stop. The
bit plus sign. The associated external signals may be
only exceptions to this are, configuration parameters that
grounded or ungrounded. However all three analog inputs
may not be adjusted from the keypad during operation,
share the same common connection. These inputs are
cannot be adjusted through the serial port during
programmable for the following functions:
operation. When the drive is faulted, no parameters may
a) Run Speed Command
g) PID Error
be changed through the serial port. All parameters may
b) Jog Speed Command
h) PID Feedback
be read under any condition.
c) Torque Reference
i) Speed Ratio
Transmission rates up to 9600 baud and an optimized
d) Auto Speed Command
j) Speed Trim
machine to machine protocol, make the ADX suitable for
e) Auto Torque Limit
k) Speed Feedback
low to moderate performance real time communication
f) PID Reference
l) None (input is unused)
tasks by providing a single parameter communications
bandwidth of better than 5 Hertz.
The Analog Input may be programmed for Scaling,
Offset, Inversion. Signal Filtering are available for all
Analog Inputs.
43. Digital Control Inputs - A total of 5 predefined and 3
programmable digital inputs are provided, these provide
the following functions.
Electrical Products Catalog
93
B
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Three Phase Adjustable Frequency
AC Motor Controller
DESIGN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
48. Speed Regulator -The ADX AC Drive controls motor
speed via a Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) Speed
Regulator. Speed Feedback to this PID Speed Regulator
can be selected from one of the following sources:
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
B
1.
Sensorless (Motor Speed is determined from
Applied Stator Voltage and measured stator currents).
2.
DC Tachometer Feedback (Requires external
scaling resistor if Tachometer voltage exceeds
±10VDC).
3.
Encoder or Pulse Tachometer Feedback (Option 24E).
49. Analog Input Loss - This feature detects the loss of a
4-20 mA analog input by determining if the input current
drops below a user programmable level. The user has
the option of generating a fault, replacing the analog
input with a fixed reference, or turning on a programmable
digital alarm output when the input is lost.
50. CE Marking
- 1-5HP 208/230V units are available with CE
- 2-5HP 208/230V units are CE
- 1-10HP 460V units are CE
- others pending certification
RATINGS
1. Horsepower Range 3 - 75 HP (see Table 1)
2. Power Source (1) 208/230 or 460V, 3-Phase, 50 or 60 Hz
3. Output Power (Three-Phase)
(a) Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 - 208/230, 0 - 460 V
(b) Frequency (3) . . . .0 to 400 Hz. Constant Torque
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .(Constant V/Hz)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 to 400 Hz Constant HP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .(Constant V, Variable Hz)
4. Service Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0
5. Duty
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Industrial, Continuous
6. Overload Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . 150% for 1 minute
7. Linearity (Output to Input) . . . . . ± 0.1% maximum.
8. Reference Power Supply . . . . . . . 10 VDC @ 5 mA
9. External Reference Source (2) . . . . . . . 0 - 10 VDC
. . . . . . . . . . .2 -10, 4 - 20, or 10 - 50 mA (4)
10. Magnetic (Pushbutton) Control Voltage . . 24 VDC
11. Storage Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0 - 70 ° C.
12. Relative Humidity . . . . . . . . . 95% Non-condensing.
NOTES: (1) 190V, 380V, and 415V models are available.
(2) Isolated reference, external control signal may
be grounded or ungrounded.
(3) Standard frequency ranges 0 - 400 Hz,
(See Figure 2).
(4) 2 - 10 mA and 10 - 50 mA input require an
external load resistor.
94
Electrical Products Catalog
ADX Series
1 – 75 Horsepower
230 and 460 VAC
ADJUSTMENTS
All adjustments are programmed digitally via the standard integral
operator panel or the standard serial port. Basic adjustments include:
1. Acceleration (Linear) ..................0.1 - 1900.0 Seconds
(S Curve) ...........................3.0 - 120.0 Seconds
2. Deceleration (Linear) .................0.1 - 1900.0 Seconds
(S Curve) ...........................3.0 - 120.0 Seconds
3. Minimum Speed (6).....................0 - 75.00 %
4. Maximum Speed (6) ....................50.00 - 100.00 %
5. Torque Limit (7)...........................20.00 - 200.00 %
6. Jog Speed (6) ..............................0 - 100.00 %
7. Torque Boost (8) .........................0 - 200.00 %
8. Slip Compensation .....................0 - 100.00 %
9. Volts/Hz Trim....................................±20.00 % of Nominal Setting
10. Preset Speeds, 7 Provided (6) .0 - 100.00 %
11. Field Trim (9) .............................50.00 - 200.00 %
NOTES: (6) % of Maximum Frequency.
(7) Motor design typically limits available torque
to 200%.
(8) % of Rated Torque. Applicable only in Volts/
Hz mode.
(9) % of Rated Current. Applicable only in Vector Control
mode.
TABLE 1: SERIES ADX MODEL MATRIX
208/230V Units
Motor
Rated Output Amps
Catalog
Dimensions (inches)
HP
1
Max KW
.75
208 VAC
3.9
230 VAC
3.6
Number
ADX20010
Height
7.48
Width
7.25
Depth
7.51
1 1/2
2
3
1.12
1.5
2.24
5.7
7.5
10.6
5.2
6.8
9.6
ADX20015
ADX20020
ADX20030
7.48
7.48
7.48
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.51
7.51
7.51
5
7.5
3.73
5.60
16.7
24.2
15.2
22
ADX20050
ADX20075
7.48
11.88
7.25
7.25
7.51
8.12
10
15
20
7.46
11.19
14.92
30.8
46.2
59.4
28
42
54
ADX20100
ADX20150
ADX20200
11.88
19.13
19.13
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.50
10.38
10.38
25
30
18.65
22.38
74.8
88
68
80
ADX20250
ADX20300
28.31
28.31
7.25
7.25
10.38
10.38
460V Units
Motor
Rated Output Amps
Catalog
Dimensions (inches)
HP
1
1 1/2
2
3
Max KW
.75
1.12
1.5
2.24
460 VAC
1.8
2.6
3.4
4.8
Number
ADX40010
ADX40015
ADX40020
ADX40030
Height
7.48
7.48
7.48
7.48
Width
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
Depth
7.51
7.51
7.51
7.51
5
7.5
10
15
20
3.73
5.6
7.46
11.19
14.92
7.6
11.0
14.0
21.0
27.0
ADX40050
ADX40075
ADX40100
ADX40150
ADX40200
7.48
11.88
11.88
19.13
19.13
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.50
8.12
7.50
10.38
10.38
25
30
40
50
18.65
22.38
29.84
37.30
34.0
40.0
52.0
65.0
ADX40250
ADX40300
ADX40400
ADX40500
22.13
22.13
27.00
27.00
7.25
7.25
14.28
14.38
10.38
10.38
10.38
10.38
60
75
44.76
55.95
77.0
96.0
ADX40600
ADX40750
27.00
27.00
14.38
14.38
10.38
10.38
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Three Phase Adjustable Frequency
AC Motor Controller
ADX Series
1 – 75 Horsepower
230 and 460 VAC
MODEL TYPES
Series ADX controllers are offered in 14 basic power frame
configurations comprising 27 models covering the range of 3 to
400 HP as shown in TABLE 1. See TABLE 5 for dimensions
and weights.
100
Series ADX Units include 21
preprogrammed patterns within
this envelope plus a user
programmed pattern.
75
VOLTS/HZ
ADJUSTMENT
RANGE
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
1. Controlled Speed Range: Minimum speed to motor base
speed, constant or variable torque with NEMA B AC induction
motors (see Table 2). Selectable constant HP operation is a
standard capability.
25
0
50
Regulation
Method
Induction
Synchronous
Load
Change
95%
X
-----
3.00%
Normal
Volts per Hertz
(2)
Slip Comp
Volts per Hertz
(2)
Line
Voltage +/10% (1)
Motor
Heating
Cold to
Normal
0.50%
1.00%
Normal
Sensorless
Torque Control
(2)
Option 24E
Encoder
Feedback (3)
Temperature
+/-10 C
(Controller
and Motor)
Speed
Range
0.25%
30:1
-----
X
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.25%
60:1
X
-----
1.00%
0.50%
0.50%
0.25%
30:1
-----
X
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
60:1
X
-----
0.50%
0.50%
0.50%
0.25%
50:1
-----
N/A
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
X
-----
0.02%
0.02%
0.02%
0.25%
100:1
-----
N/A
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
360
400
FIGURE 2: VOLTS/HERTZ ADJUSTMENT RANGE
OPERATING CONDITIONS
1. Line Voltage Variation................................±10% of rated
2. Line Frequency Variation .....................50 or 60 Hz ±5 %
3. Ambient Temperature ...................0 - 40 °C (32 - 104 °F)
4. Altitude (Standard)......3300 feet (1000 meters) maximum
5. Relative Humidity .......................... 95% Non-condensing
STANDARD DIAGNOSTIC FEATURES:
1. Over current
Current Limit
Overload
Short Circuit
Ground Fault
2.
Test Mode select - Normal self-test on power-up is
always performed.
3.
Fault Parameter Values - All operating parameters are
frozen on fault, providing extensive information on
the conditions present at the time of fault. One of
the following English language 15 character fault
codes will be displayed.
Fault Clearing
Faults are cleared on the ADX AC drive by the
following actions:
• Stop button press
• Remote Stop Button Press
• Removing and Re-applying power
(a) Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.0146 Hz
(b) Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.0060 Hz
4.
Frequency Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.005%
5.
Modulation Frequency (Selectable)2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9, or 10 KHZ
6.
Efficiency (at rated speed, rated load @the specified
carrier frequency)
7.
Displacement Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . .95% or better
5
300
ADJUSTMENT RANGE FOR 60 HZ CONSTANT TORQUE
APPLICATIONS. BOSTON SERIES ADX UNITS ARE
ADJUSTED FOR THIS PATTERN AS SHIPPED.
Frequency Resolution (at 60 Hz)
4
240
ADJUSTMENTS RANGE FOR CONSTANT HP
APPLICATIONS
NOTES: (1) Shown at full load, full speed.
(2) Listed are average, expected values when using a
wide range of standard motors. Results may vary with
some models.
(3) 1000 PPR (Minimum) encoder.
3.
180
ADJUSTMENT RANGE FOR CONSTANT TORQUE
APPLICATIONS
TABLE 2: SPEED REGULATION
Motor Type
120
OUTPUT FREQUENCY (HZ)
2. Speed Regulation (See Table 2): Regulation percentages
listed are of motor rated (base) speed under steady-state
operating conditions.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
50
Carrier Frequency (KHz)
2
3
6
7
8
9
10
Controller
97.0%
96.8%
96.6% 96.4%
96.2%
96.0%
95.8%
95.6%
95.4%
Controller with 93%
Efficient Motor
90.2%
90.0%
89.8% 89.7%
89.5%
89.3%
89.1%
88.9%
88.7%
4.
Electrical Products Catalog
95
B
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Three Phase Adjustable Frequency
AC Motor Controller
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Fault Code Number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
B
96
Fault Description
None
External Fault
Over Temperature Fault
Rating Mismatch Fault
Bus Over Voltage Fault
Bus Over Current Fault
No Encoder Option Fault
Ground Fault
Power Loss Fault
Frequency Range Fault
Voltage Knee Fault
Precharge Fault
Motor Configuration Fault
Motor Overload Fault
EEPROM Write Fault
EEPROM Read Fault
EEPROM Missing Fault
EEPROM Acknowledge Fault
User Memory Fault
Unknown Fault
Phase Loss Fault
Carrier Frequency Fault
Analog / Digital Converter Fault
Feedback Loss Fault
Analog Input #1 Fault
Analog Input #2 Fault
Analog Input #3 Fault
Output Phase Loss
10 VDC Power Supply Loss
24 VDC Power Supply Loss
Motor Current Fault
Phase Imbalance Fault
Electrical Products Catalog
ADX Series
1 – 75 Horsepower
230 and 460 VAC
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Three Phase Adjustable Frequency
AC Motor Controller
ADX Series
1 – 75 Horsepower
230 and 460 VAC
TABLE 4. TYPICAL APPLICATION DATA STANDARD SERIES ADX MODELS
Component
Rated Horsepower (HP)
1
1.5
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
Rated Kilowatts (KW)
0.746
1.12
1.49
2.24
3.73
5.60
7.46
11.2
14.9
18.7
22.4
3-Phase
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
AC Output
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
Ratings
(Full Load)
Motor
Torque
Amps 460V
2.1
3.0
3.4
4.8
7.6
11.0
14.0
21.0
27.0
34.0
40.0
Amps 230V
4.2
6.0
6.8
9.6
15.2
22.0
28.0
42.0
54.0
68.0
80.0
Amps 208V
4.6
6.6
7.5
10.6
16.7
24.2
30.8
46.2
59.4
74.8
88.0
KVA
1.7
2.4
2.7
3.8
6.0
8.7
11.1
16.6
21.4
26.9
31.7
1.5
2.2
3
4.50
7.50
11.3
15.0
22.5
30.0
37.5
45.0
3
4.5
6
9.00
15.0
22.5
30.0
45.0
60.0
75.0
90.0
4.5
6.9
9
13.7
22.8
34.3
45.7
68.5
91.3
114
137
2
3
3
5
7.5
11
15
20
27
27
34
Motor
3500
Speed 1750
(lb-ft)
RPM 1150
Minimum Transformer KVA for
Voltage Matching or Isolation
Component
Rated Horsepower (HP)
Rated Kilowatts (KW)
3-Phase
Amps 460V
AC Output
KVA
(Full Load)
Motor
Motor
3500
Torque
Speed
1750
(lb-ft)
RPM
1150
Minimum Transformer KVA for
Voltage Matching or Isolation
40
29.8
Ratings
50
60
37.3
44.8
B
75
56.0
52.0
65.0
77.0
96.0
41.2
51.5
61.0
76.1
60.0
120
183
75.0
150
228
90.0
180
274
113
225
343
40
51
63
75
TABLE 5. DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS*
HP RANGE
208/230V
1-5
7.5 - 10
15 - 20
25 - 30
---
460V
DIMENSIONS Inches (mm)
ENCLOSURE
H
7.48
1-5
(190)
11.88
7.5 - 10
(302)
19.13
15 - 20
(486)
28.31
-(719)
22.13
25 - 30
(562)
27.00
40 - 75
(686)
W
7.25
(184)
7.25
(184)
7.25
(184)
7.25
(184)
7.25
(184)
14.38
(365)
D
7.51
(191)
8.12
(206)
10.38
(264)
10.38
(264)
10.38
(264)
10.38
(264)
MOUNTING
H
7.00
(178)
11.31
(287)
16.63
(422)
24.88
(632)
19.63
(499)
25.25
(667)
WEIGHT
lbs
W
4.63
(118)
4.63
(118)
4.63
(118)
4.63
(118)
4.63
(118)
11.75
(298)
6.5
14.6
29
42.5
34.5
63.3
*Contact Factory for dimensions above 75 HP.
Electrical Products Catalog
97
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Three Phase Adjustable Frequency
AC Motor Controller
ADX Series
1 – 75 Horsepower
230 and 460 VAC
FIGURE 4-1. ADX CONTROLLER MOUNTING DIMENSIONS, 1 - 5HP, 230/460V
7.25
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
4.625
KEYPAD
FWD
REV
JOG
AUTO
FASTER
POWER
7.000
7.48
MENU
B
AT
SLOWER
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
SPEED
TERMINAL
ACCESS
COVER
®
TERMINAL
COVER
SCREW
FIGURE 4-2. ADX CONTROLLER MOUNTING DIMENSIONS, 7-1/2 - 20HP, 230/460V
7.25
4.625
7.25
4.625
16.63
19.13
KEYPAD
KEYPAD
F
W
D
REV
JOG
AUTO
POWER
FWD
REV
P
O
W
E
R
F
A
S
T
E
R
11.313
11.88
F
A
S
T
E
R
MENU
AT
J
O
G
S
L
O
W
E
R
AUTO
SPEED
MENU
A
T
S
L
O
W
E
R
SPEED
TERMINAL
ACCESS
COVER
TERMINAL
COVER
SCREW
7-1/2 - 10 HP
98
Electrical Products Catalog
TERMINAL
ACCESS
COVER
TERMINAL
COVER
SCREW
15 - 20 HP
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Three Phase Adjustable Frequency
AC Motor Controller
ADX Series
1 – 75 Horsepower
230 and 460 VAC
FIGURE 4-3. ADX CONTROLLER MOUNTING DIMENSIONS, 25 - 30HP, 230/460V
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
7.25
4.625
7.25
4.625
19.63
22.13
24.88
KEYPAD
KEYPAD
FWD
REV
JOG
AUTO
FASTER
POWER
MENU
FWD
REV
JOG
AUTO
AT
SLOWER
SPEED
FASTER
POWER
MENU
AT
SLOWER
SPEED
TERMINAL
ACCESS
COVER
TERMINAL
ACCESS
COVER
TERMINAL
COVER
SCREW
TERMINAL
COVER
SCREW
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
B
28.31
25 - 30 HP, 230V
25 - 30 HP, 460V
FIGURE 4-4. ADX CONTROLLER MOUNTING DIMENSIONS, 40 - 75HP, 460V
27.00
26.25
F W D
REV
FASTER
POWER
JOG
AUTO
MENU
AT
SLOWER
SPEED
KEYPAD
TERMINAL
ACCESS
COVER
TERMINAL
COVER
SCREW
(6PL)
11.75
14.38
Electrical Products Catalog
99
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Three Phase Adjustable Frequency
AC Motor Controller
ADX Series
1 – 75 Horsepower
230 and 460 VAC
OPTIONS
Complete option descriptions are listed in the AC option section. To order a kit for field installation order by the item code if
shown.
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Option
Local Speed Potentiometer
Magnetic Bypass
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
B
AC Line Circuit Breaker
with Handle
Voltage and Horsepower
ALL
ALL
1 1/2
2
3
230 VAC
5
7 1/2
10
15-30
1
1 1/2
2
3
460 VAC
5
7 1/2
10
15-75
230 VAC
Option Number
LSP
MB(1)
CF
1-30
CBH
(1)
1 - 75
CF
1 1/2 - 2
3-5
7 1/2 - 10
15-30
1-5
7 1/2 - 10
15-75
18409
18410
18411
CF
18409
18410
CF
®
460 VAC
Field Kit Item Code
CF
18392
18393
18394
18395
18396
18397
CF
18398
18399
18400
18401
18402
18403
18404
CF
230 VAC
Motor Contactor
460 VAC
230 VAC
1-30
Overload Relay
Electrical Products Catalog
CF
OR (1)
460 VAC
1-75
230 VAC
1 1/2 - 30
460 VAC
1 - 75
HAND-OFF-AUTO Switch
100
MC (1)
CF
HOA
18421
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Three Phase Adjustable Frequency
AC Motor Controller
ADX Series
1/6 – 75 Horsepower
230 and 460 VAC
OPTIONS (Continued)
Option
Voltage and Horsepower
ALL
Electronic Braking Resistor Assembly
ALL
ALL
EBR (1)
CF
Magnetic Control Interface (115V)
ALL
ALL
MCI
CF
230VAC
460VAC
1-30
1-75
FCL (1)
CF
CF
Input Line Chokes (Open)
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Field Kit Item Code
Electronic Braking Control Module
230 VAC
460 VAC
230 VAC
Input Line Chokes (Enclosed)
460 VAC
Output Line Filter (Open)
460 VAC
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
Option Number
1-2
3
5
7 1/2
10
15-30
1 - 1 1/2
2-3
5
7 1/2
10
15-75
1-2
3
5
7 1/2
10
15-30
1 - 1 1/2
2-3
5
7 1/2
10
15-75
1-2
3-5
7 1/2 - 10
15-75
1-2
3-5
7 1/2 - 10
15-75
ALL
Output Line Filter (Enclosed)
Fuses, Current Limiting
460 VAC
LCO (1)
LCE (1)
LFO (1)
LFE (1)
EB (1)
18422
18423
18424
18425
18426
CF
18427
18428
18429
18430
18431
CF
18432
18433
18434
18435
18436
CF
18437
18438
18439
18440
18441
CF
18442
18443
18444
CF
18445
18446
18447
CF
CF
Crane Control Interface
ALL
ALL
CCI
CF
Hand-Off -Auto Switch with pot
ALL
ALL
HP
CF
Blower Motor Control
ALL
ALL
45A
CF
Blower Motor Fuses
ALL
ALL
45B
CF
Relay Output Option
ALL
ALL
RO
CF
Auxiliary Enclosure
ALL
ALL
AH
CF
Digital Operator Panel and Cable
ALL
ALL
OPC
CF
Lonworks Network Interface
ALL
ALL
LON
CF
Encoder Feedback
ALL
ALL
24E
CF
Analog Outputs
ALL
ALL
AO
CF
B
(1) Provided as a separate assembly for customer mounting and connections.
(2) This field kit is only for NEMA 1 controllers.
Electrical Products Catalog
101
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Soft Start Acceleration Controllers
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
SSX Series controllers provide an economical, efficient means
of controlling the acceleration of conventional three-phase AC
induction motors. The units feature convenient, simple controls
for adjusting the starting torque developed by the motor and its
acceleration time to rated speed. Acceleration is smooth and
stepless under all load conditions. The SSX0310DTC and
SSX0520DTC units have torque control and a deceleration ramp
time and can be utilized as a motor overload device making it an
ideal replacement for single speed motor starters.
B
SSX SERIES
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
SSX Series
1/2-20 Horsepower, 230 VAC
1-40 Horsepower, 460 VAC
1-50 Horsepower, 575 VAC
DESIGN FEATURES AND FUNCTIONS
1. Construction – Furnished in a rugged NEMA 1
ventilated enclosure. The SSX consists of only four
primary components: (1) a die cast aluminum heatsink,
(2) a Thyristor bridge, (3) an integrated regulator/power
board, and (4) a non-metallic housing. The SSX0076,
SSX0310 and SSX0310DTC units are self-cooling. The
SSX0520DTC includes a fan on the heatsink to aid in
heat dissipation.
2. Power Circuit Configuration – Full control utilizing 6
SCR’s.
3. SCR Protective Networks –
a. Voltage transient protection - RC snubber across
each SCR.
b. Current surge protection - Inherent in motor
inductance.
4. Phase Insensitive – Simplifies application. Unit may be
started with any phase rotation.
5. Phase Loss Protection – A lost phase produces a shutdown and prevents restarting until the lost phase is restored.
This feature requires the use of either an SSX0310DTC or
SSX0510DTC unit.
6. External Control Input – External control contacts are
provided for SSX units.
7. Stepless Acceleration – No discrete speed transition
points during acceleration.
8. Solid-State Construction – No electromechanical parts
or contacts to bounce, arc or burn and generate
transients. Noiseless, maintenance free operation.
102
Electrical Products Catalog
9. Life Expectancy – Unlimited when operated within design
parameters.
10. Compact – One tenth the size and weight of
electromechanical reduced voltage acceleration controls
of equivalent power handling capacity.
11. Line Protection – Fuses or circuit breaker, provided by
the user.
12. Power Connections – Terminal board with screw
terminals.
13. Rugged Construction – Designed for mounting “on
board” traveling components in material handling
systems.
NOTE:
Where severe shock loads and/or vibration are
encountered, suitable diaphragm type (or equivalent)
flexible isolators are suggested for mounting.
14. Electrical Codes– SSX Series controllers are designed
and manufactured to comply with standards established
by the National Electrical Code and NEMA, as applied to
motor and industrial control equipment.
15. Restart – A 250 millisecond delay is required between
starts. Restarting the motor in less time can damage the
controller.
16. SSX0310DTC and SSX0510DTC – Units contain torque
control and a deceleration ramp time.
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
SSX Series
1/2-20 Horsepower, 230 VAC
1-40 Horsepower, 460 VAC
1-50 Horsepower, 575 VAC
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
ADJUSTMENTS
When commanded to start, these units provide a precisely
regulated minimum voltage necessary to develop starting
torque adequate to initiate motor rotation. They then initiate a
programmed increase in voltage (timed ramp) until the motor
reaches rated voltage and speed within the desired time
span. Typical acceleration time and deceleration adjustment
ranges are illustrated by Figures 1 and 2.
1. Starting Torque . . . . . . . . . . .0 – 100% of rated voltage
The starting voltage is adjustable to provide adequate
breakaway torque for instant reaction to operator start
commands.
2. Ramp Time (typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-30 Seconds
AC Motor design (NEMA A, B, C, D) and load
characteristics (inertia and work load) can vary the
adjustment range.
3. Dwell Time – 0-6 seconds. Time that starting torque is
held (for slack take-up etc.).
4. Torque Control (models with “DTC” suffix) –
Provides a torque limit adjustment as well as a motor
overload threshold. It adds a motor current monitoring
circuit which in turn allows torque limit and overload
functions. With this feature, the SSX may be utilized and
rated as an overload device.
5. Deceleration Ramp Time (models with “DTC” suffix)
0-30 seconds AC motor design (NEMA Type A, B, C, D)
and the load characteristics (inertia and work load) can
vary the adjustment range.
PERCENT OF RATED SPEED
FIGURE 1: ACCELERATION TIME
100
80
60
40
SSX Acceleration
Adjustment Range (Typical)
Uncontrolled,
Full Voltage Start
20
0
16
2
8
4
ACCELERATION TIME (Seconds)
1
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Soft Start Acceleration Controllers
30
PERCENT OF RATED SPEED
FIGURE 2: DECELERATION TIME
100
80
Deceleration
Control Range (Typical)
Uncontrolled Stop
60
40
20
0
0.25
20
5
25
15
10
DECELERATION TIME (Seconds)
30
RATINGS
1. Horsepower Range
230 VAC Three Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1/2 – 20 HP
460 VAC Three Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 – 40 HP
575 VAC Three Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 – 50 HP
2. Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . .208/230V,460V,or 575V,
3 Phase, 50/60 Hz
3. Output Voltage Range . . . . . . .0-100% of Line Voltage
4. Service Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.15
5. Duty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Continuous
6. Overload Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115% Continuous
500% for 30 Seconds
7. Efficiency (Rated Speed/Rated Load)
Controller SCR regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99%
Complete drive with 93% efficient motor . . . . . . . . .92%
OPERATING CONDITIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Line Voltage Variation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .±10% of Rated
Line Frequency Variation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 to 62 Hz
Ambient Temperature Range . .30° -104°F (0° - 40°C)
Altitude (standard) . .3300 Feet (1000 Meters) Maximum
Load Type . . .3-phase ungrounded AC induction motor
Electrical Products Catalog
103
B
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Soft Start Acceleration Controllers
SSX Series
1/2-20 Horsepower, 230 VAC
1-40 Horsepower, 460 VAC
1-50 Horsepower, 575 VAC
MODEL TYPES
The SSX Series of Soft Start Acceleration Controllers are offered as a NEMA 1 enclosed controller. These units are available in either 208/230 VAC,
460 VAC or 575 VAC input voltages covering a range of 1/2 to 50 HP as shown below.
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Input
Voltage
208/230 VAC
Three Phase
50/60 H
460 VAC
Three Phase
50/60 H
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
B
575 VAC
Three Phase
50/60 HZ
Motor
HP
(1)
2
10
10
20(2)
5
20
20
40
5
25
25
50
KW
Rated Output
Amps
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
1.5
7.5
7.5
15(2)
3.7
15
15
30
3.7
19
19
38
7.6
31
31
52
7.6
31
31
52
7.6
31
31
52
SSX0076
SSX0310
SSX0310DTC
SSX0520DTC
SSX0076
SSX0310
SSX0310DTC
SSX0520DTC
SSX0076
SSX0310
SSX0310DTC
SSX0520DTC
18499
19267
72302
19297
18499
19267
72302
19297
18499
19267
72302
19297
(1) Higher horsepower ratings are available. Please contact the factory for ratings up to 4,000 HP.
(2) 230 VAC Only
DIMENSIONS
SSX0076
SSX0310 / SSX0520
7.25
Ø 0.19
WIDE SLOT
4.625
6.25 7.50 (1)
7.00
5.72 5.28
MTG
Ø 0.19
TYP 2PL
4.94 Deep
1.25
0.22
0.19
1/2 IN CONDUIT
3PL
2.50
2.94
0.25
TYP 4PL
TERMINAL
COVER
PRESS HERE TO OPEN
Weight 1.5 LBS.
6.25
3.50
Weight 5.6 LBS.
(1)
SSX0540 overall height = 7.625
CL
2.00
Option
Conduit
Box
104
Description
This option provides 0-30 second stepless deceleration
control upon activation of a remote switch. Three
adjustments are provided: Stop Response, Deceleration
Time, and Drop Out.
Electrical Products Catalog
2.00
Applicable
Drive
Installed
Option Number
SSX0076
WBX
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Options AC Motor Controllers
Option
No.
AH
For Use
with
Series
Description
ENCLOSURE, AUXILIARY
ADX
AO
ANALOG OUTPUTS
The standard controller has one 0-10 VDC analog output rated 2mA which may be programmed to follow
any one of the listed parameters:
a. Speed Command
i. Actual Speed
b. Motor Voltage
j. Accel/Decel Ramp
c. Motor Current
k. Motor Load
d. Frequency
l. P.I.D. Error
e. RPM
m.P.I.D. Feedback
f. Output Power
n. P.I.D. Reference
g. Remote Digital (a parameter set through the serial port)
h. P.I.D. Output
Option AO provides the capability to follow two additional parameters of those listed. This option may be useful
for external analog monitoring devices or as a speed or torque reference for other drives in a system.
ADX
CBH (1)
AC LINE CIRCUIT BREAKER WITH HANDLE
This option provides a three-pole magnetic trip circuit breaker as a means of manually disconnecting the drive
from the AC line. The handle for the option is cover mounted.
ACX
ADX
BCX
CRANE CONTROL INTERFACE (JOYSTICK CONTROL)
ADX
CCI (2)
This option facilitates the application of standard controllers to new or existing material handling systems where
individual preset motor speeds, and the direction of rotation are commonly determined by 115 VAC input signals
selected by external control contacts such as pushbuttons, joysticks or drum switches.
The option accepts up to six (6) 115 VAC inputs from external contact closures as follows:
1. Two (2) inputs provide directional commands: Forward, Reverse, or Up, Down and Preset Speed step number 1
2. Four (4) inputs provide Preset Speed step numbers 2 through 5 in either forward or reverse directions.
The speed steps can be adjusted to produce motor speeds anywhere between zero and maximum as required
by the application.
Additionally, Option CCI can also be used where forward and reverse run commands are selected as previously
described, and the speed command is infinitely adjustable by a speed setting potentiometer or external signal.
The option also coordinates the operation of a failsafe holding brake. To enable this capability Analog Output
(Option AO) must be added to the drive. Included is a provision to assure the brake will not energize until
sufficient torque is produced by the motor (typically 10-30% torque). This is factory set for 20% but can be reset
in the field to optimize performance. The brake will not de-energize until a stop command is given, and the controller
senses the preset low speed setpoint. The low speed setpoint is separately adjustable for both forward and
reverse directions. A fault condition (External or Drive Internal) will de-energize and set the brake immediately.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
This option consists of a separate sheet metal NEMA 1 enclosure. It has ample space to allow for mounting various options.
DIN
DIN RAIL MOUNTING KIT
This option enable the control to be mounted on a standard 35mm DIN rail, simplifying installation and
maximizing available panel real estate. Applies to 1/3 + 1HP, 230 VAC (NEMA 1) models only.
DMK (1)
DOOR MOUNTING KIT
ACX
BCX
ACX
Bracket and gasket to mount ACX2003 and ACX2010 to door of an enclosure.
EB
ELECTRONIC BRAKING
The braking capability of the standard AC controller is approximately 15-20% of rated torque. This is the limit of
a typical drive to dissipate the energy regenerated from the motor and connected machine while braking. This
option consists of an electronic braking transistor module. This module must be used with option EBR to
increase braking capability to 100% of rated torque at motor base speed. Option EB is in a NEMA 1 enclosure.
EBR
ACX
ADX
BCX
BRAKING RESISTOR ASSEMBLY (furnished in a NEMA 1 enclosure)
This option must be used with option EB to allow 100% braking torque. The braking circuit is rated for stopping a
typical load a maximum of two stops per minute from motor base speed. A typical load is defined as:
1. Not exceeding rated-load torque
2. External load inertia (beyond the motor shaft) not exceeding that of the motor’s rotor.
High inertia loads may extend braking times beyond the wattage rating of the power dissipation resistor. The
braking circuit is not rated for continuous regeneration and should be used only where intermittent control of
overhauling loads is required. The braking circuit is not a holding brake; it will not prevent a motor a rest from rotating.
Electrical Products Catalog
ACX
ADX
BCX
105
B
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Options AC Motor Controllers
Option
No.
FCL (1)
Description
FUSES, CURRENT LIMITING
For Use
with
Series
ADX
Provides 3-pole current limiting, Class J fuses with a clearing capacity of at least 100,000 symmetrical amperes
for protection of the plant power bus from fault conditions.
HOA
HAND-OFF-AUTO SWITCH
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Provides a 3-position switch and legend plate to select between user supplied manual speed pot and an
automatic speed reference. Option MB is also required for option HOA.
SELECTOR SWITCH HAND-OFF-AUTO WITH MANUAL POT
Provided is a 3-position switch, manual (HAND mode) pot and legend plate with associated circuitry to select
between user supplied external (AUTO mode) signal and manual pot.
LC
AC LINE CONTACTOR
Provides an AC line disconnect for the controller.
LCE (1)
INPUT LINE CHOKES – ENCLOSED
Same as LCO but furnished in a NEMA 1 enclosure.
This option should not normally be used in combination with Option LFO/LFE Output Line Filter.
LCO (1)
INPUT LINE CHOKES – OPEN
Includes an assembly with three (3) AC line reactors (chokes rated 3% impedance) connected in series with
the AC supply lines. They are furnished loose for customer mounting. These reactors oppose rapid line current
changes and surges and help protect the unit from transients.
This option is not normally needed when a controller is connected to the AC supply through an isolation
transformer. However, option LCE is suggested whenever:
1. The KVA of the AC power supply is greater than three (3) times the horsepower rating of the controller.
2. Additional transient voltage surge protection is desirable.
3. It is desirable to isolate inverter ripple currents from the AC line.
4. Harmonic distortion must be reduced.
This option should not be used in combination with Options LFO or LFE.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
B
HP
LFE (1)
OUTPUT FILTER (ENCLOSED)
Same as LFO but furnished in a NEMA 1 enclosure,
Since this option represents a 3% output impedance, it may not be acceptable in applications characterized by
low line voltage, heavy loading, and high speeds, or in combination with Input Line Chokes.
LFO (1)
OUTPUT LINE FILTER – OPEN
This is furnished loose for customer mounting and filters the AC output to provide the following benefits:
a. Quiet motor operation at low carrier frequencies.
b. Elimination of ground fault due to DV/DT.
c. Reduced DV/DT stress on motor windings at higher carrier frequencies.
d. Reduced electrical interference.
Since this option represents a 3% output impedance, it may not be acceptable in applications characterized by
low line voltage, heavy loading, and high speeds, or in combination with Input Line Chokes.
LON (2)
LONWORKS NETWORK INTERFACE
ACX
ADX
BCX
ACX
ADX
ACX
BCX
ACX
ADX
BCX
ACX
ADX
BCX
ACX
ADX
BCX
ACX
ADX
BCX
ADX
This circuit board provides a LonWorks port, which conforms to the LonMark Profile for Variable Speed Motor
Drives. An external LonMark compliant device can then control the ADX. Additional access, beyond the LonMark
profile, is provided to all ADX parameters.
LSP
LOCAL SPEED POTENTIOMETER
This option provides local analog motor speed control (1/2 watt, 5K ohm, single turn).
For the ACX2003 and ACX2010, option WBX is also required.
MB (1)
MAGNETIC BYPASS
With this option, the ACX is bypassed and the motor is directly connected to the AC line. Three contactors, motor
overload, and AC line disconnect fuses are included in the enclosure. The drive is isolated in the bypass mode.
Option MB can be ordered in a NEMA 1 or a NEMA 4 enclosure.
MC (1)
MOTOR CONTACTOR
Provides an AC output contactor that is coordinated with the controller’s electronics to ensure a safe, reliable shutdown
and a positive disconnection of the motor from the control. Option MB can be ordered in a NEMA 1 or a NEMA 4 enclosure.
106
Electrical Products Catalog
ACX
ADX
BCX
ACX
ADX
BCX
ACX
ADX
BCX
RATIOTROL SYSTEMS
Options AC Motor Controllers
Option
No.
MCI (2)
For Use
with
Series
Description
MAGNETIC CONTROL INTERFACE (115V)
ADX
This option provides a means of interfacing the controller with pushbuttons or external logic powered by a 115 VAC
excitation source. The interface circuit includes five (5) control relays with 115 VAC coils
for use in both unidirectional and reversing applications, and three (3) or more preset speeds, or other functions.
DIGITAL OPERATOR PANEL (UNENCLOSED, SEPARATE MOUNTING)
ADX
This option provides the standard operator panel furnished with an 18” (.46m) cable and connector for plug-in
connection to the controller. The operator panel would normally be mounted in the door of a larger enclosure
within which the enclosure is mounted.
OR (1)
RO (2)
This option includes a standard NEMA rated 3-pole overload relay. Motor full-load current must match listed adjustment range.
ACX
ADX
BCX
RELAY OUTPUT
ADX
OVERLOAD RELAY
This option provides four (4) relays with Form C contacts rated 2 amps @ 250 VAC for customer use to
annunciate the digital control outputs provided by the standard open connector transistors. This option allows
these outputs to be used with warning devices such as bells, buzzers and indicator lights or other monitoring
devices. This option mounts within a dedicated area in the controller.
RSS
RUN STOP SWITCH
B
BCX
This option consists of a single-pole, single-throw slide switch which mounts on the front of the controller
WBX
CONDUIT BOX
ACX
This option connects to the bottom of the controller allowing for termination of standard conduit connections.
This option is only for controllers ACX2003, ACX2010, BCX2003, and BCX2010.
BCX
2XV-03
2XV-10
VOLTAGE DOUBLER
ACX
BCX
24E
CLOSED LOOP FLUX VECTOR (ENCODER FEEDBACK)
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
OPC
This option permits the use of 115VAC single-phase power to the controller. Two (2) models are available,
2XV-03 for up to 1/3 HP and 2XV-10 for up to 1 HP.
ADX
Provides terminals and circuitry for accepting a digital feedback signal from a photo optical encoder
mechanically coupled to the drive motor rotor. The feedback signal replaces the slip compensation circuitry
in the controller, making the unity directly sensitive to motor speed.
This option results in improved speed regulation with load changes and reduced sensitivity to operating
conditions such as line voltage variations, ambient temperature changes, motor heating, and other variables.
ENCODER SPECIFICATIONS
1. Electrical: LED/Optical type
2. Supply Voltage: +5 VDC power supply
3. Channel Arrangement: Quadrature, Differential, Bidirectional.
4. Line drivers (TTL) are needed for applications where greater than fifty (50) feet of wiring distance separate
the motor and controller.
5. Marker Pulse: Not required.
6. Number of Lines, Pulses Per Revolution (PPR): 1000 or 1024 is standard. A performance reduction will
result when lower frequency encoders are applied.
This option does not include the encoder.
45A
BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL
ADX
Includes a 3-pole AC motor starter with 3-leg overload protection and an integral circuit breaker to control and
protect an AC force-ventilation blower mounted on the main drive motor. The blower is energized whenever
power is applied to the controller and the optional AC line switch or circuit breaker is closed.
Motor blower is not included with this option.
45B
BLOWER MOTOR FUSES
ADX
Includes 3-pole line fuses to protect an AC force ventilation blower, mounted on the main drive motor. The
blower is energized whenever power is applied to the controller and the optional AC line switch or circuit
breaker is closed.
Motor Blower is not included with this option.
Electrical Products Catalog
107
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
B
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
NOTES
108
Electrical Products Catalog
ACCESSORIES
Boston Gear offers a complete range of accessories for use with our AC and DC Ratiotrol controllers. All components have been
selected for their compatibility to the systems.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
REMOTE CONTROL STATIONS...........................................................................................109-110
AC TACHOMETER GENERATOR DOUBLE C-FACE .................................................................112
DC TACHOMETER GENERATOR DOUBLE C-FACE .................................................................112
MAGNETIC PICKUP ASSEMBLIES.............................................................................................113
DIGITAL PULSE TACHOMETER..................................................................................................114
ANALOG METER..........................................................................................................................114
DIGITAL METER ...........................................................................................................................115
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
DC TACHOMETER GENERATORS..............................................................................................111
REMOTE CONTROL STATIONS
The remote control stations shown on these pages may be used with one or more controller. The listings indicate control
functions, components and the controllers with which each remote control station may be used. Dimensions are shown for
NEMA 1 enclosures. Consult factory for dimensions on other NEMA enclosures. NEMA definitions are on page 189.
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
Pushbuttons
Control Elements
Switches
Pots
Run, Stop
—
Motor Speed
Run, Stop
Run/Jog
Run, Stop
Run, Stop
Run/Jog
Run/Jog
Fwd, Rev, Stop
—
Motor Speed
Jog Speed
Motor Speed
Motor Speed
Jog Speed
Motor Speed
Use With
Controller
Models
ACX, BCX, ADX
RBA, RBS,
VES, VED(BP, CP)
VED(BP, CP)
Remote Station
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
RCS1
69362
RCS3
69366
RBA(U,UB), RBS(U,UB), VES(U,UB)
RBA, RBS, VES
RCS3C
RCS3D
58098
58099
RBA(M,MB), RBS(M,MB),
VED(BPR,CPR), VES(M,MB)
RCS6
60239
(CONTINUED)
Electrical Products Catalog
109
C
ACCESSORIES
REMOTE CONTROL STATIONS (Continued)
1.12 DIA.
(ONE END)
.88 MAX.
CONTROL
PROJ.
2.06
1.50
3.00
3.00
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
(2) .19 DIA.
HOLES-AS
SHOWN
7.50
9.00
1.62
.69
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
.75
C
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
Pushbuttons
—
Control Elements
Switches
Run/Stop/Jog
—
Run, Stop, Emer. Stop
Run/Stop/Jog,
Fwd/Stop/Rev
—
Pots
Motor Speed
Motor Speed
Motor Speed
100-0-100
Run, Stop, Emer. Stop
Run/Jog
Motor Speed
100-0-100
Run, Stop, Emer. Stop
Fwd/Rev
Motor Speed
0-100
Microprocessor Based Membrane Control Panel with Push
Switches for Run-Jog-Stop, Motor Speed Faster-Slower
and Motor Direction Forward-Reverse
110
Electrical Products Catalog
Use With
Controller
Models
RBA(U,UB),
RBS(U,UB), VES(U,UB)
RBA(M,MB),
RBS(M,MB), VES(M,MB)
VEL/H-RG
Remote Station
Catalog
Number
RCS16
Item
Code
58102
RCS17
58103
RCS30-RG
66953
VEL/H-RG
RCS31-RG
66954
VEL/H-RG
RCS32-RG
66955
VED (B, BR, C, CR)
MCS1
66774
ACCESSORIES
DC Tachometer Generator
Tachometer Generators are used to sense (monitor) motor shaft speed and to supply
a voltage signal to a meter for speed indication, to another control to set its speed
(follower or “Slave”) or to signal speed changes to the control associated with the
motor (tachometer feedback).
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
Output
per 1000
RPM
50 VDC
50 VDC
50 VDC
Catalog
Number
TG-3
TG3C-P
TG3F-P
Mounting
Foot/flange
Flange
Foot
Item
Code
38614
19170
19171
Driving
Torque
(oz. in.)
1.5
1.5
1.5
Max
RPM
5000
5000
5000
Inertia
(lb. in2)
1.4
1.4
1.4
Ripple
%
1.5
.5
.5
DIMENSIONS
.291
2
(4) .276 DIA. HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED
ON 1.989 RADIUS
5
8
.327
.297
4.61
4.57
.06
.3125 DIA.
.3120
7
4 64
2.500
2.498
DIA.
.286 FLAT
.276
5
3 16
3
4
.91
.97
113
16
158
3 78
158
7
32 DIA.
(6) HOLES
1 27
64
1 27
64
3
32
7
3 16
1.77
1.67
.281 DIA THRU
TYP 4 PLACES
6.500
.3125
B .010 DIA
.500
.3125/.3120
DIA
DIA
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Boston Gear offers three models to allow a variety of applications, flange mounted to
adapt to rear of motors (with adapters), foot mounted for belt driven applications and
one unit which can be both foot or flange mounted.
3.250
DIA
1.88
12"–14
.06
NPT
5.875
.286/.276
DIA
.97/.91
1.989
1.989
2.500
2.498 B
4.59
C
7.47
TERMINAL BOARD
TG3C-P
TG3
6.5625
5.9375
1/2"–14
NPT
3.250
DIA
.500
3125/.3120
DIA
1.88
Flange mounted generator can be mounted on certain motors
capable of supporting its size and weight as shown below:
1.81
2.500
3.250
.286/.276
.875 DIA .10
.8125
.3125
.03125
1.42/1.40
.109 RAD
1.42/1.40
3.875
ADAPTERS
3.4375
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
For Use With
Motors
Adapter Required
Catalog Number
Item Code
TGAB3*
66795
18300ATF-B
.03125
*Requires coupling BG11-3-5-5 Coupling
TG3F-P
Electrical Products Catalog
111
ACCESSORIES
AC Tachometer Generator, Double C-Face
TG50A Series
These self-contained AC voltage generators produce a 2 phase linear output voltage
proportional to speed. There are two gray leads (1st phase) and two black leads (2nd
phase) in each generator. The generator output voltage, of 50 VAC/1000 RPM, can
be used with a meter for speed indication or in a Tachometer follower or Tachometer
feedback system. These generators will fit any standard NEMA 56C, 180C or 140TC
frame motor. To prevent excessive loading, external connections to the generator
should not total less than 25K ohms. This unit is designed for use between a C-Face
motor and a flanged reducer, it is not intended for overhung loads on output shaft.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
U DIA. SHAFT WITH
3/16 x 3/32 KEYWAY
C
2.00
2.50
.12
.25
U' DIA.-2.25 DP.
WITH 3/16 x 3/32
KEYWAY
4.500
PILOT
BORE
4.499
PILOT
DIA.
6.500
DIA.
(4) 13/32 THRU. HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED
ON 5.875 DIA. B.C.
(4) 3/8-16 TAPPED
HOLES (THRU)
EQUALLY SPACED
ON 5.875 DIA. B.C.
1/2 N.P.T. FOR
LEAD WIRES
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
Voltage
Output/
1000 RPM
Max.
Speed
RPM
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
NEMA
C-Face
Bore
Code
Temperature
Constant
(Per Degree F)
50 VAC
50 VAC
6000
6000
TG50A56C
TG50A140TC
60153
60154
56C
180C-140TC
B5
B7
.04 Volt
.04 Volt
U
Output
Dia.
U′
Input
Dia.
.6245/.6250 .6257/.6252
.8745/.8750 .8757/.8752
DC Tachometer Generator, Double C-Face
Approx.
Weight
(Lbs.)
7
7
TG35D Series
These self-contained DC voltage generators produce a linear output voltage
proportional to speed. The generator output voltage of 35 VDC/1000 RPM can be
used with a meter for speed indication or in a Tachometer follower or Tachometer
feedback system. These generators will fit any standard NEMA 56C, 180C or 140TC
frame motor. To prevent excessive loading, external connections to the generator
should not total less than 50K ohms. Not for use with regenerative controllers. This
unit is designed for use between a C-Face motor and a flanged reducer, it is not
intended for overhung loads on output shaft.
U DIA. SHAFT WITH
3/16 x 3/32 KEYWAY
2.00
2.50
.12
.25
U' DIA.-2.25 DP.
WITH 3/16 x 3/32
KEYWAY
4.500
PILOT
BORE
4.499
PILOT
DIA.
(4) 3/8-16 TAPPED
HOLES (THRU)
EQUALLY SPACED
ON 5.875 DIA. B.C.
6.500
DIA.
(4) 13/32 THRU. HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED
ON 5.875 DIA. B.C.
1/2 N.P.T. FOR
LEAD WIRES
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
Voltage
Output/
1000 RPM
Max.
Speed
RPM
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
NEMA
C-Face
Bore
Code
Temperature
Constant
(Per Degree F)
35 VDC
35 VDC
2000
2000
TG35D56C
TG35D140TC
50477
50478
56C
180C-140TC
B5
B7
.04 Volt
.04 Volt
112
Electrical Products Catalog
U
Output
Dia.
U′
Input
Dia.
.6245/.6250 .6257/.6252
.8745/.8750 .8757/.8752
Approx.
Weight
(Lbs.)
7
7
ACCESSORIES
Magnetic Pick-up Assemblies
Magnetic pickup assemblies are used to deliver a 60 pulse per revolution signal for
use with a tachometer to display the accurate speed of a motor.
The assemblies contain a 60 tooth gear, C-face adapter with conduit box and sensor.
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
NEMA
C-FACE
Bore
Code
MPA56C
MPA140TC
MPA180TC
MPA210TC
MPA250TC
60254
60255
60256
60257
60258
56C
140TC
180TC
210TC
250TC
B5
B7
B9
B11
B13
DIMENSIONS
A
ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
NEMA C-FACE
A
B
C
D
56C, 140TC
180TC, 210TC, 250TC
9.32
12.63
6.50
9.62
4.500
8.500
.750
.875
B
C
D
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
Inline Amplifier and Pulse Shaper
for Magnetic Pick-ups
ASTC Series
The ASTC boosts magnetic pickup signals by a factor of more than 100, and provides
an NPN Open-Collector pulse output which is compatible with the DPT-1A and
DPT-2A meters. The ASTC can be used at pulse rates to 10KHz. The NPN O.C.
output is current limited to 40mA. The unit is epoxy encapsulated in a 3/4" Dia.
stainless steel shell, with overall dimensions of 0.9"D × 4.5"L including Neoprene
strain-reliefs on each end. In installations where long signal runs are to be made it is
advisable to keep the ASTC close to the pickup and let its output cable make the long
run. Input and output cables should not be run in conduit, cable troughs, or bundles
with power or control voltage lines. Operating temperature is –18° to +60°C.
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER
OR ITEM CODE
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
ASTC
19132
NOTE: This amplifier is recommended when using two or more meters (DPT series) from one magnetic pulse pick-up signal. Also when the meter is more than ten
feet from the signal source.
2-WIRE, SHIELDED, INPUT
CABLE, 10 FT. LONG
MAGNETIC PICKUP
BLACK
MODEL ASTC IN-LINE AMPLIFIER
3-WIRE, SHIELDED, OUTPUT
CABLE, 10 FT. LONG
RED
WHT
WHITE
BLK
SHIELD OPEN
ON THIS END
NOTE: Both magnetic pickup leads must
be floating. Do not ground or connect to shield.
+12VDC AT 15MA
OUTPUT:
40MA MAX. AT VOL=IV
+28V MAX. AT O MA.
COMMON
SHIELD - CONNECT
TO COMMON AT
INPUT OF TACH.
OR COUNTER
Electrical Products Catalog
113
C
ACCESSORIES
5 Digit Digital Pulse Tachometers
DPT Series
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
The DPT Series of digital tachometers are completely field programmable. The
display updates to a new reading at the conclusion of each time base. The time base
is set with switches, giving a choice of time bases from .001 seconds to 32.76
seconds in minimum increments of .001 seconds. In addition these tachometers have
programmable decimal points and frequency doubling at the flip of a switch. This
feature provides a count pulse at both the leading and trailing edges of the input
pulse, which doubles the input information rate and allows the time base to be
reduced by half.
Frequency doubling allows shorter update times for the readout for those applications
where a longer rate is objectionable and otherwise unavoidable. For example,
frequency doubling permits a 30 second time base to be used where a 60 second
time base would normally be required.
When using two or more generators on the same magnetic pick-up signal or for distances over ten feet, it is recommended to use the ASTC amplifier shown on page 113.
DIMENSIONS
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
.50
2.25
4.625
A.C. Line
Catalog Number
Item Code
115V
230V
DPT-1A
DPT-2A
48862
48863
4.50
Analog Meter
C
The RMA-1 meter is a 4-1/2" rectangular meter with additional printed circuitry and
adjustment pot to permit the indication of RPM when connected to the various AC and
DC voltages present on motor armatures and tachometer generators. Five voltage
ranges are provided to permit inputs of 50 VAC or 50 VDC to 500 VDC.
The meter face is readily removed to enable you to substitute a face with special
calibration, such as 0-100%, reducer RPM, FPM, etc.
Accuracy ±2% full scale
Tracking ±2%
Repeatability 2%
Balance (Horizontal to vertical) ±1%
Temperature Effect (15°-35°C) 1%
Damping Factor 2.5 min.
Response Time 1.5 sec. max.
DIMENSIONS
2.00
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
3.98
MAX.
2.65
MIN.
3.56
1.54
4.00
5.11
114
Electrical Products Catalog
(4) CLEARANCE
HOLES FOR
#6-32 SCREWS
Catalog Number
Item Code
Approx. Weight
RMA-1
60879
1 Lb.
ACCESSORIES
Digital Meter
The RMD-1 digital meter is low cost, reliable, accurate and physically interchangeable
with existing 4-1/2 inch rectangular analog meters. Four input ranges accept minimum
signals from 50 mV to 500 VDC, to read full scale (1999). The 20 turn calibration pot
allows the output to be scaled to the indication required.
DISPLAY: 4 active digits (0 to 1999). 0.5 inch LED non-blinking with a 0.25 second
update period. Optional decimal point before last digit.
INPUT SIGNAL VOLTAGE: Minimum input to produce full reading is 50 millivolts dc,
100 millivolts ac. Maximum input voltage is 500 VDC, 460 VAC.
INPUT SIGNAL DEVICE: Any AC or DC shunt providing a 50 mV. or larger signal. An
AC or DC signal source. A fixed pulse area digital tachometer.
READOUT LINEARITY: 0.5% F.S. ±1 count.
POWER REQUIREMENTS: 115 VAC ±10V, 2 watts. Meter circuit is entirely isolated
from line and case.
DIMENSIONS
OVERRANGE: Indication by “EEE”. 500% signal input over-voltage protection on all
scales except high voltage scale.
2.005
1.995
4.050
MAX.
3.572
3.552
2.700
MIN.
Jl RANGE
POWER
115 VAC
J2
1.536
1.526
4.010
3.990
4.650
MAX.
A B C D INPUT
READOUT
SCALE
XX X
– +
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
Catalog Number
Item Code
Approx. Weight
RMD-1
60880
1 Lb.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
ventas[email protected]
INPUT SIGNAL FREQUENCY: Minimum fixed frequency input is 40 Hz. Minimum
variable frequency input to produce maximum readout is 200 Hz. Maximum variable
frequency input is 2000 Hz.
C
Electrical Products Catalog
115
C
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
NOTES
116
Electrical Products Catalog
CLUTCHES AND BRAKES
A natural addition to constant speed motor/reductor drives and adjustable speed
Ratiotrol systems, these products fill a need where high inertial loads exist or frequent
starts and stops exceed the capabilities of standard motors.
These products are comprised of four groups; C-face clutch/brakes, C-face clutches,
foot-mounted clutch-brakes and shaft-mounted clutches, brakes and combination
clutch-brakes.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION ...........................................................................................................118
DOUBLE C-FACE DC CLUTCH/BRAKES ..........................................................................119-120
FOOT MOUNTED DC CLUTCH/BRAKES............................................................................121-124
DC SHAFT MOUNTED SELECTION ...........................................................................................125
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Boston Clutch and Brake products are a result of many years of manufacturing and
application experience resulting in a reliable, rugged and sound design providing maximum performance and life.
DC SHAFT MOUNTED CLUTCHES .....................................................................................126-129
DC SHAFT MOUNTED BRAKES .........................................................................................130-133
DC SHAFT MOUNTED CLUTCH/BRAKES..........................................................................134-137
DC CLUTCH/BRAKE POWER SUPPLIES ..................................................................................138
DOUBLE C-FACE AC BRAKES ..................................................................................................139
DOUBLE C-FACE WASHDOWN AC BRAKES ....................................................................140-141
AC MOTOR BRAKE KIT ..............................................................................................................142
APPLICATION ENGINEERING .............................................................................................176-189
Electrical Products Catalog
117
D
CLUTCHES AND BRAKES
General Information
These are a few common applications. Clutches and
Brakes may be used wherever control of linear or rotary
motion starts and stops are required.
Electric clutches and brakes perform controlled start and stop
functions between a constantly-running prime mover and a
load. Electrical commands are generated manually (pushbutton) or automatically (switch, photocell, tape, sequence programmer, etc.)
THE DISCS ARE CONNECTED BY MEANS OF ELECTROMAGNETIC ATTRACTION
In a brake, one disc (the magnet) contains a coil embedded in a circular horseshoe
shaped cavity. The other disc
(the armature) consists of
segments of iron attached to
backing plate.
MAGNET
ARMATURE
COIL
CLUTCH – Acceleration
TERMINAL
A friction face is embedded in
the magnet of the brake
between the inner pole and
the outer pole. When direct
current is applied to the coil,
magnetic force attracts the
armature to the magnet.
OUTER POLE
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
In this split-shaft application,
the field and rotor are mounted to a motor and the armature to a reducer input shaft.
A low setting of the potentiometer on the control
allows the clutch to engage
the reducer worm gears
smoothly, eliminating shock
to the machine system.
HIGH RESPONSE
COIL
FLUX
COIL
FRICTION
MATERIAL
INNER POLE
ARMATURE
ROTOR
NO SHOCK
Potentiometer low: controlled
stop.
EP026
A
HIGH RESPONSE
Potentiometer full: fast precise stop.
REVERSING
In this application, the rotational direction of the driven
shaft is determined by
engaging different clutches.
SPEED CHANGING
EMERGENCY STOP
Signal to brake brings malfunctioning system to a fast stop.
HOLDING
Fully engaged brake holds machine in stopped position.
CLUTCH/BRAKE
LINEAR POSITIONING
Carton breaks the beam,
disengaging the clutch,
engaging the brake. Carton
(counter timer, pressure
switch, etc.) disengages the
brake, engages the clutch.
EP024A
The speed of the driven shaft
is determined by engaging
the appropriate clutch.
D
CLUTCH & BRAKE BASICS
DC clutches and brakes are magnetically-activated mechanical
power transmission members normally installed between a
motor shaft and driven shaft – either a speed reducer or the
final driven shafts.
JOGGING
Pushbutton IN, clutch is ON;
button OUT, clutch is disengaged and brake is ON.
Common in machine setup
and registration controls.
Both a clutch and brake transmit torque mechanically in
response to an electrical signal.
118
Electrical Products Catalog
ROTARY INDEXING
EP028A
In a clutch, a disc on a revolving shaft is connected by
magnetic attraction to a disc
on a stationary shaft thus
starting the drive.
In a brake, one disc is fixed
and magnetic attraction
stops the revolving disc.
In the clutch, the magnet is
stationary and the magnetic
flux passes across an airgap
and through a rotating rotor
into the armature.
BRAKE – Deceleration
In this thru-shaft application,
the potentiometer is set to
full current. Engaging the
clutch produces millisecond
power transmission from
motor to driven shaft.
®
EP025A
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
NO SHOCK
Proximity switch disengages
the clutch, engages the brake
for precise positioning.
CYCLING
Programmed sequencer alternately engages the clutch and
brake, producing programmed start-stop sequence.
CLUTCHES AND BRAKES
C-Face Mounted
90 VDC
Clutches - CC Series
Clutch Brakes - CBC Series
“CC” clutch and “CBC” clutch/brake modules
may be mounted directly to NEMA C-face
motors and reducers. (Modules have 90VDC
coils)
NEMA C-Face Mounting
To select the correct module package:
1.
Determine the frame size, horsepower
and output rpm of your motor.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
An optional conduit box is available. It has two
conduit connection holes for 1/2” standard
conduit connectors.
2.
Choose the right size module from the
horsepower versus shaft speed chart
and the NEMA mounting flange.
Horsepower vs. Shaft Speed
HP
Shaft Speed At Clutch (In RPM)
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1500 1800 2000 2400 3000 3600
1/4
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/2
2
3
5
7-1/2
56
180
210
D
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
Static
Torque
(Lb. Ft.)
16
Maximum
Motor HP
3600 RPM
1
30
3
95
7.5
NEMA-C
Frame
56
143TC, 145TC
182C, 184C
182TC, 184TC
213C, 215C
CC Series
Reducer Approx. Weight (lbs)
Clutches
Bore
CC
CBC
Catalog
Item
Code
Series
Series
Number
Code
B5
8.3
10.0
CC56-16A
82904
CBC Series
Clutch Brakes
Catalog
Item
Number
Code
CBC56-16A
82907
B7
10.3
13.2
CC180-30A
82905
CBC180-30A
82908
B9
24.3
30.6
CC210-95A
82906
CBC210-95A
82909
Electrical Products Catalog
119
CLUTCHES AND BRAKES
C-Face Mounted
90 VDC
Clutches - CC Series
Clutch Brakes - CBC Series
G
A
H
F
1/2" Conduit
Hole Both
Ends
Optional
Conduit
Box
L
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
M
K
C
J
E
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
D
N
B
10
Motor
Clutch
40
Output
Clutch
All dimensions are nominal, unless otherwise noted.
D
SIZE*
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
56 - 16A
6.750
4.844
1.813
6.750
.625
.937
2.203
----
180 - 30A
6.828
4.844
1.812
6.750
.875
.937
2.203
----
210 - 95A
8.891
5.922
2.500
9.250
1.125
.500
2.203
.500
SIZE*
J
K
L
M
N
56 - 16A
5.531
2.188
3.250
4.438
6.688
180 - 30A
5.531
2.188
3.250
4.438
6.688
210 - 95A
6.859
2.188
3.250
5.766
9.688
* Dimensions are the same for “CC” and “CBC” Series
120
Electrical Products Catalog
CLUTCHES AND BRAKES
Foot Mounted
Clutch Brakes - CBF Series
90 VDC
Meets electrical codes
Heavy duty bearings
UL Listed or CSA Certified.
Properly aligned for maximum performance.
Clutch input shaft
Pre-packaged
Over 20 major components have been preengineered and preassembled in a typical
foot mounted module.
Ready-to-go, straight
from the box.
Maintenance free
Foot mounted
Never needs lubrication.
Self-adjusting for wear of
clutch-brake friction faces.
Consistent performance.
Bolt-it-down and wire-it-up. Allows for
quick replacement/reduced downtime.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Brake output shaft
CBF Modules are rugged, pre-assembled clutch
and brake combinations in an enclosed, foot
mounted housing.
TYPICAL APPLICATION
They are factory aligned and pre-assembled and
have been designed to mate easily with industry
standard motors and reducers with v-belts, pulleys,
chain and sprockets, in line couplings and timing
belt drives.
D
FEATURES
• Bolt-it-down and wire-it-up . . . it’s ready to go!
• Maintenance free
• Torque range from 22.5 lb. ft. to 50 lb. ft.
A foot mounted module combines with a motor in a
parallel shaft drive application.
Electrical Products Catalog
121
CLUTCHES AND BRAKES
Foot Mounted
Clutch Brakes - CBF Series
90 VDC
SELECTION PROCEDURE
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Determine the shaft speed at the clutch/brake module. The number listed at the intersection
of horsepower and speed is the size clutch/brake module you require.
Horsepower vs. Shaft Speed
HP
Shaft Speed At Clutch (In RPM)
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1500 1800 2000 2400 3000 3600 4000
CBF22A
CBF50A
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
1/20
1/12
1/8
1/6
1/4
1/3
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/2
2
3
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
D
Static
Torque
(Lb. Ft.)
Max.
RPM
Approx.
Weight
(Lbs.)
22.5
50*
4500
4000
19.7
56
*Clutch is rated 40 Lb. Ft., brake is rated 50 Lb. Ft.
122
Electrical Products Catalog
Totally Enclosed
Catalog
Item
Number
Code
CBF22A
CBF50A
82902
82903
CLUTCHES AND BRAKES
Foot Mounted
Clutch Brakes - CBF Series
90 VDC
Clutch
Brake
O
Output
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Input
A
I
B
B
C
C
J
H
K
D
D
F
E
M
G
Size
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
E
L
CBF22A
A
3/16 x 3/16 x
1-1/2
N
B
.7495
.7485
Size
I
CBF22A
6.937
C Min.
D
E
F
G Max.
1.875
3.515
4.593
2.500
11.781
J
.3474
.3464
H
.312 Wide
(4 slots)
K
L
M
N
O
.500
2.578
5.156
6.000
1/2 conduit x 2
D
SPECIFICATIONS
Size
Static Torque (lb. ft.)
CBF22A
270
Inertia*-WR2 (lb-in2)
Output
Input
2.566
2.222
Max. RPM
4500
Weight lbs.
19.7
Electrical Products Catalog
123
CLUTCHES AND BRAKES
Foot Mounted
Clutch Brakes - CBF Series
90 VDC
Brake
Clutch
Input
Output
I
A
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
D
B
J
C
C
H
L
E
F
E
N
G
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
K
M
O
Size
®
CBF50A
Size
CBF50A
A
3/16 X 3/16
1-3/4
H Dia.
.406
(4 holes)
B Dia.
.8750
.8745
I
8.218
J
4.004
3.992
C Min.
D Max. Dia.
E
F
G Max.
2.218
3.796
4.234
7.000
15.515
K
L
M
N Max.
O
5.00
2.937
5.875
8.734
1/2 conduit x 2
D
SPECIFICATIONS
Size
CBF50A
124
Electrical Products Catalog
Unit
Clutch
Brake
Static Torque (lb. ft.)
50
40
Inertia*-WR2 (lb-ft2)
Max. RPM
Weight lbs.
2.222
4000
56
Output
Input
.063
.039
CLUTCHES AND BRAKES
DC Shaft Mounted Selection
Clutch and brake components for shaft-mounting provide flexible arrangements to satisfy almost any mechanical arrangement where power transmission capabilities are
required.
The most common arrangement is the bearing-mounted split-shaft application used
to couple two in-line shafts.
Clutches for through-mounting utilize bearing mounted sprockets or pulleys to drive
parallel shafts.
Brakes are flanged mounted with the field held stationary on a machine member.
For application engineering see pages 175-189.
CLUTCH, BEARING-MOUNTED, SPLIT SHAFT
(TYPE S)
CLUTCH, BEARING MOUNTED, THROUGH
SHAFT (TYPE T)
Clutches consist of a field, rotor, armature and its hub. The field
is mounted on sealed ball bearings and remains stationary
while the rotor revolves. The rotor extends through the field
assembly and is attached to the drive shaft by a bushing, in
many sizes. A small tab holds the field stationary. The armature
is mounted on a splined hub held on the shaft by standard
tapered bushings.
The through-shaft mounting of the field and rotor is as
described for the split-shaft version. The armature in this application is mounted to a bearing mounted sheave, sprocket or
gear. A special sheave adapter is necessary to assist in the
mounting of the armature sheave. (Typical C50 and larger)
ROTOR
TAB
FIELD
SHEAVE ADAPTER
BEARING-MOUNTED SHEAVE
ROTOR
ARMATURE
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Clutch brakes are bearing-mounted for split-shaft coupling.
ARMATURE
FIELD
BALL BEARING
ARMATURE HUB
BUSHING
DRIVEN
SHAFT
DRIVING
SHAFT
DRIVING
SHAFT
DRIVEN SHAFT
AIR GAP
BRAKE, FLANGE MOUNTED
CLUTCH BRAKE
The magnet is mounted to a machine member, or a stationary
mounting plate by inner or outer mounted flanges. The space
available determines which flange to use. Terminals are wired
directly to the brake control terminals. The armature rides on a
splined drive hub. Standard tapered bushings secure the hub
to the rotating shaft, in most units.
When the clutch field is energized and the brake coil is deenergized, the clutch and brake armatures rotate with the drive
shaft. When the clutch coil is de-energized and the brake coil
energized, the two armatures are stopped. The rotor continues
to turn. Operation is the same whether the clutch is bearing or
flange mounted.
ROTOR
TERMINAL
MAGNET
OUTER POLE
COIL
FIELD
ARMATURE
ARMATURE
INNER POLE
MAGNET
ARMATURE HUB
RELEASE SPRING
KEY
DOUBLE
ARAMATURE HUB
BUSHING
DRIVEN SHAFT
DRIVING SHAFT
FRICTION MATERIAL
OUTER MOUNTED FLANGE
Electrical Products Catalog
125
D
CLUTCHES AND BRAKES
Clutches
C20 Series
90 VDC
RATINGS
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Static Torque: 20 Lb. Ft.
Maximum Speed: 4500 RPM
Voltage: 90 VDC
Resistance at 20°C: 1087 ±5% ohms
Maximum Current: .087 Amps
Maximum Watts: 7.83
Coil Build-up: 95 ms
Coil Decay: 23 ms
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS — C20S
Angular alignment of shafts within .006" TIR at 5" diameter
Armature mounting shaft concentric with rotor mounting shaft within .003" TIR
SPLIT SHAFT MODELS — C20S
THROUGH SHAFT MODELS — C20T
3.833
3.793
2.958
2.918
1.010
.990
1.948
1.928
.068
.058
.068
.058
.405
.345
.198
.178
1.135
1.115
1
3
1.198
1.178
1.604
1.584
DIA.
1.630
1.620
2
4.260
4.240
DIA.
.198
.178
1.376
1.375
DIA.
3
.073
.053
1.201
1.186
2.203
2.173
2- #1/4-20UNC
SET SCREWS
.024 NOMINAL
AIR GAP
.198
.178
2- #1/4-20UNC
SET SCREWS
E
.024 NOMINAL
AIR GAP
.5
.4 20
80
35°
25°
AVERAGE WEIGHTS AND INERTIAS
.2
.2 20
00
50°
40°
+
+
+
2
2. .52 2 2.2
47 1 .2 72
32
9
D
B
+
A
+
+
Part
Field and Rotor
Field
Rotor 3/4 bore
Armature
Armature hub (C20S)
Armature hub (C20T)
Total C20S
Total C20T
ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
STANDARD BORES
Actual
.5005/.5015
.6255/.6270
.7505/.7520
.8755/.8770
1.0005/1.0020
4.260
4.240
DIA.
1.630
1.620
2- #1/4-20UNC
SET SCREWS
Nominal
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8†
1 †
.405
.345
.3145
.3125
1
2
1.948
1.928
Inertia (lb ft2)
—
—
.0159
.0151
.0023
.0023
Wt. (lbs.)
3.890
2.343
1.547
.815
.604
.802
5.309
5.507
ORDER BY ITEM CODE
KEYWAY DIMENSIONS*
Keyway
1/8 × 1/16
3/16 × 3/32
3/16 × 3/32
3/16 × 3/32
1/4 × 1/8
A
.560/.565
.709/.715
.837/.845
.964/.970
1.114/1.122
B
.126/.128
.188/.190
.188/.190
.188/.190
.251/.253
No. 1
Armature
C20S/C20T
45061
No. 2
Armature Hub
C20S
C20T
45062
45067
45063
45068
45064
45069
45065
—
45066
—
No. 3 Field and
Rotor Assembly
C20S/C20T
45070
45071
45072
45073†
45074†
*Armature Hub Data not applicable to C20T.
†Not applicable to C20T.
HOW TO ORDER: Specify Item Codes for Armature, Armature Hub (desired bore) and Field and Rotor Assembly (desired bore) for desired Type, C20S or C20T.
126
Electrical Products Catalog
CLUTCHES AND BRAKES
Clutches
C50 Series
90 VDC
SPLIT SHAFT MODELS — C50S
RATINGS
Static Torque: 50 Lb. Ft.
Maximum Speed: 4000 RPM
Voltage: 90 VDC
Resistance at 20°C: 237 ±5% ohms
Maximum Current: 400 Amps
Coil Build-up: 70 ms
Coil Decay: 15 ms
3.798
3.410
.068
.058
1
3
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS — C50S
2
4
5.323
5.303 1.968
DIA. 1.978
DIA.
1.016
.984
4
1.016
.984
Rotor shaft concentric with armature shaft within .004" TIR
Angular misalignment of shafts within .008" TIR at 5" diameter.
THROUGH SHAFT MODELS — C50T
.031 NOMINAL
AIR GAP
.420
.274
.420
.274
1.801
1.781
2.582
2.562
1
2
.510
.490
1/2-1" BORES
.220
.200
3.144
3.104
3.239
3.199
+
+
B
.405
.345
.068
.058
2-#1/4-20 UNC
SET SCREWS
.099
.084
2.897
2.853
2.104
2.084
.979
1.109 .959
MIN.
1.877
1.875
PILOT DIA.
5.323
5.303
DIA.
°
35 5°
2
50
40° °
+
®
.188
.150
+
+
1
.198
.178
.269
.264 DIA. 4HOLES
EQUALLY
SPACED ON A
1.570/1.556 B.C.
+
2-#1/4-20 UNC
SET SCREWS
A
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
.188
.150
.031 NOMINAL
AIR GAP
1.801
1.781
2.582
2.562
3
.198
.178
2
AVERAGE WEIGHTS AND INERTIAS
5.323
5.303
DIA.
1.989
1.949
DIA.
1.323
1.303
1.505
1.495
1.960
1.940
DIA.
Part
1-1/8" & 1-1/4" BORES
ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
Nominal
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
1-1/8†
1-1/4†
Inertia (lb ft2)
6.074
3.408
2.666
1.516
—
—
.053
.044
.958
8.548
.005
—
Field and Rotor Assy
Field
Rotor 3/4" bore
Armature
Armature hub & 3/4"
bushing
Total
.031 NOMINAL
AIR GAP
STANDARD BORES
Wt. (lbs.)
D
ORDER BY ITEM CODE
KEYWAY DIMENSIONS
Actual
Keyway
A
B
.5000/.5015
.6250/.6265
.7500/.7515
.8750/.8765
1.0000/1.0015
1.1255/1.1270
1.2505/1.2520
—
—
—
—
—
1/4 × 1/8
1/4 × 1/8
.555/.565
.704/.714
.832/.842
.959/.969
1.110/1.120
1.241/1.251
1.367/1.377
.124/.126
.1865/.1885
.1865/.1885
.1865/.1885
.250/.252
.251/.253
.251/.253
No. 1
Armature
C50S/C50T
No. 2
No. 3 Field and
No. 4
Armature Hub Rotor Assembly Bushing*
C50S C50T
C50S C50T
C50S/C50T
45092
45092
45095
45095
45093
45094
—
—
45096
45097
—
—
45091
45163
45164
45165
45166
45167
—
—
*Two required for C50S Models, one for C50T Models.
†Not applicable to C50T Models.
HOW TO ORDER: Specify Item Codes for Armature, Armature Hub (desired bore), Field and Rotor Assembly and Bushing (desired bore and quantity required) for
desired Type, C50S or C50T.
Electrical Products Catalog
127
CLUTCHES AND BRAKES
Clutches
C100 Series
90 VDC
RATINGS
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Rotor shaft concentric with armature shaft within .004" TIR
Angular misalignment of shafts within .008" TIR at 5" diameter
THROUGH SHAFT MODELS — C100T
SPLIT SHAFT MODELS — C100S
3.223
3.183
3.768
3.533
3.223
3.183
2.020
1.980
.130
.120
2.021
1.880
.130
.120
.241
.161
.241
.161
4.280
4.220
1
40°
50°
.885
.855
2
3
25°
35°
1
2.502 PILOT
2.500 DIA.
4.629
4.559
6.671
6.641
1.209
1.169
1.234
1.266
.130
.120
4
2
B
3
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Static Torque: 100 Lb. Ft.
Maximum Speed: 3600 RPM
Voltage: 90 VDC
Resistance at 20°C: 202 ±5% ohms
Maximum Current: .469 Amps
Maximum Watts: 42.3
Coil Build-up: 65 ms
Coil Decay: 15 ms
A
.188
.150
1.266
1.234
1.266
1.234
6.671
6.641DIA.
.031 NOMINAL AIR GAP
4
4
.274 DIA. 6 HOLES EQUALLY
.264 SPACED ON A
2.007/1.993 B.C.
EP
AVERAGE WEIGHTS AND INERTIAS
Part
.031 NOMINAL
AIR GAP
Field and Rotor Assy
Field
Rotor 3/4" bore
Armature
Armature hub & 3/4"
bushings
Total
D
ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
STANDARD BORES
Wt. (lbs.)
Inertia (lb ft2)
10.90
6.25
4.65
2.43
—
—
.123
.115
1.79
15.12
.015
ORDER BY ITEM CODE
KEYWAY DIMENSIONS
Nominal
Actual
A
B
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
1-1/8
1-1/4
1-3/8
1-1/2
.5000/.5015
.6250/.6265
.7500/.7515
.8750/.8765
1.0000/1.0015
1.125/1.127
1.250/1.252
1.375/1.377
1.500/1.502
.555/.565
.704/.714
.832/.842
.959/.969
1.110/1.120
1.236/1.246
1.300/1.310
1.419/1.429
1.540/1.570
.124/.126
.1865/.1885
.1865/.1885
.1865/.1885
.249/.251
.249/.251
.249/.251
.3115/.3135
.375/.377
No. 1
Armature
C100S/C100T
45119
No. 2
Hub
C100S/C100T
45120
No. 3 Field and
Rotor Assembly
C100S/C100T
No. 4
Bushing*
C100S/C100T
45121
45168
45169
45170
45171
45172
45173
45174
45175
45176
*Two required for C100S Models, one for C100T Models.
HOW TO ORDER: Specify Item Codes for Armature, Armature Hub, Field and Rotor Assembly and Bushing (desired bore and quantity required) for desired type,
C100S or C100T.
128
Electrical Products Catalog
CLUTCHES AND BRAKES
Clutches
C150 Series
90 VDC
RATINGS
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Rotor shaft concentric with armature shaft within .006" TIR
Angular misalignment of shafts within .010" TIR at 8" diameter
THROUGH SHAFT MODELS — C150T
SPLIT SHAFT MODELS — C150S
4.101
3.856
3.588
3.538
2.286
2.246
.340
.330 DIA.
6 HOLES
EQUALLY
SPACED ON
2.445 DIA. B.C.
2.431
.130
.120
.248
.168
.130
.120
.248
.168
1
D
50
.3 42
.3
2
3
.
IA
.895
.855
3.588
3.538 2.286
2.246
°
50 0°
4
1
3
®
2
4
1.266
1.234
1.266
1.234
4
1.333
1.293
4
1.266
1.234
B
2.494 DIA.
2.484
3.127 PILOT
3.125 DIA.
.161
.151
8.609
8.564
DIA.
5.379
5.309
5.030
4.970
.188
.150
°
25 5°
1
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Static Torque: 150 Lb. Ft.
Maximum Speed: 3600 RPM
Voltage: 90 VDC
Resistance at 20°C: 219 ±5% ohms
Maximum Current: .433 Amps
Maximum Watts: 39
Coil Build-up: 155 ms
Coil Decay: 36 ms
A
8.609
8.564
DIA.
.039 NOMINAL
AIR GAP
AVERAGE WEIGHTS AND INERTIAS
.039 NOMINAL
AIR GAP
Part
Field and Rotor Assy
Field
Rotor 3/4" bore
Armature
Armature hub & 3/4"
bushings
Total
ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
STANDARD BORES
Wt. (lbs.)
Inertia (lb ft2)
18.33
10.85
7.48
4.85
—
—
.354
.326
2.74
25.92
.033
D
ORDER BY ITEM CODE
KEYWAY DIMENSIONS
Nominal
Actual
A
B
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
1-1/8
1-1/4
1-3/8
1-1/2
.5000/.5015
.6250/.6265
.7500/.7515
.8750/.8765
1.0000/1.0015
1.125/1.127
1.250/1.252
1.375/1.377
1.500/1.502
.555/.565
.704/.714
.832/.842
.959/.969
1.110/1.120
1.236/1.246
1.300/1.310
1.419/1.429
1.540/1.570
.124/.126
.1865/.1885
.1865/.1885
.1865/.1885
.249/.251
.249/.251
.249/.251
.3115/.3135
.375/.377
No. 1
Armature
C150S/C150T
45136
No. 2
Hub
C150S/C150T
45137
No. 3 Field and
Rotor Assembly
C150S/C150T
No. 4
Bushing*
C150S/C150T
45138
45168
45169
45170
45171
45172
45173
45174
45175
45176
*Two required for C150S Models, one for C150T Models.
HOW TO ORDER: Specify Item Codes for Armature, Armature Hub, Field and Rotor Assembly and Bushing (desired bore and quantity required) for desired type
C150S or C150T.
Electrical Products Catalog
129
CLUTCHES AND BRAKES
Brakes
B20 Series
90 VDC
RATINGS
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Squareness of brake mounting surface with armature shaft within .006" TIR at
5" diameter.
Concentricity of brake mounting pilot diameter with armature shaft within
.006" TIR.
2.239
2.199
5.625 PILOT DIA.
5.623
1.229
1.209
60
REF
.099
.089
35°
25°
4-# 1/4-20 UNC
CAP SCREWS
5
3
1
B
.198
.178
2
4.260
4.240
SQUARE
A
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Static Torque: 20 Lb. Ft.
Maximum Speed: 4500 RPM
Voltage: 90 VDC
Resistance at 20°C: 1087 ±5% ohms
Maximum Current: .087 Amps
Maximum Watts: 7.83
Coil Build-up: 100 ms
Coil Decay: 22 ms
4.260
4.240
DIA.
1.604
1.584
DIA.
1.874
–––––PILOT
1.873 DIA
1.198
1.178
2-#1/4-20 UNC
CAP SCREWS
.296 DIA. 4 HOLES EQUALLY
.280
SPACED ON 5.010 B.C.
4.990
.024 NOMINAL
AIR GAP
AVERAGE WEIGHTS AND INERTIAS
Part
Field
Armature
Armature hub
Total
D
Wt. (lbs.)
Inertia (lb ft2)
2.586
.815
.604
4.005
—
.0151
.0023
.0174
ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
STANDARD BORES
Nominal
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
ORDER BY ITEM CODE
KEYWAY DIMENSIONS
Actual
Keyway
A
B
.5005/.5015
.6255/.6270
.7505/.7520
.8755/.8770
1.0005/1.0020
1/8 × 1/16
3/16 × 3/32
3/16 × 3/32
3/16 × 3/32
1/4 × 1/8
.560/.565
.709/.715
.837/.845
.964/.970
1.114/1.122
.126/.128
.188/.190
.188/.190
.188/.190
.251/.253
No. 1
No. 2
Armature
Armature
Hub
45061
45062
45063
45064
45065
45066
No. 3
Field Assembly
Outside
Mounted
45075
HOW TO ORDER: Specify Item Codes for Armature, Armature Hub (desired bore), Field Assembly, and Field Mounting Hardware.
130
Electrical Products Catalog
No. 5
Field Mounting
Hardware
Outside
Mounting
45081
CLUTCHES AND BRAKES
Brakes
B50 Series
90 VDC
RATINGS
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Squareness of brake mounting surface with armature shaft within .006" TIR at 4" diameter.
Concentricity of brake mounting pilot diameter with armature shaft within .010" TIR.
2.426
2.386
2.690
2.465
.768
.744
1.260
1.240
INSIDE
MOUNTED
.887
.863
DIA.
.652
.592
.768
.744
1.260
1.240
INSIDE
MOUNTED
.652
.592
1
.198
.178
.188
.150
2.065 PILOT
2.063 DIA.
1.266
1.234
5.323
5.303
DIA.
2.770
2.740
DIA.
1.989
1.949
DIA.
1.323
1.303
.130
.120
4.150
MAX.
2.065 PILOT
2.063 DIA.
A
5.010
4.990
SQ.
OUTSIDE
MOUNTED
2 #1/4-20 UNC
SET SCREWS
OUTSIDE
MOUNTED
B
2.770
2.740
DIA.
EP054A
2
1.968
1.978
DIA.
5
5
2
5.323
5.303
DIA.
2.885
2.865
3
1
4
INSIDE MOUNTED
.181 DIA. 8 HOLES
.187
EQUALLY SPACED
ON 2.385 / 2.365 DIA.B.C.
.887
.863
DIA.
3
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Static Torque: 50 Lb. Ft.
Maximum Speed: 4000 RPM
Voltage: 90 VDC
Resistance at 20°C: 237 ±5% ohms
Maximum Current: .400 Amps
Maximum Watts: 36
Coil Build-up: 65 ms
Coil Decay: 13 ms
3
3
1.291
1.271
1.291
1.271
2.083
2.043
.031 NOMINAL AIR GAP
.420
.273
6.500 PILOT DIA.
6.498
.031 NOMINAL AIR GAP
1/2" To 1" MODELS
OUTSIDE MOUNTED
.399 DIA.
.389
4 HOLES EQUALLY SPACED
ON 5.885 / 5.865 DIA.B.C.
1-1/8" AND 1-1/4" MODELS
AVERAGE WEIGHTS AND INERTIAS
Part
Field
Armature
Armature hub
Total
ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
STANDARD BORE
Actual
1/2
.5000/.5015
5/8
.6250/.6265
3/4
.7500/.7515
7/8
.8750/.8765
1
1.0000/1.0015
1-1/8 1.1255/1.1270
1-1/4 1.2505/1.2520
Inertia (lb ft2)
3.763
1.516
.958
6.237
—
.044
.005
.049
D
ORDER BY ITEM CODE
KEYWAY DIMENSIONS
No. 1
Nominal
Wt. (lbs.)
Keyway
—
—
—
—
—
1/4 × 1/8
1/4 × 1/8
A
B
.555/.565
.124/.126
.704/.714 .1865/.1885
.832/.842 .1865/.1885
.959/.969 .1865/.1885
1.110/1.120 .250/.252
1.241/1.251 .251/.253
1.367/1.377 .251/.253
No. 2
No. 3
Field Assembly
No. 5
Field Mounting
Hardware
Armature Inside Outside
Inside
Outside
Armature
Hub
Mounted Mounted Bushing Mounting Mounting
45092
45091
45098
45093
45094
45099
No. 4
45163
45164
45165
45166
45167
—
—
45107
45108
HOW TO ORDER: Specify Item Codes for Armature, Armature Hub (desired bore), Field Assembly, (inside or outside mounting) Bushing (desired bore) and Field
Mounting Hardware.
Electrical Products Catalog
131
CLUTCHES AND BRAKES
Brakes
B100 Series
90 VDC
RATINGS
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Squareness of brake mounting surface with armature shaft within .006" TIR at
5" diameter.
Concentricity of brake mounting pilot diameter with armature shaft within
.010" TIR.
3.034
2.799
2.489
2.449
1.260
1.240
INSIDE MOUNTED
.358 DIA. 4 HOLES EQUALLY SPACED
.338
ON 3.698 / 3.678 DIA.B.C.
.717
.677
2.885
2.865
.652
.592
INSIDE
MOUNTED
.887
.863
4.703
MAX.
3
1
B
2
5
A
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Static Torque: 100 Lb. Ft.
Maximum Speed: 3600 RPM
Voltage: 90 VDC
Resistance at 20°C: 202 ±5% ohms
Maximum Current: .469 Amps
Maximum Watts: 42.3
Coil Build-up: 76 ms
Coil Decay: 12 ms
.188
.150
6.634
6.594
DIA.
6.583
6.543
SQUARE
2.822
2.820
PILOT DIA.
1.266
1.234
3.957
3.917
DIA.
4
OUTSIDE MOUNTED
.358
.338
DIA.
4 HOLES EQUALLY SPACED
ON 7.260 / 7.240 DIA. B.C.
8.000 PILOT DIA.
7.998
AVERAGE WEIGHTS AND INERTIAS
.031 NOMINAL AIR GAP
Part
1.281
1.251
Inertia (lb ft2)
4.85
2.43
1.79
9.07
—
.115
.015
.130
Field
Armature
Armature hub
Total
OUTSIDE
MOUNTED
D
ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
STANDARD BORE
Wt. (lbs.)
ORDER BY ITEM CODE
KEYWAY DIMENSIONS
ITEM CODES
No. 1
Nominal
Actual
A
B
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
1-1/8
1-1/4
1-3/8
1-1/2
.5000/.5015
.6250/.6265
.7500/.7515
.8750/.8765
1.0000/1.0015
1.125/1.127
1.250/1.252
1.375/1.377
1.500/1.502
.555/.565
.704/.714
.832/.842
.959/.969
1.110/1.120
1.236/1.246
1.300/1.310
1.419/1.429
1.540/1.570
.124/.126
.1865/.1885
.1865/.1885
.1865/.1885
.249/.251
.249/.251
.249/.251
.3115/.3135
.375/.377
No. 5
Field Mounting
Hardware
Armature Inside Outside
Inside
Outside
Armature
Hub
Mounted Mounted Bushing Mounting Mounting
45119
No. 2
45120
No. 3
Field Assembly
45122
45123
No. 4
45168
45169
45170
45171
45172
45173
45174
45175
45176
45124
45124
HOW TO ORDER: Specify Item Codes for Armature, Armature Hub, Field Assembly (inside or outside mounting), Bushing (desired bore) and Field Mounting
Hardware.
132
Electrical Products Catalog
CLUTCHES AND BRAKES
Brakes
B150 Series
90 VDC
RATINGS
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Squareness of brake mounting surface with armature shaft within .006" TIR at
6" diameter.
Concentricity of brake mounting pilot diameter with armature shaft within
.010" TIR.
INSIDE MOUNTED
3.148
2.903
2.634
2.584
1.266
1.234
.358 DIA.
.338
6 HOLES EQUALLY SPACED
ON 4.260 B.C.
4.240
2.885
2.865
.887
.863
.652
.592
5.625 MAX.
.739
.699
3
1
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Static Torque: 150 Lb. Ft.
Maximum Speed: 3600 RPM
Voltage: 90 VDC
Resistance at 20°C: 219 ±5% ohms
Maximum Current: .433 Amps
Maximum Watts: 39
Coil Build-up: 110 ms
Coil Decay: 20 ms
2
B
.188
.150
A
5
4
2.494
2.484
DIA.
8.020
7.980
SQUARE
3.503
3.501
PILOT DIA.
1.266
1.234
4.744
4.704
DIA.
8.609
8.564
DIA.
OUTSIDE MOUNTED
.358
4 HOLES EQUALLY SPACED
.338 DIA.
ON 8.885 B.C.
8.865
.130
.120
AVERAGE WEIGHTS AND INERTIAS
Part
Wt. (lbs.)
Inertia (lb ft2)
8.46
4.85
2.74
16.05
—
.326
.033
.359
Field
Armature
Armature hub
Total
1.318
1.298
.039 NOMINAL AIR GAP
ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
STANDARD BORE
9.749 PILOT DIA.
9.747
D
ORDER BY ITEM CODE
KEYWAY DIMENSIONS
ITEM CODES
No. 1
Nominal
Actual
A
B
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
1-1/8
1-1/4
1-3/8
1-1/2
.5000/.5015
.6250/.6265
.7500/.7515
.8750/.8765
1.0000/1.0015
1.125/1.127
1.250/1.252
1.375/1.377
1.500/1.502
.555/.565
.704/.714
.832/.842
.959/.969
1.110/1.120
1.236/1.246
1.300/1.310
1.419/1.429
1.540/1.570
.124/.126
.1865/.1885
.1865/.1885
.1865/.1885
.249/.251
.249/.251
.249/.251
.3115/.3135
.375/.377
No. 5
Field Mounting
Hardware
Armature Inside Outside
Inside
Outside
Armature
Hub
Mounted Mounted Bushing Mounting Mounting
45136
No. 2
45137
No. 3
Field Assembly
45139
45140
No. 4
45168
45169
45170
45171
45172
45173
45174
45175
45176
45141
45124
HOW TO ORDER: Specify Item Codes for Armature, Armature Hub (desired bore), Field Assembly (inside or outside mounting), Bushing (desired bore) and Field
Mounting Hardware.
Electrical Products Catalog
133
CLUTCHES AND BRAKES
Clutch/Brakes
CB-20S Series
90 VDC
Static Torque: 20 Lb. Ft.
Maximum Speed: 4500 RPM
Average Weight: 9.01 Lbs.
Output Inertia: .0336 Lb. Ft.2
Coil Build-up: (Clutch): 95 ms, (Brake): 100 ms
Coil Decay: (Clutch): 23 ms, (Brake): 22 ms
Voltage: 90 VDC
Maximum Watts: 7.83
Maximum Current: .087 Amps
Resistance at 20°C: 1087 ±5% ohms
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Angular alignment of shafts within .006" TIR at 5" diameter.
Shafts to be concentric within .003" TIR
Armature shaft square to brake mounting surface within .006" TIR at 5" diameter
Brake pilot diameter to be concentric with shaft within .006" TIR
5.625 PILOT
5.623 DIA.
4.446
4.356
1.229
1.209
1.948
1.928
.405
.345
5
1
2–#1/4–20 UNC
SET SCREWS
4
3
2.172
2.118
TO BASE
OF .220 SLOT
.200
4.260
4.240
DIA.
°
90 0°
8
2
1.630
1.620
B
RE
BO
.984
.954
1.255
1.245
1.070
1.060
2-#1/4-20 INC
SET SCREWS
A
4.260
4.240
SQUARE
1.874 PILOT
1.873 DIA.
4.260
4.240
DIA.
.198
.178
D
35°
25°
.099
.089
.068
.058
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
RATINGS
.024 NOMINAL
AIR GAP
.024 NOMINAL
AIR GAP
.296 DIA.
.280
4 HOLES EQUALLY SPACED ON
5.010 DIA. B.C.
4.990
ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
STANDARD BORES
Nominal
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
ORDER BY ITEM CODE
KEYWAY DIMENSIONS
Actual
Keyway
A
B
.5005/.5015
.6255/.6270
.7505/.7520
.8755/.8790
1.0005/1.0020
1/8 × 1/16
3/16 × 3/32
3/16 × 3/32
3/16 × 3/32
1/4 × 1/8
.560/.565
.709/.715
.837/.845
.964/.970
1.114/1.122
.126/.128
.188/.190
.188/.190
.188/.190
.251/.253
No. 1
Armature
(2 req'd.)
No. 2
Armature
Hub
No. 3
Field Rotor
Assembly
No. 4
Brake
Field
No. 5
Brake Field
Mounting Assy.
45061
45076
45077
45078
45079
45080
45070
45071
45072
45073
45074
45075
45081
HOW TO ORDER: Specify Item Codes for Armatures, Armature Hub (desired bore), Field Rotor Assembly (desired bore), Brake Field and Brake Field Mounting
Assembly.
134
Electrical Products Catalog
CLUTCHES AND BRAKES
Clutch/Brakes
CB-50S Series
90 VDC
Static Torque: 50 Lb. Ft.
Maximum Speed: 4000 RPM
Average Weight: 14.31 Lbs.
Output Inertia: .0955 Lb. Ft.2
Coil Build-up: (Clutch): 70 ms, (Brake): 65 ms
Coil Decay: (Clutch): 15 ms, (Brake): 12 ms
Voltage: 90 VDC
Maximum Watts: 34
Maximum Current: .38 Amps
Resistance at 20°C: 237 ±5% ohms
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Angular alignment of shafts within .008" TIR at 5" diameter.
Shafts to be concentric within .004" TIR
Armature shaft square to brake mounting surface within .006" TIR at 5" diameter
Brake pilot diameter to be concentric with shaft within .010" TIR
5.230
4.945
.768
.744
1.260
1.240
.068
.058
2.885
2.865
INSIDE MOUNTED
.181 DIA.
.187
.887 DIA.
.863
.652
.592
1
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
RATINGS
8 HOLES EQUALLY
SPACED ON
2.385
2.365 DIA.B.C.
2–#1/4–UNC
SET SCREWS
3
4
.120
.130
2.797
2.743
TO BASE
OF .220 SLOT
.200
1.978 DIA.
1.968
1.103
1.063
1.855
1.845
1.016
.984
5.323
5.303
DIA.
4.150
MAX.
5
°
85 5°
7
B
2
1.140
1.130
2.065 PILOT
2.063 DIA. 2.770
2.740
DIA.
RE
BO
A
5.010
4.990
SQUARE
6
5.323
5.303
DIA.
.031
NOMINAL
AIR GAP
.420
.274
.031
NOMINAL
AIR GAP
5
1.291
1.271
1.801
1.781
D
OUTSIDE
MOUNTED .399 DIA.
.389
6.500
6.498 PILOT DIA.
4 HOLES EQUALLY SPACED
5.883
ON 5.867 DIA.B.C.
ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
STANDARD BORES
Nominal
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
1-1/8
1-1/4
Actual
ORDER BY ITEM CODE
KEYWAY DIMENSIONS
A
B
.5000/.5015
.555/.565
.124/.126
.6250/.6265
.704/.714 .1865/.1885
.7500/.7515
.832/.842 .1865/.1885
.8750/.8765
.959/.969 .1865/.1885
1.0000/1.0015 1.110/1.120 .250/.252
1.1255/1.1270 1.241/1.251 .251/.253
1.2505/1.2520 1.367/1.377 .251/.253
No. 1
No. 2
45091
45100
45101
45102
45103
45104
45105
45106
No. 3
No. 4
Brake Field
No. 5 Brake
Field Mounting
Hardware
Field
Armature Armature
Rotor
Inside Outside
Inside
Outside
(2 Req'd.)
Hub
Assembly Mounted Mounted Mounting Mounting
45095
45098
45099
45107
45108
45096
45097
No. 6
Bushing
45163
45164
45165
45166
45167
—
—
HOW TO ORDER: Specify Item Codes for Armatures, Armature Hub (desired bore), Field Rotor Assembly (desired bore), Brake Field (inside or outside mounting),
Brake Field Mounting Hardware and Bushing (desired bore).
Electrical Products Catalog
135
CLUTCHES AND BRAKES
Clutch/Brakes
CB-100S Series
90 VDC
Static Torque: 100 Lb. Ft.
Maximum Speed: 3600 RPM
Average Weight: 23.30 Lbs.
Output Inertia: .2525 Lb. Ft.2
Coil Build-up: (Clutch): 65 ms, (Brake): 76 ms
Coil Decay: (Clutch): 15 ms, (Brake): 12 ms
Voltage: 90 VDC
Maximum Watts: 42.3
Maximum Current: .469 Amps
Resistance at 20°C: 202 ±5% ohms
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Angular alignment of shafts within .008" TIR at 5" diameter.
Shafts to be concentric within .004" TIR
Armature shaft square to brake mounting surface within .006" TIR at 5" diameter
Brake pilot diameter to be concentric with shaft within .010" TIR
INSIDE MOUNTED
5.354
5.182
.241
.161
.358 DIA. 4 HOLES EQUALLY SPACED
.338
ON 3.698 / 3.678 DIA.B.C.
.717
.677
1.260
1.240
.130
.120
2.885
2.865
.652
.592
1
.887
.863
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
RATINGS
5
3
4.280
4.220 TO CL
OF .350
.342 HOLE
4.703
MAX.
6
6.671
6.641
DIA.
1.266
1.234
.130
.120
4
4
2.020
1.980
B
3.957
3.917
DIA.
6.437
6.397
DIA.
6.583
6.543
SQUARE
8.000
PILOT DIA.
7.998
.358 OUTSIDE MOUNTED
.338 DIA.
.031 NOMINAL
AIR GAP
4 HOLES EQUALLY SPACED
ON 7.260 / 7.240 DIA. B.C.
D
ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
STANDARD BORES
A
RE
BO
6
1.281
1.251
.031 NOMINAL
AIR GAP
2
2.822 PILOT
2.820
1.266
1.234
ORDER BY ITEM CODE
KEYWAY DIMENSIONS
No. 1
Nominal
Actual
A
B
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
1-1/8
1-1/4
1-3/8
1-1/2
.5000/.5015
.6250/.6265
.7500/.7515
.8750/.8765
1.0000/1.0015
1.125/1.127
1.250/1.252
1.375/1.377
1.500/1.502
.555/.565
.704/.714
.832/.842
.959/.969
1.072/1.102
1.236/1.246
1.300/1.310
1.419/1.429
1.540/1.570
.124/.126
.1865/.1885
.1865/.1885
.1865/.1885
.249/.251
.249/.251
.249/.251
.3115/.3135
.375/.377
No. 5
Brake
Field
Field
Armature Armature
Rotor
Inside
Outside
(2 Req'd.)
Hub
Assembly Bushing Mounted Mounted
45119
No. 2
45125
No. 3
45121
No. 4
45168
45169
45170
45171
45172
45173
45174
45175
45176
45122
45123
No. 6 Brake
Field Mounting
Hardware
Inside
Outside
Mounting Mounting
45124
45124
HOW TO ORDER: Specify Item Codes for Armatures, Armature Hub Field Rotor Assembly, Bushing (desired bore), Brake Field (inside or outside mounting) and
Brake Field Mounting Hardware.
136
Electrical Products Catalog
CLUTCHES AND BRAKES
Clutch/Brakes
CB-150S Series
90 VDC
Static Torque: 150 Lb. Ft.
Maximum Speed: 3600 RPM
Average Weight: 40.60 Lbs.
Output Inertia: .7015 Lb. Ft.2
Coil Build-up (Clutch): 155 ms (Brake): 110 ms
Coil Decay (Clutch): 36 ms (Brake): 20 ms
Voltage: 90 VDC
Maximum Watts: 39
Maximum Current: .433 Amps
Resistance at 20°C: 219 ±5% ohms
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Angular alignment of shafts within .010" TIR at 5" diameter.
Shafts to be concentric within .006" TIR
Armature shaft square to brake mounting surface within .006" TIR at 5" diameter
Brake pilot diameter to be concentric with shaft within .010" TIR
5.878
5.706
INSIDE MOUNTED
1.266
1.234
.130
.120
.358
.338 DIA.
.887
.863
6 HOLES EQUALLY SPACED
4.260
ON 4.240 B.C.
2.885
2.865
.652
.592
.739
.699
1
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
RATINGS
5
3
5.030
4.970 TO CL
OF .350
.342 HOLE
5.625 MAX.
6
8.286
8.246
DIA.
B
8.614
8.574
DIA.
1.266
1.234
3.503 PILOT
3.501 DIA.
1.266
1.234
2
4
RE
BO
A
4.744
4.704
DIA.
8.020
7.980
SQUARE
4
.130
.120
2.286
2.246
1.318
1.298
9.749 PILOT DIA.
9.747
.358
.338 DIA.
6
OUTSIDE MOUNTED
.039 NOMINAL
AIR GAP
4 HOLES EQUALLY SPACED
ON 8.885 B.C.
8.865
.031 NOMINAL
AIR GAP
ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
STANDARD BORES
D
ORDER BY ITEM CODE
KEYWAY DIMENSIONS
No. 1
Nominal
Actual
A
B
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
1
1-1/8
1-1/4
1-3/8
1-1/2
.5000/.5015
.6250/.6265
.7500/.7515
.8750/.8765
1.0000/1.0015
1.125/1.127
1.250/1.252
1.375/1.377
1.500/1.502
.555/.565
.704/.714
.832/.842
.959/.969
1.110/1.120
1.236/1.246
1.300/1.310
1.419/1.429
1.540/1.570
.124/.126
.1865/.1885
.1865/.1885
.1865/.1885
.249/.251
.249/.251
.249/.251
.3115/.3135
.375/.377
No. 5
Brake
Field
Field
Armature Armature
Rotor
Inside
Outside
(2 Req'd.)
Hub
Assembly Bushing Mounted Mounted
45136
No. 2
45142
No. 3
45138
No. 4
45168
45169
45170
45171
45172
45173
45174
45175
45176
45139
45140
No. 6 Brake
Field Mounting
Hardware
Inside
Outside
Mounting Mounting
45141
45124
HOW TO ORDER: Specify Item Codes for Armatures, Armature Hub, Field Rotor Assembly, Bushing (desired bore), Brake Field (inside or outside mounting) and
Brake Field Mounting Hardware.
Electrical Products Catalog
137
CLUTCHES AND BRAKES
DC Power Supplies/Controls
The following standard controls provide 90 VDC from 115 VAC lines and fulfill most
clutch and brake power supply requirements.
Other versions, modified or special, are available.
All controls operate one or two units – one unit at a time – through the use of SPDT
switch, 15 Amp rated. (Customer supplied)
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
Description
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
Basic Power Supply – Plug in Fixed output
As above, fused
Octal socket for PS90B, F
Dual output, one fixed and one adjustable 0-90VDC
Dual output, both adjustable
Dual; relay output
PS90
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
PS90B
PS90F
Octal Socket
PS90-1
PS90-2
PS90-2R
45153
45154
67530
45156
45157
45158
(2) 10-32 CLEARANCE
HOLES
(-1, -2, -2R)
50
3.75
REF.
+
4.00
80
®
20
E
F
US
0
WALL MOUNTING HOLE
PATTERN
100
6.25 REF.
PS90F
(2) '6 CLEARANCE
HOLES
2.12
REF.
3.12
REF.
PS90B
(2) '6 CLEARANCE
HOLES
D
2.00
REF.
1.68
2.00
REF.
1.68
2.62
REF.
4.84
REF.
3.12
REF.
2.62
REF.
All Dimensions in Inches.
Dimensions subject to change.
138
Electrical Products Catalog
AC BRAKES
Double C-Face AC Brakes
CMBA Series
These double C-Face Brakes are direct acting with only one moving part. They are
spring set and electro-magnetically released. Movement is limited to a spring loaded
pressure plate. Release is instantaneous. If power fails, the brake will immediately set
and hold.
■ Shock Mounted Magnet
■ Direct Acting
■ Flange/Foot Mounting
■ Splined Hub
■ Standard NEMA
Voltages/Frequencies
■ Superior Disc Life
■ Superior Thermal Capacity
■ Double C-Face
■ Automatic Reset
■ Compact
■ Continuous Duty
■ Dependable
■ Full Torque Stop
■ Horizontal/Vertical Mount
■ Instant Magnetic Release
■ One Moving Part
■ Ready to Mount
OPERATION
SPLINED HUB
Friction discs rotate with the motor shaft and are free to move
axially on the hub. When the magnet coil is de-energized, a
spring loaded pressure plate (magnet armature) presses
against the rotating discs. Friction force stops and holds the
motor shaft.
These C-Face brakes use splined hubs and internally splined
friction discs as standard equipment. The spline design virtually eliminates backlash which is a delayed action effect caused
by excessive clearances between hub and discs. Splines increase disc life because the many contact points between hub
and discs reduce the concentration of stresses encountered
with non-splined hubs having only a few contact points.
The pressure plate retracts against torque springs by magnetic force when the magnet is energized. Friction discs are then
released and free to rotate with the hub and motor shaft. A
manual release is also provided.
Brake coil leads connect directly to motor leads so that power
is simultaneously supplied to both brake and motor. No control
equipment is required. An instruction bulletin on mounting and
hookup are included with each brake.
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
115/230 VAC, 60 Hz
Torque
(Lb. Ft.)
3
NEMA
Frame
56C
6
140TC
Bore
Code
B5
B5
B7
B7
B7
Catalog
Number
CMBA56R-3
CMBA56R-6
CMBA140TR-6
CMBA140TR-6U
CMBA140TR-6D
Mounting
Horizontal/Vertical
Horizontal
Horizontal
Vertical Shaft Up
Vertical Shaft Down
Item
Code
67545
67548
67551
67554
67555
Coil Voltage
208-230/460 VAC, 60 Hz
190/380 VAC, 50 Hz
Catalog
Item
Number
Code
CMBA56U-3
67546
CMBA56U-6
67549
CMBA140TU-6
67552
CMBA140TU-6U
67556
CMBA140TU-6D
67557
575 VAC, 60 Hz
Catalog
Number
CMBA56Y-3
CMBA56Y-6
CMBA140TY-6
—
—
Item
Code
67547
67550
67553
—
—
DIMENSIONS
ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
**INCLUDED IN PARTS PACKAGE
.96
25°
.56
X
“U” DIA.
SHAFT
.25°
1.625
L.H.
.187 x .093 KEYWAY
.187
AC
2.00
20°
20°
R.H.
1.875
C
Size
AC
56-3
56-6
140T-6
9/16
C
G
4-15/16 1-3/16
X
U
7/8
5/8
5/8
7/8
Housing Approx.
O.D.
Weight
6-7/8
12
Lbs.
2.8
12
R
4.500/4.497 DIA.
5.875
DIA. B.C.
**(4) MOUNTING HOLES
EQUALLY
SPACED FOR 3/8-16
THREADED STUDS
DESIGNED FOR STANDARD
NEMA SHAFT EXTENSION
KEYWAY FOR
.187 SQUARE KEY
6.875 O.D.
MANUAL RELEASE
.406 DIA. HOLE FOR
INTERNAL WIRE CONNECTION
TO MOTOR
“U” DIA.
SHAFT
4.502/4.507
DIA.
45°
.25
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
FEATURES
1/2-14 NPT LEADWIRE
OUTLET BOTH SIDES
MODEL CMBA 140T°-15
HAVE L.H. OUTLET WIRE ONLY.
PARTS
ORDER BY ITEM CODE
Description
Item Code
Base Kit
Coil–115/230 VAC 60 Hz
Coil–208-200-380-440 VAC
Coil–575 VAC 60 Hz
Disc–Stationary
Disc–Rotating
67561
67558
67559
67560
67562
67563
Electrical Products Catalog
139
D
AC BRAKES
Double C-Face AC Brakes
Washdown (BISSC)
CMBWB
Series
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Double C-Face brakes provide the simplest solution for adding a brake between a
C-Face motor and a flanged gear reducer. These brakes offer the added feature of
meeting BISSC standards, AAA standards and other food industry washdown
requirements. The CMB-WB double C-Face brakes are a perfect compliment to our
AC washdown motors.
OPERATION
The brake hub is attached to the motor shaft. The friction disk
fits around the hub and is free to move axially along the hub.
When the motor and the brake solenoid coil are de-energized,
the brake is in a set condition. In a set condition, the pressure
spring applies a force against the pressure plate to clamp the
friction disc against the stationary disc and endplate to retard
motion. The clamped friction disc prevents the hub and motor
shaft from rotating.
The brake is released electrically when voltage is applied to
the solenoid coil of the brake. This produces an electromagnetic force which pulls the lever arm away from the pressure
plate, releasing the clamping force on the friction disc. This
allows the brake hub and motor shaft to turn freely. An important feature of this spring set brake is it’s power failure characteristic. If a loss of electric power to the motor and brake
occurs, the brake will automatically engage and hold the load
provided that it has been properly applied and maintained.
The brake coil is connected directly to the motor leads so that
power is simultaneously supplied to the brake and the motor.
No additional control equipment is required.
FEATURES
■ BISSC Certified
■ CSA Certified
■ Meets National AAA Dairy Standards
■ Complies with Wisconsin Food and Dairy
Regulations
■ White FDA Approved Epoxy Paint
■ Stainless Steel Hardware
■ Neoprene Gasketing
■ Splined Hub for Increased Disc Life
■ Sizes for NEMA 56C to 184TC Frame Motors
D
■ Standard Torque Ranges from 3 to 10 lb-ft
■ Maximum RPM: 5000 (56C and 140TC) and 4000
(180TC)
■ Manual Adjust for Lining Wear (56C and 140TC)
■ Self-Adjusting for Lining Wear (180TC only)
■ Automatic Reset, Manual Brake Release
■ Rated for Continuous Duty
■ Available in AC or DC Voltages
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
Bore
Code
NEMA
Frame
3
B5
56C
6
B5
56C
6
B7
143/145TC
10
B9
182/184TC
140
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
Coil Voltage
208-230/460 VAC, 60 Hz
190/380 VAC, 50 Hz
Catalog
Item
Number
Code
Horizontal/
Vertical
CMBWB-3-R-B5
58106
CMBWB-3-U-B5
Horizontal/
Vertical
CMBWB-6-R-B5
58110
CMBWB-6-R-B7
115/208-230 VAC, 60 Hz
Nominal
Static
Torque
(Lb. Ft.)
Mounting
Horizontal/
Vertical
Horizontal/
Vertical Down
Vertical Up
Electrical Products Catalog
575 VAC, 60 Hz
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
58107
CMBWB-3-Y-B5
58108
CMBWB-6-U-B5
58111
CMBWB-6-Y-B5
58112
58114
CMBWB-6-U-B7
58115
CMBWB-6-Y-B7
58116
CMBWB-10-R-B9
58125
CMBWB-10-U-B9
58126
CMBWB-10-Y-B9
58127
CMBWB-10U-R-B9
58128
CMBWB-10U-U-B9
58130
CMBWB-10U-Y-B9
58131
AC BRAKES
Double C-Face Brakes
Washdown (BISSC)
CMB-WB
Series
DIMENSIONS
External leadwire outlet
1/2 - 14 std. pipe tap
both sides
Access covers for visual
Inspection and wear
adjustment
Four holes for
3/8 - 16 mounting
sluds (furnished)
AE
J
D
DIA.
AK
DIA.
X
DIA.
AL
DIA.
AJ
DIA.
AG
E
B
DIA.
C
L
45°
F
P
AH
A
Q
DIMENSIONS
Unit*
CMBWB-3-*-B5
CMBWB-6-*-B5
CMBWB-6-*-B7
CMBWB-10-*-B9
A
AE
AG
AJ
AK
AL
B
C
D
E
F
5.22
.88
.41
5.88
4.502/4.507
4.500/4.497
7.00
2.19
6.50
.25
.19
5.22
8.38
.88
2.12
.41
.18
5.88
7.25
4.502/4.507
8.500/8.502
4.500/4.497
8.500/8.498
7.00
10.38
2.19
2.81
6.50
9.00
.25
1.00
.19
.19
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
U
DIA.
Unit*
CMBWB-3-*-B5
CMBWB-6-*-B5
CMBWB-6-*-B7
CMBWB-10-*-B9
Input Shaft
Keyway
Output Shaft
U
Keyway
J
L
P
Q
X
AH
3.88
.12
1.25
.56
.626/.627
.19 X .09
.625/.624
.19 X .09
2.00
3.88
12.12
.12
.25
1.25
–––
.56
–––
.876/.877
1.125/1/126
.19 X .09
.25 X .12
.875/.874
1.125/1.124
.19 X .09
.25 X .12
2.00
2.62
Dimensions for estimating only. For installation purposes, request certified prints.
* Voltage
D
SPECIFICATIONS
Unit*
CMBWB-3-*-B5
CMBWB-6-*-B5
CMBWB-6-*-B7
CMBWB-10-*-B9
Nominal
Static
Torque
(lb-ft)
No. of
Friction
Discs
Maximum
Solenoid
Cycle Rate1
(cycles/min)
Inertia
(Wk2)
(lb-ft2)
Kinetic
Energy
Absorption4
(ft-lb)
Max.
RPM2
Thermal
Capacity3
(hp-sec/min)
Net
Weight
(lb)
3
1
40
5,000
5
.008
9,750
11
6
1
40
5,000
5
.008
9,750
11
10
1
30
4,000
20
.078
34,000
57
1 Maximum solenoid cycle rate is based on ambient temperature of 72° F (22°C) with 50% duty cycle. Does not relate to brake cycle rate (see Thermal Capacity).
2 Maximum RPM rating based on horizontal operation. Contact factory for maximum RPM on vertical applications.
3 Thermal capacity rating is based on ambient temperature of 72°F (22°C), stop time of one second or less, with no heat absorbed from motor and brake mounted
horizontally.
4 Total kinetic energy absorption is based on ambient temperatures at 100°F (38°C) or less, including motor heat, with brake mounted horizontally. At the given rating, a 1 1/2 hour cool-down interval between stops is required. (3 hours for 10 lb ft unit.)
* Voltage
Electrical Products Catalog
141
AC BRAKES
AC Motor
Brake Kit
MBRK
BRAKE KITS
These brakes are for quick field conversion of stock Boston
Gear brand motors to brakemotors* using only hand tools.
The brake torque rating should equal 100% to 150% or more of
the full load torque of the motor. The brake coils are AC single
phase for use with single or three phase motors.
Kit includes all of the components needed for conversion of a
56C or 143-5TC frame totally enclosed fan cooled motor* to a
brakemotor. (Totally enclosed Stearns brake, replacement cast
fan cover, shaft extension and fan/hub.) Mounts on fan end of
motor. May be used on single or three phase motors.
Two 1/2” NPT holes with 18” leads are provided for connections. The BRAKE KIT adds 5-1/8” to the overall length of TEFC
motors.
FOR MOTOR VOLTAGES—
230/460 VOLTS THREE PHASE OR 230 VOLTS SINGLE PHASE
*1/3 to 2 HP TEFC Motors Shown Below.
Catalog
Number
MBRK3
MBRK6
MBRK10
Item
Code
60000
60002
60003
Brake Rating
Max HP
(lb-ft)
@ 1725 RPM
3
1
6
2
10
3
Mounts to
NEMA Frame
56C/143-5TC
56C/143-5TC
56C/143-5TC
FOR MOTOR VOLTAGES—
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
All brakes are totally enclosed, fail-safe, spring set and electrically released for positive stop and hold operation. A manual
release is provided for power off operation. The manual release
automatically resets when power is restored.
Series
575 VOLTS THREE PHASE
®
Catalog
Number
MBR5K3
MBR5K6
MBR5K10
Item
Code
69765
69766
69767
Brake Rating
Max HP
(lb-ft)
@ 1725 RPM
3
1
6
2
10
3
Mounts to
NEMA Frame
56C/143-5TC
56C/143-5TC
56C/143-5TC
FOR USE WITH THESE MOTORS
HP
1/3
1/3
1/3
1/2
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
3/4
1
1
1
1
1
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
2
2
2
D
142
NEMA
Mtg.
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
143TC
56C
143TC
143TC
145TC
56C
145TC
145TC
56C
145TC
145TC
Electrical Products Catalog
Bore
Code
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B7
B5
B7
B7
B7
B5
B7
B7
B5
B7
B7
Voltage
Phase-Hz
115/230-1-60
230/460-3-60
575-3-60
115/230-1-60
230/460-3-60
575-3-60
115/230-1-60
230/460-3-60
575-3-60
115/230-1-60
115/230-1-60
230/460-3-60
230/460-3-60
575-3-60
115/230-1-60
230/460-3-60
230/460-3-60
575-3-60
230/460-3-60
230/460-3-60
575-3-60
Catalog
Number
ERTF
EUTF
EYTF
FRTF
FUTF
FYTF
GRTF
GUTF
GYTF
HRTF-5/8
HRTF
HUTF-5/8
HUTF
HYTF
JRTF
JUTF-5/8
JUTF
JYTF
KUTF-5/8
KUTF
KYTF
Item
Code
63750
63958
64944
63754
63961
64945
63755
63979
64946
63795
63797
63980
63981
64948
63800
63988
64281
64949
64769
64770
64950
MOTOR ENCLOSURES
Motor Enclosures
ENCLOSURES — Most applications can utilize open drip-proof
motors; other enclosures are listed. For information purposes,
the various enclosures are defined below.
TOTALLY-ENCLOSED — A motor so constructed as to prevent
free exchange of air between the inside and outside of
the motor case, but not air-tight.
TOTALLY-ENCLOSED, NON-VENTILATED (TENV) — A totally-enclosed motor of sufficient size and mass to permit
the necessary heat dissipation to eliminate the need for external cooling.
TOTALLY-ENCLOSED FAN-COOLED (TEFC) — Basically a
TENV motor which has an external fan to blow cooling air
over the motor. The additional cooling eliminates the necessity
of a more costly oversized TENV motor. NOTE: TENV and
TEFC construction are equal in all respects regarding application, temperature capabilities and performance.
EXPLOSION-PROOF — A totally-enclosed motor designed
and built to withstand an explosion within it and/or to prevent
ignition of the atmosphere surrounding it. These motors may be
either TENV or TEFC as determined by the design and the
manufacturer. All are U.L. listed and bear a U.L. label indicating
the class of hazardous atmospheres in which the motor may be
operated. All Boston Gear explosion-proof motors are nameplated Class I Group D and Class II Groups F&G.
WASHDOWN — Totally enclosed motors, either TENV or
TEFC; that are constructed to withstand washdown requirements.
BISSC — Motors that have the Baking Industry Sanitation
Standards Committee certification.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
OPEN, DRIPPROOF — Same as open, except the construction of motor prevents the entrance of drops of liquid or
particles falling on the motor at any angle not greater than 15
degrees from vertical.
TOTALLY ENCLOSED, BLOWER COOLED (TEBC) — A totally enclosed motor constructed with a fan on the opposite end of
motor shaft designed to blow cooling air over the
motor. The fan is powered separately from the motor to provide
constant air flow whether the motor is running or stopped.
D
Electrical Products Catalog
143
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
NOTES
D
144
Electrical Products Catalog
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
DC MOTORS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION...........................................................................................................146
NEMA BOLT CIRCLE DIMENSIONS ...........................................................................................147
PERMANENT MAGNET 1/12 HP TENV.......................................................................................147
PERMANENT MAGNET 1/6-5 HP TENV AND TEFC ...........................................................148-149
PERMANENT MAGNET (WASHDOWN)......................................................................................150
SHUNT WOUND OPEN DRIPPROOF 1/6-5 HP ..........................................................................151
SHUNT WOUND TEFC 1/6-5 HP..................................................................................................152
SHUNT WOUND EXPLOSION PROOF 1/2-1 HP ........................................................................153
Electrical Products Catalog
145
E
DC MOTORS
Ratiotrol DC motors have specific characteristics to match the controls with which they operate. Thus, it is not necessary that a
motor and control be mated; any stock motor will operate with a stock control of suitable rating within a series.
Standard motors have a base speed of 1750 RPM and are stocked in ratings from 1/6 through 5 HP. Operating characteristics,
reliability and durability are similar; PM motors do offer advantages such as smaller size, lower weight and the absence of field hum
on critical applications. In addition, installation is simplified since only two armatures leads need be connected.
Service factor for PM and V series motors is 1.0.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
SPEED RANGE
All listed Ratiotrol 90 VDC and 180 VDC motors for Boston
controllers have been designed to operate continuously at full
rated torque throughout the specified speed range of the
control. All shunt wound motors can operate continuously at
20:1 speed range and permanent magnet at 50:1 speed range.
Full torque operation is possible at even lower speeds if duty is
intermittent. In many cases, reduced loads will permit
continuous operation at speeds as low as 100:1 speed range.
MOUNTING
V18 SERIES – 3/4-5 HP, 180VDC armature, 100/200VDC
field.
V18 10
|
|
A
B
0
|
C
TF
|
D
–B
|
E
A – Series designation
B – HP
10 - 1 HP
15 - 1-1/2 HP
20 - 2 HP
30 - 3 HP
50 - 5 HP
Separate listings are shown for NEMA C-face mounted motors
for use with flange reductors and rigid base mounted motors
for coupled loads.
C – Mounting
0 – NEMA C-Face
1 – Rigid Base
D – Enclosure*
No letter – Open dripproof
T – TENV
TF – TEFC
X – Explosion-proof
E – Manufacturer
B – Baldor
AMBIENT TEMPERATURES
All standard motors are rated for continuous full load operation
at ambient temperatures not exceeding 40°C (104°F). The
insulation used varies with motor design; therefore, when
higher temperatures than normal are expected, please contact
the factory with complete details i.e., maximum temperature,
HP, enclosure, mounting, etc.
CATALOG NUMBERING SYSTEM
With few exceptions, noted below, motor catalog numbers
indicate voltage HP and enclosure.
V9 SERIES – 1/6 – 1 HP, 90 VDC armature, 50/100 VDC field.
V9
|
A
16
|
B
0
|
C
0
|
D
—– B
|
|
E
F
A – Series designation
B – 16 - 1/6 HP
25 - 1/4 HP
33 - 1/3 HP
50 - 1/2 HP
75 - 3/4 HP
100 - 1 HP
C – 0 - 1750 RPM (Standard)
1 - 1150 RPM
2 - 2500 RPM
3 - 3450 RPM
D – Mounting
0 – NEMA C-Face
1 – Rigid Base
E – Enclosure*
No letter – Open dripproof
T – TENV
TF – TEFC
X – Explosion-proof
F – Manufacturer
B – Baldor
E
PM MOTORS
PM
|
A
9
|
B
16
|
C
AT – B
|
|
D
E
A – PM Series designation
B – Voltage, armature
9-90VDC
18-180VDC
C – HP
16 - 1/6 HP
25 - 1/4 HP
33 - 1/3 HP
50 - 1/2 HP
75 - 3/4 HP
100 - 1 HP
150 - 1-1/2 HP
200 - 2 HP
300 - 3 HP
Electrical Products Catalog
D – Enclosure*
No letter – Open dripproof
AT, T – TENV
ATF, TF – TEFC
WB – Washdown (BISSC)
E – Manufacturer
B – Baldor
I – Indiana General
OPTIONS AND MODIFICATIONS
From an economic and delivery standpoint, it is, of course,
preferable that standard stock motors be specified for an application. However, many other types of motors and optional
features are available on a special order basis. Some modifications are more readily available on fractional HP motors
than integral HP and vice versa. Among the many options are:
Base-Speeds other than 1750 RPM such as 3450, 2500
and 1150 RPM.
Severe Duty and corrosion-proof enclosures.
Explosion-Proof enclosures–specify Class and Group of
hazardous atmosphere.
Brakemotors–brakes are AC.
Double Shafts, extended shafts, etc.
Motor-Mounted Tachometer Generators–for those
motors not adaptable to standard tachometer packages.
See page 111 and 112 for stock tachometer generators.
*Motor Enclosures described on page 143.
146
PM 18 100 AT – I
|
|
|
|
|
A
B
C
D
E
DC MOTORS
NEMA Motor Bolt Circle Dimensions
KEY
AJ
AK
U
BF HOLES
AH
1
AH
NEMA
Frame
No.
B4
42CZ
B5
56C
56CZ
182C
184C
143TC
145TC
213C
215C
182TC
184TC
254UC
256UC
213TC
215TC
254TC
256TC
B7
B9
B11
B13
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Boston
Gear
Bore Code
Key
Max.
AH
Max.
AH’
SQ.
LG.
AJ
BF
1-5/16
—
1/8
3/4
3.750
1/4–20
2-5/32
—
3/16
1-3/8
5.875
3/8-16
4.500
4.497
2-5/32
—
3/16
1-3/8
5.875
3/8–16
1.1250
1.1245
8.500
8.497
—
2-25/32
1/4
1-3/4
7.250
1/2–13
1.3750
1.3745
8.500
8.497
—
3-17/32
5/16
2-3/8
7.250
1/2–13
1.6250
1.6240
8.500
8.497
—
3-13/16
3/8
2-7/8
7.250
1/2–13
U
.5000
.4995
.6250
.6245
AK
3.000
2.997
4.500
4.497
.8750
.8745
Flanged Reductors are designed for use with motors having NEMA “C” face and shaft dimensions as shown. AH and AH’ must not be exceeded.
Permanent Magnet
TENV
1/12 Horsepower
6
4"
5
6 16
1
6 16
3
16
1
4"
3
8
3
3 78
1
4
13
16 LONG
FLAT 1
32
DEEP
2 34
303 WOODRUFF
KEYWAY
19
32
.3125
.3120
7
8
.3125
.3120
DIA.
1 34
DIA
3
2 32
(4) 10•32 HOLES
TAPPED THRU
EQUALLY SPACED
118
1.375
1.373
2
13
16
1
4
REF.
3
9
1
(4)
32 X 2
SLOTS
E
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
HP
Volts
Armature
1/12
90
PM908T-B
Special
4
90
BASE MOUNTED
BPM908T-B 64803
Special
4
1/12
Catalog
Item
NEMA
Number
Code
Mounting
C-FACE MOUNTED
Approximate
Weight
(Lbs.)
69825
Electrical Products Catalog
147
DC MOTORS
NEMA C-Face
w/Removable Bases
Permanent Magnet
TENV & TEFC
1/6-5 HP
1750 RPM
C'
BD
C
AH
AB
N
KEY
XP
P'
O
D
F
E
(4) BF-UN
TAPPED
EQUALLY
ON AJ DI
E
.34 WIDE
SLOTS
F
BA
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
Volts
Armature
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
Bore
Code
NEMA
MTG
Encl.
C
C’
D
E
N
O
P
P’
APM916AT-B
APM916T
19117
59475
B4
B4
42CYZ
42CYZ
TENV
TENV
9.50
8.47
—
—
3.50
3.50
2.44
2.44
1.50
1.50
1.13
1.17
5.88
5.75
4.68
4.87
—
—
PM916AT-B
PM916T
19120
59476
B5
B5
56C
56C
TENV
TENV
10.31
9.19
—
—
3.50
3.50
2.44
2.44
1.50
1.50
1.94
1.90
5.88
6.75
4.68
4.87
—
—
APM925AT-B
APM925T
19118
59477
B4
B4
42CYZ
42CYZ
TENV
TENV
10.44
8.97
—
—
3.50
3.50
2.44
2.44
1.50
1.50
1.13
1.17
5.88
5.75
4.68
4.87
—
—
PM925AT-B
PM925T
19121
59478
B5
B5
56C
56C
TENV
TENV
11.25
9.72
—
—
3.50
3.50
2.44
2.44
1.50
1.50
1.94
1.90
5.88
6.75
4.68
4.87
—
—
APM933AT-B
APM933T
19119
59479
B4
B4
42CYZ
42CYZ
TENV
TENV
11.38
9.47
—
—
3.50
3.50
2.44
2.44
1.50
1.50
1.13
1.17
5.88
5.75
4.68
4.87
—
—
PM933AT-B
PM933T
19122
59480
B5
B5
56C
56C
TENV
TENV
12.18
10.19
—
—
3.50
3.50
2.44
2.44
1.50
1.50
1.94
1.90
5.88
6.75
4.68
4.87
—
—
90
PM950AT-B
PM950TF
19123
59481
B5
B5
56C
56C
TENV
TEFC
13.94
—
—
11.81
3.50
3.50
2.44
2.44
1.50
1.50
1.94
1.90
5.88
6.75
4.68
4.87
—
5.16
180
PM1850TF-B
PM1850TF
19186
59482
B5
B5
56C
56C
TEFC
TEFC
—
—
13.75
11.81
3.50
3.50
2.44
2.44
1.50
1.50
1.94
1.90
6.38
6.75
5.81
4.87
6.13
5.16
90
PM975TF-B
PM975TF
69853
59483
B5
B5
56C
56C
TEFC
TEFC
—
—
13.75
14.31
3.50
3.50
2.44
2.44
1.50
1.50
1.94
1.90
6.38
6.75
5.81
4.87
6.13
5.16
180
PM1875TF-B
PM1875TF
69866
59484
B5
B5
56C
56C
TEFC
TEFC
—
—
13.75
13.81
3.50
3.50
2.44
2.44
1.50
1.50
1.94
1.90
6.38
6.75
5.81
4.87
6.13
5.16
PM9100TF-B
PM9100TF
69867
59485
B7
B7
56CZ
56CZ
TEFC
TEFC
—
—
14.68
16.31
3.50
3.50
2.44
2.44
1.50
1.50
2.00
1.90
6.38
6.38
5.81
5.61
6.13
5.88
PM9100TF-5/8-B
PM9100TF-5/8
50421
59486
B5
B5
56C
56C
TEFC
TEFC
—
—
14.63
15.81
3.50
3.50
2.44
2.44
1.50
1.50
1.94
1.90
6.38
6.75
5.81
5.61
6.13
5.88
PM18100TF-B
PM18100TF
69869
59487
B7
B7
56CZ
56CZ
TEFC
TEFC
—
—
14.68
15.31
3.50
3.50
2.44
2.44
1.50
1.50
2.00
1.90
6.38
6.75
5.81
5.61
6.13
5.88
PM18100TF-5/8-B
PM18100TF-5/8
50424
59488
B5
B5
56C
56C
TEFC
TEFC
—
—
14.63
14.81
3.50
3.50
2.44
2.44
1.50
1.50
1.94
1.90
6.38
6.75
5.81
5.61
6.13
5.88
1-1/2 180
PM18150TF-B
PM18150TF
69870
59489
B7
B7
56CZ
TEFC
143/145TC TEFC
—
—
17.19
18.34
3.50
3.50
2.44
2.75
1.50
2.00†
2.00
1.96
6.88
6.75
6.50
6.55
7.19
7.16
2
180
PM18200TF-B
PM18200TF
68783
59490
B7
B7
56CZ
TEFC
143/145TC TEFC
—
—
18.19
19.34
3.50
3.50
2.44
2.75
1.50
2.00†
2.00
1.96
6.88
6.75
6.50
6.55
7.19
7.16
3
180
PM18300TF-B
69411
B9
184TC
TEFC
—
24.09
4.50
3.75
2.75
2.50
10.00
7.88
8.88
5
180
PM18500TF-B
69412
B9
1810ATC
TEFC
—
27.59
4.50
3.75
2.75
2.00
10.00
7.88
8.88
HP
1/6
90
1/4
1/3
90
90
1/2
3/4
90
1
180
E
AJ
U
DIA.
P
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
AK
†Includes 6 mounting holes
All dimensions in inches. Dimensional information for estimating purposes only.
148
Electrical Products Catalog
F
DC MOTORS
NEMA C-Face
w/Removable Bases
Permanent Magnet
TENV & TEFC
1/6-5 HP
1750 RPM
C'
(Continued)
BD
C
AH
AB
N
KEY
XP
P'
O
AJ
U
DIA.
P
D
F
E
(4) BF-UNC-2B
TAPPED HOLES
EQUALLY SPAC
ON AJ DIA. B.C
E
.34 WIDE
SLOTS
F
BA
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
XP
Approx.
Weight
(Lbs.)
AB
4.56
–
21
19
–
4.47
3/8-16
3/8-16
4.56
–
21
19
–
4.47
4.63
–
1/4-20
1/4-20
4.56
–
22
21
–
4.47
2.75
2.69
6.50
6.50
3/8-16
3/8-16
4.56
–
22
23
–
4.47
3.00
3.00
2.75
2.69
4.63
–
1/4-20
1/4-20
4.56
–
26
24
–
4.47
5.88
5.88
4.50
4.50
2.75
2.69
6.50
6.50
3/8-16
3/8-16
4.56
–
26
23
–
4.47
2.06
2.06
5.88
5.88
4.50
4.50
2.75
2.69
6.50
6.50
3/8-16
3/8-16
4.56
–
32
26
–
4.47
1.38
1.38
2.06
2.06
5.88
5.88
4.50
4.50
2.69
2.69
6.63
6.50
3/8-16
3/8-16
4.00
–
32
26
–
4.47
3/16
3/16
1.38
1.38
2.06
2.06
5.88
5.88
4.50
4.50
2.69
2.69
6.63
6.50
3/8-16
3/8-16
4.00
–
39
37
–
4.47
.6250
.6250
3/16
3/16
1.38
1.38
2.06
2.06
5.88
5.88
4.50
4.50
2.69
2.69
6.63
6.50
3/8-16
3/8-16
4.00
–
39
37
–
4.47
56CZ
56CZ
.8750
.8750
3/16
3/16
1.38
1.38
2.06
2.06
5.88
5.88
4.50
4.50
2.69
2.69
6.63
6.50
3/8-16
3/8-16
4.00
–
44
47
–
4.87
B5
B5
56C
56C
.6250
.6250
3/16
3/16
1.38
1.38
2.06
2.06
5.88
5.88
4.50
4.50
2.69
2.69
6.63
6.50
3/8-16
3/8-16
4.00
–
44
47
–
4.87
PM18100TF-B
PM18100TF
B7
B7
56CZ
56CZ
.8750
.8750
3/16
3/16
1.38
1.38
2.06
2.06
5.88
5.88
4.50
4.50
2.69
2.69
6.63
6.50
3/8-16
3/8-16
4.00
–
44
43
–
4.87
PM18100TF-5/8-B
PM18100TF-5/8
B5
B5
56C
56C
.6250
.6250
3/16
3/16
1.38
1.38
2.06
2.06
5.88
5.88
4.50
4.50
2.69
2.69
6.63
6.50
3/8-16
3/8-16
4.00
–
44
42
–
4.87
1 1/2 180
PM18150TF-B
PM18150TF
B7
B7
56CZ
143/145TC
.8750
.8750
3/16
3/16
1.38
1.38
2.13
2.13
5.88
5.88
4.50
4.50
2.88
3.00
6.63
–
3/8-16
3/8-16
4.25
–
73
76
–
5.31
2
180
PM18200TF-B
PM18200TF
B7
B7
56CZ
143/145TC
.8750
.8750
3/16
3/16
1.38
1.38
2.13
2.13
5.88
5.88
4.50
4.50
2.88
3.00
6.63
–
3/8-16
3/8-16
4.25
–
75
83
–
5.31
3
180
PM18300TF-B
B9
184TC
1.1250
1/4
1.75
2.63
7.25
8.50
2.88
9.00
1/2-13
6.06**
116
–
5
180
PM18500TF-B
B9
1810ATC
1.1250
1/4
2.00
2.13
7.25
8.50
2.88
9.00
1/2-13
6.06**
157
–
HP
1/6
Volts
Arma- Catalog
ture
Number
Bore
Code
NEMA
MTG
U
+.0000
-.0005
SQ.
Long
AH
AJ
AK
BA
BD
BF
APM916AT-B
APM916T
B4
B4
42CYZ
42CYZ
.5000
.5000
1/8
1/8
.75
.88
1.28
1.31
3.75
3.75
3.00
3.00
2.75
2.69
4.63
–
1/4-20
1/4-20
PM916AT-B
PM916T
B5
B5
56C
56C
.6250
.6250
3/16
3/16
1.38
1.38
2.06
2.06
5.88
5.88
4.50
4.50
2.75
2.69
6.50
6.50
APM925AT-B
APM925T
B4
B4
42CYZ
42CYZ
.5000
.5000
1/8
1/8
.75
.88
1.28
1.31
3.75
3.75
3.00
3.00
2.75
2.69
PM925AT-B
PM925T
B5
B5
56C
56C
.6250
.6250
3/16
3/16
1.38
1.38
2.06
2.06
5.88
5.88
4.50
4.50
APM933AT-B
APM933T
B4
B4
42CYZ
42CYZ
.5000
.5000
1/8
1/8
.75
.88
1.28
1.31
3.75
3.75
PM933AT-B
PM933T
B5
B5
56C
56C
.6250
.6250
3/16
3/16
1.38
1.38
2.06
2.06
90
PM950AT-B
PM950TF
B5
B5
56C
56C
.6250
.6250
3/16
3/16
1.38
1.38
180
PM1850TF-B
PM1850TF
B5
B5
56C
56C
.6250
.6250
3/16
3/16
90
PM975TF-B
PM975TF
B5
B5
56C
56C
.6250
.6250
180
PM1875TF-B
PM1875TF
B5
B5
56C
56C
PM9100TF-B
PM9100TF
B7
B7
PM9100TF-5/8-B
PM9100TF-5/8
90
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
AK
1/4
1/3
90
90
1/2
3/4
90
1
180
Key
** The conduit box is located 90 degrees to the base
*** .41 wide slots on 3 & 5 HP motors
All dimensions in inches. Dimensional information for estimating purposes only.
Electrical Products Catalog
149
E
DC MOTORS
NEMA C-Face
Washdown
Permanent Magnet
TENV/TEFC
1/4-1 1/2 Horsepower
1750 RPM
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Boston’s Permanent Magnet Washdown Motors are specifically designed for use
where dust, dirt and moisture are present in industrial and washdown environments.
These motors retard the entrance of water during cleaning operations and release
any water that does enter the motor. Extra protection for the motor’s interior prevents
rust and corrosion build-up and drains release trapped moisture to insure a longer life
than possible with a standard motor. The motors are constructed using stainless steel
shafts, hardware and nameplates, sealed ball bearings and forsheda seals to prevent
water leakage into the motor.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
6.50
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
HP
1/4
1/3
1/2
3/4
E
1
1 1/2
Volts
Armature
90
90
90
180
90
180
90
180
180
Catalog
Number
PM925T-WD
PM933T-WD
PM950T-WD
PM1850T-WD
PM975T-WD
PM1875T-WD
PM9100TF-5/8-WD
PM18100TF-5/8-WD
PM18150TF-5/8-WD
Item Bore NEMA Encl.
Code Code Mtg.
59354 B5
56C TENV
59355 B5
56C TENV
59356 B5
56C TENV
59357 B5
56C TENV
59364 B5
56C TENV
59365 B5
56C TENV
59366 B5
56C TEFC
59367 B5
56C TEFC
59368 B5
56C TEFC
C
C’
10.69
–
11.69
–
13.69
–
13.69
–
15.69
–
15.69
–
– 15.81
– 14.81
– 16.81
All dimensions in inches. Dimensional information for estimating purposes only.
150
Electrical Products Catalog
DC MOTORS
NEMA C-FACE
With Removable Bases
Shunt Wound
Open Drip Proof
1/6-5 HP
1750 RPM
BD
(4) BF UNC-2B
TAPPED HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED
ON “AJ” DIA. B.C.
AB
45°
AH
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
KEY
AK
DIA.
P
O
U
DIA.
D
N
F
BA
(4) H DIA.
HOLES
F
E
E
C
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
HP
Volts
Armature
Volts
Field
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
Bore
Code
C
D
E
F
H*
N
O
P
1/6
90
50/100
V91600-B
66666
B5
56C
11.94
3.50
2.44
1.50
.34(S)
1.94
6.38
5.68
1/4
90
50/100
V92500-B
66669
B5
56C
11.94
3.50
2.44
1.50
.34(S)
1.94
6.38
5.68
1/3
90
50/100
V93300-B
66672
B5
56C
11.94
3.50
2.44
1.50
.34(S)
1.94
6.38
5.68
1/2
90
50/100
V95000-B
66675
B5
56C
12.94
3.50
2.44
1.50
.34(S)
1.94
6.38
5.68
90
50/100
V97500-B
66678
B5
56C
13.56
3.50
2.44
1.50
.34(S)
1.94
6.38
5.68
180
100/200
V18750-B
66681
B5
56C
13.56
3.50
2.44
1.50
.34(S)
1.94
6.38
5.68
3/4
1
NEMA
Mtg
90
50/100
V9100-B
66897
B5
56CZ
15.06
3.50
2.44
1.50
.34(S)
2.00
6.88
6.50
180
100/200
V18100A-B
66684
B7
56CZ
15.06
3.50
2.44
1.50
.34(S)
2.00
6.88
6.50
1 1/2
180
100/200
V18150A-B
66690
B7
184C
15.06
4.50
3.75
2.75
.41
2.00
8.44
7.88
2
180
100/200
V18200A-B
66696
B7
184C
18.38
4.50
3.75
2.75
.41
2.00
8.44
7.88
3
180
100/200
18300-B
66702
B9
215C
20.94
5.25
4.25
3.50
.41
2.75
9.94
9.38
5
180
100/200
18500A-B
66790
B11
256UC
23.38
6.25
5.00
5.00
.53
3.25
11.94
11.38
HP
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
U
+.0000
-.0005
Sq.
Key
Long
AB
AH
AJ
AK
BA
BD
BF
Approx.
Weight
(lbs.)
1/6
V91600-B
66666
.6250
3/16
1.38
4.50
2.06
5.88
4.500
2.69
6.63
3/8-16
22
1/4
V92500-B
66669
.6250
3/16
1.38
4.50
2.06
5.88
4.500
2.69
6.63
3/8-16
22
1/3
V93300-B
66672
.6250
3/16
1.38
4.50
2.06
5.88
4.500
2.69
6.63
3/8-16
23
1/2
V95000-B
66675
.6250
3/16
1.38
4.50
2.06
5.88
4.500
2.69
6.63
3/8-16
28
V97500-B
66678
.6250
3/16
1.38
4.50
2.06
5.88
4.500
2.69
6.63
3/8-16
34
V18750-B
66681
.6250
3/16
1.38
4.50
2.06
5.88
4.500
2.69
6.63
3/8-16
34
3/4
1
V9100-B
66897
.8750
3/16
1.38
5.25
2.13
5.88
4.500
2.69
6.63
3/8-16
61
V18100-B
66684
.8750
3/16
1.38
5.25
2.13
5.88
4.500
2.69
6.63
3/8-16
61
1 1/2
V18150A-B
66690
.8750
3/16
1.38
5.88
2.13
5.88
4.500
2.88
7.88
3/8-16
87
2
V18200A-B
66696
.8750
3/16
1.38
5.88
2.13
5.88
4.500
2.88
7.88
3/8-16
105
3
18300-B
66702
1.1250
1/4
1.75
7.38
3.00
7.25
8.500
3.50
9.00
1/2-13
155
5
18500A-B
66790
1.3750
5/16
2.38
8.88
3.50
7.25
8.500
4.50
9.63
1/2-13
290
*(S) Slotted (Dim is Width)
All dimensions in inches. Dimensional information for estimating purposes only.
Electrical Products Catalog
151
E
DC MOTORS
NEMA C-FACE
With Removable Bases
Shunt Wound
TEFC
1/6-5 HP
1750 RPM
BD
(4) BF UNC-2B
TAPPED HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED
ON “AJ” DIA. B.C.
AB
C'
45°
AH
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
KEY
O
U
DIA.
D
N
F
BA
(4) H DIA.
HOLES
F
E
E
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
HP
Volts
Armature
Volts
Field
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
Bore
Code
NEMA
Mtg
C’
D
E
F
H*
N
1/6
90
50/100
V91600TF-B
66741
B5
56C
12.56
3.50
2.44
1.50
.34(S)
1.94
6.38
6.13
1/4
90
50/100
V92500TF-B
66744
B5
56C
13.25
3.50
2.44
1.50
.34(S)
1.94
6.38
6.13
1/3
90
50/100
V93300TF-B
66747
B5
56C
13.25
3.50
2.44
1.50
.34(S)
1.94
6.38
6.13
1/2
90
50/100
V95000TF-B
66750
B5
56C
14.25
3.50
2.44
1.50
.34(S)
1.94
6.38
6.13
90
50/100
V97500TF-B
66752
B5
56C
14.75
3.50
2.44
1.50
.34(S)
1.94
6.38
6.13
180
100/200
V18750TF-B
66755
B5
56C
14.75
3.50
2.44
1.50
.34(S)
1.94
6.38
6.13
90
50/100
V9100BTF-B
66901
B7
56CZ
15.50
3.50
2.44
1.50
.34(S)
2.00
6.88
7.18
180
100/200
V18100BTF-B
V18100ATF-B
66757
66761
B7
B7
56CZ
182C
16.24
15.56
3.50
4.50
2.44
3.75
1.50
2.75
.34(S)
.41
2.00
2.00
6.88
8.44
7.18
8.50
1 1/2
180
100/200
V18150ATF-B
66767
B7
184C
17.31
4.50
3.75
2.75
.41
2.00
8.44
8.50
2
180
100/200
V18200ATF-B
66773
B7
184C
18.56
4.50
3.75
2.75
.41
2.00
8.44
8.50
3
180
100/200
18300ATF-B
66778
B9
215C
21.18
5.25
4.25
3.50
.41
2.75
9.94
10.18
5
180
100/200
18500ATF-B
66791
B11
256UC
24.38
6.25
5.00
5.00
.53
3.50
11.94
12.38
3/4
1
O
P’
HP
Catalog Number
Item
Code
U
+.0000
-.0005
Sq.
Long
AB
AH
AJ
AK
BA
BD
BF
XP
Approx.
Weight
(lbs.)
1/6
V91600TF-B
66741
.6250
3/16
1.38
—
2.06
5.88
4.500
2.69
6.63
3/8-16
4.00
22
1/4
V92500TF-B
66744
.6250
3/16
1.38
—
2.06
5.88
4.500
2.69
6.63
3/8-16
4.00
22
1/3
V93300TF-B
66747
.6250
3/16
1.38
—
2.06
5.88
4.500
2.69
6.63
3/8-16
4.00
23
1/2
V95000TF-B
66750
.6250
3/16
1.38
—
2.06
5.88
4.500
2.69
6.63
3/8-16
4.00
28
V97500TF-B
66752
.6250
3/16
1.38
—
2.06
5.88
4.500
2.69
6.63
3/8-16
4.00
36
V18750TF-B
66755
.6250
3/16
1.38
—
2.06
5.88
4.500
2.69
6.63
3/8-16
4.00
34
V9100BTF-B
66901
.8750
3/16
1.38
—
2.13
5.88
4.500
2.69
6.63
3/8-16
4.25
61
1
V18100BTF-B
V18100ATF-B
66757
66761
.8750
.8750
3/16
3/16
1.38
1.38
5.25
6.00
2.13
2.13
5.88
5.88
4.500
4.500
2.75
3.00
6.63
6.50
3/8-16
3/8-16
—
—
61
81
1 1/2
V18150ATF-B
66767
.8750
3/16
1.38
6.00`
2.13
5.88
4.500
3.00
6.50
3/8-16
—
90
2
V18200ATF-B
66773
.8750
3/16
1.38
6.00
2.13
5.88
4.500
3.00
6.50
3/8-16
—
105
3
18300ATF-B
66778
1.1250
1/4
2.00
7.38
3.00
7.25
8.500
3.50
9.00
1/2- 13
—
167
5
18500ATF-B
66791
1.3750
5/16
2.38
9.06
3.75
7.25
8.500
4.50
9.63
1/2-13
—
306
3/4
E
AK
DIA.
P'
Key
*(S) Slotted (Dim is Width)
All dimensions in inches. Dimensional information for estimating
purposes only.
152
Electrical Products Catalog
DC MOTORS
NEMA C-FACE
With Removable Base
Shunt Wound
Explosion Proof
1/2-1 HP
1750 RPM
CONTINUOUS DUTY
1.0 SERVICE FACTOR
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
CLASS I, GROUP D
CLASS II, GROUP F & G
6.50
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
C
(4) 3/8-16 UNC-2B
TAPPED HOLES
EQUALLY SPACED
ON 5-7/8 DIA. B.C.
7.38
AH
45°
KEY
3
SQ.X1.38LG.
16
®
4.500
4.497
DIA.
6
5
8
REF
O
U
D
N
F
F
3.75
(4) .41 HOLES
BA
3.75
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
HP
Volts
Armature
Volts
Field
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
Bore
Code
NEMA
Mtg*
F
BA
D
N
U
+.0000
-.0005
AH
O
C
Approximate
Weight
(lbs.)
1/2
90
50/100
V95000X-B
69871
B5
182CZ
2.25
2.75
4.50
1.94
.6250
2.06
8.44
18.62
103
3/4
90
50/100
V97500X-B
69872
B5
66CZ
2.50
3.06
4.13
1.94
.6250
2.06
7.94
15.56
105
1
180
100/200
V18100X-B
69873
B7
182C
2.75
2.75
4.50
2.00
.8750
2.13
8.44
18.68
103
All dimensions in inches. Dimensional information for estimating purposes only.
*56C Shaft and face mounting only, base mounting and shaft height differs from standard NEMA dimensions.
E
Electrical Products Catalog
153
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
NOTES
E
154
Electrical Products Catalog
AC MOTORS
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
F
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION...........................................................................................................156
NEMA C-FACE DIMENSIONS......................................................................................................156
OPEN DRIP PROOF..............................................................................................................157-158
TENV .............................................................................................................................................159
TEFC ......................................................................................................................................160-164
WASHDOWN/BISSC ....................................................................................................................165
BRAKE MOTORS..................................................................................................................166-167
EXPLOSION PROOF....................................................................................................................168
RIGID BASE..................................................................................................................................169
INVERTER DUTY ..................................................................................................................170-171
Electrical Products Catalog
155
AC MOTORS
Boston Gear AC motors are general purpose motors selected
for use with Boston Gear Reductors and Flanged Reductors
and are suitable for all common industrial applications.
BOSTON GEAR MOTOR CATALOG NUMBERS consists
generally of two or more letters denoting horsepower, voltage,
enclosure and mounting for motors 1/6 HP and larger.
HORSEPOWER — Motor’s listed range from 1/20 to 75 HP.
Larger HP motors can be supplied.
Prefix
H.P.
A-Small Frame A - 1/20
B-Rigid Base AA - 1/12
B - 1/8
C - 1/6
D - 1/4
E - 1/3
F - 1/2
G - 3/4
H-1
J - 1-1/2
K-2
L-3
M-5
N - 7-1/2
P - 10
R - 15
S - 20
T - 25
U - 30
V - 40
W - 50
X - 60
Y - 75
VOLTAGES — All motors listed are for 60 Hz (cycle) power;
fractional HP motors are also stocked in 50 Hz single phase
ratings.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
F
SINGLE-PHASE motors are split phase 1/20 HP through 1/6
HP. Some 1/6 HP motors and all 1/4 HP motors and larger
are capacitor start. Standard 60 Hz voltages are 115V, 230V
or 115/230V. 50 Hz voltages are 110/220. NOTE: 50 Hz
motors have a speed of 1425 RPM, nominal. Single phase 60
Hz motors cannot be used on 50 Hz power.
POLYPHASE motors are all NEMA design B induction
motors. Standard 60 Hz voltages are 208-230/460 and 575V.
50 Hz Voltage are 220/380/440 . NOTE 50Hz motors have a
speed of 1425 RPM nominal.
MOUNTING — Separate listings are shown for NEMA C-face
mounted motors for use with flange reductors and rigid base
mounted motors for coupled loads.
SERVICE FACTORS indicate the allowable overload on a
motor. The service factors vary from motor to motor. Please
consult factory for the service factor on any particular motor.
ALLOWABLE STARTS AND STOPS—based on no external
inertia and each start from a standstill:
Three phase motors ............................up to 20 times per min.
Single phase–split phase motors.........up to 20 times per hour
Single phase–capacitor motors ...........up to 30 times per hour
NOTE: Motor enclosures description on page 143.
Voltage
Enclosure
Suffix
R 115/230-1-60 No letter-Dripproof B-Brake
S 115-1-60
T-TENV
35-3450 RPM
T 230-1-60
TF-TEFC
11-1150 RPM
U 230/460-3-60 X-Explosion Proof
Y 575-3-60
WB-Washdown BISSC
R5 110/220-1-50 BC-TEBC
S5 110-1-50
T5 230-1-50
U5 220/380/440-3-50
Manufacturer
Blank-Boston Gear
B-Baldor
G-General Electric
Z - 100
NOTE: A dash followed by a letter indicates the motor manufacturer
eg -”-B” - Baldor “-G- -General Electric or “Blank” Boston Gear.
Example - FUTF-B 1/2 HP, 230/460-3 -60, TEFC, Baldor.
REVERSING—All listed motors are reversible with standard
motor reversing switches or suitable manual or magnetic
reversing starters. Single phase motors must stop before
reversing; polyphase may be instantly reversed by reversing
any two of the three incoming power leads with a suitable
starter.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURES — All standard motors are rated
for continuous full load operation at ambient temperatures not
exceeding 40°C (104°F). The insulation used varies with motor
design; therefore, when higher temperatures than normal are
expected, please contact the factory with complete details i.e.,
maximum temperature, HP, enclosure, mounting, etc.
NEMA C-Face Bolt Circle Dimensions
KEY
AJ
Boston
NEMA
Gear
Frame
Bore Code
No.
AK
U
B4
42CZ
B5
56C
BF HOLES
AH
1
AH
B7
B9
B11
B13
156
Electrical Products Catalog
182C
184C
143TC
145T C
213C
215C
182TC
184TC
254UC
256UC
213TC
215TC
254TC
256TC
Key
Max.
AH
Max.
AH’
Sq.
Lg.
AJ
BF
1-5/16
—
1/8
3/4
3.75
1/4-20
2-5/32
—
3/16
1-3/8
5.88
3/8-16
U
.5000
.4995
.6250
.6245
AK
3.000
2.997
4.500
4.497
.8750
.8745
4.500
4.497
2-5/32
—
3/16
1-3/8
5.88
3/8-16
1.1250
1.1245
8.500
8.497
—
2-25/32
1/4
1-3/4
7.25
1/2-13
1.3750
1.3745
8.500
8.497
—
3-17/32
5/16
2-3/8
7.25
1/2-13
1.6250
1.6240
8.500
8.497
—
3-13/16
3/8
2-7/8
7.25
1/2-13
AC MOTORS
110/220 VAC 1ø 50 Hz
115 VAC 1ø 60 Hz
115/230 VAC 1ø 60 Hz
Open Drip Proof
NEMA C-Face
Single Phase
1/4–1-1/2 Horsepower
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
F
C
AB
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
KEY
N
XO
P
AK
®
U
BD
45°
AH
(4) BF UNC-2B
TAPPED HOLES EQUALLY
SPACED ON AJ DIA. B.C.
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
HP
RPM
F.L.A.
@Max
Volts
P
U
+.0000
-.0005
Sq.
Long
AB
AH
AJ
AK
BD
BF
X0
Wt.
Lbs
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
5.69
5.69
5.69
6.63
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
4.75
4.75
4.75
5.75
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
5.875
5.875
5.875
5.875
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
5.87
5.87
5.87
6.50
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
1.54
1.54
1.54
2.25
22
25
27
35
8.98
8.98
8.88
10.25
0.93
0.93
1.94
1.94
3.86
3.86
5.61
5.69
0.3125
0.3125
0.6250
0.6250
See
See
3/16
3/16
Note
Note
1.38
1.38
—
—
—
4.50
1.18
1.18
2.06
2.06
1.750
1.750
5.875
5.875
1.375
1.375
4.500
4.500
4.64
4.64
5.61
5.81
10/32
10/32
3/8-16
3/8-16
1.94
1.54
10
10
16
22
9.25
8.88
10.25
9.38
10.25
9.88
11.56
10.88
11.56
12.24
12.13
12.13
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
5.61
5.61
5.69
5.61
5.69
5.61
5.69
5.61
6.63
6.63
6.63
6.63
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.8750
0.8750
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
—
—
4.88
—
4.88
—
4.75
—
5.88
5.75
5.75
5.75
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.13
2.13
5.875
5,875
5.875
5.875
5.875
5.875
5.875
5.875
5.875
5.875
5.875
5.875
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
6.52
5.61
5.81
5.61
5.81
5.81
5.87
6.50
6.50
6.50
6.50
6.50
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
1.94
1.54
1.94
1.54
1.94
1.54
1.94
2.25
2.18
2.25
2.25
12
16
22
19
25
19
27
26
34
35
35
41
NEMA
Mtg
Bore
Code
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
C
N
2.8
3.2
4.4
6.5
56C
56C
56C
56C
B5
B5
B5
B5
DR5-B
ER5-B
FR5-B
GR5-B
66854
66866
66872
66878
10.25
10.69
11.56
11.06
1.35
2.0
2.7
5.0
SP
SP
56C
56C
SPL
SPL
B5
B5
AST-B
AAST-B
DS
DS-B
65403
65402
63316
66112
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
143TC
145TC
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B7
B7
CR-G
DR
DR-B
ER
ER-B
FR
FR-B
GR
GR-B
HR-5/8-B
HR-B
JR-B
49655
63315
66109
63317
66121
63318
66130
63319
66139
19183
66145
66154
Key
110/220 VAC 1ø 50 Hz
1/4
1/3
1/2
3/4
1425
1425
1425
1425
115 VAC 1ø 60 Hz
1/20
1/12
1/4
1/4
1725
1725
1725
1725
115/230 VAC 1ø 60 Hz
1/6
1/4
1/4
1/3
1/3
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
1
1
1-1/2
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
2.0
2.7
2.5
3.1
3.0
4.4
4.2
5.4
5.6
6.7
6.5
9.0
All Dimensions in Inches. Dimensional Information for Estimating Purposes Only
NOTE: #302.5 Woodruff Key (3/32 wide)
Electrical Products Catalog
157
AC MOTORS
208-230/460 VAC 3ø 60 Hz
Open Drip Proof
NEMA C-Face
Three Phase
1/6 – 20 Horsepower
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
F
C
AB
KEY
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
N
P
AK
U
®
BD
45°
AH
(4) BF UNC-2B
TAPPED HOLES EQUALLY
SPACED ON AJ DIA. B.C.
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
HP
RPM
F.L.A.
@Max NEMA Bore
Volt
Mtg Code
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
C
N
CU-G
DU
DU-B
EU
EU-B
FU
FU-B
GU
GU-B
HU-5/8
HU-5/8-B
HU
HU-B
JU
JU-B
KU
KU-B
LU
LU-B
MU
MU-B
NU-B
PU-B
RU-B
SU-B
66108
63531
66115`
63532
66124
63533
66133
63536
66142
63537
50427
63538
66148
63539
66157
63540
66163
63542
66166
63543
66170
66174
66176
66180
66184
9.25
9.38
10.25
9.38
10.25
9.88
10.31
10.88
11.56
10.88
11.06
10.88
11.13
11.38
11.13
11.38
12.13
12.63
13.63
13.13
15.00
17.06
17.06
20.00
21.50
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
2.00
1.94
2.00
1.94
2.00
2.63
2.63
2.63
2.63
3.13
3.13
3.75
3.75
P
U
+.0000
-.0005
Key
Sq.
Long
AB
AH
AJ
AK
5.61
5.61
5.69
5.61
5.69
5.61
5.69
5.61
5.69
6.53
6.63
6.53
6.63
6.53
6.63
6.53
6.63
8.46
7.88
8.46
7.88
9.58
9.96
11.50
11.50
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.8750
0.8750
0.8750
0.8750
0.8750
0.8750
1.1250
1.1250
1.1250
1.1250
1.3750
1.3750
1.6250
1.6250
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
5/16
5/16
3/8
3/8
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.75
1.75
1.75
1.75
2.38
2.38
2.88
2.88
—
—
4.88
—
4.88
—
4.75
—
4.75
—
5.63
5.09
5.63
5.09
5.63
5.09
5.63
6.30
5.88
6.30
5.88
7.38
7.38
8.94
8.94
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.13
2.06
2.13
2.06
2.13
2.89
2.89
2.89
2.89
3.38
3.38
4.00
4.00
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
8.500
8.500
8.500
8.500
8.500
8.500
8.500
8.500
BD
BF
Wt.
Lbs
208 – 230/460 VAC 3ø 60 Hz
1/6
1/4
1/4
1/3
1/3
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
1
1
1
1
1-1/2
1-1/2
2
2
3
3
5
5
7-1/2
10
15
20
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1760
1760
0.55
0.65
0.65
0.8
0.8
1.0
1.0
1.4
1.5
1.7
1.7
1.7
1.7
2.3
2.4
3.1
3.2
4.4
4.3
7.2
7.0
11.0
14.0
19.9
26.0
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
143TC
143TC
145TC
145TC
145TC
145TC
182TC
182TC
184TC
184TC
213TC
215TC
254TC
256TC
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B7
B7
B7
B7
B7
B7
B9
B9
B9
B9
B11
B11
B13
B13
All dimensions in inches. Dimensional information for estimating purposes only.
158
Electrical Products Catalog
6.52
5.61
5.88
5.61
5.88
5.61
5.88
5.61
5.88
5.88
6.50
5.88
6.50
5.88
6.50
5.88
6.50
8.88
9.00
8.88
9.00
9.00
9.00
9.13
9.13
3/8-16
14
3/8-16
16
3/8-16
18
3/8-16
18
3/8-16
21
3/8-16
20
3/8-16
22
3/8-16
22
3/8-16
26
3/8-16
31
3/8-16
33
3/8-16
31
3/8-16
33
3/8-16
35
3/8-16
34
3/8-16
37
3/8-16
37
1/2-13
65
1/2-13
66
1/2-13
62
1/2-13
80
1/2-13 114
1/2-13 118
1/2-13 220
1/2-13 261
AC MOTORS
115/230 1ø 60 Hz
208 – 230/460 3ø 60 Hz
TENV
NEMA C-Face
Single and Three Phase
1/6 – 1/2 Horsepower
1725 RPM
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
F
C
AB
KEY
®
N
XO
P
AK
U
BD
45°
AH
(4) BF UNC-2B
TAPPED HOLES EQUALLY
SPACED ON AJ DIA. B.C.
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
HP
F.L.A.
@ Max NEMA
RPM
Volt
Mtg.
Bore
Code
P
U
+.0000
-.0005
Sq.
Long
AB
AH
AJ
AK
BD
BF
XO
Wt.
Lbs.
1.94
1.94
1.94
5.61
6.53
6.53
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
3/16
3/16
3/16
1.38
1.38
1.38
—
—
—
2.06
2.06
2.06
5.88
5.88
5.88
4.500
4.500
4.500
6.52
5.88
5.88
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
—
1.97
1.97
18
27
29
1.15
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
4.65
5.61
5.61
6.42
6.53
6.53
0.5000
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
1/8
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
0.75
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
4.03
—
—
—
—
—
1.28
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
3.75
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
3.000
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.63
6.64
5.61
6.64
5.88
5.88
1/4-20
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
—
—
—
—
—
—
19
18
16
22
20
25
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
C
N
B5
B5
B5
CRT-G
DRT
ERT
66034
63544
63732
9.88
9.94
9.94
B4
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
ACUT-B
CUT-G
DUT
DUT-G
EUT
FUT
69728
66037
63801
66038
63952
63959
9.31
9.00
9.44
9.98
9.44
10.44
Key
115/230 VAC 1ø 60 Hz
1/6
1/4
1/3
1725
1725
1725
1.6
2.4
2.9
56C
56C
56C
208 – 230/460 VAC 3ø 60 Hz
1/6
1/6
1/4
1/4
1/3
1/2
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
0.60
0.55
0.60
0.60
0.65
1.0
42CZ
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
All dimensions in inches. Dimensional information for estimating purposes only.
Electrical Products Catalog
159
AC MOTORS
115/230 VAC 1ø 60 Hz
TEFC
NEMA C-Face
Single Phase
1/6 – 1 1/2 Horsepower
1725 RPM
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]strialmagza.com
F
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
C'
AB
KEY
N
XO
P'
P
®
AK
U
BD
45°
AH
(4) BF UNC-2B
TAPPED HOLES EQUALLY
SPACED ON AJ DIA. B.C.
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
HP
F.L.A.
@ Max. NEMA Bore
RPM
Volt
Mtg.
Code
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
C′
N
P
ACRTF-B
CRTF-G
ADRTF-B
DRTF
DRTF-B
DRTF-G
DSTF-B*
AERTF-B
ERTF
ERTF-B
FRTF
FRTF-B
GRTF
GRTF-B
HRTF-5/8
HRTF-5/8-B
HRTF
HRTF-B
JRTF
JRTF-B
69725
66190
69726
63545
66199
66200
66202
69727
63750
66211
63754
66219
63755
66228
63795
19178
63797
66234
63800
66243
9.31
10.30
10.31
9.81
11.38
10.30
11.38
10.31
10.94
11.38
10.94
12.00
11.44
13.31
11.94
13.31
11.94
13.38
12.44
14.25
1.15
1.94
1.15
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.15
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
2.00
1.94
2.00
4.69
5.61
4.69
5.61
5.69
5.61
5.69
4.69
6.53
5.69
6.53
5.69
6.53
6.63
6.53
6.63
6.53
6.63
6.53
6.63
P’
U
+.0000
-.0005
Key
Sq.
Lg.
AB
AH
AJ
AK
BD
5.19
6.78
5.19
5.88
6.19
6.78
6.19
5.19
7.16
6.19
7.16
6.19
7.16
7.19
7.19
7.19
7.16
7.19
7.16
7.19
0.5000
0.6250
0.5000
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.5000
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.8750
0.8750
0.8750
0.8750
1/8
3/16
1/8
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
1/8
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
0.75
1.38
0.75
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
0.75
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
4.03
4.74
4.03
4.87
4.89
4.74
4.89
4.03
5.09
4.89
5.09
4.89
5.09
5.63
5.09
5.75
5.09
5.75
5.09
5.75
1.28
2.06
1.28
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
1.28
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.13
2.06
2.13
3.75
5.88
3.75
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
3.75
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
3.000
4.500
3.000
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
3.000
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.63
6.78
4.63
5.61
5.81
5.66
5.81
4.63
5.88
5.81
5.88
5.81
5.88
6.50
5.88
6.50
5.88
6.50
5.88
6.50
BF
XO
Wt.
Lbs.
115/230 VAC 1ø 60 Hz
1/6
1/6
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/3
1/3
1/3
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
1
1
1
1
1-1/2
1-1/2
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1740
1725
1740
1725
1.9
2.0
2.3
2.7
2.5
2.7
5.0
3.1
3.2
3.0
4.4
3.7
5.8
5.5
6.4
6.2
6.4
6.2
8.6
8.0
42CZ
56C
42CZ
56C
56C
56C
56C
42CZ
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
143TC
143TC
145TC
145TC
B4
B5
B4
B5
B5
B5
B5
B4
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B7
B7
B7
B7
*115 VAC Single Phase 60 Hz only
All dimensions in inches. Dimensional information for estimating purposes only.
160
Electrical Products Catalog
1/4-20 1.66
3/8-16 1.53
1/4-20 1.66
3/8-16 2.00
3/8-16 1.54
3/8-16 1.53
3/8-16 1.54
1/4-20 1.66
3/8-16 1.97
3/8-16 1.54
3/8-16 1.97
3/8-16 1.54
3/8-16 1.97
3/8-16 2.25
3/8-16 1.97
3/8-16 2.25
3/8-16 1.97
3/8-16 2.25
3/8-16 1.78**
3/8-16 2.25
20
18
21
20
23
20
23
23
26
26
29
30
30
42
34
34
34
47
47
58
**Two capacitors
AC MOTORS
208-230/460 VAC 3ø 60 Hz
TEFC
NEMA C-Face
Three Phase
1/6 – 1 Horsepower
1725 RPM
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
F
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
C'
AB
KEY
N
P'
P
AK
®
U
BD
45°
AH
(4) BF UNC-2B
TAPPED HOLES EQUALLY
SPACED ON AJ DIA. B.C.
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
HP
F.L.A.
@ Max. NEMA Bore
RPM
Volt
Mtg. Code
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
C′
N
P
CUTF-G
ADUTF-B
DUTF
DUTF-B
DUTF-G
AEUTF-B
EUTF
EUTF-B
FUTF
FUTF-B
FUTF-G
GUTF
GUTF-B
GUTF-G
HUTF-5/8
HUTF-5/8-B
HUTF
HUTF-B
HUTF-G
66197
69729
63949
66205
66206
69730
63958
66214
63961
66223
66224
63979
66231
66233
63980
50428
63981
66237
66239
10.30
10.31
9.81
11.38
10.30
10.31
10.94
11.38
10.94
11.38
10.93
11.44
11.38
11.36
11.94
12.31
11.63
12.38
11.72
1.94
1.15
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.15
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
2.00
1.94
5.61
4.69
5.61
5.69
5.61
4.69
6.53
5.69
6.53
5.69
5.61
6.53
5.69
5.61
6.53
6.63
6.53
6.63
6.42
P'
U
+.0000
-.0005
Key
Sq.
Long
AB
AH
AJ
AK
BD
BF
Wt.
Lbs.
6.78
5.19
5.88
6.19
6.78
5.19
7.16
6.19
7.16
6.19
6.78
7.16
6.19
6.78
7.19
7.19
7.16
7.19
7.10
0.6250
0.5000
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.5000
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.8750
0.8750
0.8750
3/16
1/8
3/16
3/16
3/16
1/8
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
1.38
0.75
1.38
1.38
1.38
0.75
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
4.74
4.03
4.87
4.89
4.74
4.03
5.09
4.89
5.09
4.89
4.74
5.09
4.89
4.74
5.09
5.75
5.09
5.75
5.94
2.06
1.28
2.06
2.06
2.06
1.28
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.13
2.13
5.88
3.75
5.88
5.88
5.88
3.75
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
4.500
3.000
4.500
4.500
4.500
3.000
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
6.78
4.63
5.61
5.81
5.66
4.63
5.88
5.81
5.88
5.81
5.66
5.88
5.81
5.66
5.88
6.50
5.88
6.50
6.52
3/8-16
1/4-20
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
1/4-20
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
18
21
18
19
20
21
20
19
25
22
26
26
32
32
33
35
33
35
26
208-230/460 VAC 3ø 60 Hz
1/6
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/3
1/3
1/3
1/2
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
3/4
1
1
1
1
1
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1740
1725
1725
0.55
0.60
0.65
0.65
0.70
0.70
0.65
0.80
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.4
1.5
1.4
1.7
1.7
1.7
1.7
1.8
56C
42CZ
56C
56C
56C
42CZ
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
143TC
143TC
143TC
B5
B4
B5
B5
B5
B4
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B7
B7
B7
All dimensions in inches. Dimensional information for estimating purposes only.
Electrical Products Catalog
161
AC MOTORS
208-230/460 VAC 3ø 60 Hz
TEFC
NEMA C-Face
Three Phase
1-1/2 – 20 Horsepower
1725 RPM
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
F
C'
AB
KEY
®
N
P'
P
AK
U
BD
45°
AH
(4) BF UNC-2B
TAPPED HOLES EQUALLY
SPACED ON AJ DIA. B.C.
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
HP
F.L.A.
@ Max. NEMA Bore
RPM
Volt
Mtg. Code
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
C
N
P
JUTF-5/8
JUTF-5/8-B
JUTF
JUTF-B
JUTF-G
KUTF-5/8
KUTF-5/8-B
KUTF
KUTF-B
KUTF-G
LUTF
LUTF-B
MUTF
MUTF-B
NUTF-B
PUTF-B
RUTF-B
SUTF-B
63988
19784
64281
66246
66248
64769
19785
64770
66252
66254
64771
66258
64772
66262
66266
66270
66274
66278
12.44
12.31
12.44
12.38
12.72
12.44
13.31
12.44
13.38
14.10
13.91
15.18
14.91
16.56
18.69
19.44
22.00
22.00
1.94
1.94
1.94
2.00
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
2.00
1.94
2.63
2.63
2.63
2.63
3.13
3.13
3.75
3.75
6.53
6.63
6.53
6.63
6.42
6.53
6.63
6.53
6.63
6.42
8.46
7.88
8.46
7.88
9.56
9.56
12.94
12.94
P'
U
+.0000
-.0005
Key
Sq.
Long
AB
AH
AJ
AK
BD
BF
Wt.
Lbs.
7.16
7.19
7.16
7.19
7.10
7.16
7.19
7.16
7.19
7.10
9.09
8.50
9.09
8.50
10.19
10.19
13.25
13.25
0.6250
0.6250
0.8750
0.8750
0.8750
0.6250
0.6250
0.8750
0.8750
0.8750
1.1250
1.1250
1.1250
1.1250
1.3750
1.3750
1.6250
1.6250
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
5/16
5/16
3/8
3/8
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.75
1.75
1.75
1.75
2.38
2.38
2.38
2.38
5.09
5.75
5.09
5.75
5.94
5.09
5.75
5.09
5.75
5.25
6.36
5.88
6.36
5.88
7.38
7.38
9.63
9.63
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.13
2.13
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.13
2.13
2.89
2.89
2.89
2.89
3.38
3.38
4.00
4.00
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
8.500
8.500
8.500
8.500
8.500
8.500
8.500
8.500
5.88
6.50
5.88
6.50
6.52
5.88
6.50
5.88
6.50
6.52
8.58
9.00
8.58
9.00
9.00
9.00
9.13
9.13
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
1/2-13
1/2-13
1/2-13
1/2-13
1/2-13
1/2-13
1/2-13
1/2-13
37
37
37
37
35
42
42
42
45
39
65
94
84
102
113
146
312
312
208-230/460 VAC 3ø 60 Hz
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
1-1/2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
5
5
7-1/2
10
15
20
1725
2.3
1725
2.5
1740
2.3
1725
2.0
1725
2.4
1725
3.1
1725
3.1
1740
3.1
1725
3.1
1725
3.1
1740
4.4
1725
4.3
1740
6.7
1725
6.6
1725 10.0
1725 13.0
1725 19.6
1725 26.0
56C
56C
145TC
145TC
145TC
56C
56C
145TC
145TC
145TC
182TC
182TC
184TC
184TC
213TC
215TC
254TC
256TC
B5
B5
B7
B7
B7
B5
B5
B7
B7
B7
B9
B9
B9
B9
B11
B11
B13
B13
All dimensions in inches. Dimensional information for estimating purposes only.
162
Electrical Products Catalog
AC MOTORS
575 VAC 3ø 60 Hz
TEFC
NEMA C-Face
Three Phase
1/4 – 5 Horsepower
1725 RPM
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
F
C'
AB
KEY
N
P'
P
®
AK
U
BD
45°
AH
(4) BF UNC-2B
TAPPED HOLES EQUALLY
SPACED ON AJ DIA. B.C.
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
HP
F.L.A.
@ Max. NEMA Bore
RPM
Volt
Mtg. Code
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
C′
N
P
DYTF
DYTF-B
EYTF
ETYF-B
FYTF
FYTF-B
GYTF
GYTF-B
HYTF-5/8-B
HYTF
HYTF-B
JYTF
JYTF-B
KYTF
KYTF-B
LYTF
LYTF-B
MYTF
MYTF-B
64963
66208
64944
66217
64945
66226
64946
66831
19179
64948
66240
64949
66249
64950
66255
64954
66260
64955
66264
9.81
11.38
10.94
11.38
10.94
11.38
11.44
12.31
12.31
11.94
12.38
12.44
12.38
12.44
13.38
13.91
15.18
14.91
16.56
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
2.00
1.94
2.00
1.94
2.00
2.63
2.63
2.63
2.63
5.61
5.69
6.53
5.69
6.53
5.69
6.53
6.63
6.63
6.53
6.63
6.53
6.63
6.53
6.63
8.46
7.88
8.46
7.88
P'
U
+.0000
-.0005
Key
Sq.
Long
AB
AH
AJ
AK
BD
BF
Wt.
Lbs.
5.88
6.13
7.16
6.19
7.16
6.19
7.16
7.19
7.19
7.16
7.19
7.16
7.19
7.16
7.19
9.09
8.50
9.09
8.50
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.8750
0.8750
0.8750
0.8750
0.8750
0.8750
1.1250
1.1250
1.1250
1.1250
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
1/4
1/4
1/4
1/4
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.75
1.75
1.75
1.75
4.87
4.89
5.09
4.89
5.09
4.89
5.09
5.75
5.75
5.09
5.75
5.09
5.75
5.09
5.75
6.36
5.88
6.36
5.88
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.13
2.06
2.13
2.06
2.13
2.88
2.88
2.88
2.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
8.500
8.500
8.500
8.500
5.61
5.81
5.88
5.81
5.88
5.81
5.88
6.50
6.50
5.88
6.50
5.88
6.50
5.88
6.50
8.58
9.00
8.58
9.00
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
1/2-13
1/2-13
1/2-13
1/2-13
18
19
26
19
26
22
26
32
35
32
35
35
37
37
45
60
94
77
102
575 VAC 3ø 60 Hz
1/4
1/4
1/3
1/3
1/2
1/2
3/4
3/4
1
1
1
1-1/2
1-1/2
2
2
3
3
5
5
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1740
1725
1740
1725
1740
1725
1740
1725
1740
1725
0.56
0.48
0.52
0.64
0.80
0.80
1.1
1.2
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.9
1.9
2.5
2.5
3.5
3.6
5.4
5.3
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
143TC
143TC
145TC
145TC
145TC
145TC
182TC
182TC
184TC
184TC
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B7
B7
B7
B7
B7
B7
B9
B9
B9
B9
All dimensions in inches. Dimensional information for estimating purposes only.
Electrical Products Catalog
163
AC MOTORS
110/220 1ø 50 Hz
220/380/440 3ø 50 Hz
TEFC
NEMA C-Face
Single and Three Phase, 50 Hz
1/6 – 1-1/2 Horsepower
1425 RPM
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
F
C'
AB
KEY
N
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
XO
P'
P
AK
U
®
BD
45°
AH
(4) BF UNC-2B
TAPPED HOLES EQUALLY
SPACED ON AJ DIA. B.C.
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
HP
F.L.A.
@ Max. NEMA Bore
RPM
Volt
Mtg. Code
P'
U
+.0000
-.0005
Sq.
Long
AB
AH
AJ
AK
BD
BF
XO
Wt.
Lbs.
4.69
4.69
5.69
5.69
5.69
6.63
5.19
5.19
6.19
6.19
6.19
7.19
0.5000
0.5000
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
1/8
1/8
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
0.75
0.75
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
4.03
4.03
4.51
4.51
4.51
5.25
1.28
1.28
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
3.75
3.75
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
3.000
3.000
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.63
4.63
5.81
5.81
5.81
6.50
1/4-20
1/4-20
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
1.66
1.66
1.56
1.56
1.56
2.25
20
21
23
26
30
42
5.69
5.69
6.63
6.63
6.19
6.19
7.19
7.19
0.6250
0.6250
0.8750
0.8750
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
4.51
4.51
5.25
5.25
2.06
2.06
2.13
2.13
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
5.81
5.81
6.50
6.50
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
—
—
—
—
22
32
35
37
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
C
N
P
B4
B4
B5
B5
B5
B5
ACR5TF-B
ADR5TF-B
DR5TF-B
ER5TF-B
FR5TF-B
GR5TF-B
50480
66970
66858
66869
66875
66881
9.31
9.31
11.38
12.38
12.88
13.31
1.15
1.15
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
B5
B5
B7
B7
FU5TF-B
GU5TF-B
HU5TF-B
JU5TF-B
50337
50338
50339
50340
11.38
12.00
12.38
13.38
1.94
1.94
2.00
2.00
Key
110/220 VAC 1ø 50 Hz
1/6
1/4
1/4
1/3
1/2
3/4
1425
1425
1425
1425
1425
1425
2.1
2.3
2.8
3.1
4.0
6.4
42CZ
42CZ
56C
56C
56C
56C
220/380/415-440 VAC 3ø 50 Hz
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/2
1425
1425
1425
1425
1.0
1.3
1.5
2.1
56C
56C
143TC
145TC
All dimensions in inches. Dimensional information for estimating purposes only.
164
Electrical Products Catalog
AC MOTORS
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
208-230/460 VAC 3ø 60 Hz
575 VAC 3ø 60 Hz
BISSC Approved Washdown
& Stainless Steel
NEMA C-Face
Three Phase
TENV-TEFC
1/2 – 5 Horsepower
1725 RPM
C
AB
KEY
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
N
P'
P
AK
®
U
BD
45°
AH
(4) BF UNC-2B
TAPPED HOLES EQUALLY
SPACED ON AJ DIA. B.C.
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
HP
F.L.A.
@ Max.
Volt
NEMA
Mtg.
Bore
Code
Catalog
Number
P’
U
+.0000
-.0005
Sq.
Lg.
AB
AH
AJ
AK
BD
BF
Wt.
Lbs.
6.63
6.63
6.63
6.63
6.63
6.63
7.88
7.88
—
—
—
—
7.19
7.19
8.50
8.50
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.8750
0.8750
0.8750
1.1250
1.1250
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
1/4
1/4
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.75
1.75
5.25
5.25
5.25
5.25
5.25
5.25
5.88
5.88
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.13
2.13
2.13
2.88
2.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
7.25
7.25
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
8.500
8.500
6.62
6.62
6.62
6.62
6.62
6.62
9.00
9.00
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
1/2-13
1/2-13
30
34
38
39
40
44
61
76
1.94
1.94
1.94
2.00
2.00
2.00
6.53
6.53
6.53
6.53
6.53
6.53
—
—
—
—
—
—
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.8750
0.8750
0.8750
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
5.44
5.44
5.44
5.44
5.44
5.44
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.13
2.13
2.13
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
6.53
6.53
6.53
6.53
6.53
6.53
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
34
38
39
39
46
49
1.94
1.94
1.94
2.00
2.00
2.00
6.53
6.53
6.53
6.53
6.53
6.53
—
—
—
—
—
—
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.8750
0.8750
0.8750
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
5.44
5.44
5.44
5.44
5.44
5.44
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.13
2.13
2.13
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
6.53
6.53
6.53
6.53
6.53
6.53
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
34
38
39
39
46
49
Item
Code
C
N
P
69105
69106
69123
69107
69110
69111
69112
69113
11.06
11.06
12.13
12.13
12.38
13.38
15.19
16.56
1.94
1.94
1.94
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.62
2.62
FUT-SS
GUT-SS
HUT-5/8-SS
HUT-SS
JUTF-SS
KUTF-SS
46488
46630
46634
46635
46636
46639
11.56
12.06
12.06
12.13
14.25
14.25
FYT-SS
GYT-SS
HYT-5/8-SS
HYT-SS
JYTF-SS
KYTF-SS
59000
59001
59003
59002
59004
59005
11.56
12.06
12.06
12.13
14.25
14.25
Key
208-230/460 VAC 3ø 60 Hz BISCC Approved
1/2
3/4
1
1
1 1/2
2
3
5
0.80
1.1
1.5
1.7
2.5
3.1
4.3
6.6
56C
56C
56C
143TC
145TC
145TC
182TC
184TC
B5
B5
B5
B7
B7
B7
B9
B9
FUT-WB-B
GUT-WB-B
HUT-WB-5/8-B
HUT-WB-B
JUTF-WB-B *
KUTF-WB-B *
LUTF-WB-B *
MUTF-WB-B *
208-230/460 VAC 3ø 60 Hz Stainless Steel
1/2
3/4
1
1
1 1/2
2
1.4
2.2
2.9
2.9
4.4
6.0
56C
56C
56C
143TC
145TC
145TC
B5
B5
B5
B7
B7
B7
575 VAC 3ø 60 Hz Stainless Steel
1/2
3/4
1
1
1 1/2
2
1.4
2.2
2.9
2.9
4.4
6.0
56C
56C
56C
143TC
145TC
145TC
B5
B5
B5
B7
B7
B7
All dimensions in inches. Dimensional information for estimating purposes only.
*TEFC, All other TENV
Electrical Products Catalog
165
F
AC MOTORS
115/230 1ø 60 Hz
208-230/460 3ø 60 Hz
Brake Motors, Open Drip Proof
NEMA C-Face
Single and Three Phase
1/4 – 5 Horsepower
1725 RPM
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
F
C
AB
KEY
N
®
XO
P
AK
U
BD
45°
AH
(4) BF UNC-2B
TAPPED HOLES EQUALLY
SPACED ON AJ DIA. B.C.
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
HP
Brake
F.L.A.
Rating @ Max.
(Lb. Ft.) VOLT
NEMA
MTG.
Bore
CODE
56C
56C
56C
56C
B5
B5
B5
B5
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
143TC
145TC
145TC
182TC
184TC
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B7
B7
B7
B9
B9
Item
Code
C
N
P
U
+.0000
-.0005
Sq.
Lg.
AB
AH
AJ
DRB-B
ERB-B
FRB-B
GRB-B
66361
66370
66379
66388
14.19
15.19
16.19
15.25
1.88
1.88
1.88
1.88
5.69
5.69
5.69
6.63
.6250
.6250
.6250
.6250
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
4.88
4.88
4.88
5.63
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
5.81
5.81
5.81
6.50
DUB-B
EUB-B
FUB-B
GUB-B
HUB-5/8-B
HUB-B
JUB-B
KUB-B
LUB-B
MUB-B
66364
66373
66382
66391
19181
66397
66403
66409
66415
66834
14.19
14.19
14.19
15.25
15.25
15.31
15.31
16.31
18.19
19.56
1.88
1.88
1.88
1.88
1.88
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.63
2.63
5.69
5.69
5.69
6.63
6.63
6.63
6.63
6.63
7.88
7.88
.6250
.6250
.6250
.6250
.6250
.8750
.8750
.8750
1.1250
1.1250
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
1/4
1/4
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.75
1.75
4.88
4.88
4.88
5.63
5.47
5.25
5.25
5.25
5.88
5.88
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.13
2.13
2.13
2.89
2.89
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
7.25
7.25
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
8.500
8.500
5.81
5.81
5.81
6.50
6.50
6.50
6.50
6.50
9.00
9.00
Catalog
Number
Key
AK
BD
XO
Wt.
Lbs.
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
2.20
2.20
2.20
2.28
34
34
38
45
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
1/2-13
1/2-13
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
26
28
31
41
31
40
43
53
73
84
BF
115/230 VAC 1ø 60 Hz
1/4
1/3
1/2
3/4
3
3
3
3
2.5
3.0
4.2
5.4
208-230/460 VAC 3ø 60 Hz
1/4
1/3
1/2
3/4
1
1
1 1/2
2
3
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
6
6
10
10
0.65
0.80
1.0
1.5
1.7
1.7
2.4
3.2
4.3
7.0
All dimensions in inches. Dimensional information for estimating purposes only.
166
Electrical Products Catalog
AC MOTORS
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
115/230 VAC 1ø 60 Hz
208-230/460 VAC 3ø 60 Hz
575 VAC 3ø 60 Hz
Brake Motors
TEFC & TENV
NEMA C-Face
Single and Three Phase
1/4 – 5 Horsepower
1725 RPM
C'
AB
KEY
N
XO
P'
P
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
AK
U
BD
®
45°
AH
(4) BF UNC-2B
TAPPED HOLES EQUALLY
SPACED ON AJ DIA. B.C.
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
HP
Brake
Rating
(lb ft)
F.L.A.
@ Max. NEMA
Volt
Mtg.
Bore
Code
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
C
N
P
P’
U
+.0000
-.0005
Sq.
Key
Lg.
AB
AH
AJ
AK
BD
BF
XO
Approx.
Wght.
(lb)
115/230 VAC 1ø 60 Hz
1/4
1/3
1/2
3/4
3
3
3
3
2.5
2.4
3.4
5.6
56C
56C
56C
56C
B5
B5
B5
B5
DRTB-B
ERTB-B
FRTB-B
GRTFB-B*
66419
66431
66440
66449
15.19
16.19
16.25
17.88
1.88
1.88
1.88
1.88
5.68
5.68
6.63
6.63
—
—
—
7.18
.6250
.6250
.6250
.6250
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
4.88
4.88
5.75
5.75
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
5.81
5.81
6.50
6.50
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
1.54
1.54
2.30
2.30
34
38
39
48
0.60
0.70
0.90
1.1
1.5
1.5
25
3.1
4.3
6.6
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
145TC
145TC
145TC
182TC
184TC
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B7
B7
B7
B9
B9
DUTB-B
EUTB-B
FUTB-B
GUTB-B
HUTB-5/8-B
HUTB-B
JUTFB-B*
KUTFB-B*
LUTFB-B*
MUTFB-B*
66425
66434
66443
66452
19182
66458
66464
66470
66474
66838
14.19
14.19
14.81
15.25
16.25
16.31
16.94
17.94
19.81
21.18
1.88
1.88
1.88
1.88
1.88
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.63
2.63
5.68
5.68
5.69
6.63
6.63
6.63
6.63
6.63
8.50
7.89
—
—
—
—
—
—
7.18
7.18
7.18
10.18
.6250
.6250
.6250
.6250
.6250
.8750
.8750
.8750
1.1250
1.1250
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
1/4
1/4
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.75
1.75
4.88
4.88
4.89
5.75
5.75
5.75
5.75
5.75
5.88
5.97
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.3
2.13
2.13
2.88
2.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
7.85
7.25
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
8.500
8.500
5.81
5.81
5.81
6.50
6.50
6.50
6.50
6.50
9.00
8.86
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
1/2-13
1/2-13
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
25
27
30
40
41
41
43
51
76
118
.40
.72
1.2
1.2
2.0
2.5
3.6
5.3
56C
56C
56C
145TC
145TC
145TC
182TC
184TC
B5
B5
B5
B7
B7
B7
B9
B9
DYTB-B
FYTB-B
GYTB-B
HYTB-B
JYTFB-B*
KYTFB-B*
LYTFB-B*
MYTFB-B*
66428
66446
66455
66461
66467
66472
66476
66840
15.25
15.19
15.19
16.31
16.94
17.94
19.81
21.18
1.88
1.88
1.88
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.63
2.63
6.63
5.81
5.81
6.63
6.63
6.63
8.50
8.50
—
—
—
—
7.18
7.18
7.18
7.18
.6250
.6250
.6250
.8750
.8750
.8750
1.1250
1.1250
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
1/4
1/4
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.75
1.75
5.63
4.88
4.88
5.75
5.75
5.75
5.88
5.88
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.13
2.13
2.13
2.88
2.88
5.08
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
7.25
7.25
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
8.500
8.500
5.81
5.81
5.81
6.50
6.50
6.50
9.00
9.00
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/9-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
1/2-13
1/2-13
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
30
30
40
51
43
51
76
112
208-230/460 VAC 3ø 60 Hz
1/4
1/3
1/2
3/4
1
1
1 1/2
2
3
5
3
3
3
3
3
3
6
6
10
25
575 VAC 3ø 60 Hz
1/4
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/2
2
3
5
3
3
3
3
6
6
10
10
*TEFC, All others TENV.
All dimensions in inches. Dimensional information for estimating purposes only.
Electrical Products Catalog
167
F
AC MOTORS
115/230 VAC 1ø 60 Hz
208-230/460 VAC 3ø 60 Hz
Explosion Proof
NEMA C-Face
Single and Three Phase
1/4-5 Horsepower
1725 RPM
CONTINUOUS DUTY
F
1.0 SERVICE FACTOR
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
CLASS I GROUP D
CLASS II GROUPS F & G
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
C'
AB
KEY
N
P'
®
P
AK
U
BD
45°
AH
(4) BF UNC-2B
TAPPED HOLES EQUALLY
SPACED ON AJ DIA. B.C.
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
HP
F.L.A.
@ Max. NEMA
Volt
Mtg.
Bore Catalog
Code Number
P'
U
+.0000
-.0005
Sq.
Lg.
AB
AH
AJ
AK
BD
BF
Wt.
Lbs.
6.68
6.68
6.75
6.75
7.19
7.19
7.19
7.19
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
6.75
6.75
6.75
6.75
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
6.50
6.50
6.50
6.50
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
42
42
49
54
6.68
6.68
6.68
6.68
6.68
6.68
6.88
6.75
7.88
7.88
7.19
6.20
7.19
7.19
6.20
7.19
7.19
7.19
8.49
8.82
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.6250
0.8750
0.8750
0.8750
1.1250
1.1250
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
1/4
1/4
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.75
1.75
6.75
6.50
6.75
6.75
6.50
6.92
6.92
6.92
7.52
7.52
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.06
2.13
2.13
2.13
2.88
2.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
7.25
7.25
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
8.500
8.500
6.50
6.50
6.50
6.50
6.50
6.50
6.50
6.50
8.98
8.98
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
1/2-13
1/2-13
42
28
42
43
44
39
43
50
81
111
Item
Code
C'
N
P
DRX-B
ERX-B
FRX-B
GRX-B
66292
66304
66313
66322
14.38
14.38
14.38
15.25
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
DUX-B
EUX-B
FUX-B
GUX-B
HUX-5/8-B
HUX-B
JUX-B
KUX-B
LUX-B
MUX-B
66298
66307
66316
66325
19180
66334
66343
66349
66353
66357
14.38
13.22
14.38
14.38
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
1.94
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.63
2.63
KEY
115/230 VAC 1ø 60 Hz
1/4
1/3
1/2
3/4
2.5
3.0
3.8
5.3
56C
56C
56C
56C
B5
B5
B5
B5
208-230/460 VAC 3ø 60 Hz
1/4
1/3
1/2
3/4
1
1
1-1/2
2
3
5
0.65
0.80
1.0
1.5
1.8
1.7
2.5
3.1
4.3
6.5
56C
56C
56C
56C
56C
143TC
145TC
145TC
182TC
184TC
B5
B5
B5
B5
B5
B7
B7
B7
B9
B9
17.50
All dimensions in inches. Dimensional information for estimating purposes only.
168
Electrical Products Catalog
AC MOTORS
115/230 VAC 1ø 60 Hz
208-230/460 VAC 3ø 60 Hz
TEFC
Rigid Base
Single and Three Phase
1/2 – 50 Horsepower
1725 RPM
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
F
C
KEY
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
M
P
N
AB
V
XO
O
®
P'
U
D
H
HOLE
F
F
E
E
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
HP
RPM
F.L.A.
@ Max. NEMA
Volt
MTG
N
O
P
P′
U
+.0000
-.0005
3.63
3.69
4.00
4.00
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
6.34
6.88
6.81
6.81
5.68
6.63
6.63
6.63
6.13
7.18
7.18
7.18
.6250
.6250
.8750
.8750
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.88
1.88
2.25
2.25
4.88
5.75
5.75
5.75
1.50
2.25
2.25
2.25
27
35
39
48
.34(S) 3.63
.34(S) 3.63
.34(S) 4.00
.34(S) 4.00
.34(S) 4.00
.41
4.19
.41
4.19
.41
5.75
.41
5.75
.53
8.06
.53
8.94
.53
9.44
.53
10.29
.66
10.31
.66
11.06
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
3.56
3.56
3.88
3.88
4.31
4.31
4.75
4.75
5.44
5.44
6.38
6.38
6.88
6.81
6.88
8.44
8.44
10.06
10.06`
12.18
12.88
15.56
14.44
16.25
16.50
5.68
5.68
6.63
6.63
6.63
7.88
7.88
9.56
9.56
12.94
12.94
14.63
14.63
17.38
17.38
6.13
6.13
7.18
7.18
7.18
8.50
8.50
10.18
10.18
10.62
13.25
15.00
15.00
16.94
16.94
.6250
.6250
.8750
.8750
.8750
1.1250
1.1250
1.3750
1.3750
1.6250
1.6250
1.8750
1.8750
2.1250
2.1250
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
1/4
1/4
5/16
5/16
3/8
3/8
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.75
1.75
2.38
2.38
3.00
3.00
3.63
3.63
4.25
4.25
1.88
1.88
2.25
2.25
2.25
2.75
2.75
3.38
3.38
4.00
4.00
4.63
4.63
5.25
5.25
4.88
4.88
5.75
5.75
5.75
5.88
5.88
7.38
7.38
8.86
9.50
12.63
13.12
14.62
14.13
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
––
23
26
32
41
42
55
75
99
127
244
269
359
433
583
526
Catalog
Number
Item
Code
C
D
E
F
H*
BFRTF-B
BGRTF-B
BHRTF-B
BJRTF-B
66530
66536
66542
66548
11.95
13.31
13.31
14.19
3.50
3.50
3.50
3.50
2.44
2.44
2.75
2.75
1.50
1.50
2.00
2.00
.34(S)
.34(S)
.34(S)
.34(S)
BFUTF-B
BGUTF-B
BHUTF-B
BJUTF-B
BKUTF-B
BLUTF-B
BMUTF-B
BNUTF-B
BPUTF-B
BRUTF-B
BSUTF-B
BTUTF-B
BUUTF-B
BVUTF-B
BWUTF-B
66533
66538
66544
66550
66554
61314
61316
61318
61320
66886
61341
61343
61345
61347
61349
11.38
12.38
12.38
13.31
13.38
15.18
16.56
17.94
19.06
21.09
23.18
27.28
27.76
30.25
30.25
3.60
3.50
3.50
3.50
3.50
4.50
4.50
5.25
5.25
6.25
6.25
7.00
7.00
8.00
8.00
2.44
2.44
2.75
2.75
2.75
3.75
3.75
4.25
4.25
5.00
5.00
5.50
5.50
6.25
6.25
1.50
1.50
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.25
2.25
2.75
2.75
4.13
5.00
4.75
5.50
5.25
6.00
M
Key
SQ
Long
V
AB
XO
Wt.
(Lbs.)
115/230 VAC 1ø 60 Hz
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/2
1725
1725
1725
1725
3.7
5.6
6.2
8.0
56
56
143T
145T
208-230/460 VAC 3ø 60 Hz
1/2
3/4
1
1 1/2
2
3
5
7 1/2
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1750
1750
1750
1750
1760
1760
1760
1760
1760
1760
1.0
1.5
1.7
2.5
3.1
4.3
6.6
10.0
13.0
19.6
26.0
30.0
37.0
46.5
62.0
56
56
143T
145T
145T
182T
184T
213T
215T
254T
256T
284T
286T
324T
326T
All dimensions in inches. Dimensional information for estimating purposes only.
*(S) Slotted (Dimension is Width)
Electrical Products Catalog
169
AC MOTORS
Totally Enclosed
Nonventilated
Inverter Duty
1/3–10 Horsepower
Boston Gear’s Inverter Drive motors are specifically designed for today’s tough
adjustable speed applications. The design uses a rugged ribbed (for cooling) cast
iron frame*, endplates and connection box. The motors feature a cast iron base and
C-face mounting. Locked bearings allow for vertical wall and horizontal mountings
without modifications. These motors are fully insulated (Class H) for protection
against voltage spikes which could cause phase to phase or turn to turn shorts. Also
included are normally closed thermal protectors for overheating protection. These
motors are offered at 1800 RPM base speed in a TENV or TEBC enclosure. Also
available 1150 RPM Base Speed in a TEBC Enclosure.
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
F
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
*1 HP and above
C
AB
AH
BB
GREASER & RELIEF
EACH END
45°
KEY
45°
®
(4) BF UNC-2B
TAPPED HOLES EQUALLY
SPACED ON AJ DIA. B.C.
AK
BD
O
U
D
E
AUTO. DRAIN
EACH END
H. HOLES
E
BA
2F
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER
HP
F.L.A.
RPM @ @ Max.
60 Hz
Volt
NEMA
Mtg.
Bore
Code
Catalog
Number
C
D
E
B5
B5
B5
B7
B7
B9
B9
B11
B13
B13
EUT-ID-B
FUT-ID-B
GUT-ID-B
HUT-ID-B
JUT-ID-B
KUT-ID-B
LUT-ID-B
MUT-ID-B
NUT-ID-B
PUT-ID-B
10.25
10.88
11.50
11.82
11.82
14.86
14.86
18.07
21.67
21.67
3.50
3.50
3.50
3.50
3.50
4.50
4.50
5.25
6.25
6.25
2.44
2.44
2.44
2.75
2.75
3.75
3.75
4.25
5.00
5.00
Totally Enclosed, Non-Ventilated
1/3
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/2
2
3
5
7-1/2
10
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1725
1750
1760
1760
1760
0.50
0.65
0.65
1.6
2.1
2.9
4.0
6.7
10.0
12.8
56C
56C
56C
143TC
143TC
182TC
184TC
213TC
254TC
256TC
O
U
+.0000
–.0005
Sq
Key
Long
AB
AH
AJ
AK
BA
BB
BD
BF
Wt.
Lbs.
.34(S)
.34(S)
.34(S)
.38
.38
.41
.41
.41
.53
.53
6.34
6.34
6.88
7.59
7.59
9.23
9.23
10.99
12.87
12.87
.6250
.6250
.6250
.8750
.8750
1.1250
1.1250
1.3750
1.6250
1.6250
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
3/16
1/4
1/4
5/16
3/8
3/8
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.75
1.75
2.38
2.88
2.88
4.51
4.51
5.25
6.33
6.33
7.08
7.08
8.61
9.42
9.42
1.94
1.94
1.94
2.00
2.00
2.62
2.62
3.12
3.75
3.75
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
5.88
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
4.500
8.500
8.500
8.500
8.500
8.500
2.69
2.69
2.69
2.38
2.38
3.38
3.38
4.25
4.75
4.75
.12
.12
.12
.12
.12
.25
.25
.25
.25
.25
5.81
5.81
6.50
6.50
6.50
9.00
9.00
9.06
9.09
9.09
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
1/2-13
1/2-13
1/2-13
1/2-13
1/2-13
24
26
42
54
63
105
124
170
204
265
230/460-3-60 VAC
All dimensions in inches. (S) Slotted (Dimension is width).
Dimensional information for estimating purposes only.
170
H
2F
Electrical Products Catalog
3.00
3.00
3.00
4.00
4.00
4.50
5.50
5.50
8.25
10.00
AC MOTORS
208-230/460 VAC 3ø 60 Hz
Inverter Duty
Blower Cooled
NEMA C-Face
1–75 Horsepower
1150 & 1725 RPM
F
C
AB
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
AH
CONN. LABEL
(FAN LEADS)
BB
GREASER & RELIEF
EACH END
45°
KEY
45°
(4) BF UNC-2B
TAPPED HOLES EQUALLY
SPACED ON AJ DIA. B.C.
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
AK
O
BD
U
D
E
AUTO. DRAIN
EACH END
H. HOLES
BA
2F
EP086A
®
E
ORDER BY CATALOG NUMBER OR ITEM CODE
HP
F.L.A.
RPM @ @Max. NEMA
60 Hz
Volt
Mtg.
Bore
Code
Catalog
Number
C
D
E
B7
B7
B7
B9
B7
B9
B9
B11
B9
B11
B11
B13
B11
B13
B13
*
B13
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
HUBC-ID-B
HUBC-11-ID-B
JUBC-ID-B
JUBC-11-ID-B
KUBC-ID-B
KUBC-11-ID-B
LUBC-ID-B
LUBC-11-ID-B
MUBC-ID-B
MUBC-11-ID-B
NUBC-ID-B
NUBC-11-ID-B
PUBC-ID-B
PUBC-11-ID-B
RUBC-ID-B
RUBC-11-ID-B
SUBC-ID-B
SUBC-11-ID-B
TUBC-ID-B
TUBC-11-ID-B
UUBC-ID-B
UUBC-11-ID-B
VUBC-ID-B
VUBC-11-ID-B
WUBC-ID-B
WUBC-11-ID-B
XUBC-ID-B
YUBC-ID-B
18.65
18.65
18.65
21.73
18.65
21.73
21.73
25.39
21.73
25.39
25.39
29.29
25.39
29.29
29.29
32.82
29.29
32.82
32.82
35.23
32.82
35.23
35.23
37.13
35.23
37.13
37.13
37.13
3.50
3.50
3.50
4.50
3.50
4.50
4.50
5.25
4.50
5.25
5.25
6.25
5.25
6.25
6.25
7.00
6.25
7.00
7.00
8.00
7.00
8.00
8.00
9.00
8.00
9.00
9.00
9.00
2.75
2.75
2.75
3.75
2.75
3.75
3.75
4.25
3.75
4.25
4.25
5.00
4.25
5.00
5.00
5.50
5.00
5.50
5.50
6.25
5.50
6.25
6.25
7.00
6.25
7.00
7.00
7.00
Totally Enclosed, Blower Cooled
1
1
1 1/2
1 1/2
2
2
3
3
5
5
7 1/2
7 1/2
10
10
15
15
20
20
25
25
30
30
40
40
50
50
60
75
1725
1150
1725
1140
1750
1160
1760
1160
1760
1160
1760
1170
1760
1170
1760
1170
1780
1170
1780
1180
1780
1180
1780
1180
1780
1180
1780
1780
1.7
1.5
2.5
2.6
3.1
2.8
4.5
5.0
6.8
7.7
9.8
10.2
12.7
14.0
18.0
19.5
24.0
26.0
30.4
29.8
35.5
36.0
46.5
47.0
57.5
59.0
71.0
86.0
143TC
145TC
145TC
182TC
145TC
184TC
184TC
213TC
184TC
215TC
213TC
254TC
215TC
256TC
256TC
284TC
256TC
286TC
284TC
324TC
286TC
326TC
324TC
364TC
326TC
365TC
364TC
365TC
H
O
U
+.0000
–.0005
Sq
Long
AB
AH
AJ
AK
BA
BB
BD
BF
Wt.
Lbs.
.38
.38
.38
.41
.38
.41
.41
.41
.41
.41
.41
.53
.41
.53
.53
.56
.53
.56
.56
.65
.56
.65
.65
.66
.65
.66
.66
.66
7.59
7.59
7.59
9.23
7.59
9.23
9.23
10.99
9.23
10.99
10.99
12.87
10.99
12.87
12.87
14.44
12.87
14.44
14.44
16.23
14.44
16.23
16.23
18.38
16.23
18.38
18.38
18.38
.8750
.8750
.8750
1.1250
.8750
1.1250
1.1250
1.3750
1.1250
1.3750
1.3750
1.6250
1.3750
1.6250
1.6250
1.8750
1.6250
1.8750
1.8750
2.1250
1.8750
2.1230
2.1250
2.3750
2.1250
2.3750
2.3750
2.3750
3/16
3/16
3/16
1/4
3/16
1/4
1/4
5/16
1/4
5/16
5/16
3/8
5/16
3/8
3/8
1/2
3/8
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
1/2
5/8
1/2
5/8
5/8
5/8
1.38
1.38
1.38
1.75
1.38
1.75
1.75
2.38
1.75
2.38
2.38
2.88
2.38
2.88
2.88
3.25
2.88
3.25
3.25
3.88
3.25
3.88
3.88
4.25
3.88
4.25
4.25
4.25
6.33
6.33
6.33
7.08
6.33
7.08
7.08
8.61
7.08
8.61
8.61
9.42
8.61
9.42
9.42
12.96
9.42
12.96
12.96
14.46
12.96
14.46
14.46
14.80
14.46
14.80
14.80
14.80
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.63
2.00
2.63
2.63
3.12
2.63
3.12
3.12
3.75
3.12
3.75
3.75
4.38
3.75
4.38
4.38
5.00
4.38
5.00
5.00
5.62
5.00
5.62
5.62
5.62
5.88
5.88
5.88
7.25
5.88
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
7.25
9.00
7.25
9.00
9.00
11.00
9.00
11.00
11.00
11.00
11.00
11.00
11.00
11.00
4.50
4.50
4.50
8.50
4.50
8.50
8.50
8.50
8.50
8.50
8.50
8.50
8.50
8.50
8.50
10.50
8.50
10.50
10.50
12.50
10.50
12.50
12.50
12.50
12.50
12.50
12.50
12.50
2.38
2.38
2.38
3.38
2.25
3.38
3.38
4.25
3.38
4.25
4.25
4.75
4.25
4.75
4.75
4.75
4.75
4.75
4.75
5.25
4.75
5.25
5.25
5.88
5.25
5.88
5.88
5.88
.12
.12
.12
.25
.12
.25
.25
.25
.25
.25
.25
.25
.25
.25
.25
.25
.25
.25
.25
.25
.25
.25
.25
.25
.25
.25
.25
.25
6.50
6.50
6.50
9.00
6.50
9.00
9.00
9.06
9.00
9.06
9.06
9.09
9.06
9.09
9.09
11.21
9.09
11.21
11.21
13.40
11.21
13.40
13.40
12.89
13.40
12.89
12.89
12.89
3/8-16
3/8-16
3/8-16
1/2-13
3/8-16
1/2-13
1/2-13
1/2-13
1/2-13
1/2-13
1/2-13
1/2-13
1/2-13
1/2-13
1/2-13
1/2-13
1/2-13
1/2-13
1/2-13
5/8-11
1/2-13
5/8-11
5/8-11
5/8-11
5/8-11
5/8-11
5/8-11
5/8-11
58
60
61
96
67
100
113
157
132
182
180
235
210
300
275
450
311
459
408
571
470
612
547
747
670
835
797
869
2F
Key
230/460-3-60 VAC
4.00
5.00
5.00
4.50
5.00
5.50
5.50
5.50
5.50
7.00
5.50
8.25
7.00
10.00
10.00
9.50
10.00
11.00
9.50
10.50
11.00
12.00
10.50
11.25
12.00
12.25
11.25
12.25
All dimensions in inches. Dimensional information for estimating purposes only.
*Not standard BG mounting.
Electrical Products Catalog
171
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
NOTES
F
172
Electrical Products Catalog
WASHDOWN PRODUCTS
Boston Gear has developed a wide range of power transmission products specifically for the food and beverage industry. Working
with design and maintenance personnel we have designed certain mechanical, electrical and electronic products to meet their
harsh washdown applications.
A COMPLETE VARIABLE SPEED
WASHDOWN POWER DRIVE SYSTEM
A.C. MOTOR
CONTROL
600 SERIES
A.C. MOTOR
SENSOR
700 SERIES
SENSOR
CLUTCH
D.C. MOTOR
BRAKE
200 SERIES
D.C. MOTOR
CONTROL
Mechanical • Electrical • Electronic
SPEED REDUCERS
DC CONTROLLERS
AC BRAKE
700 Series — Stainless Bost-Kleen™
BETA II/Beta Plus DC Controllers
Double C-Face AC Brakes
BISSC Certified
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
BRAKE
• Durable stainless steel epoxy
coating system utilizes a unique
stainless steel leafing pigment
• USDA Approved for use in food
processing and handling industry
where incidental food contact may
occur
• BISSC Certified
• Washable and scrubbable
• Corrosion resistant
• Prelubricated with USDA
Approved Mobil SHC634
synthetic oil
• Double lipped oil seals
• Excluder seal on output shaft
• Limited lifetime warranty
• Available up to 25 HP in 1” to 6”
Center distances
• NEMA 4 washdown enclosure
• 1/12 to 2 horsepower range
• Reconnectable 115/230 VAC
input
• Run/Stop/Job & Forward/Reverse
operation
• Rugged, compact design
• Durable non-absorbent, non-toxic
white epoxy finish, USDA
approved
• NEMA 4 washdown duty AC
inverters also available
• Standard torque ranges from 3 to
10 lb-ft
• Available with DC voltage coils
• Automatic reset, manual brake
release
• Rated for continuous duty
• Available from stock
Electrical Products Catalog
173
G
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
WASHDOWN PRODUCTS
800 SERIES
700 SERIES
AC Motors (pg. 165)
• 1/2 – 5 Horsepower
• 230/460-3-60 VAC
• BISSC Certified
• Durable White Epoxy Finish
• Totally Enclosed Design
• NEMA C-Face Mounting
• Weep Holes
800 Series Bost-Kleen™*
• Durable non-absorbent, non-toxic
white (BK) or stainless epoxy
finish (SBK)
• Washable & scrubbable
• Includes all the standard 800
features
• Single, double and triple reduction
ratios from 1:5:1 to 250:1
• Helical gearing
• Standard NEMA C-face or
projecting input shaft
configurations
Bost-Kleen™*
• Boston Gear’s proven 700 Series
quality
• Limited lifetime warranty
• Pressure relief valves standard
• Double lipped oil seals
• Available from stock up to 25 hp
in 1" to 6" center distances
• Single Reduction Ratios 5:1 to
60:1
• Double Reduction Ratios 100:1 to
1800:1
DC Motors (pg. 150)
• 1/4 – 3/4 Horsepower
• 90 & 180 VAC
• BISSC Certified
• Durable White Epoxy
• TENV
• NEMA C-Face Mounting
• Permanent Magnet
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
G
AC/DC MOTORS
AC MOTORS
200 SERIES
Stainless Steel AC Motors
• AC Motors 1/2-2 horsepower
range
• All surfaces of the end bells and
conduit box are hard anodized
and processed with a USDA
approved resin-bound
Fluorocarbon Duplex Coating
Process to enhance chemical and
corrosion resistance
• Shaft seals, slingers and one-way
stainless steel drains to retard
entrance of contaminants and
water into the motor
• Bearings are double sealed and
prelubricated with moisture
resistant Shell Dolium R lubricant
• Construction is CSA Certified for
safety and energy efficiency
verification programs
• NEMA C-face mounting
200 Series – Bost-Kleen™**
• Washable & Scrubbable
• Durable, non-absorbent, non-toxic
white epoxy finish, USDA
approved
• Corrosion resistant
• 1/4 to 20 horsepower range
• Single and double reduction ratios
– 4:1 to 24:1
• Standard NEMA C-face and
projecting input shaft
configurations
• Horizontal and vertical mounting
kits
• Projecting and hollow output
shafts
BISSC Certified
• All single reduction 700 series
Quill type & nonflanged unit
• Cast iron horizontal base
standard
• Pre-lubricated standard with
SHC634 synthetic oil, USDA
approved
• Smooth flat machined surfaces to
resist dirt build-up. Bolt heads and
nuts are exposed so
contaminants can easily be
removed to simplify washdown
• Durable, non-absorbent, non-toxic
white epoxy finish, USDA
approved
• Single Reduction Ratios 5:1 to
60:1
600A SERIES
600A Series – Bost-Kleen™**
• Washable & Scrubbable
• Durable non-absorbent, non-toxic
white epoxy finish
• Single, double and triple
reductions 1.6:1 to 160:1 ratios
• Helical gearing
• Output flange available
*Located in Worm Gear Drives Catalog
**Located in Helical and Bevel Gear Drives Catalog
174
Electrical Products Catalog
APPLICATION ENGINEERING
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
AC & DC Controllers
ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVES –
WHAT THEY ARE, HOW THEY WORK
1.OPERATOR CONTROL
STATION – THE BOSS
The primary function of any adjustable speed drive is to
control the speed, torque, acceleration, deceleration and
direction of rotation of a machine. Unlike constant speed
systems, the adjustable speed drive permits the selection of
an infinite number of speeds within its operating range.
Allows the operator to start
and stop the drive controller
by push buttons or switches,
and set the motor speed by
turning a potentiometer to the
desired dial setting. Operator
controls may be integrated
into the controller or mounted
remotely from the drive
controller.
Most multi-purpose production machines benefit from
adjustable speed control, since frequently their speeds must
change to optimize the machine process or adapt it to various
tasks for improved product quality, production speed or safety.
Lathes and other machine tools run small diameter work
pieces at high speed and large diameter pieces at low speeds
to optimize the feed rate into the cutting tool. A printing press
is operated at the speed that produces the best quality
product, which may vary greatly with the weight and coating of
paper, and the characteristics of the inks used. Also, the
controlled acceleration provided by an adjustable speed drive
allows the press to accelerate smoothly to prevent breaking
the web of paper. A pump supplying water in a high rise
building may run at very slow speeds at 3 o’clock AM to
maintain system pressure, but be called upon at 3 o’clock PM
to run at high speeds to provide high flow rates necessitated
by water usage by the inhabitants.
While early types of adjustable speed drives based upon
mechanical and hydraulic principles still remain in limited
usage, the overwhelming choice today for industrial
applications is the electrical adjustable speed drive. No other
type offers the combined benefits of high performance, high
efficiency, low maintenance, versatility and moderate initial
cost. Electrical adjustable speed drives are offered in a
number of basic types, but the two most versatile for general
purpose applications and therefore the most common, are
direct current (DC drives) and adjustable frequency (AC
drives) as manufactured by Boston Gear. Electrical adjustable
speed drives typically consist of three principle elements, as
shown by the system block diagram in Figure 1.
2. DRIVE CONTROLLER –
THE BRAINS
Converts the fixed voltage
and frequency of the alternating current (AC) plant power
source into an adjustable
power output to control the
drive motor over a wide
speed range. The output is
established by the speed
control potentiometer. The
controller includes sensing
circuits to hold or regulate the
motor at the desired speed with variations in the source voltage
and changes in motor load. The controller also includes
protective circuitry and devices to prevent damage from
overloads, power source transients and output power faults.
Translates electrical energy
into mechanical motion. The
output is a shaft rotation
(RPM), which varies in proportion to the power applied
by the drive controller. The
motor shaft is normally
coupled to a gear reducer or other mechanical power transmission device to further reduce the motor speed to a level
useable by the driven machine.
3
2
AC
DRIVE
CONTROLLER
POWER
H
3. DRIVE MOTOR –
THE MUSCLE
REGULATED
POWER
OUTPUT
DRIVE
MOTOR
DRIVEN
MACHINE
SPEED & TORQUE
FEEDBACK
1
OPERATOR
CONTROLS
FIGURE 1.
Electrical Products Catalog
175
APPLICATION ENGINEERING
AC & DC Controllers
DC DRIVES – PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
FIELD REGULATOR
OR SUPPLY
POWER CONVERTER
AC
MOTOR
ARMATURE
DC OUTPUT
POWER
SOURCE
FIRING
CIRCUIT
MOTOR
FIELD
CURRENT (TORQUE)
FEEDBACK
VOLTAGE (SPEED)
FEEDBACK
REGULATOR
OPERATOR’S
CONTROL
STATION
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
DC drives, because of their simplicity, ease of application,
reliability and favorable cost remain the backbone of industrial
applications. A typical adjustable speed drive using a silicon
controller rectifier (SCR) power conversion section, common
for this type unit, is shown in Figure 2. The SCR, (also termed
a thyristor) power converter converts the fixed voltage
alternating current (AC) of the power source to an adjustable
voltage, controlled direct current (DC) output which is applied
to the armature of a DC motor.
H
FIGURE 2. TYPICAL DC DRIVE
0
90
180
270
360
SCR’s provide a controllable
power output by “phase angle
(+)
control”, so called because the
firing angle (a point in time where
(–)
the SCR is triggered into
conduction) is synchronized with
the phase rotation of the AC power
25% POWER
source. If the device is triggered
(+)
early in half cycle, maximum
power is delivered to the motor;
(–)
late triggering in the half cycle
provides minimum power, as
illustrated by Figure 3. The effect
50% POWER
is similar to a very high speed
switch, capable of being turned on
(+)
and “conducted” off at an infinite
number of points within each half
(–)
cycle. This occurs at a rate of 60
times a second on a 60 Hz line, to
100% POWER
deliver a precise amount of power
to the motor. The efficiency of this
form of power control is extremely FIGURE 3. TRIGGERING
high since a very small amount of POINTS FOR VARIOUS
POWER OUTPUTS
triggering energy can enable the
SCR to control a great deal of output power.
reversing contactor or manual switch permits reversing the
controller output polarity and therefore the direction of rotation
of the motor armature as illustrated in Quadrant III. In both
cases torque and rotational direction are the same.
Regenerative DC Drives–Regenerative adjustable speed
drives, also known as four-quadrant drives, are capable of
controlling not only the speed and direction of motor rotation,
but also the direction of motor torque. This is illustrated by
Figure 4.
The term regenerative describes the ability of the drive under
braking conditions to convert the mechanical energy of the
motor and connected load into electrical energy which is
returned (or regenerated) to the AC power source.
When the drive is operating in Quadrants I and III, both motor
rotation and torque are in the same direction and it functions
as a conventional nonregenerative unit. The unique
characteristics of a regenerative drive are apparent only in
Quadrants II and IV. In these quadrants, the motor torque
opposes the direction of motor rotation which provides a
controlled braking or retarding force. A high performance
regenerative drive, is able to switch rapidly from motoring to
braking modes while simultaneously controlling the direction of
motor rotation.
A regenerative DC drive is essentially two coordinated DC
drives integrated within a common package. One drive
operates in Quadrants I and IV, the other operates in
Quadrants II and III. Sophisticated electronic control circuits
provide interlocking between the two opposing drive sections
for reliable control of the direction of motor torque and/or
direction of rotation.
QUADRANT II
MOTOR ROTATION
TORQUE
QUADRANT III
ARROWS
OPPOSITE DIRECTION
BRAKING (HOLDING)
FIGURE 4.
TABLE 1. COMPARISON OF NONREGENERATIVE VS.
REGENERATIVE DC DRIVE CAPABILITIES
Braking
DC DRIVE TYPES
176
Electrical Products Catalog
QUADRANT IV
NOTE:
ARROWS
SAME DIRECTION
MOTORING (PULLING)
Power delivered to motor
Nonregenerative DC Drives–Nonregenerative DC drives are
the most conventional type in common usage. In their most
basic form they are able to control motor speed and torque in
one direction only as shown by Quadrant I in Figure 4. The
addition of an electromechanical (magnetic) armature
QUADRANT I
Reversing
Simplicity
Efficiency
and
Speed
Range
Nonregenerative
No inherent braking capability. Requires
the addition of a dynamic braking circuit
which dissipates the braking energy as
heat in a resistor. Braking effort is exponential with initial high torque which
reduces to zero at zero speed. Braking
circuits are rated for stopping only, not
continuous hold back, or as a holding
brake.
No inherent reversing capability. Requires
the addition of reversing contactors or a
switch to reverse the polarity of DC
voltage applied to the motor. Normally
rated for occasional reversing.
The least complex and least expensive
form of electronic adjustable speed motor
control.
Regenerative
Inherent electronically by regeneration
whereby the kinetic energy of the motor
and driven machine is restored to the AC
power source. Can be regulated to
control the braking torque down to, and
at zero speed. Typically capable of
continuous braking torque for hold back
applications.
An inherent capability. Motor polarity is
reversed electronically with no contacts
to arc, burn or wear. Desirable for
applications requiring frequent reversals.
More complex since it includes double
the nonregenerative circuitry.
Controller efficiency up to 99%, complete drive with motor 87%. Speed range up to
50:1 without a feedback tachometer, 200:1 and greater with a tachometer.
APPLICATION ENGINEERING
AC & DC Controllers
BETAplus
VEplus
VED
VERG
NOTES:
Full Converter
4 SCR
Nonregenerative
8 SCR
Regenerative(1)
(1)
(2)
1.05
240
150
460
5-1000
500
300
230
5-10
240
150
460
5-20
500
300
360
180
K
1.35
120
115,230
1-3
90, 180
50,100
100,200
100,200
–
–
120
115,230
1-5
90,180
100,200
Single-phase: others are three-phase
Ripple frequency quoted for 60 Hz power source. 50 Hz
power sources result in ripple currents 20%, higher than
those for a 60 Hz source under the same operating
conditions. The higher ripple produces additional heating
which may be compensated by reducing the continuous load
capability below base speed by approximately 5%. Form
factor is at base speed, full load. Form factor of the current is
the ratio of the rms current to the average current. For pure
DC, such as a battery, the form factor is 1.0. For motors
operated on rectified power the AC ripple content of the
rectified current causes additional heating which increases as
the square of the form factor. A motor is suitable for
continuous operation of the form factor stamped on the data
plate at rated load and rated speed. Actual motor heating
when run from a half-wave converter should be determined
by test, and is the responsibility of the purchaser.
DC MOTOR CONTROL CHARACTERISTICS
A shunt-wound motor is a direct-current motor in which the
field windings and the armature may be connected in parallel
across a constant-voltage supply. In adjustable speed
applications, the field is connected across a constant-voltage
supply and the armature is connected across an independent
adjustable-voltage supply. Permanent magnet motors have
similar control characteristics but differ primarily by their
integral permanent magnet field excitation.
The speed (N) of a DC motor is proportional to its armature
voltage; the torque (T) is proportional to armature current, and
the two quantities are independent, as illustrated in Figure 5.
Armature Controlled DC Drives – Certain applications
require constant horsepower over a specified speed range.
The screened area, under the horsepower curve in Figure 6,
illustrates the limits of constant horsepower operation for
armature controlled DC drives. As an example, the motor
could provide constant horsepower between 50% speed and
100% speed, or a 2:1 range. However, the 50% speed point
coincides with the 50% horsepower point. Any constant
horsepower application may be easily calculated by multiplying
the desired horsepower by the ratio of the speed range over
which horsepower must remain constant. If 5 HP is required
over a 2:1 range, an armature only controlled drive rated for 10
(5 x 2) horsepower would be required.
Table 3 provides a convenient listing of horsepower output at
various operating speeds for constant torque drives.
Field Controlled DC Drives – Another characteristic of a
shunt-wound DC motor is that a reduction in field voltage to less
than the design rating will result in an increase in speed for a
given armature voltage. It is important to note, however, that
this results in a higher armature current for a given motor load.
A simple method of accomplishing this is by inserting a resistor
in series with the field voltage source. This may be useful for
trimming to an ideal motor speed for the application. An
optional, more sophisticated method uses a variable voltage
field source as shown by Figure 6. This provides coordinated
automatic armature and field voltage control for extended speed
range and constant HP applications. The motor is armature
voltage controlled for constant torque-variable HP operation to
base speed where it is transferred to field control for constant
HP-variable torque operation to motor maximum speed.
100
TORQUE
75
50
HORSEPOWER
TO
RQ
UE
ORQUE
Ratiopax Semiconverter
BETA II 2 SCR,
DCX
3 Diode(1)
D
5-125
ER
Semiconverter
3 SCR, 4 Diode
1.01
230
CONSTANT HORSEPOWER APPLICATIONS
W
P25
C
Field
VDC
EP
O
Full Converter
6 SCR
Nonregenerative
12 SCR
Regenerative
Motor Ratings
NEMA Form(2) Ripple(2) Source HP Armature
Code Factor
Hz
VAC Range
VDC
RS
P40
P60
DP60
DP60RG
®
25
0
50
100
150
200
% RATED BASE SPEED
CONSTANT TORQUE-VARIABLE HORSEPOWER
(RATED FIELD EXCITATION)
CONSTANT HORSEPOWER-VARIABLE TORQUE
(WEAKENED FIELD EXCITATION)
FIGURE 6.
AC DRIVES – PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
MOTOR RPM (N)
MOTOR TORQUE (T)
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Series
Converter
Type
Armature voltage controlled DC drives are constant torque
drives. They are capable of providing rated torque at any
speed between zero and the base (rated) speed of the motor
as shown by Figure 6. Horsepower varies in direct proportion
to speed, and 100% rated horsepower is developed only at
100% rated motor speed with rated torque.
HO
TABLE 2.
Rectified Power Source
CONSTANT TORQUE APPLICATIONS
% RATED HORSEPOWER & T
Converter Types – The power conversion or rectified power
section of a DC drive is commonly called the converter. The
individual characteristics of the various converter types used in
standard industrial applications have had a definite influence in
the design of compatible DC motors as shown in Table 2.
ARM. VOLTS (Ea)
ARM. CURRENT (Ia)
FIGURE 5. DC MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
Adjustable frequency AC motor drive controllers frequently
termed inverters are typically more complex than DC
controllers since they must perform two power section
functions, that of conversion of the AC line power source to DC
and finally an inverter changes the DC to a coordinated
adjustable frequency and voltage output to the AC motor. The
appeal of the adjustable frequency drive is based upon the
simplicity and reliability of the AC drive motor, which has no
brushes, commutator or other parts that require routine
(Continued)
Electrical Products Catalog
177
H
APPLICATION ENGINEERING
AC & DC Controllers
TABLE 3. HORSEPOWER OUTPUT AT VARIOUS MOTOR SPEEDS WITH 1750 RPM BASE SPEED CONSTANT TORQUE DRIVES
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Rated HP
At 1750 RPM
Base Speed
1/6
H
Rated Torque
At All Speeds
Lb. -Ft. (1)
0.50
1/4
0.75
1/3
1.00
1/2
1.50
3/4
2.25
1
3.00
1-1/2
4.50
2
6.00
3
9.00
5
15.00
7-1/2
22.50
10
30.00
15
45.00
20
60.00
25
75.00
30
90.00
40
120.00
50
150.00
60
180.00
75
225.00
100
300.00
125
375.00
Percent of Base Speed
HP Ratings at Various Motor RPM
1575
.150
1400
.133
.225
.200
.300
.267
.450
.400
.675
.600
.900
.800
1.350
1.200
1.800
1.600
2.700
2.400
4.500
4.000
6.750
6.000
9.000
8.000
13.500 12.000
18.000 16.000
22.500 20.000
27.000 24.000
36.000 32.000
45.000 40.000
54.000 48.000
67.500 60,000
90.000 80.000
112.500 100.000
90
80
1225
.117
1050
.100
875
.083
700
.067
525
.050
350
.033
175
.017
87.5
.008
35
.003
.175
.233
.350
.525
.700
1.050
1.400
2.100
3.500
5.250
7.000
10.500
14.000
17.500
21.000
28.000
35.000
42.000
52.500
70.000
87.500
70
.150
.200
.300
.450
.600
.900
1.200
1.800
3.000
4.500
6.000
9.000
12.000
15.000
18.000
24.000
30.000
36.000
45.000
60.000
75.000
60
.125
.167
.250
.375
.500
.750
1.000
1.500
2.500
3.750
5.000
7.500
10.000
12.500
15.000
20.000
25.000
30.000
37.000
50.000
62.500
50
.100
.133
.200
.300
.400
.600
.800
1.200
2.000
3.000
4.000
6.000
8.000
10.000
12.000
16.000
20.000
24.000
30.000
40.000
50.000
40
.075
.100
.150
.225
.300
.450
.600
.900
1.500
2.250
3.000
4.500
6.000
7.500
9.000
12.000
15.000
18.000
22.500
30.000
37.500
30
.050
.067
.100
.150
.200
.300
.400
.600
1.000
1.500
2.000
3.000
4.000
5.000
6.000
8.000
10.000
12.000
15.000
20.000
25.000
20
.025
.033
.050
.075
.100
.150
.200
.300
.500
.750
1.000
1.500
2.000
2.500
3.000
4.000
5.000
6.000
7.500
10.000
12.500
10
.013
.017
.025
.038
.050
.075
.100
.150
.250
.375
.500
.750
1.000
1.250
1.500
2.000
2.500
3.000
3.750
5.000
6.250
5
.005
.007
.010
.015
.020
.030
.040
.060
.100
.150
.200
.300
.400
.500
.600
.800
1.000
1.200
1.500
2.00
2.50
2
Motors may require supplemental cooling when operated continuously at rated
load at reduced speeds. See Motor Specifications.
NOTE: (1) lb-in = lb - ft × 12
maintenance, which more than compensates for the
complexity of the AC controller. The robust construction, and
low cost of the AC motor makes it very desirable for a wide
range of uses. Also, the ability to make an existing standard
constant speed AC motor an adjustable speed device simply
by the addition of an adjustable frequency controller creates a
very strong incentive for this type of drive.
AC CONTROLLER TYPES
A number of different types of AC motor controllers are
currently in common use as general purpose drives: Six-Step
or Variable Voltage Input (VVI), Pulse Width Modulated
(PWM), Current Source Input (CSI), and the Load
Commutated Inverter (LCI). Each type offers specific benefits
and characteristics but the Six-Step and PWM types have
been selected by Boston Gear as offering the best
combination of simplicity, performance and economy for
general purpose applications. Table 4 shows comparative
advantages and disadvantages.
POWER
SOURCE
1-Ø 50 or
60 Hz
(1) Torque ratings for other base speed motors:
2500 RPM Motor = 1750 RPM Torque x .7 Approx.
1150 RPM Motor = 1750 RPM Torque x 1.52 Approx.
850 RPM Motor = 1750 RPM Torque x 2.06 Approx.
Six Step Controllers – Six-Step controllers, so called due to
their output voltage waveform, utilize an adjustable voltage,
linkcoupled inverter system as shown in Figure 7.
The controller converts the AC power source to an adjustable
DC voltage proportional to the speed reference command.
The DC voltage is smoothed by a filter network and directed to
a six-step inverter. The inverter changes the DC to AC at a
frequency proportional to the speed reference. Output voltage
and frequency are simultaneously coordinated and regulated
to maintain a specific relationship of voltage and frequency
(volts/Hz ratio) throughout the normal speed range. The
voltage waveform applied to the motor is a stepped wave
approximation of a true sinusoidal waveform as shown by
Figure 8. The low harmonic content of this waveform has little
adverse effect on the motor.
LINE-TONEUTRAL
VOLTAGE
ADJUSTABLE
VOLTAGE
BUS
LINE
INDUCTORS
DC
CONVERTER
FILTER
NETWORK
CURRENT
FEEDBACK
INVERTER
3Ø OUTPUT
0-60 Hz
AC
MOTOR
FAULT
LIMITING
FACTOR
DC
CONTROL
CIRCUITS
AC
CONTROL
CIRCUITS
LINE
CURRENT
FREQUENCY
SPEED REFERENCE
(1) 120 Hz BY SELECTOR SWITCH
FIGURE 7.
178
Electrical Products Catalog
TYPICAL VOLTAGE AND CURRENT WAVE FORMS
FOR A VVI CONTROLLER
FIGURE 8.
APPLICATION ENGINEERING
AC & DC Controllers
Six-Step
Advantages
Disadvantages
• Microprocessor based
PWM units are typically
less expensive than sixstep units which commonly
use SCR phase converters
and analog techniques.
• 30:1 and greater, constant
torque speed range with
smooth, noncogging low
speed operation.
• High Power Factor–
Displacement power factor
is 96% or better over entire
speed range at rated load.
• High Efficiency – Controller
only 96%. Complete drive
powered by a 3-phase
source 83%, 70-80% when
powered from a singlephase source, dependent
upon motor efficiency.
• Power section with simple
diode bridge AC to DC front
end converter.
• Diode converter causes no
line notching.
• Complex microprocessor
circuitry easily serviced by
substitution.
• Quiet motor operation with
minimal audible noise.
• Radiated RFI well within
F.C.C. guidelines (nonmicroprocessor designs)
making them desirable for
sensitive applications such
as hospitals.
• Minimal distortion of the AC
voltage source with phase
control input designs.
• Power factor 95% or less,
variable with speed and
load.
• Audible motor noise may
be objectionable for some
applications. This can be
minimized/eliminated with
higher carrier frequencies,
but this reduces controller
efficiency (IGBT units allow
higher switching frequencies, therefore less audible
motor noise).
• Microprocessor control
common to PWM inverters
and high frequency power
output tends to produce
radiated, radio frequency
interference (RFI) which
may be objectionable in
sensitive environments
such as hospitals, communications centers, etc.
• Up to 2.5 times greater
distortion of the AC voltage
source than phase control
input six step drives.
• Speed range limited to 10:1
constant torque. Rated
torque operation produces
motor cogging at and below
this speed.
• Phase controlled converter
may produce notches in the
AC line power source.
• Power factor reduces with
speed and load.
• SCR phase converters and
analog circuitry common to
these units usually make
them more expensive than
PWM designs.
3-PHASE OUTPUT
0-MAX HZ
POWER
SOURCE
1-PHASE
OR 3-PHASE
6 DIODE
FULL-WAVE
BRIDGE
PWM
INVERTER
FILTER
NETWORK
DC CURRENT
FEEDBACK
AC
MOTOR
TRANSISTER
OVER CURRENT
FEEDBACK
CONTROL
CONTROL
CIRCUITS
TYPICAL PWM VOLTAGE AND
CURRENT WAVEFORMS
FIGURE 10.
AC MOTOR CONTROL CHARACTERISTICS
The synchronous speed of an AC induction motor is directly
proportional to the applied frequency.
Speed =
120 × Frequency
No. of Motor Poles
The synchronous speed is the speed of the rotating electrical
field, not the actual motor rotor speed. The difference between
the synchronous speed and the full-load motor speed is called
slip, which is normally expressed in percent. The percentage of
slip is determined by the design of the motor, primarily the rotor
resistance. NEMA has assigned code letters (A, B, C, D, etc.)
to standardize motor characteristics including slip. The type
most commonly used is NEMA Design B with 3% slip at rated
operating conditions. Figure 11 shows typical speed/torque
curves for NEMA Design B and D motors.
100
75
3% SLIP
TYP.
8-13% SLIP TYP.
BREAKDOWN LANE
50
25
0
NEMA
DESIGN B
NEMA
DESIGN D
100
150
200
% FULL-LOAD TORQUE
300
FIGURE 11.
As the applied frequency is
100
60
changed, the motor will run
50
75
faster or slower as shown
40
by Figure 12. The actual
30
50
full-load motor slip (as a
20
25
percent of the motor
10
synchronous speed) varies
0
50
100 150 200
% RATED TORQUE
in inverse proportion to the
frequency, where a 3% slip FIGURE 12. TYPICAL SPEED
motor 60 Hz would have a TORQUE CURVES FOR 60 HZ
6% slip at 30 Hz or 1 1/2 %
NEMA DESIGN B MOTOR
slip at 120 Hz. Motor speed (WITHOUT VOLTAGE BOOST)
is limited only by the
maximum inverter output frequency, load torque requirements,
and the mechanical integrity of the motor.
% SYNCHR
The voltage applied to the motor is a pulsed approximation of a
true sinusoidal waveform as shown in Figure 10. This is
LINE
CURRENT
ONOUS SPEED
PWM Controllers–The PWM controller converts the AC power
source to a fixed DC voltage by a full-wave rectifier. The resultant DC voltage is smoothed by a filter network and applied to
a pulse width modulated inverter using high power transistors.
These transistors are normally Darlington, MOSFET (Metal
Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor) or IGBT
(Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor) types. The MOSFET and
IGBT types allow higher switching frequencies and therefore,
less audible motor noise. The speed reference command is
directed to the microprocessor which simultaneously optimizes
the carrier (chopping) frequency and inverter output frequency
to maintain a proper volts/Hz ratio and high efficiency
throughout the normal speed range. See Block Diagram,
Figure 9.
LINE-TONEUTRAL
VOLTAGE
FREQUENCY (Hertz)
PWM
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Type
commonly called a PWM waveform because both the carrier
frequency and pulse-width is changed (modulated) to change
the effective voltage amplitude and frequency. The current
waveform very closely follows the shape of a sine wave and
therefore provides improved low speed motor performance,
efficiency, and minimizes motor heating.
% SYNCHRONOUS SPEED
TABLE 4. COMPARISON OF PWM VERSUS SIX-STEP
ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY AC CONTROLLER CAPABILITIES
SPEED
REFERENCE
FIGURE 9.
Electrical Products Catalog
179
H
APPLICATION ENGINEERING
AC & DC Controllers
% RATED SPEED
100
Variable Torque Applications–
CONTINUOUS
DUTY
The application of standard AC
TYPICAL
75
PUMP/FAN
motors to adjustable speed
LOAD
variable torque applications such
50
as centrifugal fans or pumps is
INTERMITTENT
25
DUTY
ideal from a motor cooling standpoint. The torque characteristics of
0
25
50
75
100
a variable torque (cubed expo% RATED TORQUE
nential horsepower) load are such FIGURE 14. TYPICAL
that the load falls off rapidly as the STANDARD AC MOTOR
motor speed is reduced. The APPLICATION WITH
variable torque load eliminates the VARIABLE TORQUE
necessity to derate the motor due
LOADS
to excessive heat resulting from
diminished motor cooling at reduced speeds. Figure 14
illustrates the relationship between speed and torque in
variable torque applications.
% RATED SPEED
H
Potential Power Savings–Most
fan and pump applications require
the system to run for sustained
periods at reduced outputs by
either reducing the speed of the
motor or by mechanically altering
the flow. Figure 15 illustrates typical
energy savings, in percent of rated
power, which can be realized when
using an adjustable frequency
180
Electrical Products Catalog
100
80
OUTPUT DAMPER
60
40
20
ENERGY
SAVINGS
ADJUSTABLE
FREQUENCY
AC DRIVE
20
40
60
80
RATED FLOW (SPEED) — %
100
FIGURE. 15.
ENERGY SAVINGS
FREQUENCY Hz
0
200
30
60
90
120
HP
TORQUE
100
0
ORQUE OR
Constant Torque Operation–
The ability of the AC controller to
maintain a constant volts/Hz
relationship is ideal from a motor
standpoint. This permits operation
of the motor at rated torque from
near standstill to rated speed.
% RATED T
1. Standard three-phase AC motors, designed for fixed speed
operation at standard line frequency, may be easily adapted
for use with the AC controller by considering the following:
a. A slight increase in motor losses occurs with inverter
power.
b. The motor thermal capacity
100
CONTINUOUS
must typically be derated as
DUTY
75
a function of the minimum,
continuous operating speed
50
in accord with Figure 13, due
INTERMITTENT
25
to the reduced ventilation
DUTY
provided by the integral
0
25
50
75
100
motor fan. Where the appli% RATED TORQUE
cation requires 100% rated FIGURE 13. TYPICAL
torque at speeds below 50% STANDARD AC MOTORS
of synchronous speed, a ADJUSTABLE SPEED
separately powered ventilaOPERATION
tion blower, a nonventilated
motor with greater reserve thermal capacity or, a motor
with higher rated capacity should be used. When a
separately powered ventilation blower is used, a
thermostat should be built into the motor to prevent
damage which may result from a failure in the ventilation
system.
2. Any three-phase synchronous or induction AC motor
designed expressly for adjustable speed service by inverter
control may normally be used over its design speed range
with the AC controller.
% INPUT POWER
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Constant Torque Applications–About 90% of all general
industrial machines, other than fans and pumps, are constant
torque systems where the machine’s torque requirement is
independent of its speed. If the machine speed is doubled, its
horsepower requirement doubles. Conversely a reduction in
machine speed by 50% will result in an equal reduction in
horsepower, but no reduction in torque.
controller to reduce motor speed and thereby system flow as
opposed to a constant speed motor which has its system flow
varied by an outlet damper.
900
1800 2700 3600
MOTOR RPM (4-POLE MOTOR)
460V MOTOR-CONSTANT VOLTS Hz RATIO
Figure 16 represents the relationship between torque, horsepower FIGURE 16. CONSTANT
and motor speed with a maintained TORQUE OPERATION
volts/Hz ratio using a 60 Hz controller for illustration. A
standard 4-pole 460V motor can be controlled by this method
to its synchronous speed of 1800 RPM. If the same motor were
wound for 50% of the input voltage (230V), it could be
controlled with constant torque to double the normal rated
speed and horsepower. The motor would not be “overvoltaged”
because the volts/Hz ratio could be maintained e.g.: a motor
wound for 230 VAC can supply constant torque to twice the AC
line frequency when used on a 460V power source without
overvoltaging the motor because the volts/Hz ratio of 230V/60
Hz is the same as 460V/120 Hz. The horsepower would also
double since the same torque would be developed at twice the
normal rated speed.
230V MOTOR-CONSTANT VOLTS Hz RATIO
Caution must be observed when applying standard motors for
continuous low speed, rated torque operation. The motor’s selfcooling capability is dependent upon self-ventilation schemes
with efficiency that is considerably reduced at lower operating
speeds.
Constant Horsepower OperFREQUENCY Hz
0
30
60
90
120
ation – AC motor controllers are
100
also adaptable to constant
75
horsepower operation as shown
50
by Figure 17. With this mode of
25
operation, the volts/Hz ratio is
0
maintained to a specific frequency,
900
1800 2700 3600
0
MOTOR RPM
normally 50 or 60 Hz. At this point,
(4-POLE, 230V, 80HZ. MOTOR)
the voltage is “clamped” at a FIGURE 17. TYPICAL
constant level while the frequency
CONSTANT HP
is adjusted further to achieve the
OPERATION
desired maximum speed. Since
the controller maximum output voltage is limited to the voltage
of the AC power source, the volts/Hz ratio must decrease
beyond this point as the frequency increases. The motor
becomes “voltage starved” above the clamping point and
torque decreases as speed increases, resulting in constant
horsepower output.
PERCENT RATED
HP AND T
MOTOR SELECTION
HP
TORQUE
As shown in Figure 17 the drive provides conventional constant
torque/variable horsepower operation up to 60 Hz which is
equivalent to the 1800 RPM base speed of the 60 Hz motor.
Between 1800 and 3600 RPM, the drive provides constant
horsepower/variable torque operation. If constant horsepower
is required between 900 and 3600 RPM (a 4:1 speed range) –
using the same 1800 RPM base speed motor, the drive rated
horsepower must be increased since 900 RPM intersects the
curve at a point which is 50% of rated horsepower.
Constant HP operation (above synchronous speed) is limited
to induction motors only. In addition, at some point, typically
around three times base speed for a four-pole induction motor,
the breakdown torque of the motor prevents further constant
horsepower operation. Synchronous reluctance motor
characteristics prevent operation in this mode.
APPLICATION ENGINEERING
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
AC & DC Controllers
Multiple Motor Operation (From a Common Controller) –
An adjustable frequency AC motor controller is ideally suited
for simultaneous control of multiple motors in process line
applications. All motors are operated at a common frequency
and are therefore synchronized at a common speed. Tracking
accuracy between the individual motors varies only the difference in their loads, typically 0.5% to 3% with standard NEMA
Design B motors and 0.0% with synchronous reluctance
types.
DC drives may be better because . . .
• DC drives are less complex with a single power
conversion from AC to DC.
Where tracking ratios other than 1:1 are desirable, gear
boxes, fixed or adjustable sheaves may be used to attain the
desired individual speeds. Two-pole, four-pole and six-pole
motors may also be mixed to obtain various individual motor
operating speeds when operated from a common adjustable
frequency controller. Selection of a properly rated controller
should be made with consideration for the total KVA required
by all the motors which are normally started and stopped
simultaneously. Some process line applications require the
ability to selectively start and stop one or more of the motors
while the others are operated at the desired speed. A
standard motor started under this condition instantaneously
draws locked-rotor current of 600-800%. Unless this factor is
considered in the selection of an adequately rated controller,
the additional load may exceed the capacity of the power unit,
reducing the voltage to the entire system which could cause
the line to stall or trip off.
• Cooling blowers and inlet air flanges provide cooling air
for a wide speed range at constant torque.
AC VS. DC DRIVE COMPARISON
AC and DC drives both continue to offer unique benefits and
features that may make one type or other better suited for
certain applications.
AC drives may be better because . . .
• They use conventional, low cost, 3-phase AC induction
motors for most applications.
• AC motors require virtually no maintenance and are
preferred for applications where the motor is mounted in
an area not easily reached for servicing or replacement.
• AC motors are smaller, lighter, more commonly available,
and less expensive than DC motors.
• AC motors are better suited for high speed operation
(over 2500 rpm) since there are no brushes, and
commutation is not a problem.
• DC drives are normally less expensive for most
horsepower ratings.
• DC motors have a long tradition of use as adjustable
speed machines and a wide range of options have
evolved for this purpose:
• Accessory mounting flanges and kits for mounting
feedback tachometers and encoders.
• DC regenerative drives are available for applications
requiring continuous regeneration for overhauling loads.
AC drives with this capability would be more complex and
expensive.
• When properly applied brush and commutator
maintenance is minimal.
• DC motors are capable of providing starting and
accelerating torques in excess of 400% of rated.
• Some AC drives may produce audible motor noise which
is undesirable in some applications.
• DC SCR drives have been the first choice of industry for
over 25 years. Their maintenance, technology,
serviceability and reliability are well understood by plant
maintenance personnel.
BASIC MECHANICS
The curve in Figure 6 shows a distinct relationship between
speed, torque and horsepower. Torque is constant at any
speed while there is a direct proportional relationship between
horsepower and speed; horsepower varies directly with the
speed. Therefore, horsepower is motion dependent, torque
is not.
TORQUE
A force applied in a manner that tends to produce rotation,
such as a pipe wrench on a shaft. Torque (force) without
rotation is termed static torque, since no motion is produced.
FORCE
10 LBS.
• Whenever the operating environment is wet, corrosive or
explosive and special motor enclosures are required.
Special AC motor enclosure types are more readily
available at lower prices.
• When multiple motors in a system must operate
simultaneously at a common frequency/speed.
• When it is desirable to use an existing constant speed AC
motor already mounted and wired on a machine.
12" R
FIGURE 19
Torque is measured in lb-in
or lb-ft which is the product
of the force in pounds (lb) x
the distance in inches (in)
or feet (ft) from the center
of the point of apparent
rotation. Figure 19 shows
120 lb-in (12 inches x 10
lbs) or 10 lb-ft torque.
• When the application load varies greatly and light loads
may be encountered for prolonged periods. DC motor
commutators and brushes may wear rapidly under this
condition.
Because most power transmission is based upon rotating
elements, torque is important as a measurement of the effort
required to produce work (horsepower).
• When low cost electronic motor reversing is required.
A force applied in a manner that produces motion and,
therefore, work over a specified time period. A common unit of
power is horsepower. One horsepower (HP) is defined as
the force required to lift 33,000 lbs, one foot in one
minute.
• Whenever it is important to have a back up (constant
speed) if the controller should fail.
POWER (Horsepower)
Electrical Products Catalog
181
H
APPLICATION ENGINEERING
AC & DC Controllers
THREE BASIC FACTORS ARE INVOLVED:
Factor
Distance (Radius)
Force (Push or Pull)
Foot (or inches)
Pounds
Time
One (1) Minute
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
HP =
H
Unit
F (Load in Pounds) × Feet per Minute
33,000
HORSEPOWER-TORQUE,
GETTING IT TOGETHER
10"
DIA.
As shown in Figure 20, the
10"
50 lb load is acting on the 5
inch radius (distance) of the
winch, producing a load
25
LBS.
torque of 250 lb-in (50 lbs ×
5 inches) that must be
50
LBS.
overcome to lift the load.
Since the hand crank arm
FIGURE 20
has a 10 inch radius
(distance), a minimum force of 25 lbs must be exerted to
overcome the load torque (25 lbs × 10" = 250 lb-in). If no
motion is involved, the system is in balance. Although torque is
being exerted, no work is accomplished and no horsepower is
developed.
The winch diameter is 10 inches. Therefore, each revolution of
the hand crank will lift the weight 10 inches x π = 31.416
inches (2.618 feet).
If the crank is turned at 10 RPM, 50 lbs will be lifted a distance
of 26.18 feet in one minute:
HP =
Load in Pounds × Feet per Minute
33,000
HP =
50 × 26.18
= .03966 HP
33,000
Turning the crank twice as fast (20 RPM) will develop twice the
horsepower.
HP =
50 × 52.36
= .07933 HP
33,000
Thus, the horsepower of rotating elements can be calculated
from the following formula:
HP =
F × 2π × R × RPM T × RPM
=
33,000
5252
SELECTING A DRIVE FOR A MACHINE
The application of an adjustable speed drive to power a
machine is a mechanical, rather than an electrical problem.
When applying the drive, the speed – torque – horsepower
characteristics developed at the drive motor shaft must be
considered, and how well these characteristics suit the
machine.
Four essential parameters are
1.
2.
3.
4.
Breakaway Torque
Process Torque
Accelerating Torque
Running Torque
BREAKAWAY TORQUE –
The torque required to start the machine in motion.
It is most always greater than the torque required to maintain
motion (running torque). Breakaway torque combined with
process torque frequently determines drive selection. Table 5
lists typical breakaway torques for various machine types.
TABLE 5. TYPICAL BREAKAWAY TORQUES FOR
VARIOUS MACHINE TYPES
Machine Types
Breakaway Torque* Drive Selection
Machines with ball
or roller bearings
Machines with
sleeve bearings
Conveyors and
machines with
excessive sliding
friction
Machines that have
"high" load spots in
their cycle, e.g.,
printing and punch
presses, and
machines with cam
or crank operated
mechanisms
High Inertia –
Machines with flywheels or other
heavy rotating
masses. Also, some
machines that move
large masses by
cranks, centrifuges,
etc.
110 to 125%
Standard drive rating
130 to 150%
Standard drive rating
160 to 250%
Oversize drive
250% to 600%
Oversize drive
Nominal rating of
drive will depend
on the breakaway
torque requirement
Drive rating dependent upon desired
acceleration time
and drive torque
*Typical percentages of running torque
PROCESS TORQUE –
Where,
F = force in pounds
R = radius (lever length in feet)
RPM or N = revolutions per minute
T = torque in lb-ft (F x R)
The torque required to pull, push, compress, stretch or
otherwise process or act upon the material being transported
by or through the machine.
On some machines, process torque may be so significant as to
determine the drive power rating. On other machines, this load
may be insignificant. The process torque load is superimposed
on all other static and dynamic torque requirements of the
machine.
182
Electrical Products Catalog
APPLICATION ENGINEERING
AC & DC Controllers
ACCELERATING TORQUE –
The torque required to bring the machine to an operating
speed within a given time.
RUNNING TORQUE –
The torque required to maintain machine motion after it
accelerates to the desired operating speed.
The characteristics of the speed-torque curves of various
machines are very important to proper adjustable speed drive
selection. Most machines fall into four basic categories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Constant Torque (Figure 21)
Constant Horsepower (Figure 22)
Squared Exponential Horsepower (Figure 23)
Cubed Exponential Horsepower (Figure 24)
Some machines may have operating characteristics which are
a composite of the basic types.
150
150
SQUARED-EXPONENTIAL LOADS –
With machines of this type, torque varies directly as the
speed, and power as the square of speed.
Such relationships are frequently found in positivedisplacement pumps and mixer applications.
CUBED-EXPONENTIAL LOADS –
It is characteristic of these machines that torque varies as the
square of speed, and power as the cube of speed.
This type of load is imposed on centrifugal pump drives and
most fan or blower drives. In some uses, fan or blower
horsepower varies as the fifth power of speed. The
exponential relationship is characteristic of these machines.
This fact must be considered when sizing motors for
adjustable speed drives. If the speed of a centrifugal pump is
doubled, its power requirement increases by a factor of eight.
% TORQUE AND HP
% TORQUE AND HP
OTHER APPLICATION FACTORS
100
50
CONSTANT TORQUE SPEED RANGE –
100
50
0
0
0
50
100
% SPEED
0
150
Figure 21. Constant Torque
50
100
% SPEED
150
Figure 22. Constant
Horsepower
150
% TORQUE AND HP
150
% TORQUE AND HP
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
With most machines, the load is largely friction and a standard
drive rating may have adequate torque for satisfactory
acceleration. However, certain machines classified as "high
inertia" with flywheels, bull gears or other large rotating
masses may require drive selection based upon the power
required to accelerate the load within a given time.
This type is most often found in the machine-tool industry and
with center driven winders. When drilling, shaping, milling, or
turning metal, the loads all tend toward constant horsepower.
At low speed there is high torque; at high speed, light torque.
A drive must be selected for its highest torque condition which
is at the lowest speed of the range. With most machines, the
"constant horsepower range" seldom exceeds a 3:1 range.
100
50
TORQUE LIMITATIONS –
Most adjustable speed drives feature a torque limiter to protect
the drive and the machine from torque overloads. The torque
limiter (current limit) is normally adjusted to 150% of rated
torque to allow extra momentary torque for breakaway,
acceleration or cyclic overloads. Most drive systems are
capable of sustaining the 150% torque overload for one
minute or less.
100
50
0
0
0
50
100
% SPEED
150
Figure 23. Squared
Exponential Horsepower
– – – – Torque
On large motors, minimum operating speed limitations may be
necessary for self-ventilated motors, since their cooling is
entirely dependent upon motor speed and, therefore,
diminishes as speed is reduced. Where rated torque operation
is required continuously at lower speeds, either a higher rated
drive motor or supplemental motor ventilation, such as a motor
mounted cooling blower or external air duct, is required.
0
50
100
% SPEED
150
Figure 24. Cubed
Exponential Horsepower
_______ HP
CONSTANT TORQUE –
Most industrial machine applications, other than pumps, are
constant torque systems.
The machine's torque requirement is independent of its speed.
If the machine speed is doubled, its horsepower requirement
doubles. This fact must be kept in mind when replacing a
constant speed drive with an adjustable speed drive and the
machine operating speed is increased.
CONSTANT HORSEPOWER –
DUTY CYCLE –
Certain applications may require continuous reversals, long
acceleration times at high torque due to inertia loads, frequent
high rate acceleration, or cyclic overloads which may result in
severe motor heating if not considered in the selection of the
drive. Most drives with 150% overload capability will operate
successfully if there are compensating periods of operation
where motor temperatures can be normalized.
MEASURING MACHINE TORQUE
To measure the torque required to drive a machine, fasten a
pulley securely to the shaft which the motor is to drive. Fasten
one end of a cord to the outer surface of the pulley and wrap a
few turns of the cord around the pulley. Tie the other end of
the cord to a spring scale. See Figure 25.
For machines with constant horsepower loads, the power
demand is independent of speed, and torque varies inversely
with speed.
Electrical Products Catalog
183
H
APPLICATION ENGINEERING
AC & DC Controllers
HOW TO CALCULATE HORSEPOWER
SCALE
For Rotating Objects:
TN
63,025
HP =
R
F
PULLEY
or:
HP = TN
5250
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
TORQUE = F X R
H
Figure 25.
Pull on scale until the shaft turns. The force in pounds or
ounces, indicated on the scale, multiplied by the radius of the
pulley (measured from the centerline of the machine shaft) in
inches gives the torque value in lb-inches or oz-inches. On
some machines, this torque may vary as the shaft rotates. The
highest value of torque must be used when selecting a motor.
The running torque required by a machine will be
approximately equal to the starting torque if the load is
composed almost entirely of friction. If the load is primarily
inertia or windage, the characteristics of the inertia or windage
producing elements must be determined.
The running torque of a machine can be accurately
determined by making a test run with an armature controlled
DC drive (with a shunt wound or permanent magnet DC
motor) of known horsepower rating. The DC drive should have
an ammeter in the armature circuit so significant current
readings can be observed and recorded throughout the speed
range of the machine. Since armature current and torque are
directly proportional within very close limits, the current
readings will provide accurate information for selecting the
drive rating required by the machine.
Most machines require a higher torque value for breakaway,
but once running, the torque requirement will decrease. Many
drives have 150% load capability for one minute, which may
allow the required additional breakaway torque to be obtained
without increasing the drive horsepower rating.
If the running torque is equal to or less than the breakaway
torque divided by 1.5, use the breakaway torque divided by
1.5 as the full-load torque required to determine the motor
horsepower.
If the running torque is greater than the breakaway torque
divided by 1.5, but less than the breakaway torque, use the
running torque as the full load rated torque required to
determine the motor horsepower.
MECHANICAL FORMULAS
HOW TO CALCULATE TORQUE
If the horsepower and base speed of a motor are known, the
full-load torque of the motor is determined by:
T=
(5250) (HP)
N
Where, T = Torque (lb-ft)
HP = Horsepower
N = Base speed of motor (RPM)
184
Where, T = Torque (lb-in)
N = Speed (RPM)
Electrical Products Catalog
Where, T = Torque (lb-ft)
N = Speed (RPM)
For Objects in Linear Motion:
HP =
FV
396,000
Where, F = Force (lb)
V = Velocity (IPM)
or:
HP =
FV
33,000
Where, F = Force (lb)
V = Velocity (FPM)
For Pumps:
HP =
(GPM) × (Head in Feet) × (Specific Gravity)
3950 × (Efficiency of Pump)
For Fans and Blowers:
HP =
CFM × (Pressure in Pounds/Sq ft)
33,000 × Efficiency
When calculated horsepower falls between standard motor
ratings, select the next higher rating.
CALCULATING ACCELERATING FORCE FOR LINEAR
MOTION.
The following formula can be used to calculate the
approximate accelerating force required for linear motion.
However, before sizing the drive, add the torque required to
accelerate the motor armature, gears, pulleys, etc. to the
linear-motion accelerating force converting to torque.
Acceleration Force (F) =
Where,
W ( ∆V)
1933t
W = Weight (lb)
∆V = Change in velocity (FPM)
t = Time (seconds) to accelerate weight
CALCULATING ACCELERATING TORQUE FOR ROTARY
MOTION
When, in addition to the selection of a motor with proper
torque capacity to start and maintain machine motion, a
desired time for acceleration is involved and the required
torque value may be affected, an additional formula must be
considered. This formula makes it possible to calculate the
average torque required over the complete range of speed
change to accelerate a known inertia (WK2).
On high inertia loads, accelerating torque may be the major
factor in the drive selection.
APPLICATION ENGINEERING
AC & DC Controllers
The formula to calculate acceleration torque (torque required
above load torque) or a rotating member:
2
T=
(WK2)
The factor WK2 is the weight (lbs)
of an object multiplied by
the square of the radius of
gyration (K). The unit measurement of the radius of gyration is
expressed in feet.
For solid or hollow cylinders,
inertia may be calculated by the
equations shown in Figure 26.
SOLID
D
L
2
4
WK =.000681 ρLD
HOLLOW
L
D1
D2
WK2 = lb-ft2
EP075A
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
T = Acceleration torque (lb-ft)
WK2 = Total system inertia (lb-ft2) that the motor
must accelerate. This value includes
motor armature, reducer and load.
∆N = Change in speed required (RPM)
t = Time to accelerate total system load
(seconds)
The same formula can also be used to determine the minimum
acceleration time of a given drive, or if it can accomplish the
desired change in speed within the required time period.
(WK 2) (∆N)
t=
308T
INERTIA
Diam. (IN.)
WK2 (lb Ft2)
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
1-3/4
WK2 (lb Ft2)
0.00006
0.0002
0.0005
0.001
0.002
10-1/2
10-3/4
11
11-1/4
11-1/2
2.35
2.58
2.83
3.09
3.38
2
2-1/4
2-1/2
2-3/4
3
0.003
0.005
0.008
0.011
0.016
11-3/4
12
12-1/4
12-1/2
12-3/4
3.68
4.00
4.35
4.72
5.11
3-1/2
3-3/4
4
4-1/4
4-1/2
0.029
0.038
0.049
0.063
0.079
13
13-1/4
13-1/2
13-3/4
14
5.58
5.96
6.42
6.91
7.42
5
5-1/2
6
6-1/4
6-1/2
0.120
0.177
0.250
0.296
0.345
14-1/4
14-1/2
14-3/4
15
16
7.97
8.54
9.15
9.75
12.59
6-3/4
7
7-1/4
7-1/2
7-3/4
0.402
0.464
0.535
0.611
0.699
17
18
19
20
21
16.04
20.16
25.03
30.72
37.35
8
8-1/4
8-1/2
8-3/4
9
0.791
0.895
1.00
1.13
1.27
22
23
24
25
26
44.99
53.74
63.71
75.02
87.76
9-1/4
9-1/2
9-3/4
10
10-1/4
1.41
1.55
1.75
1.93
2.13
27
28
29
30
—
102.06
118.04
135.83
155.55
—
Diam. (IN.)
(WK ) (∆N)
308t
Where,
TABLE 6. INERTIA OF STEEL SHAFTING
(PER INCH OF LENGTH)
2
4
4
WK =.000681 ρL (D2 -D1 )
D, D1, D2 and L = in.
FIGURE 26.
ρ = lb./in.3
ρ (aluminum) = .0924
H
ρ (bronze) = .320
ρ (cast iron) = .260
TABLE 7.
SHAFT MATERIAL FACTOR
ρ (steel) = .282
The inertia of solid steel shafting per inch of shaft length is
given in Table 6. To calculate for hollow shafts, take the
difference between the inertia values for the O.D. and I.D. as
the value per inch. For shafts of materials other than steel,
multiply the value for steel by the factors in Table 7.
FORMULAS TO APPROXIMATE
WK2
2
Rubber
Nylon
Aluminum
Bronze
Cast Iron
.121
.181
.348
1.135
.922
The inertia of complex concentric rotating parts is calculated
by breaking the part up into simple rotating cylinders,
calculating their inertia and summing their values, as shown in
Figure 27.
For a solid cylinder or disc = W × r
2
where r = radius in feet and W is weight in pounds.
2
For a hollow cylinder: W K = W ×
2
2
r 1 + r2
2
=
+
+
where r1, is ID and r2 is OD .
2
2
(1)
(2)
2
2
2
(3)
2
WK = WK1 + WK2 +WK3
FIGURE 27.
Electrical Products Catalog
185
APPLICATION ENGINEERING
AC & DC Controllers
WK2 OF ROTATING ELEMENTS
In practical mechanical systems, all the rotating parts do not
operate at the same speed. The WK2 of all moving parts
operating at each speed must be reduced to an equivalent
WK2 at the motor shaft, so that they can all be added together
and treated as a unit, as follows:
POWER IN DC CIRCUITS:
Watts = Volts × Amperes
Horsepower =
Kilowatts =
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Equivalent WK 2 = WK 2 N
NM
H
2
Volts × Amperes
746
Volts × Amperes
1000
Kilowatt-Hours =
Where, WK2 = Inertia of the moving part
N = Speed of the moving part (RPM)
NM = Speed of the driving motor (RPM)
When using speed reducers, and the machine inertia is
reflected back to the motor shaft, the equivalent inertia is
equal to the machine inertia divided by the square of the drive
reduction ratio.
2
Equivalent WK 2 = WK
(DR)2
Volts × Amperes × Hours
1000
POWER IN AC CIRCUITS:
Kilovolt - Amperes (KVA)
KVA (Single-Phase) =
KVA (Three-Phase) =
Where, DR = drive reduction ratio = NM
N
WK2 OF LINEAR MOTION
Equivalent WK 2 =
Where,
W(V)
2
39.5(NM)2
W = Weight of load (lbs)
V = Linear velocity of rack and load or conveyor
and load (FPM)
NM = Speed of the driving motor (RPM)
Kw (Two-Phase) =
Power Factor =
Amperes = Volts
Ohms
Ohms =
Length
Torque
Rotation
Power
Temperature
Electrical Products Catalog
Kilowatts
Kilovolts × Amperes
MULTIPLY
Moment
of
Inertia
186
Volts × Amperes × Power Factor × 1.73
1000
CONVERSION FACTORS
Volts
Amperes
Volts = Amperes × Ohms
Volts × Amperes × Power Factor
1000
Volts × Amperes × Power Factor × 1.42
1000
Kw (Three-Phase) =
NOTE: This equation can only be used where the linear
speed bears a continuous fixed relationship to the
motor speed, such as a conveyor.
ELECTRICAL FORMULAS
OHMS Law:
Volts × Amperes × 1.73
1000
Kilowatt (Kw)
Kw (Single-Phase) =
Not all driven systems involve rotating motion. The equivalent
WK2 of linearly moving parts can also be reduced to the motor
shaft speed as follows:
Volts × Amperes
1000
BY
TO OBTAIN
Meters
Meters
Inches
Feet
Millimeters
3.281
39.37
.0254
.3048
.0394
Feet
Inches
Meters
Meters
Inches
Newton-Meters
Lb-Ft
Lb-In
Lb-Ft
.7376
1.3558
.0833
12.00
Lb-Ft
Newton-Meter
Lb-Ft
Lb-In
6.00
.1047
.1667
9.549
Degrees/Sec.
Rad./Sec.
RPM
RPM
RPM
RPM
Degrees/Sec.
Rad./Sec.
Newton-Meters2
Oz-In2
Lb-In2
Slug-Ft2
Oz-In-Sec2
Lb-In-Sec2
Watts
Lb-Ft/Min
2.42
.000434
.00694
32.17
.1675
2.68
.00134
.0000303
Lb-Ft2
Lb-Ft2
Lb-Ft2
Lb-Ft2
Lb-Ft2
Lb-Ft2
HP
HP
Degree C = (Degree F -32) × 5/9
Degree F = (Degree C × 9/5) + 32
APPLICATION ENGINEERING
AC & DC Controllers
CURRENT RATINGS OF INSULATED COPPER CONDUCTORS
TABLE 8. ALLOWABLE CURRENT CARRYING CAPACITIES
(Amperes) of Insulated Copper Conductors. Not more than three conductors in raceway
or direct burial, based on 30°C (86°F) ambient (Condensed from National Electrical Code)
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Type of
Insulation
T-TW
RH,RHW,
THW,THWN,
XHHW
V-C(V)
V-C(AVB)
THHN,RHH,
XHHW
Type of
Insulation
T-TW
RH,RHW,
THW,THWN,
XHHW
V-C(V)
V-C(AVB)
THHN,RHH,
XHHW
Wire Size AWG or MCM
6
4
3
2
Allowable Line Amperes
Maximum
Operating
Temperature
14
12
10
8
60°C
15
20
30
40
55
70
80
75°C
15
20
30
45
65
85
85-90°C
25
30
40
50
70
90
Maximum
Operating
Temperature
0000
250
300
350
60°C
195
215
240
260
280
320
355
75°C
230
255
285
310
335
380
85-90°C
235
270
300
325
360
405
*Correction
Factors
31–40°C
41–50°C
1
0
00
000
95
110
125
145
165
.82
.58
100
115
130
150
175
200
.88
.75
105
120
140
155
185
210
.90
.80
750
800
900 1000
385
400
410
435
455
.82
.58
420
460
475
490
520
545
.88
.75
455
490
500
515
555
585
.90
.80
Wire Size AWG or MCM
400 500 600 700
Allowable Line Amperes
*Correction
Factors
31–40°C
41–50°C
*For room temperatures above 30°C ( ).
DEFINITIONS
Performance specifications listed for the basic Boston Gear
adjustable-speed drives in the standard specification sheets
and those provided with companion functional options are
based upon the following conditions:
Formula (1) is more realistic than Formula (2), since the
friction in the driven machine normally loads the motor
appreciably, and the changing work load on the machine
subjects the motor to a smaller speed change than from
absolute no-load to full-load torque.
DRIVE SPEED REGULATION
(2)
The motor speed change between minimum load and full-load
torque, expressed as a percentage of the full-load motor
speed. This change is measured after all transient
disturbances, due to load change, have terminated.
% Regulation =
× 100
DRIVE SPEED RANGE
(1)
(Min-Load Speed)–(Full-Load Speed)
% Regulation =
(Motor Rated Speed)
(No-Load Speed)–(Full-Load Speed)
(Motor Rated Speed)
× 100
Minimum-load is normally expressed as 5% of rated full load.
For drives with armature controlled DC motors, the rated
speed is the motor operating speed when developing full-load
torque with 100% rated armature voltage and field power
applied. This is normally termed base speed.
For drives operated in the field weakened range, regulation is
specified as a percentage of top speed.
Speed regulation for standard drives is expressed as a
percentage of base speed. Set speed regulation is expressed
as a percentage change in speed from an operating point (set
speed) due to load changes. If a drive had 1% regulation of
base speed, a 2% change of set speed could result at 1/2
motor speed.
Any motor speed between minimum and maximum that can
be obtained in a stable manner. For most static, electronic
drives it is normally specified that the minimum speed is zero
and the maximum speed is the motor base speed.
“Controlled Speed Range” specifies the operating range with
respect to the quoted drive speed regulation. This is typically
expressed as a ratio of the minimum to maximum speeds
such as 20:1, 50:1, etc. Typically, high performance drives will
offer close speed regulation along with wide speed range
capability.
DRIVE SERVICE FACTOR
A multiplier, which when applied to the drive rated
horsepower, indicates a permissible maximum loading at
which the drive can be operated continuously. To determine
the horsepower required for greater than standard service
factor, multiply the rated horsepower by the service factor. If
the rating thus calculated is not standard, select a drive (same
base speed motor) with the next higher rating. Boston Gear’s
standard drives have a 1.0 service factor.
Electrical Products Catalog
187
H
APPLICATION ENGINEERING
AC & DC Controllers
STEADY-STATE REGULATION
TRANSIENT RESPONSE TIME
The regulated value due to the following variation in operating
parameters occurring independently or simultaneously. (Load
remaining constant for speed and voltage regulators.
Time required to recover and maintain speed within the
specified regulation tolerance after a specified change in load.
Performance is dependent on load inertia, motor inertia, load
friction, etc.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
VARIABLE
AC Supply Voltage
AC Supply
Frequency
Ambient Temperature
Random Drift
VARIATION
10% with rate of
change not to exceed
2.5% per second
2 Hz variation with
rate of change
not to exceed 2.5%
per second
15°C
8 hour period after
1 hour warmup
RANGE
±10% of nominal
voltage
58-62 Hz
(60 nominal)
48.5-51.5 Hz
(50 nominal)
0 to 40°C
TEMPERATURE
A change in ambient temperature produces a change in the
control variable expressed as a percentage change for a
specified temperature change of ±10°C. All standard units are
designed to operate with a maximum enclosure interior
temperature of 55°C surrounding the regulator power
conversion module.
TRANSIENT DEVIATION
A momentary speed change from a speed set point, occurring
at the result of a specified rate of load change. Performance is
dependent on load inertia, motor inertia, load friction, etc.
H
188
Electrical Products Catalog
RANDOM DRIFT
A change from initial set speed during an unchanging load
condition over specified time period with constant reference
input, constant temperature, constant line voltage, and
constant line frequency. Equipment must be operating at a
specified ambient condition for a warm-up of one hour before
the drift specification is applicable. Drift is specified as a
percentage change (may be plus or minus) of base speed,
unless otherwise stated. Drift is caused by random changes in
operating characteristics of drive components.
DISPLACEMENT POWER FACTOR
The ratio of the active power of the fundamental wave to the
apparent power of the fundamental wave in rms voltamperes.
Displacement power factor is the power factor for which
electric power utility companies charge penalties for low power
factor.
CALCULATED POWER FACTOR
Expressed by the formula: Watts = 3 × E Line (rms) × I Line
(rms) × Cos θ (Power-Factor), represents the ratio of total
watts input to total rms voltamperes input. This considers the
harmonic content of line input, as well as the fundamental
wave of the line, and is always lower than the displacement
power factor.
APPLICATION ENGINEERING
Electrical Enclosures
NEMA DEFINITIONS
Extracted from NEMA Standard (ICS-110)
ENCLOSURES
DESCRIPTION
NEMA 1
General Purpose — Indoor.
NEMA 12
Intended for use indoors to protect the
enclosed equipment against fibers, flyings,
lint, dust and dirt, and light splashing,
seepage, drippings and external
condensation of non-corrosive liquids.
Intended for use indoors, primarily to
prevent accidental contact of personnel with
the enclosed equipment. In addition, they
provide protection against falling dirt.
Dusttight, Raintight and Sleet (Ice)
Resistant – Outdoor.
NEMA 13
NEMA 3R
Oiltight and Dusttight – Indoor.
Intended for use indoors primarily to house
pilot devices such as limit switches, foot
switches, pushbuttons, selector switches,
pilot lights, etc., and to protect these
devices against lint and dust, seepage,
external condensation, and spraying of
water, oil or coolant.
Intended for use outdoors to protect the
enclosed equipment against windblown
dust and water. They are not sleet (ice)
proof.
Rainproof and Sleet (Ice) Resistant –
Outdoor.
Intended for use outdoors to protect the
enclosed equipment against rain. They are
not dust, snow, nor sleet (ice) proof.
NEMA 3S
Dusttight, Raintight and Sleet (Ice) Proof
– Outdoor.
Intended for use outdoors to protect the
enclosed equipment against windblown
dust and water and to provide for its
operation when the enclosure is covered by
external ice or sleet. Does not protect the
enclosed equipment against malfunction
resulting from internal icing.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
NEMA 3
Industrial Use – Dusttight and Driptight –
Indoor.
NEMA 4
NEMA 4X
Watertight and Dusttight – Indoor.
ENCLOSURES
DESCRIPTION
FOR HAZARDOUS
LOCATIONS
The term “explosion-proof” has been so
loosely applied that NEMA deprecates
its use. As defined by the National
Electrical Code, the term “explosionproof” applies only to NEMA 7 and 10
enclosures which, when properly
installed and maintained, are designed
to contain an internal explosion without
causing external hazard.
Intended for use indoors to protect the
enclosed equipment against splashing
water, seepage of water, falling or hosedirected water, and severe external
condensation.
NEMA 7, Class I
Group A,B,C, or D
Intended for use indoors, in the atmospheres and locations defined as Class I
and Group A, B, C or D in the National
Electrical Code. The letters indicate the
gas or vapor in the hazardous location.
Watertight and Dusttight – Indoor.
NEMA 9, Class II
Group E,F, or G
Intended for use indoors in the
atmospheres defined as Class II and
Group E, F or G in the National Electrical
Code. The letters E, F or G indicate the
dust in the hazardous location.
NEMA 10
Designed to meet the requirements of
the U.S. Bureau of Mines which relate to
atmospheres containing mixtures of
methane and air, with or without coal
dust.
Same provisions as NEMA 4 enclosures
and, in addition, are corrosion resistant.
NEMA 5
Superseded by NEMA 12.
NEMA 6
Submersible, Watertight, Dusttight and
Sleet (Ice) Resistant – Indoor and
Outdoor.
Intended for use indoors or outdoors where
occasional submersion is encountered.
Electrical Products Catalog
189
H
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
ALL QUOTATIONS AND SALES BY BOSTON GEAR. THE CONTRACTING PARTY HERETO, A DIVISION OF IMO INDUSTRIES INC.
HEREAFTER CALLED “COMPANY” ARE MADE ON THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS
charged for the actual work done. The Company assumes no
responsibility for, and will not be liable for loss of or damage
to samples, blueprints, diagrams, and other material of any
nature submitted or furnished by the customer or prospective
customer, provided the Company has exercised reasonable
care in the handling of the same. The Company does not assume transportation and insurance costs on any of the foregoing items. In all cases where the customer or prospective
customer makes no statement in writing, concerning the disposition of any of the foregoing material when submitted, the
Company reserves the right to dispose of such material according to its best judgment.
QUOTATIONS and THEIR ACCEPTANCE
Unless otherwise specified, quotations on stock products are
for immediate acceptance, subject to prior sales. Quotations
on special products are made subject to acceptance within
thirty (30) days from date thereof, but in making such quotations, the Company reserves the right to change or cancel
them at any time prior to the receipt of the customer’s written
acceptance. All quotations for special products are based
upon supplying up to plus or minus 5% of quantity ordered
unless otherwise stated in the quotation. All quotations are
made F.O.B. shipping point.
2-
PRICES
Prices are in accordance with current Company price lists, are
based on quantity specified and are subject to minimum order
requirements of the Company. In the event the Company consents to the cancellation or suspension of orders, it shall be
entitled to charge for work done and material ordered or used
up to the time of giving its written consent to such cancellation
or suspension. When work is to be done on material furnished
by the customer, prices are based on the quantity specified
being delivered by the customer at one time within a reasonable time after acceptance of order. Quotations will be made
on special products of all types or on cutting only. Prices, specifications, and terms and conditions, as well as all statements
appearing in the Company’s catalogs and advertisements,
and made elsewhere by the Company are subject to change
without notice. Changes by the customer in specifications or
delivery requirements will be subject to change in price. Whenever the net price of an order amounts to less than $25.00, a
minimum charge of $25.00 will be made.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
1-
3-
MATERIAL FURNISHED BY THE CUSTOMER
Unless otherwise specified, quotations are based on material
furnished by the customer being of ordinary hardness, normal
allowance for finish, uniform specification, and machine work
being of ordinary commercial accuracy. If material furnished
by the customer involves the Company in expense not contemplated by the contract, the customer will be charged for all
such additional expense. If serious defects are found in the
material furnished by the customer, the customer will be
190
Electrical Products Catalog
DIMENSIONS
When dimensions of rims, bores, and hubs are not clearly
specified, quotations are based on ordinary dimensions. Before the customer’s blanks are accepted by the Company for
cutting, the diameter, holes, rims and ends of holes must be
finished; for bevel gears, hubs, must be of uniform length.
There should also be an allowance of extra blanks to cover
possible spoilage. Unless otherwise specified, dimensions
are in inches.
6-
SAMPLES
In no case are samples furnished free. If agreed to by the Company, a few products in advance of a regular quantity order will
be furnished but only at an agreed upon price over the regular
quantity price.
7-
TAXES
If any tax is at any time levied or imposed by the federal or any
state or local government, or any other taxing authority, upon
the products covered hereby, or in respect of the production,
processing, manufacture, storage, sale, use, or consumption
thereof, or, in the case of goods delivered at the Company’s
expense, upon the transportation thereof, including freight
charges thereon, the amount of such tax shall be added to the
purchase price above specified and shall be borne by the customer. The Company will accept a valid exemption certificate
from the customer if applicable; however, if any exemption certificate previously accepted is not recognized by the taxing authority involved and the Company is required to pay the tax
covered by such exemption certificate, the customer shall be
required to promptly reimburse the Company for the taxes so
paid.
CREDIT TERMS
To those customers and prospective customers whose credit
is satisfactory to the Company, terms are net thirty (30) days,
from date of invoice, with the option of paying semi-monthly.
The Company may at any time when, in its opinion, the financial condition of the customer or prospective customer warrants it, either alter or suspend credit, or discontinue deliveries, and render a charge covering the value of any partially finished special products which are then being manufactured for
the customer. In those instances where credit is not established, and in cases where satisfactory references are not
given, the terms are cash with order. For special products in
those instances where credit is not established to the satisfaction of the Company, a deposit of at least 50% of total value of
the order is required. Remittances should be made by check
or money order, payable to the Boston Gear, Quincy, Massachusetts. 02171, U.S.A. Delays in transportation shall not extend the terms of payment.
4-
5-
8-
SHIPMENTS
All shipments are made F.O.B. shipping point (subject to freight
allowance under conditions stated in separate price schedules). When ordering, the customer’s desired method of
shipment must be clearly stated. Where instructions for
shipping do not appear on the order, shipment will be made
according to the Company’s best judgment. Fully risk of loss
(including transportation delays and losses) shall pass to the
customer upon delivery of the products to F.O.B. point. Unless
otherwise instructed, all Parcel Post shipments are insured at
the customer’s expense. Parcel Post shipments without insurance are at the customer’s risk. Deliveries by Messenger
Service to a terminal are made at the customer’s risk and
expense. Partial shipments shall be permitted and the
Company may invoice each shipment separately.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
ALL QUOTATIONS AND SALES BY BOSTON GEAR. THE CONTRACTING PARTY HERETO, A DIVISION OF IMO INDUSTRIES INC.
HEREAFTER CALLED “COMPANY” ARE MADE ON THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS
9-
REFUSAL of SHIPMENT
In case of the refusal or inability of the customer to accept
any shipment in accordance with the terms of the order, the
customer shall be liable for freight, express, storage, extra
cost of handling and all other expenses incurred by the
Company as a result of such refusal or inability.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
10- DELAY or NONPERFORMANCE
The Company shall not be liable for any delay or loss of any
nature or failure in performance due to or caused by fire,
flood, strike, or other differences with workmen, accidents,
labor or material or transportation shortages, war (declared
or undeclared), insurrection, riot, or by any governmental
orders or regulations, legal interferences or prohibitions,
defaults on the part of suppliers or other causes beyond the
Company’s reasonable control.
11- CLAIMS and REJECTED MATERIAL
Any products which have been altered or damaged are not
returnable except with the Company’s written consent. To
reject products on inspection as defective, customer must
notify the Company in writing within ten (10) days from
receipt of the products. Before allowing or rejecting claim,
the Company shall then have the option of reinspection at
the customer’s plant or its own. Defects that do not impair
service shall not be a cause for rejection. The Company shall
have the right to replace within a reasonable time any
product or products which in its opinion do not conform to the
order. No claim will be allowed for any products damaged by
the customer or damaged in transit. Expenses incurred in
connection with claims for which the Company is not liable,
will be charged to the customer. The Company will not be responsible for any work done to correct errors unless such
work is authorized by the written consent of the Company.
The Company assumes no liability for any claim for
infringement of any foreign or domestic patent.
12- LIMITED WARRANTY
The Company warrants that products manufactured or sold
by it shall be free from defects in material and workmanship.
Any products which shall within two (2) years of delivery, be
proved to the Company’s satisfaction to have been defective
at the time of delivery in these respects will be replaced or
repaired by the Company at its option. Freight is the
responsibility of the customer. The Company’s liability under
this limited warranty is limited to such replacement or repair
and it shall not be held liable in any form of action for direct
or consequential damages to property or person. THE
FOREGOING LIMITED WARRANTY IS EXPRESSLY MADE
IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER.
EXPRESS, IMPLIED AND STATUTORY AND INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS.
No employee, agent, distributor, or other person is
authorized to give additional warranties on behalf of Boston
Gear, nor to assume for Boston Gear any other liability in
connection with any of its products, except an officer of
Boston Gear by a signed writing.
13- WAIVER OF BREACH
No waiver by the Company of any breach of these provisions
shall constitute a waiver of any other breach.
14- CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
The Company shall not be liable to the customer or others
claiming through the customer for special or consequential
charges for any reason whatsoever.
15- LAWS
To the best of the Company’s knowledge and belief it is in
compliance with all local, state and federal laws. All orders
are subject to the condition that the Company’s obligation
under such local, state and federal laws and Executive
Orders. Rules and Regulations issued thereunder, whether
now in force or hereafter made effective, shall be no greater
as a result of this agreement and no greater than required
by such laws and the Company expressly disclaims
assumptions of any of the customer’s obligations under such
laws.
16- GENERAL
Any terms and conditions of a customer’s order which are
inconsistent with or additional to the terms and conditions
hereof shall not be binding on the Company and shall not be
considered applicable to any sale or shipment of the
Company’s products. All such terms and conditions are
hereby expressly rejected. No waiver, alteration or
modification of any of the Company’s terms and conditions
shall be binding on the Company unless made in writing and
agreed to by a duly authorized official of the Company.
17- PRINTERS, STENOGRAPHIC, and CLERICAL ERRORS
The Company is not responsible for printers’ errors made in
any of its publications and other forms of printed matter, or
for any stenographic and clerical errors. All such errors are
subject to correction.
Electrical Products Catalog
191
Other products
available from Boston Gear
Boston Gear has been a leader and pioneer in manufacturing gearing products since 1877, when we introduced the concept of gear standardization
and stock gears -innovations of enormous benefit to power transmission
system designers, specifiers, and users. Today, Boston Gear manufactures
open gearing at our state-of-the-art facility in Charlotte, NC, where we continue to improve product quality and manufacturing efficiencies with programs like gear cell manufacturing, CAD/CAM design and manufacturing and
CNC/DNC programming.
Enclosed Gear Drives
Boston Gear’s comprehensive line of enclosed gear drives, including worm,
in-line and parallel-shaft helical, miter, and bevel, provides you with the
product variety you need to get the job done. Factor in our Guaranteed
Same Day Shipment Program, which ensures rapid delivery, or our innovative Reducer Express™, which ensures overnight delivery, and you’ll see
why Boston Gear’s speed reducers are preferred by manufacturers worldwide. In fact, every time you specify a Boston Gear product, you incorporate quality, responsiveness, and Boston Gear’s 123-year reputation into
your design.
®
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Gears and Shaft Accessories
Centric Clutches
Boston Gear offers the industry's most diversified line of clutches, with
mechanical and pneumatic clutches to suit most any application. Our
complete selection of torque overload devices, along with our Model H
clutch and our entire line of centrifugal clutches, comes with Boston
Gear's 120 years of mechanical power transmission expertise - so ask for
Centric™ clutches by name. Because we apply the same quality standards to
all of our products, you'll find our electrical and clutches offer exceptional
performance, as well.
Bearing Products
When you want the freedom to select from the widest range of the highest
quality bearings, come to the power transmission specialists at Boston
Gear, because we offer the most comprehensive selection of bearing products from one single source in the power transmission industry. Everything
from plain sleeve bearings, ball bearings, rod ends, and spherical bearings
to linear bearings, pillow blocks and flanged units are in stock.
Electrical Products
From fractional horsepower AC and DC motor controllers to a complete offering of complementary motors -including Ratiotrol®, the industry's first stock
single phase DC drive, Boston Gear is prepared to meet the broad spectrum
of your adjustable speed needs. And with a complete line of complementary
clutches, brakes, and other accessories available from Boston Gear, we are
prepared to serve your motion control product needs.
MTY (81) 83 54 10 18
[email protected]
Colfax Power Transmission Group
Wichita Clutch
Colfax Power Transmission Group
Quincy, MA 02171
617-328-3300
Wichita Clutch
Pneumatic Clutches and Brakes
Wichita Falls, TX 76302
940-723-3400
Boston Gear
For application assistance:
1-940-767-2000
Boston Gear
Enclosed Gear Drives,
Open Gearing, Overload
Clutches, AC and DC Motors
and Controls, Bearings,
Fluid Power Products
Quincy, MA 02171
617-328-3300
Industrial Clutch
Industrial Clutch
Dry and Oil Immersed Clutches
and Brakes; Hydraulic and
Pneumatic Controls
Waukesha, WI 53187
262-547-3357
MEX (55) 53 63 23 31
DIST. AUTORIZADO QRO (442) 1 95 72 60
For all Boston Gear product
lines, contact: 888-999-9860
for Customer Service
Ameridrives Couplings
Warner Electric
Ameridrives Couplings
Gear Couplings, Mill Spindles,
Universal Joints
Erie, PA 16512
814-480-5000
Warner Electric
South Beloit, IL 61080
800-234-3369
®
Warner Electric
Clutches & Brakes
Roscoe, IL 61073
Nuttall Gear and Delroyd Worm Gear
Nuttall Gear and
Delroyd Worm Gear
Worm and Worm Gear Sets,
Parallel Shaft and In-Line
Helical Speed Reducers
Niagara Falls, NY 14302
716-731-5180
Warner Electric
Precision Electric Coils
Columbia City, IN 46725
219-244-6183
Formsprag Clutch
Formsprag Clutch
Overrunning Clutches
and Holdbacks
Warren, MI 48089
586-758-5000
Fincor Electronics
Fincor Electronics
AC and DC Adjustable
Speed Drives, Motors,
Controls, and Accessories
York, PA 17402
717-751-4200
Marland Clutch
Marland Clutch
Roller Ramp and Sprag Type
Overrunning Clutches and Backstops
LaGrange, IL 60525
708-352-3330
Bay City Forge
Bay City Forge
Carbon and Alloy Steel
Open-Die Forgings
Erie, PA 16512
814-456-2088
w w w. b o s t o n g e a r. c o m
toll
free:
888-999-9860
Boston Gear
14 Hayward Street • Quincy, MA 02171
617-328-3300 • Fax: 617-479-6238
www.bostongear.com
50115 12/01
Printed in USA
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement